Pcs Cdma Minicell | Channel Access Method | Cellular Network

PCS Systems

CDMA Minicell
Description, Operation, and
Maintenance

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999
Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
This document contains proprietary information of
Lucent Technologies and is not to be disclosed or used
except in accordance with applicable agreements
Copyright © 1999 Lucent Technologies
Unpublished and Not for Publication
All Rights Reserved

This material is protected by the copyright and trade secret laws of the United States and other countries. It
may not be reproduced, distributed, or altered in any fashion by any entity (either internal or external to
Lucent Technologies), except in accordance with applicable agreements, contracts or licensing, without the
express written consent of the Customer Training and Information Products organization and the business
management owner of the material.
For permission to reproduce or distribute, please contact:
Product Development Manager1 888 LTINFO6 (domestic)
1 317 322 6848 (international)

Notice
Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time
of printing. However, information is subject to change.

Mandatory Customer Information
Federal Communication Commission Statement (FCC) Notification and Repair Information
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy, and if not installed and used in accordance with the
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in
a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the
interference at his/her own expense.

Security Statement
In rare instances, unauthorized individuals make connections to the telecommunications network through the
use of remote access features.
In such event, applicable tariffs require that the customer pay all network charges for traffic. Lucent
Technologies cannot be responsible for such charges and will not make any allowance or give credit for
charges that result from unauthorized access.

Trademarks
AUTOPLEX is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies
Cadweld is registered trademark of ERICO Products, Inc.
Twist-Lock is a registered trademark of Hubbell Inc.

Support Telephone Number
Lucent Technologies provides a telephone number for you to report errors or to ask questions about the
information in this document.
1 888-LTINFO6
Lucent Technologies provides a telephone number for technical support from the Customer Technical
Support Organization (CTSO).
1-800-225-4672
E-mail addresses have been created that allow CTIP Wireless customers to send in comments about
Wireless customer documents and training courses. The e-mail address for comments on customer
documents is:
wirelessdocs@lucent.com
Developed by the Lucent Technologies Customer Technical Support and Information Organization.

Lucent Technologies — Proprietary
See notice on first page

How Are We Doing?
Title: PCS CDMA Description, Operation and Maintenance

Identification No.: 401-703-301

Issue No.: Issue 8

Date: April 1999

Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this Customer Information Product (CIP). Your
comments can be of great value in helping us improve our CIPs.
1. Please rate the effectiveness of this CIP in the following areas:
Excellent

Good

Fair

Not
Applicable

Poor

Clarity

//////////////////
//////////////////

Completeness

//////////////////

Accuracy

//////////////////

Organization

//////////////////

Appearance

//////////////////

Ease of Use

Examples
Illustrations

//////////////////

Overall Satisfaction

2. Please check the ways you feel we could improve this CIP.
r
r
r
r
r
r

Improve the overview/introduction
Improve the table of contents
Improve the organization
Include more figures
Add more examples
Add more detail

r
r
r
r
r
r

Make it more concise/brief
Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials
Add more troubleshooting information
Make it less technical
Add more/better quick reference aids
Improve the index

Please provide details for the suggested improvement.

3. What did you like most about this CIP?

4. Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet.

If we may contact you concerning your comments, please complete the following:
Name:
Company/Organization:

Telephone Number:
Date:

Address:
When you have completed this form, please fold, tape and return to address on back
or Fax to: 910 727-3043.

------------------------------------------------------------ Do Not Cut — Fold Here And Tape ---------------------------------------------------------------------

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 1999 GREENSBORO, NC

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

DOCUMENTATION SERVICES
2400 Reynolda Road
Winston-Salem, NC 27199-2029

How Are We Doing?
Title: PCS CDMA Description, Operation and Maintenance

Identification No.: 401-703-301

Issue No.: Issue 8

Date: April 1999

Lucent Technologies welcomes your feedback on this Customer Information Product (CIP). Your
comments can be of great value in helping us improve our CIPs.
1. Please rate the effectiveness of this CIP in the following areas:
Excellent

Good

Fair

Not
Applicable

Poor

Clarity

//////////////////
//////////////////

Completeness

//////////////////

Accuracy

//////////////////

Organization

//////////////////

Appearance

//////////////////

Ease of Use

Examples
Illustrations

//////////////////

Overall Satisifaction

2. Please check the ways you feel we could improve this CIP.
r
r
r
r
r
r

Improve the overview/introduction
Improve the table of contents
Improve the organization
Include more figures
Add more examples
Add more detail

r
r
r
r
r
r

Make it more concise/brief
Add more step-by-step procedures/tutorials
Add more troubleshooting information
Make it less technical
Add more/better quick reference aids
Improve the index

Please provide details for the suggested improvement.

3. What did you like most about this CIP?

4. Feel free to write any comments below or on an attached sheet.

If we may contact you concerning your comments, please complete the following:
Name:
Company/Organization:

Telephone Number:
Date:

Address:
When you have completed this form, please fold, tape and return to address on back
or Fax to: 910 727-3043.

------------------------------------------------------------ Do Not Cut — Fold Here And Tape ---------------------------------------------------------------------

NO POSTAGE
NECESSARY
IF MAILED
IN THE
UNITED STATES

BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
FIRST CLASS PERMIT NO. 1999 GREENSBORO, NC

POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE

DOCUMENTATION SERVICES
2400 Reynolda Road
Winston-Salem, NC 27199-2029

Preface

0-1

1.

Introduction to PCS CDMA

1-1

2.

PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description

2-1

3.

Cabling, Connections, and Software

3-1

4.

Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell

4-1

5.

PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance

5-1

6.

Diagnostics

6-1

7.

Troubleshooting

7-1

8.

Repairs

8-1

9.

Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell

9-1

10.

Fault Isolation and Troubleshooting Techniques

Glossary

10-1
GL-1

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies - Proprietary
See notice on first page

Contents - 3

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Contents - 4

Lucent Technologies—Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Preface

Contents

Contents

Preface-1

Manual Coverage and Revisions

Preface-2

Sources of Information

Preface-3

Electromagnetic Interference

Preface-4

Service Available

Preface-5

Introduction

Preface-6

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies - Proprietary
See notice on first page

-1

Manual Coverage and Revisions

Preface

Manual
Coverage and Revisions
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Overview

Reason for Reissue

Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this
manual reflects hardware configuration at the time of shipment. Lucent
Technologies continually strives to improve the quality and reliability
of all its products, and in some instances, product changes may occur
just prior to shipment. Therefore, because of printing and distribution
requirements, some information in this manual may not reflect
hardware configuration as delivered. However, in all cases, when
required, updated information will be issued to you as rapidly as
possible.
Whenever this manual is reissued, the reason for reissue will be given
in this paragraph.
Issue 8 corrects errors from Issue 7.

Manual Organization

For ease of access, the information contained in this manual is divided
and organized under major headings and subheadings as listed in the
table of contents.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

-2

Lucent Technologies—Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Sources of Information

Preface

Sources
of Information
.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Documentation
Sources

Document Comments

The documentation useful in maintaining the Minicell comes from two
primary sources: Lucent Technologies manuals and records maintained
on the cell maintenance.
E-mail addresses have been created that allow CTIP Wireless
customers to send in comments about Wireless customer documents
and training courses.
e-mail address for comments on is

customer documents

wirelessdocs@lucent.com

training courses and student guides wirelesscourse@lucent.com.
Obtaining Related
Documentation

The AUTOPLEX Cellular Telecommunications Systems System 1000
Customer Documentation Catalog (401-610-000) is a guide to all
AUTOPLEX System 1000 customer documents and includes document
descriptions and ordering information.
To order AUTOPLEX System 1000 documents, including documents
on CD-ROM, and all other Lucent Technologies product
documentation by phone, please use the following numbers:
Within the United States:
Voice: 1-888-LUCENT8 or 1-888-582-3688, prompt 1
FAX: 1-800-566-9568
Locations outside of the United States:
Australia and all European countries

(317) 322-6416

Asia Pacific and China

(317) 322-6411

North America (excluding U.S.) and all
other countries

(317) 322-6646

FAX for all international customers

(317) 322-6699

To order documentation by mail, please use the following address:
Lucent Technologies Customer Information Center
Attention: Order Entry Section
2855 N. Franklin Road
P.O. Box 19901
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies - Proprietary
See notice on first page

-3

Sources of Information

Preface

Indianapolis, IN 46219
U.S.A.
To order documentation electronically, visit the Lucent Technologies
Customer Information Center web site at:
http://www.cic.lucent.com

Related Documentation

For related documentation, refer to the table below:

Document
Cell Site Antenna Equipment Installation Planning Guide
Cell Site Diagnostic Description
Cell Site I/O Manual
PCS CDMA Minicell Installation
Recommended Spare Parts, Tools, and Test Equipment

Reference
401-200-300
401-660-101
401-610-107
401-703-300
401-610-120

System Description and Planning Guide
System Routine and Corrective Maintenance (Series II)

401-610-006
401-610-175

Hardware/Software
Options Information

To determine which hardware/software options are currently available,
please contact your Account Executive.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

-4

Lucent Technologies—Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

.... Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules require that you be notified of the following: RF Interference This equipment generates..................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies ............................Electromagnetic Interference Preface Electromagnetic Interference ......... will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference........................Proprietary See notice on first page -5 ....... which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment............................................................................................................................................ Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference............................... uses.... in which case the user. at his own expense........................................................................................... and can radiate radio frequency energy............. may cause interference to radio communications........................................................................ ................. It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules... Electromagnetic Interference Lucent Technologies runs extensive tests on all its products to ensure that they do not cause interference to radio communications by the radiation of radio frequency energy... If not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual...................

............................................... Lucent Technologies has a wide range of services to help you in selecting the right configuration for your needs.... the product is warranted upon the acceptance date or thirty (30) days from the installation completion date............................................................... the warranty period is the greater of 6 months or the unexpired term of the new product warranty........................................................................ whichever is sooner........ and planning for future growth.......... For repaired product or product provided as a replacement............ However...........................Service Available Preface Service Available ...... -6 Lucent Technologies—Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....................................... Warranty and Repair Services The Minicell is warranted upon shipment for 24 months...................................... ........................................................ A complete and detailed description of the warranty and repair policy is available from your Account Executive.................................................. installing and maintaining your system............. If installed by Lucent Technologies...................................... Engineering Services The PCS CDMA Minicells are designed to provide self-contained systems requiring no equipment engineering........................... site engineering and custom configuration services are available to meet your special requirements.........

............................ The mutual benefits of your involvement opportunities must be negotiated prior to turnover... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies .............. it may be to your advantage to become involved with the operation and maintenance activities prior to normal turnover...... as soon as possible....................................................................Introduction Preface Introduction ................... Lucent Technologies...... potential failure conditions and/or equipment failures................ and your maintenance personnel will become familiar with the equipment sooner. The options which may be negotiated are summarized as follows: • Full or partial operation of the system from the MSC • Full or partial system maintenance • Cutover prior to the completion of system testing by Lucent Technologies • Customer additions to and/or involvement in system-level tests............ the warranty period begins at the time of turnover.......... These routines consist of software-controlled diagnostic tests and a number of manual tests as defined by the Equipment Test List (ETL)...... or the system is altered due to customer actions...... or as specified in the sales agreement. Nor is involvement intended for maintenance personnel who are inexperienced in maintaining switching and radio systems........Proprietary See notice on first page -7 .................... at its own option. The opportunity for your involvement is in no way intended to replace the formal training offered by Lucent Technologies.................................................................... Product Warranty Lucent Technologies warrants that all PCS System equipment that it sells and installs is free from defects in materials and workmanship as specified in the sales agreement............................................................... ........ By doing so................................... Customer Options As a customer option.. General Preventive maintenance is defined as those activities performed at regular intervals and designed to identify.................. you will have access to your system earlier than normal............................... The goal of preventive maintenance is to maintain normal system operations and to prevent loss of service by the use of software and manual routines...................... will either repair or replace defective units without charge for parts or labor during the warranty period.................................................... Unless otherwise negotiated.....

................................................................................................................................ -8 Lucent Technologies—Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...................................................Introduction Preface ..........................................................................

..................1-13 .....1-9 Call Processing Overview • PCS System Description ............0-GHz range..1 .............• Key Parts: PCS Access Manager ............ PCS Frequency Assignment ..................................................1-21 ....................... Purpose PCS stands for Personal Communication Services.............................- - - - - - - - 1-11 .................................................. which was produced by the Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) TR45.....1-16 ..............5 Subcommittee on Wideband Spectrum Digital Technology..• PCS CDMA Environment for the Minicell • Key Parts: PCS Switching Center (PCSC) ......................................................... and designates a portion of the radio frequency spectrum in the 1......1-23 ......1-25 .......................................................1-6 • PCS CDMA Receive/Transmit Bands and Channel Assignment 1-7 • Channel Number vs....8-to 2...............................1-4 • PCS CDMA Frequency Assignments .......................... Contents PCS CDMA Overview 1-3 • Comparison between Multiple Access Schemes ..........................1 Introduction to PCS CDMA Overview ..................... The PCS CDMA standard is defined within the IS-95 document.. CDMA (Code Division Multiple Access) is a method of supporting multiple voice calls within an allocated frequency band using special codes to differentiate the calls........• Packet Pipe Connection -...................1-12 .... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 .............1-19 ....Minicell Interface • Key Parts: The Minicell Site ........1-17 ...............• Key Parts: 5ESS®--2000 Switching Platform • CDMA Packet Pipe Trunk Group ....................................

...................................The CDMA Interference .....CDMA Channel Element Encoding Codes Used in a CDMA Transmission Display of Walsh Codes .............................................................................................Introduction to PCS CDMA • • • • • • • • • Packet Pipe Connection .........................Details of Walsh Codes Display ............2 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..............CDMA Traffic Channels .................Daisy Chain CDMA Implementation .................................- - - - - - - - - - - - 1-27 1-29 1-32 1-34 1-36 1-37 1-39 1-40 1-43 ....................................... 1 .......Diversity and CDMA ......

..................................................... This unit is designed to enable cell technicians to identify the components and define the major functions of the PCS CDMA System by doing the following: • Naming elements of a PCS CDMA architecture • Identifying the components of a PCS CDMA Minicell • Stating the functions performed by Data Links • Naming the Walsh codes assigned to specific communication channels • Stating the role of the different codes used in CDMA transmissions .............................................................................................................................Introduction to PCS CDMA PCS CDMA Overview OverviewObjectives ... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 ........................3 ....................................................................................................................................... Purpose Review and Identification This unit provides an introduction to the Personal Communications Services (PCS) System................................................................................................................................... It describes the distributed architecture approach on which this system is based.....................................

............................. Each channel supports a single user........... or credit card numbers................................................. Although there are 61 Walsh codes available to differentiate calls and theoretical limits are around 40 calls................................................2288-MHz channel....................................... Multiple Access Schemes Diagram The diagram below compares the ability of an encoding scheme to utilize a frequency band....... The CDMA standard allows up to 61 simultaneous users in one 1.......2288 MHz channel ............ The present TDMA standard allocates two time slots per user.......................... it is virtually impossible to monitor a CDMA conversation or fraudulently access ESNs...... Each user is assigned a unique code to differentiate each call....... Each channel allows multiple users....................4 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................... PINs............................................. 1 ......25-MHz channels.... Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) TDMA divides each 30-kHz channel into six time slots...... Definitions Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) This access scheme divides the spectrum into a series of 30-kHz channels............................... Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) This access scheme divides the spectrum into a series of 1........ By processing each voice packet with two PN codes............................................ 30 kHz FDMA 30 kHz One user per channel 30 kHz 30 kHz TDMA Three users (2 timeslots per user) per channel 12 41 1 42 29 27 2 39 21 28 6 23 10 40 61 25 51 34 16 55 24 0 48 13 4 15 20 3 17 7 59 58 53 46 37 35 14 43 45 31 44 30 22 49 50 5 56 18 9 33 11 54 8 19 32 60 47 36 57 62 52 63 38 26 1.... the operational limitations and quality issues will reduce the maximum number of calls somewhat below this value....2288 MHz CDMA Channel As many as 61 Simultaneous users per 1.......Introduction to PCS CDMA Comparison between Multiple Access Schemes Comparison between Multiple Access Schemes .............................................. enabling three simultaneous users per 30-kHz channel........................

...................... they enable: • Up to 10 times the capacity of analog cellular • Soft handoff (which improves dropped call performance and voice quality at the edges of the cell) • An air interface compatible with the IS-41 switch interface for intersystem operations (handoff............................................ and other advanced services).............. ISUP (trunk signaling... delivery of calling party number......Comparison between Multiple Access Schemes Selected Features of Lucent Technologies CDMA Implementation Introduction to PCS CDMA The Lucent Technologies PCS CDMA Minicells implement the features of the PCS CDMA standard................... and roaming)............................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 .................................................. In particular................. and INAP (intelligent network protocols) • Superior voice quality (supports 13-kbps speech coding algorithms that can provide voice quality comparable to landline) • Higher quality RF coverage • Simplified RF engineering and planning (allows the support of “N=1 frequency reuse pattern”) • Low power consumption and enhanced terminal battery life ....... enhanced privacy....... call delivery........................................5 ...

..........000 MHz for transmitting channel number 0............ The remaining bands are shown in the graphic.................000 MHz for receiving and 1930........ 1 ............... which has been divided into six bands..8-GHz to 2..... Likewise............000 MHz for receiving and 1950.................................... The Lucent Technologies PCS CDMA Minicell can support customers in all bands.......................................000 MHz for transmitting.............................................................. Overview Frequency Assignments Diagram PCS transmissions occur in the 1.........................................Introduction to PCS CDMA PCS CDMA Frequency Assignments PCS CDMA Frequency Assignments ...........................6 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................. the B-band spectrum begins at 1870. labelled from A to F............................. PCS Minicell Receive Frequency Bands (MHz) A 1850 D B 1865 1870 E 1885 1890 1895 F C PCS Minicell Transmit Frequency Bands (MHz) 1910 A 1930 D B 1945 1950 E 1965 1970 1975 F C 1990 ........................................................................................................ The diagram shows a call in the A-band spectrum begins with 1850.............0-GHz frequency range.....................................................................

.................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 .................................................... numbered consecutively................. in both receive and transmit frequencies............. Allowed Channels PCS Channel Band PCS CDMA Channel Numbers Receive Frequency Range (MHz) Transmit Frequency Range (MHz) A 000-299 1850-1865 1930-1945 D 300-399 1865-1870 1945-1950 B 400-699 1870-1885 1950-1965 E 700-799 1885-1890 1965-1970 F 800-899 1890-1895 1970-1975 C 900-1199 1895-1910 1975-1990 Note that channels 0-24 and channels 1176-1199 are not allowed.......................... Channel Assignment Table Frequency up-conversion is the process by which channels in the 800MHz band are converted to the 1900-MHz band.................................................................................................. Overview The PCS spectrum is divided into 1200 50-kHz wide channels.................................................................................................... The table shows the relationship between channel number and the transmit and receive frequency ranges.....Introduction to PCS CDMA PCS CDMA Receive/Transmit Bands and Channel Assignment PCS CDMA Receive/Transmit Bands and Channel Assignment .......... Frequency Band Allowed Channels A 25-275 D 325-375 B 425-675 E 725-775 F 825-875 C 925-1175 ......... the Receive Frequency is 80 MHz lower than the Transmit Frequency................................. Frequency downconversion is the process by which channels in the 1900-MHz PCS band are converted to corresponding channels in the 800-MHz band... and that there are upper and lower limits for each band.............................................. For a given channel.................................7 .....................

................................................................................................................................................................. divided into three bands......................... Each band is 10-MHz wide....... 1 ...............8 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........ K-PCS K-PCS CDMA Tx Frequency Channel Block Channel Numbers Range (MHz) Rx Frequency Range (MHz) Ak 0-199 1840-1850 1750-1760 Bk 200-399 1850-1860 1760-1770 Ck 400-599 1860-1870 1770-1780 ......................Introduction to PCS CDMA PCS CDMA Receive/Transmit Bands and Channel Assignment Frequencies for Korean Installations The frequency band used for the Korean market consists of 600 pairs of radio frequencies..................

............................ Where lower band frequency is: Computing Center Channel Frequency Table Computing Center Channel Frequency Example 1 Computing Center Channel Frequency Example 2 • 1850 MHz for a Receive Channel • 1930 MHz for a Transmit Channel..................05N+1850 Minicell Transmit 1<N<1199 0.................... Channel # Center Frequency (N) (MHz) Minicell Receive 1<N<1199 0.......050MHz + Lower Band Frequency................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 ......................................2250 MHz For Minicell transmit and Handset receive: ....................000 MHz 5 Equals 1866.......... PCS Frequency Assignment ..........05 MHz 3 Equals 16...........................................................Introduction to PCS CDMA Channel Number vs..... The center frequency in megahertz corresponding to any channel number (N) can be calculated as shown in the table......9 ................. For PCS channel number and PCS frequency assignments.....25 MHz 4 Plus 1850................................................................ The asterisk (*) stands for the multiplication sign.......... using a simple arithmetic formula.................. The formula for frequency assignment is as follows: Channel Frequency = [Channel Number] * 0.........................................................................05N+1930 For Handset transmit and Minicell receive: Step Value Example 1 First Channel 325 2 Times Constant 0................................................... refer to the following table..... PCS Frequency Assignment Channel Number vs......... Overview Formula for Frequency Assignment Center frequency for a given channel can be computed from the channel number.................

.............................................000 MHz 5 Equals 1946............................25 MHz 4 Plus 1930............................................................................ 1 ..................10 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............ PCS Frequency Assignment Step Value Example 1 First Channel 325 2 Times Constant 0....05 MHz 3 Equals 16.................................................Introduction to PCS CDMA Channel Number vs..............2250 MHz ............

.............................................. PCS Frequency Assignment Introduction to PCS CDMA Call Processing Overview System Overview Purpose This unit is designed to enable you to identify the components and define the major functions of the PCS CDMA System by doing the following: • Naming elements of a PCS CDMA architecture • Identifying the components of a PCS CDMA Minicell • Stating the functions performed by Data Links • Naming the Walsh codes assigned to specific communication channels • Stating the role of the different codes used in CDMA transmissions..................Channel Number vs........................................................11 ...................................................................................................... ............................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 .....

........... Under these circumstances....12 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..... Minicell or Base Station 4............... Mobile terminal The four components of a PCS System are shown in the following diagram: Lucent Technologies PCS Switching Center (PCSC) PCS Access Manager OMP T1 or E1 SS7 Public Networks Centralized Control Center X............................ the PCS CDMA System is centered about a distributed architecture approach that consists of four essential elements: 1............. a separate centralized control center may be employed to monitor and control system functions from one location................................................. ............ Operational Perspective of the PCS CDMA System Architecture Switching Center Diagram Operations Network From an operational perspective.......................................... The centralized control center may be staffed on a 24-hour................................................. 7-day per week basis......................................................................... 1 ........................................ Associated T1(or E1) network interfaces 3.Introduction to PCS CDMA PCS System Description PCS System Description ..................................................................................... the MSC is normally unattended... However....................................25 Base Station 5ESS Switch In addition to these elements.............................. and it is capable of monitoring and controlling several service areas (different cities) simultaneously...... PCS Switching Center (PCSC) 2............. the MSC is staffed and used as a centralized control center when a separate centralized control center is not used.....

.............................................. • DL1 (Data Link 1) carries maintenance messages............ the two data links between the Switch and the Minicell are assigned the following roles: PCS CDMA Minicell Environment Diagram • DL0 (Data Link 0) carries call processing messages...............................Introduction to PCS CDMA PCS CDMA Environment for the Minicell PCS CDMA Environment for the Minicell ........... Overview Maintenance of the Minicell requires an understanding of the components that connect the Minicell to the phone network.................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 .............................................................. which is the subject of this course • Receive/Transmit Antenna at the Minicell site • User mobile terminal..................................................................................................................................................... Under normal conditions........... the key parts of a PCS CDMA environment are the: • PCS Switching Center • T1/E1 Network • PCS CDMA Minicell.................. at the mobile user location........................13 ............ PCS CDMA Environment From a structural standpoint.................................... The diagram below shows the key parts of the PCS CDMA system: PCSC OMP Rake Receiver PCS ACCESS MANAGER Interference GPS CSN ECP IMS Rake Receiver Soft Hand-Off CNI 5ESS-2000 DCS 5E10 AM DL0 DL1 CDMA minicell Site RCC CSC CM Public Switched Telephone Network NCT SM PSU2 P H A P H V T1/E1 Network F R P H DLTU2 ECSU RFTG SCT DFI C C C TSI Pilot Channel Sync Channel Paging Channel CE CE A C U B C R C T U DLTU2 ....................................................................................

...................................................... 1 ....Introduction to PCS CDMA PCS CDMA Environment for the Minicell Acronyms The following table lists some of the acronyms used in a PCS CDMA environment........................................ Calls from and to the standard telephone network and calls from cellular subscriber to cellular subscriber pass through the PCSC............................................................................. The PCSC also provides an interface into the PSTN.................... ....................... a power cabinet....... Base Station The base station consists of a primary radio cabinet...14 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....... The system can be installed indoors or outdoors........... up to two optional growth cabinets (for adding up to two additional carriers for 3-sector applications)....... ACU Analog Conversion Unit FRPH Frame Relay Protocol Handler AM Administrative Module GPS Global Positioning System BCR Baseband Combiner Radio IMS Interprocessor Message Switch CCC CDMA Cluster Controller NCT Network Communication Trunk CE Channel Element OMP Operations and Management Platform CM Communication Module PCSC PCS Switching Center CNI Common Network Interface PHA Protocol Handler ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) CSC Cell Site Controller PHV Protocol Handler Voice CSN Cell Site Node PSU2 Packet Switching Unit Version 2 CTU CDMA Transmit Unit RCC Radio Control Complex DFI Digital Facility Interface RFTG Reference Frequency and Timing Generator DLTU2 Digital Line Trunk Unit Version 2 SCT Synchronized Clock and Tone ECP Executive Cellular Processor SM Switch Module ECSU Echo Cancelling Unit TSI Time Slot Interchange PCSC The PCSC is equipped with switching and interface equipment and provides all the cellular network switching required to process calls to and from the cellular subscriber........ and an optional battery cabinet or an optional DC generator cabinet.

........ even when not being used by the subscriber................................ the basic functional operations of the vehicle-mounted units and the hand-held units are identical..................... For duplex filters there are 2 antennas for the Tx and 2 Rx’s. One transmit and two receive antennas are provided for each face of the cell site when using simplex filters.......................................... A DS0 channel is a digital signal of up to 64-kbps for a total on the T1 of 1....................... The Tx shares an antenna with one of the Rx filters..........PCS CDMA Environment for the Minicell Network Interfaces Transmit/Receive Antenna Introduction to PCS CDMA The T1 network is a digital transmission system using time division multiplexing to carry 24 DS0 channels. The subscriber’s unit contains a microprocessor and is continually performing operations and communicating with the cell site......... For example...............15 ........................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 .....544-Mbps.... ...... however....... Mobile Terminals Two categories of units are used by the cellular subscriber: vehiclemounted and transportable units (Class I) and hand-held units (Class III).................. The subscriber’s unit performs these functions so that it can be ready to receive an incoming call or make a call..... on a three sector cell site there would be 6 receive antennas and 3 transmit antennas.................... A variety of styles and options are available in each category...............

.......... PSTN..............16 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................................................................................................................................................... and maintenance activities................... which provides the network connectivity with other PCS Switching Centers........................... which performs the mobility management functions between base station and the switch • The 5ESS-2000 Switch Platform................ which provides a computer platform dedicated to the support of all operation......................................... The diagram below provides a view ofPCSC the switching center.......................... PCSC Components PCSC Diagram A PCSC has three components: • An Operation and Maintenance Platform (OMP)..Introduction to PCS CDMA Key Parts: PCS Switching Center (PCSC) Key Parts: PCS Switching Center (PCSC) .................................................................... PCS ACCESS MANAGER OMP ECP SS7 Links IMS CSN CNI 5E10 AM CM 5ESS-2000 DCS NCT SM PSU2 Soft Handoff Public Switched Telephone Network P H A P H V F R P H TSI DLTU2 ECSU DLTU2 ....... and local carriers. administration.......................................................................... including the support of remote data communication with the Minicell site • A PCS Access Manager................................................ 1 ..............

..... The Access Manager also supports stand-alone HLR capabilities.......................17 .......................................... The ECP is responsible for mobility management................................................................................ including: • Home Location Register/Visitor Location Register (HLR/VLR) paging • Autonomous registrations • Subscriber management • Roaming support • Intelligent Network support • Authentication and enciphering................. and system integrity........................................................ system maintenance................................................... Access Manager Diagram The diagram below shows the key parts of the PCS Access Manager: PCSC OMP PCS ACCESS MANAGER ECP CSN IMS SS7 Links Access Manager Key Features The PCS Access Manager provides Wireless terminal mobility management.................... technician interface......................... In particular...............................................Introduction to PCS CDMA Key Parts: PCS Access Manager Key Parts: PCS Access Manager .. call processing............................. PCS Access Manager Components The Access Manager is composed of the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP).............................................................................. ......... The ECP controls the operation of the AUTOPLEX® System 1000................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 ...... the ECP maintains the database and the translation tables that contain the operating parameters of the cells connected to the switch...........

........... some number of Wireless Call Processing Servers will be equipped (where each Call Processing Server handles a specific engineered capacity) • The desired number of subscriber records (HLR)........................................................ Depending on these system traffic loads....................................... ...... The HLR supports incremental growth up to the platform capacity...........Introduction to PCS CDMA Key Parts: PCS Access Manager Access Manager Capabilities The PCS Access Manager supports: • The expected traffic loads (plus sparing) of the various call types up to the engineered capacity of the platform..................... 1 ....................................... Each Access Manager is sized to support the desired number of PCS Base Stations....................................................18 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .......................

.............. The diagram below shows the main components of the 5ESS-2000 Switching Platform........... CNI Soft Hand-Off 5ESS-2000 DCS 5E10 AM DL0 DL1 CM NCT SM PSU2 Public Switched Telephone Network P H A F R P H To PCS CDMA Minicell To PCS CDMA Minicell TSI DLTU2 Functions P H V ECSU DLTU2 The PCS Switch is based on the 5ESS-2000 switch.............................. Signaling...........19 ................................................. Intelligent Networks...................................... Inter-Exchange Carrier (IEC)........................)................................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 ............................. ........................................ The PCS switching function manages the connectivity between the PCS Base Stations and the various networks (Local Exchange Carrier (LEC)............................................................... etc...... 5ESS®-2000 Switching Platform Key Features 5ESS Overview Diagram The following list describes the key features of the 5ESS®-2000 Switching Platform: • Provides the PCS switching function between PCS Base Stations and various networks • Supports both wireless and wired applications simultaneously • Is a proven market leader • Provides multiple applications on the same switch • Provides increased switching capacity • Provides highest reliability • Co-exists with existing module or reduced footprint 5ESS equipment............................... Private...........................Introduction to PCS CDMA Key Parts: 5ESS®--2000 Switching Platform Key Parts: 5ESS®--2000 Switching Platform ...............................................................................................

......................................................20 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........................................ 1 .......................................... Depending on these traffic loads............ up to the engineered capacity of the platform........................ ..................Key Parts: 5ESS®--2000 Switching Platform Introduction to PCS CDMA The 5ESS-2000 switch is engineered to support the expected traffic loads... a certain number of traffic-handler channels and network trunks will be equipped................................................................

... Therefore............................... ............... Packet pipes are defined in the minicell translation table and must be contained within the same T1 line...... Voice communications between the switch and a minicell are carried by packet pipes........ voice activity.... Overview Packet Pipe Sizes All communications are carried by the T1/E1 line................................. the packet pipe size is increased from eight DS0 to 16 DS0s................................ Packet pipes are the result of multiplexing 64-kB wide or 56-kB wide bandwidths (DSOs) on a T1 span........ The number of DSOs (packet pipe size) that can be accommodated in a packet pipe depends on RF Engineering considerations (processing gain.. Packet Pipe Trunk Group Packet Pipe Definition and Allocation In the minicell translation table........ required service level)... In ECP 12............. Changes in minicell configuration may require changes in the Packet Pipe size...............21 .. This enhancement of packet pipe size further provides the flexibility and efficiency of the usage of the T1 line... The packet pipe size can then be of variable length from two DS0s to 16 DS0s.. it is associated with the CCC with the same number at the Minicell site.................. each Packet Pipe is assigned a Packet Pipe Trunk Group Member (PPTM) number................................................................... Packet pipes do not need to be assigned to contiguous DSOs..... The packet pipe size for a given minicell is defined in the minicell translation tables maintained by the ECP................................................................ going from the Digital Cellular Switch (DCS) to the minicell site............. intersector interference...................................... In ECP 13.........Introduction to PCS CDMA CDMA Packet Pipe Trunk Group CDMA Packet Pipe Trunk Group ................................. When a PPT M of a given number is equipped............... the packet pipe size is from two DS0s to eight DS0s.......... and on the minicell configuration..................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 ........................ This number corresponds to the number assigned to a circuit CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) in the Minicell frame that provides the interface to the Minicell Time Division Multiplex (TDM) bus..... there is a one-to-one mapping between PPTM number and CCC number......

..............................................................................................22 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........... Switch Module(s) PSU2 DLTU2 DFI-2 ECSU TSI PHV FRPH CE DLTU2 DFI DFI CCC CE PSTN T1 Fac......................... (PCM) CE Nailed-up Packet Pipes (20ms packets) Packet Pipe Creation The definition of the Packet Pipe is done through the PPTG (Packet Pipe Trunk Group) form of the AUTOPLEX RC/V system.. 1 ................................................. ................................... Packet Pipes originate at the Frame Relay Protocol Handler (FRPH) and terminate at a CDMA Cluster Controller..................Introduction to PCS CDMA CDMA Packet Pipe Trunk Group Packet Pipe Diagram The diagram below shows the data path in the Switch and Minicell...................... A further discussion on Packet Pipes is provided in Unit 9..

.......... Cluster Controller The CDMA Cluster Controller passes the signals to Channel Elements (CEs) contained in the CCU...............Minicell Interface Packet Pipe Connection -...........Introduction to PCS CDMA Packet Pipe Connection -........ Cluster A Cluster is a logically associated group of CEs that can be controlled by a single CCC.........Minicell Interface ................................................................................. Minicell Interface Diagram The diagram below shows the Packet Pipe connection to the Minicell.. more than one channel..... All of the conversations on the CEs within a Cluster are backhauled to the PCSC through the same Packet Pipe....................................... Overview The Packet Pipe’s physical interface with the Minicell is through the Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) that provides serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial data conversion between the T1 lines and the TDM buses internal to the Minicell............................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 .....................23 .......... Subcell A Subcell is a group of interconnected Clusters that allow all the CE within the Subcell to act as share resources for the sectors... i.......................................... Each CE supports one CDMA channel.................................................... Channel Elements A CE contains the circuitry necessary to support a full duplex CDMA channel......... The Packet Pipe terminates at the CDMA Cluster Controller............................................... PCS CDMA Minicell Site CE 1 Nailed-up Packet Pipe DFI CCC CE 24 CE Role of the Channel Element Each CE can be assigned to perform one or more of the following functions: ....................................... to perform forward link and reverse link CDMA spread-spectrum processing....e.... or in some cases..... A CE is capable of performing the modulation/demodulation of a CDMA channel................................................................................

............... the number of 64-kB DSOs allocated to a Packet Pipe) is.........Packet Pipe Connection -...... CCCs equipped with ECUs may be configured for “larger” size Packet Pipes............ .......................... unless channel pooling is enabled.... TCU and ECU The PCS CDMA Minicell can presently support two different CUs............... used by the Minicell to transmit system overhead information to the mobile • Traffic (User) Channel......... 1 .. The Packet Pipe size (i.... at most............ more than four DSOs will be unused. the Thirteen Kilobit Channel Unit (TCU) and the Enhanced Channel Unit (ECU)... up to a maximum of 16 DSOs on the same T1 line.....................e.........24 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 . is used to receive various types of messages from the mobile • Paging Channel functions.........Minicell Interface Introduction to PCS CDMA • Pilot Channel functions............. which carries voice communication Several functions can be combined into a single CE........ used by the mobile to acquire initial time synchronization • Access Channel... Line Support Current software supports only one T1/E1 line interface port............................ which enables the CDMA mobile to establish communication with the Minicell • Sync Channel functions................... four for CCCs equipped with TCU Channel Elements................. RF Engineering considerations determine that maximum................... reverse of the Paging Channel..........

............... The Minicell maintains maximum commonality with 800-MHz standards for CDMA (that is.... The diagram below represents the key components in a Minicell receive or transmit path..... The PCS CDMA Minicell Site Minicell Diagram The PCS CDMA Minicell Site contains a PCS CDMA Minicell that is designed to optimize performance for voice and data services at the 1......... IS-95 and its extensions for PCS)...................Introduction to PCS CDMA Key Parts: The Minicell Site Key Parts: The Minicell Site ............. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 .......................6608 MHz DFI C C C CE CE A C U B C R C T U Important! The acronyms RCC and CSC represent the same piece of equipment...................................................................................................... lower frame error rates with reduced fading.................................25 ...................ten times the capacity of analog cellular • Has larger Minicell radii ........ RCC RFTG SCT CSC CDMA Minicell Site 19.............................0-GHz range..............three to four times that of GSM • Uses multipath to enhance signal strength and to combat fading • Offers good voice quality (i......e......................................8-GHz to 2....................................................................................... Advantages of PCS CDMA Minicells The PCS CDMA Minicell offers the following advantages: • Offers high capacity ...................... multiple base station communication.................................................................. and no recognizable noise or cross talk) • Imposes lower power requirements for mobiles providing longer battery life for handheld units ......... soft handoffs.

....................................... these forms can be updated via a laptop and a modem connection.... These forms are maintained in the PCSC (Access Manager) computer............................................. With proper authorization....... 1 ............................................ ......... Current vocoders do not support data transmission................................................................................Introduction to PCS CDMA Key Parts: The Minicell Site • Minicell Translation Forms About Vocoders Provides a degree of built-in privacy All configuration and operating parameters relative to a given Minicell are stored in data tables called Translation Forms......... even if the cell design is optimized for that mode of operation......... therefore enabling changes in a Minicell configuration from a remote location......26 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........

.. In this example they occupy the last 16 DS0s (i....................................... 1....................27 ........................e...................................... DS1-9 through 24)....... Overview This feature provides Lucent customers with a more efficient utilization of T1/E1 transport facilities..........................Daisy Chain Packet Pipe Connection ...............Daisy Chain .......... The analogous upstream path is not depicted in the picture.............. This is also called Fractional T1 facilities....... ................... Fractional T1 Example Diagram The figure below illustrates an example of daisy chaining three cells solely on the downstream path from the MSC to the cell sites......................... The 8th line is the POTS line.................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 ...................................................... This CSU reads the first eight DS0s from the incoming T1 (i....... DS1-1 through 8) and writes them to the first eight DS0s of the T1 going to Base Station 1.. Cell Site 1 1-7 Full T1 CDMA Radio 8 CSU Cell Site 2 1-7 1-8 9-16 17-24 CSU CDMA Radio 8 Cell Site 3 1-8 9-16 17-24 1-7 CSU CDMA Radio 8 1-8 9-16 17-24 Detailed Operation Description In PCS networks......................... even if a fraction of the T1/E1 facility is in use................................................ every Cell is connected to the DCS via T1/E1 transport.....e.............................. A full T1 comes into the first CSU from the MSC......... This example describes one T1 line daisy chained across three cell sites.... The remaining DS0s are written to the T1 going to the second CSU.........................Introduction to PCS CDMA Packet Pipe Connection ........................ This feature provides a mechanism for customers to drop/insert any number of DS0s to/from multiple cells daisy chained together via T1/E1 facilities...............................

.. they only need to connect their laptop to the RS-232 port... This is the last cell in the chain........ When a technician wishes to access the port remotely........ The CSU will translate the packet to the expected position of DS0 13 and 24..... DS1-17 through 24) 3....28 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................... For simplicity the example shows each eight DSOs allocated to the next cell site..........e................ At the third CSU we again have a similar situation.... In this example they occupy the last eight DS0s (i............. Administrative Port The remotely accessible administrative port sub-feature works in a fashion similar to the POTS line............... This DS0 will be dedicated as a POTS line until it is deprovisioned by an operator............. DS1-9 through 16) and writes them to the first eight DS0s of the T1 going to Base Station 2... POTS Line The POTS sub-feature work as follows............Daisy Chain 2......... When the customer would like to use the POTS line. 1 ..... When a technician wishes to access the port locally............e..... Data Lines Each cell site needs two DS0s allocated for DL1 and DL0...................... Actual use of this feature will likely be different. At the second CSU we have a similar situation.... The remaining DS0s are written to the T1 going to the third CSU................e. This CSU reads the second eight DS0s from the incoming T1 (i........... they will provision a particular DSO for that purpose..... an operator may need to provision a particular DS0 for that purpose....................Introduction to PCS CDMA Packet Pipe Connection . ........... DS1-17 through 24) and writes them to the first eight DS0s of the T1 going to Base Station 3...... This CSU reads the last eight DS0s from the incoming T1 (i..

................. and carrier modulation......................... ........................................................................ provides channel encoding and bit interleaving to reduce communication errors....... communications destined to a given Minicell are bundled into Packet Pipes assigned to that Minicell and sent to the Minicell site over a T1 line.......................................................... 2 The PCSC converts the received signal into a voice communication and sends it over the PSTN............. Walsh function modulation............ and sends the resulting signal to the PCSC in a Packet Pipe over a T1 line............................................. deencryption............. ............................................ 1 The PCSC has speech handling circuitry to encode land-originated communications........... signal despreading....................... .................................. 1 The Minicell site provides carrier demodulation....................................................................................................................... deinterleaving.............................................. Walsh function demodulation................................................ Current software supports only one T1/E1 line interface port.............................29 ............................................. signal spreading........Introduction to PCS CDMA CDMA Implementation CDMA Implementation .................... 3 Receive Bit interleaving is used to reduce the effects of RF fading and large interference bursts.......................... Once encoded...................... Transmit and Receive functions are performed in hardware................ .......................... 2 The Minicell site unbundles the Packet Pipes.......................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 ......................................................... Overview T1/E1 Lines Transmit Lucent Technologies PCS CDMA Minicell implementation is compliant with the IS-95 Standard................................................................................................................................. On the Receive Path: ......................................................... On the Transmit Path: ........................................................................................... provides long code encryption.............................................................................................. channel decoding.............

............ 5 Encryption.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 4 Bit Interleaving: rearrange the bits to limit “burst” errors ........................................30 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....... 6 Signal spreading..............................................................................................0 L CDMA Encoding Process tT h l i P i t The call process steps are as follows: .................................................................................................................... 2 Encode the digitized signal ........................................................ long code scrambling: apply the users long code to provide secure transmission (see page 1-32) ... Walsh function modulation (see page 1-32) ................... 10 10 99 88 77 66 55 44 33 22 CTU minicell Site Carrier Modulation Carrier Demodulation 11 11 Signal Despreading 12 12 Baseband Combiner & Radio PN Offset Bus Interface Unit Signal Spreading............................................................................................................................................................................ Walsh function Modulation Analog Conversion Unit 64 bit Orthogonal Symbol Demodulation 13 13 CCU Encryption: Long Code Scrambling CDMA Channel Element Bit Interleaving CDMA Cluster Controller Channel Coding T1/E1 T1/E1 Packet Pipe in DS1 BBA CRC Frame Relay Bit Deinterleaving 15 15 16 16 MSC Speech Handler: Variable Low Bit Rate Speech Coding 11 14 14 Channel Decoding Packet Pipe Encoding Decryption: Long Code Unscrambling Decoding 17 17 PSTN 18 CL3805 ..................................................................................................................... 1 PSTN: Phone call originates ................................... 1 ....................................................................................................................................................... 3 Channel coding: (see page 1-32) duplicate the signal ......................................................................................L1V7..Introduction to PCS CDMA CDMA Implementation CDMA Encoding Process Diagram The following diagram shows the signal encoding that occurs in the Minicell.................................................

.............................................................................................................................. 18 PSTN: the send and return sides of a call are completed .................................................................................................... 10 Mobile phone responds: Receive signal from mobile terminal ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 11 Carrier demodulation ................................................................ 7 PN offset (see page 1-32) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... long code unscrambling (see page 1-32) ................... 12 Signal despreading (see page 1-32) ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Introduction to PCS CDMA CDMA Implementation ........................................................................................................................................................ 8 Carrier modulation: prepare the encoded signal for transmission ................. 14 Decryption................................................................................... 9 Transmit to mobile terminal: the handset decodes the signal and encodes the mobile users voice ..................................................................................................... 15 Bit deinterleaving .............................................................................. 17 Decoding: convert voice data from vocoder to 64-kB digitized data ................... 16 Channel decoding ................................................................................... 13 64 bit orthogonal symbol demodulation ................................................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 ................................................................................................................................31 ........................................

.............................32 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............ 1 The forward traffic is encoded with the Long Mask code............ 2 The Walsh function is then applied to ensure the orthogonality of the channel against the remaining channels................................................ Overview The Channel Elements encode the signal three ways to maintain privacy and identify the call to the receiver...........................Introduction to PCS CDMA CDMA Channel Element Encoding CDMA Channel Element Encoding ......................................................................4 kbps 19............6 kbps or 14........................................................................................................... ................................................................................. 3 The encoded signal is then assigned codes that are used to identify the base station and sector to the mobile..........................................................................................2288 Mbps Legend: Σ = summed Power Control The Power control bit is used during call processing to maintain the relative power of each individual active traffic channel.2 kbps Speech Processor Power Control Bits (800 bps) Block Interleaver Walsh Function I Baseband Filter Σ MUX s(t) Q Baseband Filter 19........................................................................... 1 ..................... .................2 kbps Long Code Mask for User m Long Code Generator Decimator 1/64 1..................................2288 Mbps sin Q Channel Pilot PN Sequence 1................2288 Mbps cos 9....................................................... and to power it ........................ Encoding the Transmit Signal The encoding process is as follows: ............................................................................................ Channel Element Encoding Diagram The diagram below shows the CDMA channel element encoding: I Channel Pilot PN Sequence 1.......................................................................................... and provided through multiplexing with a power control bit that will be used by the mobile to maintain its receive/transmit level..................................................................................

... and expressed in terms of digital gain units..........................33 .........Introduction to PCS CDMA CDMA Channel Element Encoding up or down to maintain acceptable Frame Error Rate (FER) measurements by the mobile on the channel............................................................... Units Used These relative power settings are defined in the Minicell translation tables....................................... .......................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 ...........................

...... Overview The codes used in a CDMA transmission are assigned specific functions......... informs the mobile which antenna face and base station the mobile is communicating with...................... and thus ensures privacy.... transmitted from the base station to the mobile................................... the result is acknowledged by the receiving system................................ if two Walsh codes are correlated...... 1 ......34 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................. Orthogonal encoding is characterized by the following properties when they are combined (multiplexed): • If they were encoded with the same code....... the result is intelligible only if these two codes are the same.................. when a Walsh-encoded signal is received by a PCS CDMA-capable mobile terminal it appears as random noise to that terminal........................ Walsh codes are “orthogonal” mathematical codes........... Walsh Function This function provides orthogonal encoding....... ........................ • If they were encoded with different codes........ Pilot Channel PN Code This code........ the result is ignored by the receiving system..................................... unless that terminal uses the same code as the one encoding the incoming signal........................................................................................................................................... As such.Introduction to PCS CDMA Codes Used in a CDMA Transmission Codes Used in a CDMA Transmission ......... Long Code The Long Code is used to encrypt the content of the transmitted signal............................................................................... As a result..

........42-bit 42-bitbinary binarynumber.....35 ..Walsh Walshfunctions functions are used to provide orthogonal are used to provide orthogonal channelization channelizationamong amongall allcode codeCDMA CDMA forward channels (pilot...... code....... Description AArandom.................. random...... traffic)..Introduction to PCS CDMA Codes Used in a CDMA Transmission CDMA Codes Table Code Name Long code mask Walsh function Pilot channel PN code (short code) Result of CDMA Encoding This table provides a summary of the various CDMA coding functions..............2288 MHz channel ..............and and traffic)....... providing 16 trillion providing 16 trillioncombinations combinationsofof0’s 0’s and and1’s... paging..... 12 39 41 1 42 29 0 2 17 28 10 6 23 25 51 34 43 16 55 24 40 48 4 37 15 35 13 3 58 20 46 21 7 59 39 53 14 43 41 49 45 22 30 11 44 5 31 50 56 18 54 8 9 33 38 19 32 60 47 36 57 62 63 26 52 27 40 1.......... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 .... Function Voice privacy Channel Formation.. forward channels (pilot.. omni).......................... 0 .... number............ AA15 15bit bitcode codewith with512 512combinations combinationsthat that isisunique to minicell face unique to minicell face(sectorized (sectorizedor or omni)...... paging.......2288-MHz bandwidth....................... mixed within a 1................................. 1’s.2288 MHz CDMA Channel As many as 61 Simultaneous users per 1.........sync..63 Time Offset The illustration below depicts different voice communications....................... AA64-bit 64-bitorthogonal orthogonalcode.............. sync.....

.......................................................... L ........................................................................................................... Sync) • Traffic (Voice) channels PCS CDMA Channels When the CDMA signal is monitored on a test set running in the code domain mode........Introduction to PCS CDMA Display of Walsh Codes Display of Walsh Codes ............ Overview PCS CDMA transmissions require two types of channels: • Supervision channels (Pilot.............................................................................................. each channel is represented by a separate bar corresponding to its assigned Walsh code................................................................ the supervision channels will have a higher power level than the voice channels.......... Paging.................................... Walsh Code Display Diagram On the display............................................................ 1 ........................... The Pilot channel (Walsh code 0) is always the first on the left of the display................36 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....................

Introduction to PCS CDMA Details of Walsh Codes Display Details of Walsh Codes Display ......... or autonomous registration messages... The sync channel is always spread with Walsh function 32........... Its nominal strength is 0.......... and its function is assigned to the same CE as the pilot for the Minicell site or face..........................12 W (34DGUs) or 1......5% of total power........................................................................... Paging Channels Paging channels are used by the Minicell site to transmit system overhead information and mobile-specific information (such as pages) to the mobiles........... The Pilot Channel The pilot channel (Walsh code 0) is transmitted at all times by the Minicell site on each active carrier........................................................... Its maximum value is 1................................ transmits at 1200 bps......................... Signal strengths for the CDMA channels can be displayed with relative powers shown................................................... page response........37 .............. The Sync Channel The sync channel is used by mobile units operating within the coverage area of the Minicell site to acquire initial time synchronization............................. as follows: • Paging channel 1 is the primary paging channel • The paging channel is divided into 2048 80-ms timeslots ........ The following actions take place: • The CDMA mobile constantly monitors the pilot channel and measures the signal strength of the pilot signal............ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 ......................................... the mobile monitors the pilot channel and estimates the power level to use for origination (open-loop power control)... • The mobile unit also assists the Minicell site in the handoff process by measuring and reporting the strengths of the received pilot signals........ the mobile unit’s relative power level is adjustable............. Overview Total transmit power is distributed among the different Walsh codes............... Because the power of the pilot channel determines the initial power of the mobile’s transmitting origination............. • Prior to origination................ The supervision channels are set to stronger values...................2W (or 108 Digital Gain Units (DGUs) representing 15% of the 8W total power when using a normal CTU...........

........... Access Channel The access channel is used to receive various types of messages from the mobiles...... it is on the receive side of the CE used for the pilot and sync channels....................... or 5............... such as call origination requests......................... Functionally.............. and page responses.. an unused paging channel (Walsh code) may be used randomly by the Minicell to handle voice traffic......... referred to as slotted mode...... it is the reverse of the paging channel... The slotted mode is required for optional mobile features such as sleep mode..................... Pilot (W0) Paging (W1-7) Sync (W32) Voice Traffic Voice Traffic ..44 W (64DGUs)... referred to as nonslotted mode...........5% of a total 8W signal..................... Physically......Introduction to PCS CDMA Details of Walsh Codes Display Mobiles may monitor all slots........ Traffic Channels The rest of the CDMA Walsh codes (or 78%) will be used to carry voice traffic... autonomous registrations...... Mobiles may also monitor certain slots..... • Paging channels: – Are spread with Walsh functions 1 through 7 – Transmit data at either 9600 or 4800 kbps – Are assigned to specific CEs at the Minicell or face Because there may be one or as many as seven paging channels from Minicell to Minicell... Walsh Code Relative Power Levels Diagram The diagram below provides a comparison of the power levels allocated to the Walsh codes shown as channels on a meter display...38 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........ 1 ........ Strength of Paging Channel is 0....................................................

....23-MHz wide frequency band................................ Signal Processing: Transmit CDMA starts with an encoded narrowband signal.................... To overcome this problem. The predominant interference to CDMA users are other CDMA users........................... and interference from adjacent cells......................23 MHz................................ both the Minicell site and mobile can increase power until neither the mobile nor the Minicell site can power up further to decrease FER to an acceptable amount......... Signal Processing: Receive When the signal is received.....Introduction to PCS CDMA The CDMA Interference The CDMA Interference .......... This processing is done by a correlator that eliminates interference sources because they are uncorrelated with the desired signal........ This includes the “noise” of other CDMA calls................................. Each subscriber is assigned PN (pseudorandom noise) codes.. This event gives a “soft limit” of calls of a particular Minicell.. The total interference also includes background noise and other spurious signals....... shown at the full data rate of 9600 bps................................. By using this method............... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 ..................... A CDMA signal experiences high levels of interference dominated by the coded signals of other CDMA users....................................39 ...... ................... measured in terms of Frame Error Rate (FER).. Noise Sources In spread-spectrum technology...... increases with the number of calls.. Overview CDMA is based on the use of a spread-spectrum form of modulation to encode a signal for its transmission and retrieval.. Signals that match the PN codes are decoded and processed.. a large number of CDMA calls may occupy the same frequency spectrum simultaneously............................................................. radio signals are spread across a single 1.................. Frame Error Rate The number of transmission errors......................... This takes two forms: interference from other users in the same Minicell..................naturally occurring and man-made interference • Interference from calls on this Minicell • Interference from calls on other cells The diagram below displays the four sources of interference to a CDMA call..... and depends on: Noise Source Diagram • The noise floor ............ This is spread with the use of the PN codes to a bandwidth of 1... Signals that do not contain the code matches are treated as noise and ignored................................... it is filtered and processed to recover the desired signal.

.................................. which counteracts the effects of fading by combining several signals........... The three types of diversity that impact PCS CDMA are: Diversity Diagram • Time • Path • Frequency............... 1 ............................................................... all having the same information...................................25 MHz Baseband Filter 1...23 MHz 10 KHz 9..............................Introduction to PCS CDMA Diversity and CDMA 1.............................. ....40 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................. The diagram below shows the various sources of echoes and other multipath signals that can be utilized to improve signal quality................... Diversity Diversity is a method of radio transmission and/or reception..........................................................................................................25 MHz Baseband Filter Data De-interleave & Decode PN Source Signal Processing Carrier Carrier Background Noise External Interference Other minicell Interference Other User Interference 5 Diversity and CDMA ..................................23 MHz 1.................................2288 Mbps Signal Processing 1............................................6 Kbps Data TX RX Correlator Digital Filter Encoding & Inter-leaving PN Source 10 KHz Filter 1..........................

......................... Rake receivers: • Enable soft handoffs • Provide significant gain • Protect against fading • Enable diversity The base station rake receiver has four fingers that can access multiple antennas.............. particularly in areas where most signals are weak........ and search for alternate multipaths and neighboring base station signals......... which are continuously trying to lock into the three strongest signals............. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 ................... a loss of consecutive bits during transmission will have little or no effect on the entire data message........2 kbps)................................... each digital bit of information in the data packet that is received by the cell site over the Packet Pipe is duplicated (9............Introduction to PCS CDMA Diversity and CDMA Rake Receiver Interference Interference Rake Receiver Interference MSC Lucent Technologies Rake Receivers A rake receiver significantly improves reception reliability..... Thus.............. whereas the handset rake receiver has one antenna with three elements...........41 ........................ This is because their near duplicates are stored elsewhere in ...6 kbps becomes 19.. A rake receiver contains multiple tuning fingers. The position of each new bit in the data stream is rearranged in relation to the original bit.................................... Additional circuitry is used to correlate signals........... Time Delay With time delay...................

..... So only those delays in time of less than 1 microsecond.........23-MHz bandwidth.............................. as many as three multipath data streams may be received independently.... identical data is received from more than one path. For a 1-ms delay.................... actually cause the signal to experience a deep fade... The mobile selects the best (lowest FER (frame error rate)) packet of voice data in 20-ms frames from the available signal source........... A fade appears as a notch filter that moves across a band............ This common time delay method is used to improve digital transmission of data packets.... The width of the notch is on the order of one over the difference in arrival time of two signals.................. the notch is approximately 1MHz wide.. Path Delay In multipath data streams............... As the user moves............ Fading is caused by................. ........... the time delays in the alternate multipaths..... and is a function of..... The CDMA system uses a 1...................Introduction to PCS CDMA Diversity and CDMA the data stream and can be used to recreate the data.................... the frequency of the notch changes.........................42 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................ Because the CDMA mobile has a rake receiver with three receiver elements... 1 . Frequency Delay Frequency changes are inherent in spread-spectrum systems due to fading...... It is received several microseconds apart due to the varying lengths of the paths.

43 .. Number of Traffic Channels per Minicell Site The maximum number of traffic channels per Minicell site is determined by the elements installed in the PCS CDMA Minicell primary frame.. which is also called a frame................... such as powerup/powerdown commands... for a combined total of 61 possible Walsh codes that may be used for traffic channels................................. Traffic channels may simultaneously handle voice and signaling data..... .... signaling data is transmitted via blank and burst............................................... This yields 55 possible Walsh codes............ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 1 . Traffic channels are assigned to unique CEs in the Minicell site or face......................................................................... • When voice data is present...................... • When primary data is not present... • Traffic channels transmit data packets containing 20 ms of speech samples.... This means that as many as six additional Walsh codes may be selected during call processing................................................... Transmission occurs in the following ways: • CDMA traffic channels transmit at variable data rates of 9600................................... • Traffic channels are randomly assigned by call processing to Walsh functions 8 through 63 (but not 32) during a call......................................................................................Introduction to PCS CDMA CDMA Traffic Channels CDMA Traffic Channels .............. signaling data is transmitted via dim and burst..... Overview Signal Transmission Primary Traffic Data and Signaling Data CDMA traffic channels are used to transmit user and signaling information between the Minicell site and the mobile unit during a call......... 4800...... where both primary traffic and signaling data share the same frame....................... • In addition........ where signaling data uses the entire frame............ and by engineering (Packet Pipes and RF) considerations. • All data rates include a frame quality indicator as part of the 20ms packet........................... • The rate is based on the activity of the speech sample. and 1200 bps.. 2400..................... Walsh functions for unused paging channels may also be selected during call processing.

.................... ..................................... the number of simultaneous traffic channels is less than the theoretical value of 61......................................... 1 .........................................................................Introduction to PCS CDMA CDMA Traffic Channels • Because each additional traffic channel creates additional interference for each established call...................44 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................................................................

in order to perform troubleshooting procedures..2 PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Overview ................. List Components in the Data and RF Paths The objective here is to enable cell technicians to follow the data and RF path............................................................ Objectives This unit provides the cell site technician with the ability to locate Minicell components that will need to be worked on as part of the maintenance process........................................................... Locate Components This unit is designed to enable cell technicians to locate the physical components in a Minicell so that they can maintain and/ or perform maintenance actions on them......................................................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 .......................1 ............ Receive and Transmit paths .............. About the Signal Path A PCS CDMA Minicell provides connectivity between the land-based telephone network and wireless terminals...................................... 3.... The objectives to be achieved are as follows: 1............... The physical description of Minicell components will enable the Cell Site technician to perform necessary maintenance tasks.............................................................................. and between wireless terminals that are within the wireless coverage area....................................... Identify Functions Another objective is to enable cell technicians to identify the role of the different components that they have located...... 2.............................

..............• CTU Assembly Description .....2-43 .............• PCS CDMA Minicell Receive Data Path ...............2-60 ....User Alarm Board - 2-22 .- - Primary Cabinet Shelf Descriptions • CDMA Radio Test Unit .................................2-5 • Concepts of the PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station 2-6 • The PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station .• Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 Layout Detail .2 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..........................2-32 ...........• Configuration Changes in PCS CDMA Minicell Version 4...2-47 ......• Frame Pedestal ..........2-25 ......2-35 .• CDMA Radio Test Unit Module .....• Filter Assembly--Simplex Filters .........• Alarm Interface Module ....2-30 .............2-50 ..............• CDMA Radio Complex (CRC) Shelves ....2-23 ..........2-53 ..........PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description are part of the Minicell overall signal path that also includes signaling and control paths..... 2 ..... • Cabinet Technical Specifications (Standard Minicell) ........2-45 ..• PCS CDMA Minicell Signal Flows .................2-34 ....2-37 ....• CRC Shelf Descriptions ..2-28 .2-39 ..• Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP) ...........................• Radio Control Complex Shelf Description • CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) Shelf .........• Radio Switch Panel Connections .......2-58 • Heat Exchanger ..............2-51 .......2-40 .....• Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Back) ...........................................• PCS CDMA Minicell Transmit Path .......• Digital Facilities Interface Board ...• CRC Shelf Details ......2-7 Primary Cabinet Layout and Signal Flows • Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Front) ..............• Circuit Breaker Panel .....• Alarm Interface Panel -.............................2-49 .............2-55 - - - - - - - 2-9 2-10 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-15 2-16 2-18 2-20 Side and Rear Panel Descriptions 2-56 • Side Panel (Version 2 Only) ...........2-42 ....... Contents PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description 2-4 • CDMA Overview ..• Reference Frequency and Timing Generator • Radio Control Complex Shelf ............• Channel Service Unit (Optional) .....2-57 • Rear Interface Panel .......2-27 ..• Front Filter Assembly ...............................

..........• Growth I Cabinet Layout .• Backup Battery Cabinet (Optional) ..........- - - - - - - - - 2-62 ..............................• Minicell Primary Power Cabinet (Optional) • Minicell Power Cabinet Layout .................2-79 .2-67 ....................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Other Base Station Cabinets • Special Omni ....2-76 ...................................................2-65 ....2-64 .....• Range Extension Option ........... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ................2-80 ..3 .................2-74 .2-66 ..................................• Growth Cabinets ............................• Growth II Cabinet Layout ..• Rack-Mounted Growth ......• Growth III Cabinet Layout .2-63 ...................2-69 .............................

.............................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 2 ........................................................4 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................... Purpose The PCS CDMA Minicell is the physical interface between the T1 line from the 5ESS-2000 system and the wireless system antenna..................................... .......... Equipment designed for a base station includes radio and power cabinets.........................................................................................................

................ The switch is connected to a caller on the landbased telephone network or another wireless terminal that is within the wireless coverage area of the switch.............................................................................................................. 2-sector...... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 .................................. Features The Minicell features are as follows: Transmit Configurations • Omni...........................................................................5 ......................................................... Overview A PCS CDMA Minicell provides connectivity between the switch and wireless terminals......... or 3-sector operation in a single cabinet • Environmentally-hardened cabinets • Can be installed outdoors on rooftop or concrete slab • Sub-rate multiplexing (allows multiple packet pipes to occupy the same facility) on base station-to-switch links • Works with existing AUTOPLEX® System 1000 equipment • CDMA technology..................... ..................................................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description CDMA Overview CDMA Overview ........................................................................... The following configurations are supported: • Omni antenna with one CDMA carrier • 3-sector directional antennas with one CDMA carrier • Omni and 3-sector directional antennas with up to three CDMA carriers (requires growth cabinets)...... The Minicell supports a maximum of three transmit antennas and six receive antennas (including diversity receive) per carrier......

.............................. each cell receives timing signals from GPS satellites using a GPS antenna................................................................................................................... 2 ........................... Overview The PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station is the physical interface between the T1 line from the 5ESS-2000 System and a wireless mobile..............................................................6 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ......... Acronyms CDMA Code Division Multiple Access GPS Global Positioning System PCS Personal Communications Services TDM Time Division Multiplex T-Smart Channel Service Unit DFI Digital Facilities Interface CDMA Minicell Connections Diagram The diagram below shows the external connections to a PCS CDMA Minicell............. GPS Antenna T1/E1 from 5ESS®-2000 Growth Cabinets (Optional) Receive (RF) Transmit (RF) Timing Ref................................................................ T-Smart-to-DFI Alarms TDM Bus    l l l PCS CDMA Minicell Power and Alarms Power Cabinet ................................................................ Because CDMA requires synchronization between all the cells in the network..............................................................................0 Battery Backup Power Cabinet (Optional) Commercial Power (220 VAC) Lucent Technologies Proprietary ................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Concepts of the PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station Concepts of the PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station .................................

......................... Primary Radio Cabinet Growth Cabinets Location (Optional) Power Cabinet Battery Backup Cabinet (Optional) Primary Radio Cabinets The Primary Radio Cabinet contains the foundational complement of radios for a Minicell................................ These cabinets are Growth I and Growth II. Optional cabinets include one or more Growth Cabinets and one or more types of Backup Power Cabinets....... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ............ ....................................................... Base Station Graphic The graphic below shows one of the possible layouts of a base station... When ECU equipped....................7 .................. of a Primary Radio Cabinet and a Primary Power Cabinet.................................................. The Minicell itself is composed........................ and also give the possibility of using different carriers............. Growth I When equipped with ECUs.............. a primary cabinet can support up to 120 control and traffic channels............................................................ at a minimum................................ Overview A PCS CDMA Base Station contains the PCS CDMA Minicell and the Receive/Transmit Antenna...................................................... Differences between these two models are essentially related to the physical location of some of their electronic components......................................... the Growth I cabinet can support an additional 120 control and traffic channels to those available in the Primary Radio Cabinet.......... Two functionally equivalent models of Primary Radio Cabinets (Version 2 and Version 4) are currently available...................... Growth Radio Cabinets Two growth cabinets are available to support larger traffic volumes..............The PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description The PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station ...............

. Receives and transmits RF signals.................................................. 2 ...The PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Growth II When equipped with ECUs............................................... the Growth II cabinet can support an additional 120 control and traffic channels to those available in the Primary Radio Cabinet and the Growth I Cabinet............................ Primary Power Cabinet The primary power cabinet provides the power (240 VAC and 24 VDC) necessary for the functioning of the various circuits in the primary and growth cabinets................................................. Backup Generator Cabinet Antenna The backup power cabinet is an optional piece of equipment that provides generator supplied power in case of failure of primary power...................................... ........................ Backup Battery Cabinet The backup battery cabinet is an optional piece of equipment that provides temporary power in case of failure of primary power..8 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................

............................................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 .........................................................................9 .................................. ..................................The PCS CDMA Minicell Base Station PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Primary Cabinet Layout and Signal Flows Overview Purpose This section provides an overview of the PCS CDMA primary Minicell hardware and signal flows...

............. routes alarm signals to the switch ............................................................................. Part of the RCC.............................. for control of the cell operations CRC CDMA Radio Complex (Labeled CCC2............... CRTUm RSP CSU RFTG-m Rb RFTG-m CSC 0 CTUs PCU ACB PCU Filters (RUs 1............................................ RCC Radio Control Complex contains two CSCs for redundancy CSC Cell Site Controller.................................................................. for interface with the T1 line(s) RFTG Reference Frequency Timing Generator to maintain cell timing....PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Front) Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Front) ..............10 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........... from top to bottom: Component Description CRTUm CDMA Radio Test Unit Module for testing cell operation RSP Radio Switch Panel....... Primary Radio Cabinet Diagram (Front) This is the front view of the PCS CDMA Minicell with the receive units and filters on the left side............................. and 6 for historical reasons) CTU CDMA Transmit Unit for transmission to a filter for clean-up of transmit signals Filters Filters for the transmit and receive paths......................... 2 ......................... RU Receive Unit passes the received signal to a filter for clean-up PCU Power Conversion Unit provides +15V output from a +24V input ACB Alarm Control Board............ 4........................5 behind TFUs) SIDE 0 SIDE 1 C T U C T U C T U 0 1 2 A C B TFU TFU TFU RFU RFU RFU Side Interface Panel Primary Radio Cabinet Components CSC 1 RCC (Hidden behind Fan) X0 CSC Heat Exchanger CCC 2 CCC 4 CRC CCC 6 Alarm Panel The front of a primary cabinet shows the radio components....... for switching signals to and from the CRTU CSU Channel Service Unit........................................................................................3...........................

.......................................................... Overview The back of the cabinet contains the antenna and power connections................................................................................... DANGER Electrical Burns Serious burns may occur......... Make sure that there is no RF Power applied to the antenna leads before disconnecting.......................... Antennas may need to be disconnected to perform measurements..11 .................................................................. The diagram below shows the components on the back of a Version 3 Minicell...................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ............................... which is made through the Power Distribution Assembly (PDA).......................... which are connected through the Antenna Interface Panel (AIP) • BCR to CTU connectors (CTU Backplane) • Access to CSU connections • Power distribution.............................................. CRTU CSU BACK PLANE RCC BACK PLANE CCC2 BACK PLANE Side Interface Panel CCC4 BACK PLANE Power Distribution Assembly CCC6 BACK PLANE TX TX TX TX S3P S3G S2P S2G TX TX S1P RX RX RX RX RX LIGHTNING PLATE Connections SAGE S1G RX S3D0 S3D1 S2D0 S2D1 S1D0 S1D1 GPS AIP Antenna Interface Panel The following connections are accessible from the back of the radio cabinet: • Antennas.................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Back) Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 (Back) .. Components Primary Radio Cabinet Diagram (Back) The back of the primary cabinet has limited service or maintenance requirements by cell technicians................................................................................................ ................

.......................................................12 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ......................................................................... Primary Radio Cabinet Layout The diagram below shows the layout of the primary radio cabinet..................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 Layout Detail Primary Radio Cabinet Version 2 Layout Detail ..................................................................... Exact position of boards on a given shelf may differ from site to site................ shelf location will not be affected............................. Details on the individual boards are provided later on in this unit. However......................... 2 ... CRTU DUPLEX J8 SIU CSU 1 J7 RFTG 0 CSU 2 CSU 3 RFTG 1 CSC0 C T U 0 J6 -50 J4 -50 J5 -40 J3 -40 J9 C T U 1 TX S1P C T U 2 TX S2P CSC1 P AC CU B P C U C C N M C C MN C R P C E P P EC P T I I M U U MI IU 0 1 i 4 A 1 F 5 I A C RSP 4 1 5 A C * * * * cCC CC CC CC CC BI CA CB cC U1 U2 U3 U4 U U R c CCC2 CCC4 TX S3P RX 0 RX 0 RX 0 J10 INTERFACE PANEL CCC6 Air Duct J1 S C T / D F I 44 1 5 A A C C BBA Group Circuit Breakers AIM0 SIDE EXT ALM 6 CLOSE ON ALARM AIM 1 A F I AIM1 SIDE OPEN ON ALARM AIM 0 CSU Remote Optioning Port EXT ALM 0 Shelf Layout Each shelf is composed of individual boards................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................

.............. with some rearrangement of components to ease access and manufacturing......... ...................................... PCS CDMA Minicell Version 4 Diagram The components moved to new locations are shown in the picture below: Air Ducts CTU RFTGm Larger Heat Exchanger N 6 Filters Combined CRTUm and RSP Physical Differences between Version 2 and Version 4 Front Front Back Back The major physical differences between the two versions are as follows: • The RFTGms have been moved below the CTUs... The PCS CDMA Minicell Version 4 The PCS CDMA Minicell Version 4 enables a smaller footprint than a Version 2 installation when it includes Growth cabinets......................................................................................13 .............................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Configuration Changes in PCS CDMA Minicell Version 4............................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ......0 Minicell functions like its predecessor....... rather than side-by-side.......................................................... This is achieved by making all filters accessible from the front of the cabinet......... eliminating the need for a second heat exchanger when using High Power CTUs............... Overview The Version 4.......................................................................... and to enhance reliability................. ..................... In their place are air ducts that enable vertical air flow for cooling the inside of the Minicell......... • The Heat Exchanger is larger than in the Version 2 Minicell...................................... Version 4 also presents a more efficient cooling system................. The RFTGms are now placed on top of each other......................... eliminating the need for a back panel Heat Exchanger......... Configuration Changes in PCS CDMA Minicell Version 4.........

..... It is now called a CDMA Test Module....... • The CRTUm has been combined with the RSP into one unit and moved to the bottom right front corner... center left CRTUm/ RSP front... That configuration................ The following components remain in the same location as the Primary Minicell but the functionality has changed......... The following components have been moved: Equipment Primary Location V2 Enhanced Primary Location V4 CTU Fan front.. top front................ CTU shelf NFI front. bottom left RFTGm front............ • The heat exchanger is now larger. bottom left back center Filters front and side panel front....... coupled with the more powerful Heat Exchanger and the improved cooling air flow eliminates the need for a secondary Heat Exchanger for either HPCTU operation.......... bottom rightt ..... so that only one exchanger is needed for all configurations..... top front........... • The Network Facilities Interface (NFI) has been moved to the back of the Primary Cabinet.................. • Air ducts and fans have been put where the RFTGm was formerly located.......................... 2 .......14 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................ • Receive Filters that were in the Side Panel have been moved and there are now six filters accessible from the front of the primary cabinet........... This leaves clear access to the CTUs for replacement or upgrade to HPCTU.. CTU shelf back. Location Changes • The CTU cooling fan is now in the back of the Primary Cabinet....................................... providing easier access to the bottom part of the front of that cabinet.........PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Configuration Changes in PCS CDMA Minicell Version 4......... or high temperature environments.........

........................................................................................ (76 cm) 30 in.............................................................................. (76 cm) 840 lb.. Parameter Outdoor -Temperature Range -Humidity Range Indoor -Temperature Range Normal Short-term (Not to exceed 3 days at a time and 15 days per year.................................................. Overview Technical specifications covering equipment and environmental requirements are given in the equipment table and the environment table.....PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Cabinet Technical Specifications (Standard Minicell) Cabinet Technical Specifications (Standard Minicell) ......... (76 cm) 30 in............... (76 cm) 500 lb........................................ empty (227 kg) 48/220 AC Input Power Amps/ Volts Environment Table This table covers the technical specifications environmental requirements........................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 .... (79 cm) 30 in............. (382 kg) 60 in.......... (152 cm) 22 in........ (341 kg) 60 in (152 cm) 31 in.. Weight Primary Growth Power 60 in......... Height Width Depth Approx........ (76 cm) 750 lb.................15 ........................... Equipment Table for the Standard Minicell This table displays the technical specifications covering equipment space and weight requirements.............................................................) -Humidity Range Normal Short-term Specification -40° C to +46° C (-40° F to +115° F) 10 percent to 100 percent +5° C to +38° C (+41° F to +100° F) +2° C to +49° C (+36° F to +120° F) 20 percent to 55 percent 10 percent to 80 percent .. (152 cm) 30 in...............................

............................................................................................... The following diagram shows the three signal flows (i......................................................................................................Proprietary Transmit path The following describes the Transmit path process: ...............e................... T1 3 PSU Rx Tx 8 3 C S U M E M N C I C P I C R T U i C R T U m A F I D Packet Pipe Data Link F TDM BUS I R S P ANT CRTU Testing 8 C P U BIU C C C C CC C C CC C U UU U Tx A C U B C R C T U Rx Depending on configuration........................L2V7.............................................. and test) through the Minicell.................................................................................... can be ECUs or TCUs CL3805 .......................................................................................... 2 ............................................................................................................. 1 Digitally encoded signals from the switch (voice and control data) go through a Protector Block.....................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description PCS CDMA Minicell Signal Flows PCS CDMA Minicell Signal Flows ...............................0 04/08/1999 10 Tx Rx Packet Pipe Rx FILTER Tx PCSC PROTECTOR BLOCK CSC1 Tx Rx A I P RU Analog Signal Lucent Technologies .......... control............... Overview PCS CDMA Minicell Flow Diagram The signal flow through a PCS CDMA Minicell has three components: • Traffic (Voice) data: carries communication • Control (Date Link) data: carries signals that manage the cell operation • Test data: enables verification of the good health of the cell....................... .......................................................................................................... traffic................................. .................. 2 Signals are fed to an optioned CSU connecting with the switch..... ..........................................................16 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................................................. 3 Signals go then to a DFI board that interfaces them to the TDM bus...............

401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ................ Upbanded and amplified in the CTU............ The voice data is processed and transmitted.............. Filtered and sent to the antenna through the AIP............................. 5... Acronyms in the Minicell have the following meanings: Analog Conversion Unit Antenna Interface Panel Baseband Combiner Radio CDMA Cluster Controller Cell Site Controller Communication Processing Interface CRTU Interface Channel Service Unit Digital Facilities Interface Network Control Interface Packet Switch Unit Radio Switching Panel Receive AFI ANT BIU CCU CPI CRTU CRTUm CTU MEM PCSC RCC RU Tx Alarm and Fits Interface Antenna Bus Interface Unit CDMA Channel Unit Core Processing Unit CDMA Radio Test Unit CRTU Module CDMA Transmit Unit Memory Unit PCS Switching Center Radio Control Complex ....................................................................... Test data will be covered in more detail in unit 3................................................... 4 Voice Data Control Data Receive path Test data Acronyms ACU AIP BCR CCC CSC CPU CRTUi CSU DFI NCI PSU RSP Rx The signal is split with voice data directed by a CCC in the CRC and the control data sent to the CSC..................... except that the signals go through the RU while bypassing the CTU................... Test data is supported by a CRTUm that feeds test signals emulating a mobile............PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description PCS CDMA Minicell Signal Flows ...........................17 .............. Processed in a CCU for digital baseband signal......... 2..2 CSCs Receive Unit Transmit ......................... Control data is processed in the CPI and sent from the NCI to the other CSC units on the TDM bus.................. 1......... Converted by an ACU from digital encoding to analog.................................... The Receive path is essentially the reverse of the Transmit path... 3.................. Processed by the BCR as an RF signal..... 4.............................

............. item 1................................ The antenna feed..................................................................................... 9 7 65 4 3 8 10 .... enters the back of the Minicell...................... Overview The receive path for the Minicell follows 10 main steps.................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description PCS CDMA Minicell Receive Data Path PCS CDMA Minicell Receive Data Path ................. Note that the antenna connections are at the back of the cell....... Receive Path Diagram The following diagram shows the receive path for the PCS CDMA Minicell..............................................................

1 From Mobile to Switch Antenna Antenna Interface Panel Receive Filter and Receive Unit Baseband Combiner/Radio Analog Converter Unit CDMA Channel Unit CDMA Cluster Controller Digital Facilities Interface Channel Service Unit Protector Block .

..................................................................................................................................................... 2 ................. 4 From the Receive Unit to the Baseband Combiner/Radio ........ 2 From the Antenna Interface Panel to the Receive Filter ......................... 3 From the Receive Filter to the Receive Unit .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................18 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...........................Proprietary Signals from a mobile source are received by the Antenna........ T1 Line to the MSC 2 CL3805 ........................... Their path through the cell is: ...................................................................................... 1 From the Antenna to the Antenna Interface Panel ....................L2V7...................................................................................................................................................................................................................0 04/08/1999 11 n o p q r s t u v w Lucent Technologies ................................

.................PCS CDMA Minicell Receive Data Path PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description ....................................................... 6 From the Analog Converter Unit to the CDMA Channel Unit ......................................... 9 From the Digital Facilities Interface to the Channel Service Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 5 From the Baseband/Combiner/Radio to the Analog Converter Unit ..................................................................................................... 8 From the Cluster Controller to the Digital Facilities Interface ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 11 From the Protector Block to the Switch through the T1 line ................................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 10 From the Channel Service Unit to the Protector Block ...................................................................... 7 From the CDMA Channel Unit to the Cluster Controller ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................19 ....................................................

....... Item 10............................................................................... The antenna feed................................................... comes out the back of the cabinet...................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description PCS CDMA Minicell Transmit Path PCS CDMA Minicell Transmit Path ................... Transmit Path Diagram The follwoing diagram shows the transmit path of the PCS CDMA Minicell.... Overview The transmit path covers 10 main steps and is almost the reverse of the receive path...............................................................................

T1 Line from the MSC 2 4 5 6 7 8 3 9 1 10 From Switch to Mobile n o p q r s t u v w Protector Block Channel Service Unit Digital Facilities Interface CDMA Cluster Controller CDMA Channel Unit Analog Conversion Unit Baseband Combiner/Radio CTU and Transmit Filter Antenna Interface Panel Antenna .

............ Signals from land-based sources are carried to the cell through a T1 line..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4 From a CDMA Cluster Controller to its assigned CDMA Channel Unit .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 3 From the Digital Facilities Interface to the CDMA Cluster Controllers ......................20 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................... 1 From the protector block to the Channel Service Unit ...................................................... Their path through the cell is: ...................................... connected at a protector block................................... 2 From the Channel Service Unit to the Digital Facilities Interface ................................................. 2 ...........................................................................................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................................................... 9 From the Transmit Filter to the Antenna Interface Panel ....................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description PCS CDMA Minicell Transmit Path ..... 7 From the Baseband Combiner/Radio to the CDMA Transmit Unit ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 6 From the Analog Conversion Unit to the Baseband Combiner/Radio ....................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 From the CDMA Transmit Unit to the Transmit Filter ............................................................................... 10 From the Antenna Interface Panel to the Antenna ........................................................................................................................................21 ............................... 5 From the CDMA Channel Unit to the Analog Conversion Unit .......................................................................

..............22 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .........Alarm Control Board • Filter Assembly • Filter Assembly--Simplex Filters • CDMA Radio Complex (CRC) Shelves ............................................................... 2 ..........................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description PCS CDMA Minicell Transmit Path Primary Cabinet Shelf Descriptions Overview Objectives The primary cabinet consists of the following shelves: • CDMA Radio Test Unit • Channel Service Unit • Reference Frequency and Timing Generator • Radio Control Complex Shelf • CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) Shelf • CTU Shelf -..............................................................................................................

........................................... • RSP .................................. The duplexer provides separate RF transmit and receive paths for the single-ported CDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobile... and a 24-V DC to 12-V DC power converter................ an EIA422 to TTL signal converter................ Under the current software release.. the Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP)....... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ............................. a duplexer containing a three-port RF circulator.......... FRONT CRTUm CSU Rb RFTG-m RFTG-m CSC0 CRTUi (Frame 1........................... combiners..... Overview The CDMA Radio Test Unit enables the testing of a Minicell by emulating a mobile unit............ and splitters that provides connectivity to the selected test face....occupies the top shelf in the Primary Radio Cabinet........................ Slot 15) C T U C T U C T U 0 1 2 TFU RFU TFU X0 RTU Switch Panel (RSP) CSC1 A C B CCC2 CCC4 TFU RFU RFU CCC6 P D A CRTU Detailed Description The CDMA Radio Test Unit enables the testing of a Minicell by emulating a mobile unit............... CRTU Diagram The diagram below shows the location of the CRTU components in the PCS CDMA Minicell............................the Radio Switch Panel contains RF switches.......... traffic path and pilot power setting)....................... The CRTU is composed of three major subassemblies: the CDMA Radio Test Unit Module (CRTUm)..... its use is limited to functional tests (overhead channels....................... and the CDMA Radio Test Unit Interface (CRTUi).......................................................................................................... It consists of an IS-95A compliant CDMA/AMPS dual-mode mobile................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description CDMA Radio Test Unit CDMA Radio Test Unit .........23 .................. .................... It is composed of three major subassemblies as follows: • CRTUm ......................

....................................The CRTUi is a plug-in board installed in the CSC1.......24 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................. 2 . the CRTUi carries out the specified actions and returns the test information to the RCC........... that provides a transparent communications interface between the Radio Control Complex (RCC) and the CRTUm..... Their meanings are as follows: • • • The RED LED is: – Controlled by the CRTUi – Lighted during the self-test initiated upon power-up or after a reset and goes off after successful completion of the self-test – Lighted during normal operation if the CRTUi has a board error or is insane The YELLOW LED is: – Controlled by cell site system software – Lighted during non-volatile memory (NVM) update The GREEN LED is: – Controlled by the CRTUi – Lighted when a CDMA functional test is executing The term CRTU will be used in this document to refer to both components except when it is necessary to distinguish between the CRTUi and CRTUm............... In response to functional test messages from the RCC... one yellow.... The CRTUi contains the firmware needed to run the CDMA functional tests............ one red.... The message exchange is through TDM bus 0................................... and between the RCC and the RSP....................................... The CRTUi faceplate has three light-emitting diode(LED) indicators................ .........PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description CDMA Radio Test Unit • CRTUi Functional Description CRTUi Faceplate Description CRTUi ............. and one green......................................

................... that has been programmed to respond to specific signals from the PCSC..........................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description CDMA Radio Test Unit Module CDMA Radio Test Unit Module . instructs the CRTUm to perform individual CDMA functional tests....................25 .................................... In all cases.............................................................. The CRTUm communicates with the CRTUi through an EIA-422 asynchronous data link........................ More about the CRTU The CRTUm is a full-featured wireless terminal.......................................... ............................ can be ECUs or TCUs CRTUm Functions RU Analog Signal The CRTUm has RF connections to the directional couplers of the transmit and receive filter panels............ The CRTU can be invoked through the RCC either on schedule................. or manually... the RCC instructs the CRTU to dial a specific MOST (Mobile Operating System Test) number stored at the PCSC................... Overview CRTUm Position in the Signal Flow The CRTUm is connected to the directional couplers of the transmit and receive filter panels through the Radio Test Unit Switch Panel............................................... under the direction of the RCC... The diagram below shows the CRTUm position in the Minicell signal flow.................... CSC1 T1 PSU 3 Rx Tx 8 C S U C R T U i C P I A F I C R T U m R S P ANT CRTU Testing PCSC 8 M N E C M I Packet Pipe D Data Link F I BIU TDM BUS 3 Tx Rx Packet Pipe Rx C C C Tx C CC C C CC C U UU U A C U B C R C T U Tx FILTER Tx PROTECTOR BLOCK C P U A I P Rx Rx Depending on configuration............................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ............. automatically.................... The ECP at the PCSC identifies the MOST call and initiates Functional Tests.................... The CRTUi or RCC can turn off the CRTUm by disabling power to the CRTUm............... It is over this data link that the CRTUi.......... and over which the CRTUi and RCC collect the test results......................................

..... but does not go back to the Switch................... 2 ..........................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description CDMA Radio Test Unit Module The RCC can trigger any one of several MOST test functions including forced handoff..................) In the Overhead Channel Functional Test.... .................................................. the signal goes back to the ECP.................................................... (The term “forced handoff” means to change to another Channel Element...........26 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........................................ the signal is recognized by the CCC.......... the signals are used to check the Access Channel............ In the Traffic Path Functional Test........ Version 4 Minicell In version 4 of the minicell the RSP is combined with the CRTUm.......

.....................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP) Radio Test Unit Switch Panel (RSP) ......................................................................... the RSP is located directly under the CRTUm shelf...... The combiner is attached directly to the rear of the RSP.............................................................................. In the Version 4 Minicell...................... Overview The RSP connects the CDMA Radio Test Unit Module (CRTUm) and the PCS Receive and Transmit chains for functional and diagnostic tests.............................. CSC1 T1 PSU 3 Rx Tx 8 3 C S U C R T U i C P I A F I C R T U m R S P ANT CRTU Testing 8 M N E C M I Packet Pipe D Data Link F I TDM BIU BUS Tx Rx Packet Pipe Rx C C C Tx C CC C C CC C U UU U A C U B C R C T U FILTERT Tx PCSC PROTECTOR BLOCK C P U x A I P Rx Rx Depending on configuration................................... The RSP combiner performs this function.......................................... RSP Combiner Minicells with more than one CDMA carrier require combining RF signals from the primary and growth transmit carriers................. can be ECUs or TCUs RU Analog Signal Function The CRTUm transmit output power is fed to the PCS receive chain dual directional couplers...... Physical Location In the Version 2 Minicell................ The coupled transmit output ports of the PCS TX chain is fed to the CRTUm receive input port........................................... .......................................27 .................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 .................. the RSP is in the same circuit pack as the CRTUm........ RSP Position in the Signal Flow The diagram below shows the RSP position in the Minicell signal flow........ Omni and three sector Minicell configurations use different combiners.......................................

.............................................. RSP Connections Diagram The diagram below shows the RSP................28 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Radio Switch Panel Connections Radio Switch Panel Connections .0 4/08/1999 16 Operation RSP Connections J29 9-pin (Unused) J4 RX Test Monitor Removable microprocessor board with lightning arrestors Lucent Technologies .....................................................................................................................................................25 to 30V) J3 TX Test Monitor Power Switch CL3805 ........................ RF Ports to and from dual directional couplers Tx J16 J10 J12 J14 J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J11 J13 J15 Rx J17 J18 J20 J22 J24 J26 J28 J19 J21 J23 J25 J27 J1 to CRTUm Rx J2 from CRTUm Tx J30 15-pin (14...... The RSP contains a microcontroller board............................Proprietary The RSP is controlled by the CRTUi via an RS422 control bus.................................................................................................................... 2 ............................. and SP6T and SP12T RF switches.................... 1-carrier configuration.............................. The table shows the RSP connections for 3-sector....................... RSP Port WH1 WH1 Cable # Filter Assy Cable # Out of Location Into RSP Coupler Coupler Port Carrier Tx Sector Rx Sector / Diversity Forward -50 dB Reflected -40 dB J5 P1 P28 A1 J6 C1 Tx 1 Fwd -50 J6 P2 P48 A13 J6 C2 Tx 1 J7 P3 P27 A1 J5 C1 Tx 1 J8 P4 P47 A13 J5 C2 Tx 1 J9 P5 P30 A2 J6 C1 Tx 2 * Fwd -50 Ref -40 * Ref -40 Fwd -50 .................L2V7......

...... for which space is provided at the top of the cabinet......... .. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 .............................................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Channel Service Unit (Optional) Forward -50 dB Reflected -40 dB RSP Port WH1 WH1 Cable # Filter Assy Cable # Out of Location Into RSP Coupler Coupler Port Carrier Tx Sector Rx Sector / Diversity J10 P6 P43 A15 J6 C2 Tx 2 J11 P7 P29 A2 J5 C1 Tx 2 J12 P8 P44 A15 J5 C2 Tx 2 J13 P9 P33 A3 J6 C1 Tx 3 J14 P10 P40 A17 J6 C2 Tx 3 J15 P11 P34 A3 J5 C1 Tx 3 J16 P12 P39 A17 J5 C2 Tx 3 J17 P13 P25 A1 J4 Rx 1 / D0 Fwd -50 J18 P14 P26 A1 J3 Rx 1 / D0 Ref -40 J19 P15 P46 A13 J4 Rx 1 / D1 Fwd -50 J20 P16 P45 A13 J3 Rx 1 / D1 Ref -40 J21 P17 P32 A2 J4 Rx 2 / D0 Fwd -50 J22 P18 P31 A2 J3 Rx 2 / D0 Ref -40 J23 P19 P41 A15 J4 Rx 2 / D1 Fwd -50 J24 P20 P42 A15 J3 Rx 2 / D1 Ref -40 J25 P21 P35 A3 J4 Rx 3 / D0 Fwd -50 J26 P22 P36 A3 J3 Rx 3 / D0 Ref -40 J27 P23 P37 A17 J4 Rx 3 / D1 Fwd -50 J28 P24 P38 A17 J3 Rx 3 / D1 Ref -40 * Fwd -50 Ref -40 * Fwd -40 Fwd -50 * Fwd -50 Ref -40 * Ref -40 Channel Service Unit (Optional) ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... OverviewOverview The Channel Service Unit (CSU) is an optional component and shelf...................29 ........................................................................................................................................................

.. The SIU is located in slot 0..... Each T1 line is a four-wire connection...... CSU Features The following describes the Kentrox CSU................ • The CSU shelf receives DC power via a +24 V feeder pair................... 2 ... .................... primary cabinet first T1 line in slot 2.........................................................30 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..................... growth I cabinet T1 line in slot 1.............................. • Each CSU handles only one T1 line...... • The SIU provides the interface between the CSU and the operator’s control terminal or the automated Network Management System (NMS)... A I P x Rx Rx Depending on configuration... • Lucent’s CSU shelf is designed as a four-slot shelf with up to three CSUs and one shelf interface unit (SIU). the major role of which is to help in troubleshooting by enabling loop-backs between cell and switch.PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Channel Service Unit (Optional) CSU Position in the Minicell Signal Flow Growth I Primary Cabinet Growth II CSC1 PCSC 8 T1 PSU 3 Rx Tx 8 C S U M E M N C I C R T U i C P I A F I C R T U m R S P ANT CRTU Testing Tx PROTECTOR BLOCK C P U Packet Pipe D Data Link F I BIU TDM BUS 3 Tx Rx Packet Pipe Rx C C C Tx C CC C C CC C U UU U A C U B C R C T U FILTERT SIU The diagram below shows the position of the CSU in the Minicell and the Minicell signal flow. can be ECUs or TCUs RU Analog Signal CSU Function The CSU provides T1 or E1 interface to the primary cabinet.......................... • The CSU shelf terminal and network connections are via separate 15-pin female connectors on the back of the CSU shelf................... one of the CSUs used with the Lucent PCS CDMA Minicell. It is a network interface.................. and T1 line interface for growth II cabinet in slot 3............

........PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Channel Service Unit (Optional) CSU Connections CSU Option By-passing the CSU The CSUs connect to the digital facilities interfaces (DFIs) in the CDMA Radio Complex Shelf 2 to provide the T1 or E1 signals..... such as having the CSU mounted on a wall adjacent to the cell..................... Reference Find more information in the Kentrox Documentation.................................31 ... or adopted alternate configurations. it is possible to maintain service by bypassing the device altogether........ ........................ Remove the plugs from the back of the unit and connect the lines together............................. the CSU can be bypassed.. The bus connections are described on page 3-8............... If the DFI board options are set the same as the network side of the CSU.......... • The T1 (network) side of the interface will be connected to a T1 terminal lightning protection block. • The terminal side of the CSU is connected to the DFI.... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ..... some customers have selected other brands..... This can be ordered from the CIC......... In case of failure of the CSU.......................................... The lines are gendered correctly to allow this connection......... This description is for a “standard” CSU.................. which is also used to lightning protect external user alarms......... Because the device is an optioned item......... The DFI is selectable for either a T1 or E1...

............................ a crystal controlled oscillator with a Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver (the GPS receiver is located inside the crystal controlled unit) • GPS antenna interface • RF circuits for receiving GPS signals............................... Overview The Reference Frequency and Timing Generator for the Minicell (RFTG-m) provides the reference frequency and timing source for the Minicell....PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Reference Frequency and Timing Generator Reference Frequency and Timing Generator ............................................ and the synchronized clock-and-tone (SCT) units on the CRC0 and CRC1 ......... Only one unit is active at a time and during normal operation the rubidium unit: • Is active • Provides a 1-pulse-per-second (1 PPS) timing signal which is synchronized to the receive signal from the GPS satellite through an antenna • Provides a 15-MHz reference frequency for all receiver units (RUs)... CDMA Transmit Units (CTUs).................................................................................................. baseband combiner/radio (BCR) assemblies............................... a rubidium (Rb) oscillator • Side 1............................ 2 ..................................... Version 2 Description Normal Operation Version 4 The RFTGm consists of the following: • Side 0........................................................................................................................................................32 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................... RFTG Position in the Minicell The diagram below shows the RFTG position in the Minicell cabinet.............................

............ RFTG Testing Program SDP Other Information About the need for GPS The RFTG testing program can be ordered from the CIC.... the Minicell goes into a “flywheel” mode.............................. The crystal oscillator also provides the 5 V DC power required by the GPS receiver... This is explained in more detail in Lucent 401-660-128........ A combination of errors from the RFTG units............... There is an icon on the Status Display Page 2138 to warn of a possible synchronization problem. and the CCC are used to display MINOR............. The order includes the program. MAJOR........ The RFTG-m requires GPS updating once per 24-hour period............ The RFTG-m requires GPS updating once per 24hour period.......... An RS-485 data cable provides RFTG signals to the growth cabinets............ see Lucent 401-660-128....... SCT board.. For more information on the GPS.....33 ... The RFTG-m provides a 1-PPS signal output which is synchronized to the GPS time clock.......Reference Frequency and Timing Generator Backup Operation RFTG-m Specifications PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description The crystal controlled unit gets activated by an automatic failure triggered sequence when the rubidium unit experiences failure......... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ... or CRITICAL Cell_Sync Status........... and cables.......... manual..... A minimum of +22 V DC is required during a 5 minute warm-up period........................ This icon is labeled “Cell_Sync”... . In the absence of GPS signal........ where the Minicell continues to operate for up to 24 hours on the rubidium oscillator.2. The maximum loss of the GPS antenna cable can be 10 dB without the need for an additional external antenna mounted amplifier.0 +/...............................0) dBm...... The RFTG-m operates over an input voltage range of +19 to +32 V DC......... or up to 4 hours on the crystal unit.... The rubidium and crystal controlled reference signal output level is (+17.....

...... The radio control complex (RCC) shelf is fully redundant with independent power circuits for each side of the controller for the primary frame.................... The stand-by side tracks what the online side is doing so that it may come online as needed.......... one is active while the other is on stand-by................. CSC1 T1 PSU 3 Rx Tx 8 C S U N C I C R T U i C P I A F I C R T U m R S P ANT CRTU Testing PCSC 8 M E M Packet Pipe D Data Link F I BIU TDM BUS 3 Tx Rx Packet Pipe Rx C C C Tx C CC C C CC C U UU U A C U B C R C T U Tx FILTER Tx PROTECTOR BLOCK C P U A I P Rx Rx Depending on configuration.................................... The RCC shelf is comprised of two Cell Site Controllers (CSC)..................... can be ECUs or TCUs RCC Description RCC Components RU Analog Signal The controller is equipped with two identical sides............................................ ..................................... Each CSC consists of the following circuit packs: • Core Processor Unit (CPU) • 8 Meg Memory (MEM) • Network Control Interface (NCI) • Communications Processor Interface (CPI) • Alarm and Fits Interface (AFI) • 415AC 5V DC Power Conversion Unit (PCU)............ The diagram below shows the RCC position in the Minicell and signal flows............................ Only one side is online at a time...................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Radio Control Complex Shelf Radio Control Complex Shelf ......................... The active side receives/sends control and data information from/to the PCSC and other cell site components.........34 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....................................................................................... Overview RCC Diagram The Radio Control Complex controls the minicell and contains two CSCs for redundancy...................................................... 2 ...........................................

......................... MEM board.... one is active while the other is on stand-by.......................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Radio Control Complex Shelf Description Radio Control Complex Shelf Description ....................................................................................................35 .................................................... The stand-by side tracks what the on-line side is doing so that it may come on-line as needed....................... The active side receives/sends control and data information from/to the PCSC and other cell site components................................. Acronyms Acronyms in the table below are used for the boards of the RCC shelf................... Overview RCC Shelf Diagram +5V 4 1 5 A C Shelf components are referenced by their slot number and the position of their connection pins in the backplane........................................... Only one side is on-line at a time............................................................ and the CPI board............................................. 2 D 1D 0D A F I C P I N M C E I M 4D 5D 6D C P U 0 C P U 1 C M N C R E C P T M I I U i CSC0 +5V A F I 4 1 5 A C CSC1 Operation The controller is equipped with two identical sides.................. ..................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ........... NCI board.............. The diagram below shows the board positions on the RCC shelf...... Core Processor Unit CSC Cell Site Controller CPI Communications Processor Interface CPU Core Processor Unit NCI Network Control Interface AFI Alarm FITS Interface MEM Memory The core processor controls the cell site controller which is made up of the alarm/FITS board.....

......... Alarm/FITS Interface The Alarm and Factory Installation Test Set (FITS) Interface circuit pack provide the interface required to store/process cell site alarms and to send alarm status to the MSC via the Core Processor Unit (CPU)......... full duplex...... independent data links that implement the X............ Besides being the mediator of the CPU. In this arrangement... 2 .. In addition.. the CPU uses the system bus to communicate with the other circuit boards on the same side........... this mode allows an immediate transfer of control from the active CPU to the mate with a minimum loss of control information............... The FITS provides a number of diagnostic tests used to initially check out the Minicell after installation by Lucent Technologies............................ which provides independent operation on a per-pack level....... while the CPU in the other side (the mate) is kept in a stand-by state... The NCI functions as a full-duplex message switch (Archangel function) between the CPU and the microprocessors (Angels) in the port boards.................... the circuit pack contains the circuitry necessary to interface the FITS to the cell site.....25 protocol..... The NCI interfaces with the CPU through a 512-byte System Dual-Port Memory.. It contains a memory array which includes a 32-bit data array with one parity bit for every eight bits of data........ Communication Processor Interface The CPI board is part of the core processor complex........ 8-Megabyte Memory One memory board is used with each side of the controller..............36 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............... Network Control Interface (NCI) The NCI provides synchronization of control channel messages between the CPU and the distributed network of port circuit packs that are connected to the TDM bus...... The CPI is a multiprocessor circuit pack that provides the data connectivity between the controller and any of the other terminating entities in the cellular system......... ....... the CPU in one side (active side) is always in control of the call processing..... In the event of a failure in the active side of the controller.......... This arrangement comprises a duplex controller that provides reliability through redundancy...... On each side of the controller.. The memory circuit pack has a storage capacity of 8 Mb...... The CPI manages two point-to-point programmable..... the NCI monitors the sanity of all the microprocessors and reports any changes it detects to the CPU...Radio Control Complex Shelf Description PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Each side of the controller uses one core processor board.... The memory and interrupt control logic-write-protect and parity error latching functions are contained in each circuit pack... and its memory is continually being updated via the update bus................................

........................................91-to 1.................................................................. used in the primary frame • Power Conversion Unit (2).................................................. CSC1 T1 PSU 3 Rx Tx 8 C S U C R T U i C P I A F I C R T U m R S P ANT CRTU Testing 8 M N E C M I Packet Pipe D Data Link F I BIU TDM BUS 3 Tx Rx Packet Pipe Rx C C C Tx C CC C C CC C U UU U A C U B C R C T U FILTERT Tx PCSC PROTECTOR BLOCK C P U x A I P Rx Rx Depending on configuration.............................................................................................99 GHz) and to amplify the signal to an eight or 16 Watt level • Alarm Control Board (1)................. which houses circuitry to convert the cellular band frequencies (800-MHz range) to PCS frequency bands (1.......37 ............................................................................................................................................................ can be ECUs or TCUs Components CDMA Transmit Unit Description RU Analog Signal The CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) shelf contains the following circuit packs: • CDMA Transmit Unit Assembly (three total in the primary cabinet).........PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) Shelf CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) Shelf ............... used only in the primary frame (the +24 V DC is input from the frame and +15 V DC is output to the Receive Units via the ACB) • Alarm light on each CTU (these lights are difficult to see with the fan in place) The CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) consists of: • The transmit upconverter— a fiberglass circuit board with a sheet metal shield that takes the +24 V DC power and returns from the backplane and feeds them to the transmit amplifier • The transmit amplifier — a cast aluminum housing/heat sink provided with cavities for shielding between circuit boards ............... CTU Position Diagram The diagram below shows the CTU position in the Minicell and signal flow............ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 .................................

...... HPCTUs will draw more power than CTUs... and..... .... Cooling Cooling for HPCTUs is provided by fans in the front of the radio cabinet..38 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .............. However.. No CTUs with HPCTUs in the Same Cell Site Swap-Out Rules Because all amplifiers in a single shelf and in a single sector must be of the same amplifier type......... If output power is set in translation to eight W instead of 16 W...... High Power CTU (HPCTU) The HPCTU is designed to provide 16 W output and may be useful to compensate for the use of dual pole antennas....... HPCTUs and CTUs cannot coexist in a cell site..... To install HPCTUs in a radio cabinet..................................... ensure that the output power set in translation has been changed to 16 W before bringing the Minicell back into service................... 2 .. Two lateral connectors provide interconnections with the TX upconverter section........ Each Minicell primary frame contains only one CTU backplane.......... the HPCTUs are bigger than the CTUs..........................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) Shelf The upconverter and the amplifier sections connect together to form a circuit pack which slides into the CTU card cage.......... it will be necessary to: • Remove the cooling fan • Remove the card cage • Use the HPCTU mounting bracket to install that unit directly in the cabinet • Replace the cooling fan.................................. if necessary.... A CTU shelf can accommodate up to 3 HPCTUs...... When replacing CTUs by HPCTUs............... Enhanced Primary Minicell On the Enhanced Minicell the cooling fan is in the back of the CTU shelf..... by a heat exchanger mounted on the radio cabinet back panel......... or to overcome intermodulation problems caused by nearby TDMA cell sites.... A frame cooling fan is located in front of the CTU card cage for cooling purposes.......

........................ Overview CTU Shelf Diagram The Transmit Unit Boards (CTUs or HPCTUs) are mounted within an overall cage............................................39 ..................................................................................... The AFI can send out up to 32 unique polling requests in approximately a two-second period of time.......................................... Alarm Control Board The Alarm Control Board (ACB) monitors the alarms from the Minicell frame PCS components and reports the alarm status to the AFI board located within the Radio Control Complex (RCC)................... The CTUs are mounted into individual frames within that cage..................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ........... The settings of these switches are used to set the CTU and RU filters........................... The LAC alarm is used for reporting any CDMA transmit unit (CTU) and/or receive unit (RU) failures.... .............. Connection to a duplex filter uses the original RX1/G antenna as its TX/G antenna. CTU Fan is in the back of the Cabinet ALM STBY ACT ALM 1 ALM 2 ALM 3 ALM 4 ALM 5 ALM 6 ALM RU AMP RST Power Conversion Units Growth Frame CTU Filter Connections The Growth Frame CTU can be connected to either a simplex or duplex filter unit................... The diagram below shows the components on the CTU shelf..............................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description CTU Assembly Description CTU Assembly Description .................... The thicker HPCTUs are directly mounted on that cage...................... at which time it reports both amplifier alarms (LAC alarms) and frame alarm status information to the AFI... ACB and Frequency Assignment The ACB also contains switches that determine the frequency Receive and Transmit bands used by the Minicell.. The ACB continuously scans and analyzes the alarms in its equipment sector until it is interrupted by AFI polling..... a frame alarm reports power converter unit (PCU) failures in the CTU shelf.... Alarm Control Board (ACB) CTU 0/1/2 Fan* (Version 2 Only) *In Version 4............................................. thus not requiring additional antennas................

.............. Filter Assembly Diagram The diagram below shows the position of the filters in the Minicell cabinet and the signal flow.................85-to 1...................................................... For duplex configuration........................................... ....... Up to three sets of filters (transmit and receive diversity 0 and diversity 1) are installed: • Inside the primary cabinet • On the left side of the primary cabinet for receive diversity 1..............................40 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ......... can be ECUs or TCUs Duplex and Simplex Filters RU Analog Signal The Primary Radio Cabinet can be fitted with either duplex or simplex filters........................................... 2 ....................................................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Front Filter Assembly Front Filter Assembly .............................................................................................. Each receive filter contains a receiver unit (RU) which amplifies a received signal and converts it from the PCS band (1............................................................ There is a view of the side panel filters on page 2-57....................91GHz) to the cellular band (850-MHz frequency)......... the Transmit Filter Unit (TFU) and the Receive Filter Diversity 0 Unit (RFU) will be replaced by the Duplex Filter Unit (DFU)......... CSC1 T1 PSU 3 Rx Tx 8 C S U N C I C R T U i C P I A F I C R T U m R S P ANT CRTU Testing 8 M E M Packet Pipe D Data Link F I BIU TDM BUS 3 Tx Rx Packet Pipe Rx C C C Tx C CC C C CC C U UU U A C U B C R C T U FILTERT Tx PCSC PROTECTOR BLOCK C P U x A I P Rx Rx Depending on configuration......

........................ Interfaces the primary frame to........ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 .....41 ............................................................. TFU The transmit antenna in the simplex operation Four coaxial connections to the TFU input signal: • • • RFU Div0 DFU (Combined TFU and RFU Div0) Input from CTU Antenna connection Two test path signals The receive antenna in the simplex mode Four coaxial connections: Antenna Eight coaxial connections: • • • • • • • • Receive signal Antenna connection Two test path signals 15-MHz Reference Signal Transmit signal Antenna interface Receive signal Four test path signals Enhanced Primary inicell The PCS CDMA Enhanced Primary Minicell has all 6 filters in the front....PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Front Filter Assembly Filters / RU Shelf Interfaces and Connections The following table shows the interfaces and connections to the different types of filter units............. Is connected to the Filter/RU and has........................................ The Tower Top Low Noise Amplifier (TTLNA) portion of the REO requires new filter types to account for the Masthead Amplifier Unit (MAU)................ Range Extension Option (REO) The REO means there are two filter types for replacement purposes............ ........................................................................ Filter Unit............

........ ..................................................... interfacing the primary cabinet to the transmit antenna • An RFU....... Simplex Filters Diagram The diagram below shows the components of the simplex filters................................................ interfacing the primary cabinet to the receive antenna • An RU.......................................... 2 .............................. D-subminiature connector is used for connecting regulated +15 V DC power and alarm signals.................................................. Receive Unit (RU) Transmit Filter Unit (TFU) Receive Filter Unit (RFU) L3805 L2V7 0 Simplex Configuration Simplex Filter Connections The simplex configuration includes: • A TFU.............................. that provides amplification and down conversion of the received signal There are three coaxial connections to the RU assembly: • Input PCS signal • Output cellular band signal • 15-MHZ reference signal A 9-pin.............................................................................................................................................................42 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Filter Assembly--Simplex Filters Filter Assembly--Simplex Filters ..................................

........................ Has DC-DC converter to supply voltages other than digital +5 volts needed by the ACU.................................................... .................................... can be ECUs or TCUs Description RU Analog Signal Each shelf supports up to four CDMA Channel Units (CCUs) forming one cluster................... On shelf CRC2................................................................. EVENSEC TIC and bus clocks.......... GPS time of day.. shelves CRC0 and CRC1 have Synchronized Clock and Tone (SCT) circuit packs to generate the 19...................................................... The BIU contains the TDM bus interface to support the BBA trio...........................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description CDMA Radio Complex (CRC) Shelves CDMA Radio Complex (CRC) Shelves ...........43 ...6608 MHz................................................................................. Overview CRC Shelf Position Diagram A PCS CDMA Minicell Primary cabinet contains three CDMA Radio Complex (CRC) shelves arranged in a cross-connected configuration....................... which is supported by a CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC).... In addition to the CCC and CCU........... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ................. BIU.... and BCR....................... the Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) circuit pack is put in place of the SCT board........... CSC1 T1 PSU 3 Rx Tx 8 3 C S U C R T U i C P I A F I C R T U m R S P ANT CRTU Testing PCSC 8 M N E C M I Packet Pipe D Data Link F I TDM BIU BUS Tx Rx Packet Pipe Rx C C C Tx C CC C C CC C U UU U A C U B C R C T U Tx FILTER Tx PROTECTOR BLOCK C P U A I P Rx Rx Depending on configuration.......... each shelf contains: • One analog conversion unit (ACU) • One baseband combiner/radio unit (BCR) • One bus interface unit (BIU) • One 415 AC converter In addition............. The diagram below shows the position of the CRC shelf in the Minicell cabinet and the signal flow.......................

............ are distributed to the three CRC shelves’ ACU.. The +5 V DC output gets distributed to the CDMA circuit packs. the Cluster bus clocks...............................6608-MHz primary and delayed clock signals.. BCR and Operating Frequency Frequency Distribution 15 MHz Reference Frequency The Channel Number................................................... determines the frequency at which the BCR operates........ the GPS time-of-day clock.......... the TDM bus..... as well as by the BCR in each CRC.............................. and other control signals.......................... There is no 15-MHz reference input to shelf 2....... The 19..... set in translation.. 2 ...........................44 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ......... ......... except for the BCR. which are generated on the SCT circuit pack.................CDMA Radio Complex (CRC) Shelves PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description The 415 AC converter makes the conversion of the +24 V DC feeder voltage to +5 V DC.6608MHz clocks.. The 15-MHz reference frequency is separately received by each SCT on the CRC shelves 0 and 1............. Backplane Signal Terminations The CRC backplane also supports the terminations for the 19.

. it is possible to have configurations where Clusters are not assigned to a Packet Pipe so that their CEs can be shared resources (overhead channels) in a subcell.... Slot # Shelf 0 Slot # Shelf 1 Slot # Shelf 2 Clusters and Cluster Controllers 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 C C C C C U 1 C C U 2 C C U 3 4 C C U 4 B I U A C U B C R S C T 4 1 5 AC P3 EQL 016 P4 EQL 022 P5 EQL 025 P6 EQL 034 P7 EQL 040 P8 EQL 046 P10 EQL 052 P11 EQL 062 P13 EQL 072 P19 EQL 080 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 C C C C C U 1 C C U 2 C C U 3 4 C C U 4 B I U A C U B C R S C T 4 1 5 AC P3 EQL 016 P4 EQL 022 P5 EQL 025 P6 EQL 034 P7 EQL 040 P8 EQL 046 P10 EQL 052 P11 EQL 062 P13 EQL 072 P19 EQL 080 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 10 C C C C C U 1 C C U 2 C C U 3 4 C C U 4 B I U A C U B C R D F I 4 1 5 AC P3 EQL 016 P4 EQL 022 P5 EQL 025 P6 EQL 034 P7 EQL 040 P8 EQL 046 P10 EQL 052 P11 EQL 062 P13 EQL 072 P19 EQL 080 Clusters are logically associated groups of CEs associated to a single Packet Pipe....................45 ........... and provides greater efficiency....... The maximum number of ECUs is currently set at 4 to provide 40 CEs........... The remaining 10 CEs may be used for overhead channels.. but only 30 of those may be used for traffic channels.......................... allowing fewer CEs to be equipped to support a given communication load.................... but there can be a mixture of TCU and ECU shelves......................................... The ECU may be used within a CDMA cluster in exactly the same manner as the TCU............................................................. While there can be only one Packet Pipe per CCC...................... ........ leaving 4 unallocated CEs for redundancy............................................... Mixing TCUs and ECUs in a Minicell This ability to mix shelves provides flexibility in growing the capacity of a Minicell........................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ...................... A CCC is a circuit pack that controls one cluster....................................... (A 3-sector configuration requires 6 overhead channels...............) The Subcell concept enables softer handoff............................................................ A Cluster must be homogeneous with respect to the type of CCU that can be equipped on a given shelf..................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description CRC Shelf Details CRC Shelf Details .............................. CRC Shelf Diagram The diagram shows the board for the three CRC shelves..

................................................................ ............................... The designations for the ECUs are TN 1711................... that are functionally the same............................................... The various ECU circuit packs can be mixed and matched on the shelves or in the cabinet..............PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description CRC Shelf Details ECU Board Numbers There are going to be three (3) types of ECUs (Enhanced Channel Units)....46 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................. 2 ......................................... TN 1716 (available December 1998).. and TN 1718 (available in 1999)........

.. ECU Capacity Each ECU contains 10 CEs............................ a fully loaded CDMA cluster contains 8 CEs......... CRC Shelf Boards CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) Board TN1852 The boards on the CRC Shelf are as follows: CCC CDMA Cluster Controller BCR Baseband Combiner and Radio ACU Analog Conversion Unit BIU Bus Interface Unit CCU CDMA Channel Unit (TCU or ECU) DFI Digital Facilities Interface SCT CDMA Synchronized Clock and Tone 415AC Power Converter Unit The CCC provides a control and data interface between the TDM bus and up to four 13-kbps CDMA channel units (CCUs)............................................................................................. assembles the data into packets. thus... the CCC receives voice data from its CCUs................................................ ......................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ................................................................... In the reverse direction.................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description CRC Shelf Descriptions CRC Shelf Descriptions ...........................47 ........................... including spreading and despreading....... TCU Capacity Each TCU contains two CEs................ A CCC and its CCUs form a CDMA cluster..... and then multiplexes the packets onto the packet pipe...................... CDMA Channel Unit (TCU/ ECU) The TCU/ECU performs the digital baseband signal processing........ The CCC manages the CCUs..................... there is one cluster per shelf........ The CCC extracts the voice data from the incoming packets and distributes the data to the appropriate CCUs for processing...... thus a fully loaded CDMA cluster contains 40 CEs................. Each CCC terminates the dedicated packet pipe associated with its CDMA cluster...................... Each CE is configured to interface with a 13-kbps vocoder and can support 8-kbps as well.............................................

... ...... The ACU uses the +5 V DC and -5............ CDMA Baseband Combiner/Radio (BCR) 44WR1 CDMA Synchronized Clock and Tone (SCT) Unit TN1703 Digital Facilities Interface (DFI) Board TN3500B Power Converter 415AC Board (+5 V) The BCR accepts analog signals from and sends analog signals to its associated ACU. and +12 V DC......2 V DC...48 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................. and maintenance tone detection.. -5.... The DFI provides serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial data conversion between the T1 or E1 lines and the TDM buses internal to the Minicell...............PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description CRC Shelf Descriptions Vocoder Rates For earlier releases an entire Cellular Geographic Service Area (CGSA) must operate at the same vocoder rate...... the ACU converts the analog receive signals from the BCR to digital and then distributes the digital signals to the cluster...... Current software supports only one T1/E1 line interface port......................... In the reverse direction......... CDMA Bus Interface Unit (BIU) TN1702 The BIU provides a control bus interface between the TDM bus and its associated ACU and BCR................. The SCT generates the CDMA clock signals for the Minicell.... maintenance tone generation............................... the mixing of 13-kbps and 8-kbps vocoders in a CGSA is not supported in the early release of CDMA......... 2 ............... The BCR is responsible for RF transmission and reception........... It also provides power conversion for its associated ACU and BCR as explained below......... Analog Conversion Unit (ACU) TN1853 The ACU combines the digital transmit signals from the cluster and then converts the signals to analog for input to the BCR....... The BIU has an on-board converter circuit that converts +24 V DC to a precise +5 V DC............. The SCT performs the following TDM bus functions: bus clock generation and monitoring for the TDM bus.....2 V DC............... while the BCR uses all three voltages.. This is the same unit used with each side of the RCC and has the following features: • output current rating of 43 amperes • built-in programmable over-current protection circuit Each circuit board that is plugged into the power plane has a programmable resistor that corresponds to the current drawn by the board...........

.. supports only one T1/E1 line.......................................................... The TN3500B supports two T1/E1 lines although the system supports only one. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ......................................................................................................................49 ..................................................................................................................... 1 3 OFF OFF ON SW 1 ON 2 ON ON SW 6 OFF SW 4 OFF ON SW 2 ON OFF SW 3 Function DFI Functionality OFF SW 5 1 2 3 ON OFF SW 7 The DFI provides the interface between the TDM bus and the CSU................................ One DFI can be accommodated in the primary frame......... TN1713B.................... The DFI is located in shelf 2 (lowest shelf) of the CRC..................................... The Minicell platform uses TDM timeslots to “nail up” the logical connection between a packet pipe on the T1 or E1 line and the associated CDMA cluster........................... The newer DFI board........................... ..................................................... DFI Board Diagram The diagram below shows the switches on the DFI board for a T1 line....PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Digital Facilities Interface Board Digital Facilities Interface Board ..........

. .......................................................................................................................................................................................50 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Frame Pedestal Frame Pedestal ............................................... the Frame Pedestal contains interface panels that connect the Primary Radio Cabinet to signals and power sources.......................................................................................................................................... the Frame Pedestal also contains the combined CRTU and RSP.................................................... 2 ......... Frame Pedestal Diagram This diagram below shows the positions of the components near the bottom of the Minicell................................. In Version 4................. Composed of – Circuit Breaker Panel – Alarm Interface Panel – Side Interface Panel – Rear Interface Assembly L2V7 0 Description In Minicell Version 2............

.............. Be careful not to touch them inadvertently when working around them...... CB17 3....PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Circuit Breaker Panel Circuit Breaker Panel ................................................. the prescribed sequence is CB1 to CB20.......... Circuit Breaker Diagram Function The circuit breaker panel diagram: The circuit breaker panel distributes the DC and AC power in the frame........................................................ the remaining circuit breakers from CB1 to CB14 (except CB6 & 7) To power the radio cabinet back up.......... ................ Some of the breakers are easy to trip.................... CB15 4..................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 .............. the prescribed sequence is to turn off all the BCR faceplate switches.................................................................................................... then turn off the circuit breakers in the following order: 1.................................................... CB16 7. CB20 5.............................. CB18 6...... If it becomes necessary to power down one of the radio cabinets................. Service Interruption There is a chance of unnecessarily powering down equipment causing service interruptions................................ CB19 2.................... and then the BCR faceplate switches...........................................51 .

.....PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Circuit Breaker Panel Whenever it is necessary to turn the power off on a radio cabinet............................................................................. it will be necessary to wait at least 15 minutes after power has been restored before the RFTGs can be put back into service.................... Circuit Breaker Description Reference For more information on the circuit breaker see page 3-14..................................................52 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................................................... .. 2 .......................

.................. of which eight are available for customer assignment to equipment external to the cell..................................... which connects to a board on the backplane and ultimately routes alarm signals back to the switch • AIM1................................................................................ Two alarm interface modules connect to the primary frame...........53 ................... The Alarm Interface Module: • Collects all alarm connections • Handles both equipment and user alarms • Alarm Interface Panel provides connections to user defined alarms The User Alarm Cross Connect Board provides the customer with a pre-wired (fixed) user alarm interface board............... which connects to the lightning protection block and provides 18 opto-isolator user alarms...................................... It is wired during installation as per the customer requirement for external user alarms........................................................................ AIM Position Diagram Description The diagram below shows the position of the alarm panel in the Minicell cabinet.......... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ......................................................... .......... They are as follows: • AIM0....................................................................................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Alarm Interface Module Alarm Interface Module ...............

. the primary cabinet.................................. and seven can be set to “open on alarm” or “close on alarm.............PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Alarm Interface Module User and User Reserved Alarms Equipment that is part of the Minicell assembly (namely.54 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .............................................. battery or generator backup cabinet) uses some of the user alarms for reporting their status to the PCSC and therefore have been categorized as external user alarms.......................................” but the 8th alarm is “close on alarm” only............ 2 ......................................................................... power cabinet.. User Alarms The external user alarms can be wired to monitor equipment alarms in two states: • Open on alarm (normally closed) • Close on alarm (normally open) There are eight alarms available to the user............ ....... User Alarms are discussed in detail in Unit 6.....................

........................................................................Alarm Interface Panel -................................................................... ...................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ...............................................................................User Alarm Board .User Alarm Board PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Alarm Interface Panel -................................................................................. User alarm connection definitions are made using slide switches on the circuit board and are located in the primary cabinet just above the T1 facilities and alarm interface board...............................................................................55 ........... User Alarm Board Diagram Description The diagram below shows the user alarm board..................................

.......................... 2 ..........................................................................Side and Back Panels The side and rear panels contain fewer components than the front panel but are still important to maintenance of the Minicell...............................................56 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........................Alarm Interface Panel -......................................... This section consists of information on the side and back of the Minicell: • Side Panel • Rear Interface Panel • Heat Exchangers ..User Alarm Board PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Side and Rear Panel Descriptions Overview Objectives ..........................................

........................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 .............................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Side Panel (Version 2 Only) Side Panel (Version 2 Only) ........ In both versions................. equipped only in Minicell Version 2........................................................ the filter assembly is accessible from the front of the cabinet.... is located on the left of the primary cabinet to provide access to the RX1 Receive Assemblies................................................................................................................................................................... the bottom of that panel has a side interface panel (SIP) that is used for connections to the Growth Cabinets........... In Minicell Version 4....... Side Panel Diagram The diagram below shows the components on the left side of the Minicell...............................................................................................................57 .......................... .... x Receive Units RX1 Receive Filter/RX1 Receive Unit Assemblies (Simplex only) FRONT Side Interface Panel for Growth Description This panel...................

........................ Overview The Rear Interface Panel (RIP) contains the Antenna Interface Panel (AIP) and the Power Distribution Assembly (PDA)................58 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 . power cables (AC/DC)................................ Three-Sector Configuration For a three-sector configuration...... G=Growth). that identifies sector (S) and frame (P=Primary.................................................. To avoid injury be sure that the cell cannot transmit when disconnecting the antennas........................................................................... The Antenna Interface Panel (AIP) provides access to antenna leads and is used to input or measure test signals during performance testing...........PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Rear Interface Panel Rear Interface Panel .............................................................. For example...... S1D0/P is Sector 1 Transmit and Receive (Diversity) zero for a Primary frame with duplex filter panels................. Connections are clearly marked according to a simple code. Electrical Burn Danger Risk of serious burns.................... 2 ................................................ Rear Interface Diagram The diagram below shows the rear interface panel.. ................................... the rear interface panel shows: • The “TX” section (top) is where the transmit antennas are terminated when SIMPLEX FILTERS are equipped................ T1/E1 lines.................................................................................. and external user alarms.. 2 or 3 Sector TX S3P S3G S2P S2G S1P RF Test S1G RX/DX S3D0/P S3D1/G S2D0/P S2D1/G S1D0/P S1D1/G GPS OMNI TX C3P C6G C5G C4G RF Test DX D1(C2P) Function Antenna Interface Panel D0(C1P) GPS The rear interface panel provides the interface for the antenna cables..............

........6 and may be equipped in a Growth Frame....... It is the first Carrier Transmit and Diversity 0 Receive........................... Primary Filters Primary Simplex Primary Simplex Primary Duplex Growth Filters Growth Simplex Growth Duplex Growth Simplex Primary Duplex Growth Duplex TX Primary S1/P (Top row) TX Growth S1/G (Top Row) RX0 Primary / RX0 Growth RX1 Primary / RX1 Growth S1D0/P (Bottom Row) (Splitter) S1D1/G (Bottom Row) (Splitter) S1D0/P (Bottom Row) S1D1/G (Bottom Row) S1D0/P (Bottom Row) (Splitter) S1D1/G (Bottom Row) (Splitter) Omni Configuration Power Distribution Assembly S1/P (Top Row) S1D0/P (Bottom Row) S1D1/G (Bottom S1/G (Top Row) Row) (Splitter) S1D0/P (Bottom S1D0/P (Bottom Row) (Splitter) Row) (Splitter) S1D1/G (Bottom S1D1/G (Bottom Row) (Splitter) Row) (Splitter) For an omni configuration........ identified in the table below................................................ are the same for each sector.... if equipped................ the rear interface panel shows: 1.............. C3P is the Transmit for Carrier 3 (Primary) and C4G .. Has power cables (AC/DC)..... and depend on the type of equipped filter........... Connections...59 ....................C6G are Carrier 4 . D1 (C2P) is always Duplex......... • Antennas are hooked to the appropriate sectors. It is the Diversity 1 Receive and.... T1/E1 lines......... • The “RX/DX” section (bottom) is also where RX0 and RX1 receive antennas are terminated for any filter type............................ D0 (C1P) is always Duplex.. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 .......... the second Carrier Transmit....PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Rear Interface Panel • The “RX/DX” section (bottom) is where the transmit antennas are terminated when DUPLEX FILTERS are equipped......... .... 2... 3.... and external user alarms................

...... mounts on the front door of the primary cabinet and is designed for the outdoor application...... and is activated when the outside ambient temperature reaches 70º F..................................................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Heat Exchanger Heat Exchanger ............ Structure of a Version 2 Primary Cabinet Heat Exchanger The heat exchanger does not have a redundant set of internal and external blowers........................... and is alarmed............................... The heat exchanger supports cooling fans and heaters...... 2 ......... make sure that you have secured it in the open position................... The heat exchanger regulates the internal temperature of the Primary Radio Cabinet.............................. The only other air movers within the Minicell primary cabinet are a single CTU shelf fan for cooling the CTUs.... • There are also 240 V AC heaters within the heat exchanger................... Insect screens are mounted inside the door in the lower area.................... .......................................... necessitating 240 V AC input from the Minicell power system..............................60 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................... Before Working on a Minicell Cabinet When opening a door fitted with a heat exchanger............... Overview Heat Exchanger Diagram Outdoor applications require a heat exchanger that is mounted on the front panel............ Minicell Air Movers not Part of the Heat Exchanger • There is one internal and one external blower powered by the same +24 V feeder................................................................................. The diagram below shows the heat exchanger for the Minicell................ and a frame fan (located below the bottom CRC shelf).......

. which switches on low if fan speed drops below a predetermined level... fan alarms follows: • A fan failure... The associated heater can put out 1100 watts..... the alarm will not be activated even if the AC power is disconnected........... CAUTION Handling the HPCTU Heat Exchanger Panel The HPCTU exchanger is a heavy unit................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Heat Exchanger Minicell Fan Alarms Fan Electrical and Alarm Connections The conditions for.................. Seek assistance before removing the heat exchanger to prevent injury................ • Fan alarm electronics are powered from the +15 V CTU shelf power converter....... ... The output is an open collector type........................ Five electrical wires (two for +24V and +24V return.......................... These fan alarms are run to the AFI circuit pack and have the same ground reference................. Self Test Panel Some heat exchangers have self-testing key pads.... and the reporting of........ causes an alarm of failure (logic 0) for each fan which gets reported back to the AFI via separate interface cabling............... High Power CTU Applications (Version 2 Only) High Power CTU applications require an additional heat exchanger that is mounted on the back of the Primary Radio Cabinet..................... • The three alarm output connections are isolated from the two +24V input connections.......... • A heater alarm is activated when the +24 V powered controller circuit is calling for heat and it is not provided... If the controller is not calling for heat......... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 .. or rotation.... See page 8-63 for more information....... loss of +24 V...........61 ... Enhanced Minicell Primary The heat exchanger for the Enhanced Primary Minicell is able to cool the cell and no back unit is needed for HPCTU equipped Minicells........ and three for alarms) are connected to each of these fans......

...............................Other Cabinets The Minicell can contain other cabinets and are described in this section.................................... These cabinets are as follows: • Special Omni: page 2-63 • Growth I Cabinet Layout: page 2-65 • Growth II Cabinet Layout: page 2-66 • Growth III Cabinet Layout: page 2-67 • Rack-Mounted Growth: page 2-69 • Minicell Primary Power Cabinet (Optional): page 2-76 • Backup Battery Cabinet (Optional): page 2-80 .........................................62 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .....PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Heat Exchanger Other Base Station Cabinets Overview Objectives ............ 2 ..................................................................................................................................

........................................................................................................... depending on the kit used... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ........... ....................................................................................................................63 ....................................................... Special Omni The Special Omni PCS CDMA Minicell is a single-sector................................. The kit contains the steps needed to upgrade the cell from omni to two-or-three sector......................................... single-carrier configuration of the PCS CDMA Minicell......................................................................................... It can be upgraded to a two-or three sector Minicell as needed..........PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Special Omni Special Omni ..............................................

.............................64 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..................................... Combinations Other combinations of sectors and carriers can be accommodated with the fully configured cell..... Growth II Cabinet The Growth II Cabinet is added to a Growth I Cabinet to provide for two-sector three-carrier and three-sector three-carrier operations............ The Growth I also supports six sector one carrier for CATV..... ................... the growth cabinets contain three CRC shelves and one CTU Assembly (with fan in the back of the unit).. Overview Besides the Primary Radio Cabinet...................... a PCS CDMA Minicell can have growth cabinets............ Growth I supports two-sector two-carriers.... or to provide capacity for additional traffic channels............................................................................................................................. Growth II Cabinets have additional antenna leads and corresponding filters.................................... such as: • Nine-Carrier Omni • Three-Sector Multiband Each Growth Cabinet contains a DFI board to accommodate the additional traffic................. Like a primary cabinet............................................. The growth cabinets have basically the same structure.......................... and three carriers for omni......... Primary Growth I Growth II Growth I Cabinet The Growth I Cabinet is required when adding additional carriers to an existing primary cabinet................ Growth Cabinet Position in the Minicell The diagram below shows the growth cabinet’s position in the minicell.............................................................. 2 .....PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Growth Cabinets Growth Cabinets ......... three-sector twocarriers........................

......................................................................................................................................................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Growth I Cabinet Layout Growth I Cabinet Layout ...............................................65 ............................................................................................................................................................................ CTU fans are located in the back of the cabinet..................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ...... Growth I Layout Diagram The diagram below shows the layout of the Growth I cabinet.......... Growth I Layout The Growth I Cabinet contains CRC and CTU Shelves....... CTU Air Exhaust CRC Blower C C C CC BA B S P C C C CC I C C CC C U U UU UU R T U 2 CRC0 C C C C C BA B S P C C CC C I C C C C C U UU U UU R T U 3 CRC1 C C C CC B A B D P C C C CC I C C F C C U U UU U U R I U 2 CRC2 CRC Air Intake C T U 1 C T U 2 C T U 3 A C B P C U 1 P C U 2 CTU Blower AC DC PDA Digital Cables FRONT VIEW PDA REAR VIEW ................................

........66 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................................................. Growth II Cabinet Layout Diagram The diagram below shows the layout of the Growth II cabinet.......... CTU Air Exhaust CRC Blower T F U T F U T F U C C C CC BA B S P C C C CC I C C CC C U U U U UU R T U 4 CRC0 C C CC C BA B S P C C CC C I C C C C C U U U U UU R T U 5 CRC1 C C C CC B A BD P C C C CC I C CF C C U U UU U U R I U 3 CRC2 CRC Air Intake C T U 1 C T U 2 C T U 3 P A C C U B 1 CTU Blower P C U 2 AC DC PD A Digital Cables FRONT VIEW PD A AIP REAR VIEW ................................................ Growth II contains filters for additional carrier operation................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2 ....................................................................... Growth II Cabinet Layout In addition to CRC and CTU shelves........................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Growth II Cabinet Layout Growth II Cabinet Layout .............................

. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ... Growth III Cabinet Layout In addition to CRC and CTU shelves.67 .........PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Growth III Cabinet Layout Growth III Cabinet Layout ...................................................... ................................................................................................................. The Growth III Duplex filter configuration is the same as the Growth II...... Growth III contains filters and CSU for additional carrier operation.............................................................................. including simplex filter cage and simplex transmit filters...... Growth III Simplex Filter Configuration Changes from Growth II The Growth III Simplex filter configuration is the same as the Growth II................................................................................................................................................... It is to be available Autumn 1998.............. except for: • Addition of a 5 AMP circuit breaker to the PDA for the CSU • Addition of the Minicell Primary water tight connector to the AIP for a T1 line • Addition of the Minicell Primary CSU........................................ except for: Growth III Duplex Filter Configuration Changes from Growth II • Addition of a 5 AMP circuit breaker to the PDA for the CSU • Addition of the Minicell Primary water tight connector to the AIP for a T1 line • Addition of the Minicell Primary CSU.................................. mounted where the duplex filter plate would be • Addition of the 110ANA (6 pair) lightning protection block to the floor of the cabinet • Addition of a 24:6 combiner mounted where the CATV transmit couplers would be mounted • Addition of a twisted pair power cable from the PDA to the CSU • Change in the length of the interconnection cables........ mounted where the duplex filter plate would be • Addition of the 110ANA (6 pair) lightning protection block to the floor of the cabinet • Addition of a 24:6 combiner mounted where the CATV transmit couplers would be mounted • Deletion of the Simplex Filter Cage and Simplex Filter Tray Assemblies • Addition of the Simplex Filter Plate • Addition of a new AIP with longer cables to reach duplex filters • Addition of a twisted pair power cable from the PDA to the CSU • Change in the length of the interconnection cables..

......................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Growth III Cabinet Layout Growth III Cabinet Layout Diagram The diagram below shows the layout of the Growth III cabinet............................................................................... CTU Air Exhaust CRC Blower CSU T F U T F U C C C CC BA B S P C C C CC I C C CC C U U UU UU R T U 4 CRC0 C C CC C BA B S P C C CC C I C C C C C U U U U UU R T U 5 CRC1 T C C C CC B A BD P F C C C CC I C CF C U C U U UU U U R I U 3 CRC2 CRC Air Intake C T U 1 C T U 2 C T U 3 P A C C U B 1 P C U 2 CTU Blower AC DC PDA Digital Cables FRONT VIEW AIP PDA REAR VIEW ................................... 2 ..........................................................................68 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................

......................: Cabinet Rack-mounted growth cabinet is being designed only for indoor installations............................ and T1/E1 interface.....69 ............................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ... Within a cabinet..................... The second carrier goes on the left CRC...................... CSU Because the rack-mounted growth cabinet does not contain sufficient internal space to install a CSU shelf.......................................... The following table provides information on these differences........................... antenna............................................ T1/E1 The components of the rack-mounted growth cabinet vary from those of the primary and growth cabinets.......... Interface Panel The interface panel integrates the power.............. Since the primary cabinet affords an internal CSU shelf for the first three T1 connections......................or three-sector configurations..... it only provides an external indoor CSU shelf.................... a second TDM bus will be added beyond a nine radio shelf configuration...... the external CSU shelf supports T1/E1 connections beyond nine radio shelf configuration................ power......................................... the first carrier number goes on the right........ It provides the following items: • Indoor cabinet • Smaller footprint • CTU and Fan • Integrated interface panel including antenna.......... the location of the carriers varies by component........................ TDM Bus Since the capacity of a TDM bus is limited supporting up to nine radio shelves. Power Carrier Locations Same power sources are supported as the current PCS CDMA Mincell.................... ..........PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Rack-Mounted Growth Rack-Mounted Growth ...................... CTU The CTU is same as the current module of PCS CDMA Minicell................. This interface is protected from lightning and electronic surge.. Overview Component Differences The rack-mounted growth cabinet supports up to two PCS CDMA carriers in two..... • For CRC shelves..

....... RG1......... • The circuit breakers at the top of the cabinet are the reverse of the CRC shelves. and growth III with carriers 2 and 3 in the RG1 cabinet and carrier 4 in growth III....................... Each rack-mounted growth cabinet contains two carriers. The circuit breaker for the first carrier is on the left and the second carrier is on the right... growth 1 and rack-mounted growth 2 would place carrier 2 in growth 1 and carriers 3 and 4 in RG2.........70 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ... or high-power combiners........ The cabinet services the next two carriers in the minicell configuration....................... The current limit is believed to be 12 antennas per cell tower....... The number of antennas will be minimized with the use of duplexers...................... 2 .. According to the RF and antenna conditions.......PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Rack-Mounted Growth Antenna Reduction Program Rack Mounted Growth Filter Configuration Carrier Assignments • The bottom CTU gets the first carrier and the upper CTU gets the second carrier... This feature will ensure that the number of antennas required to support a PCS CDMA Minicell with up to six CDMA carriers (up to five growth cabinets) is within limits imposed on service providers by zoning restrictions............................... ..................... For example. either a simplex or diplexer filter supports the transmission.................................................................... dual-carrier linear amplifiers.......... a minicell site with a primary. A similar minicell arrangement would contain the primary cabinet....... The receive filter in the primary cabinet is shared by all CDMA carriers.....

........................71 ...............PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Rack-Mounted Growth Rack Mounted Growth Cabinet The diagram below shows the layout of the rack-mounted growth cabinet................................................................................. Carriers 1 29 0 1 2 30 1 1 3 31 2 1 1 4 3 2 2 5 4 2 3 6 5 2 1 1 6 3 2 2 7 3 3 3 8 3 ............................ Physical Number S 2 The table below shows the CTU logical number versus physical number in Status Display Page 2136..... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ......... Sect or Circuit ID CTU No.......................................................................................... PDA PDA CRC0 CRC0 CRC0 CRC1 CRC1 CRC2 CRC2 CRC0 CRC1 CRC1 CRC2 CRC2 CRC FANS CRC FAN C3 C2 15MHZ 1:8 SPL 15MHZ 1:8 SPL S 0 S 1 S 2 15MHZ 1:6 SPL C T U 0 C T U 1 C T U 2 CTU FAN 2 C T U 0 C T U 1 C T U 2 CTU FAN 1 S 1 S 0 REAR VIEW FRONT VIEW CTU Logical Number vs......

................................................................... me RU/ CTU Name SDP/TI 3 sector/3 carrier 6 sector/1 carrier 9 carrier OMNI PCA Address Name Usage sectorcarrier PCA Address Name Usage sectorcarrier PCA Address Name Usage Sectorcarrier PCA Address Name Usage sector carrier U1 CTU29 LAC29 Sl-C1 LAC29 Sl-Cl LAC29 Cl LAC29 Sl-Cl-BA l RU29-0 LAC29 S1-D0 LAC29 Sl-D0 LAC29 D0 LAC29 S1-D0-BA 2 RU29-1 LAC29 Sl-D1 LAC29 Sl-Dl LAC29 D1 LAC29 Sl-Dl-BA U2 CTU30 LAC30 S2-C1 LAC30 S2-Cl LAC30 C2 LAC30 S2-Cl-BA 3 RU30-0 LAC30 S2-D0 LAC30 S2-D0 na na LAC30 S2-D0-BA 4 RU30-l LAC30 S2-D1 LAC30 S2-D1 na na LAC30 S2-D1-BA U3 CTU31 LAC31 S3-C1 LAC31 S3-Cl LAC31 C3 LAC31 S3-C1-BA 5 RU31-0 LAC31 S3-D0 LAC31 S3-D0 na na LAC31 S3-D0-BA 6 RU31-1 LAC31 S3-D1 LAC31 S3-D1 na na LAC31 S3-D1-BA U4 CTU4 LAC4 S1-C2 LAC4 S4-C1 LAC4 C4 LAC4 Sl-Cl-BE 7 RU4-0 na na LAC4 S4-D0 na na LAC4 S1-D0-BE RU4-1 na na LAC4 S4-D1 na na LAC4 Sl-Dl-BE 8 3 sector sharedcarrier ...........................72 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........ 2 ............... S/ U elf uip........PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Rack-Mounted Growth CTU/RU Hardware Shelf Equipment Name Sect or Circuit ID CTU No................................... Carriers 1 7 9 4 2 8 10 4 3 9 11 4 1 10 12 5 2 11 13 5 3 12 14 5 1 13 15 6 2 14 16 6 3 15 17 6 The table below shows the CTU/RU hardware shelf equipment name (physical ID and the logical ID) for various cell configurations................................................................................................

................................................Carrier Number..........73 ........ Name RU/ CTU Name SDP/TI CTU5 Notes: S#-Sector Number..................PCS band letter ............................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 .......... B[A-F] ....................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Rack-Mounted Growth 3 sector/3 carrier 6 sector/1 carrier 9 carrier OMNI 3 sector sharedcarrier PCA Address Name Usage sectorcarrier PCA Address Name Usage sectorcarrier PCA Address Name Usage Sectorcarrier PCA Address Name Usage sector carrier CTU5 LAC5 S2-C2 LAC5 S5-C1 LAC5 C5 LAC5 S2-C1-BE RU9 RU5-0 na na LAC5 S5-D0 na na LAC5 S2-D0-BE RU10 RU5-1 na na LAC5 S5-D1 na na LAC5 S2-D1-BE CTU6 CTU6 LAC6 S3-C2 LAC6 S6-C1 LAC6 C6 LAC6 S3-C1-BE RU11 RU6-0 na na LAC6 S6-D0 na na LAC6 S3-D0-BE RU12 RU6-1 na na LAC6 S6-D1 na na LAC6 S3-D1-BE CTU7 CTU1 LAC1 S1-C3 na na LAC1 C7 LAC1 S1-C2-BA/ E CTU8 CTU2 LAC2 S2-C3 na na LAC2 C8 LAC2 S2-C2-BA/ E CTU9 CTU3 LAC3 S3-C3 na na LAC3 C9 LAC3 S3-C2-BA/ E PCS/ CTU Shelf Equip........................................................ C# .............................................

....... potentially extending the range and lowering the average reverse link power required of mobiles.....................74 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Range Extension Option Range Extension Option .... 2 ............................................... The diagram below shows the components of the TTLNA as attached to the Minicell............................................ Gain must be increased in the transmit path and the noise figure must be reduced in the receive path...... • The TTLNA improves the receiver signal-to-noise ratio on the receive path (uplink)................................................................................................... • The HPCTU improves the transmit (downlink) performance of the Minicell.................. Its purpose is to extend the range of the Minicell.................................................. Masthead Amplifier Unit (six used) TX TX TX PCS CDMA Minicell RX RX RX DC BIAS/ ALARM DC BIAS/ ALARM DC BIAS/ ALARM Alpha Sector Diversity 0 Gamma Sector Diversity 1 Alpha Sector Diversity 1 Power Distribution Unit +24 V From Power Cabinet Two Alarm Outputs H P C T U H P C T U H P C T U High Power Amplifiers MAS RU DC Bias Tees (six used) TX/RX Duplex Coaxial Cables Masthead Amplifier System Receiver Units MAS RU MAS RU ............................ Overview Principle of the REO TTLNA Diagram The Range Extension Option (REO) requires a Tower Top Low Noise Amplifier (TTLNA) and a cell equipped with HPCTUs............................. Increasing the Minicell range requires a balanced link budget.............................................................................................

placed in the back of the Primary Cabinet frame pedestal).................................................... and the other for the DC bias applied to the amplifier........... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 .......................................................... and one power unit for each of the amplifiers..............PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Range Extension Option Structure of the TTLNA The TTLNA Power Distribution Unit The TTLNA is composed of: • Masthead Amplifiers (one per diversity antenna) • A Power Distribution Unit (mounted on a panel..................................... Each TTLNA is provided with two alarms: one for power.............................................. Each Amplifier Power Unit is provided with separate ON/OFF switches for Power and Alarm..... ....75 ............. The Power Distribution Unit is composed of one main power switch assembly.....................

.....................................) – 60 minutes @ 3 kW ............................................. The power cabinet shown is the 60C................................................................................. Fan Unit Secondary Shelf Rectifier Assemblies Primary Shelf DC Distribution Alarm Panel AC Input Panel Backup Batteries 1 2 1 2 Battery String 1 Battery String 2 3805 L2V7 0 Key Components The key components of the PCS primary power cabinet include: • • Ten Rectifiers (five per shelf) – 750 W each – Engineered based on Minicell load requirements – N + 1 redundancy Two Battery Strings (IR-125) – 30 minutes @ 3 kW each • Engineered based on holdover required • Maximum holdover – 30 minutes @ 6 kW (Max................. Primary Power Cabinet Diagram The diagram below shows the Minicell power cabinet..........................................................................................................................................76 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Minicell Primary Power Cabinet (Optional) Minicell Primary Power Cabinet (Optional) ....................................................... 2 ................. Primary Power Cabinet The primary power cabinet provides the rectifiers for converting 220 V AC to +24 V DC as needed by the Minicell..................... Minicell config...................................................................

.........8 1...4 17.8 8....7 15..... PCS CDMA Minicell Configuration Maximum DC Load Number of Battery Strings Battery Reserve Time Initial Capacity (hours) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Primary with Standard CTUs 1600 W 2...8 3.77 ........... The temperature of the batteries in these two cabinets is maintained within a range specified by the battery vendor to prevent overcharging or damage to one of the battery strings.....5 ...........5 10........0 38...3 12.............................9 11.9 Primary and 1 Growth with Standard CTUs 3100 W 1..........1 11..........2 3...8 7...1 4.....6 1.1 5.....4 7...........8 10..2 6......0 Primary and 2 Growth with Standard CTUs 4600 W 0..1 4....3 23..9 14. For batteries near then end of their life these times are reduced approximately 25%...... This prevents voltage reversal of battery cells and severe performance degradation of the connected equipment.... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ...2 Primary and 2 Growth with High Power CTUs 6000 W 0.....PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Minicell Primary Power Cabinet (Optional) – • Backup Batteries 90 minutes @ 2 kW (Typical for three-sector Minicell with ten effective voice channels per sector) AC Service Entrance The power cabinet contains batteries capable of providing up to 6 kW of DC power holdover for a minimum of 30 minutes in the event of either a 208/240 volt AC (local utility) power interruption or any power system failure resulting in loss of DC output power........9 2..............7 Primary and 1 Growth with High Power CTU 4050 W 0...... The power cabinet has temperature-compensated float charging capability for the batteries in both the power cabinet and the battery cabinet.......4 19....5 27... The low voltage disconnect is setable in the power cabinet..4 21.................. The combination of the power cabinet and battery cabinet provides a minimum of 4 hours of holdover at end of life.....3 2.2 3....0 5....6 5.4 16.....1 6......3 8....5 11. The power cabinet contains a low voltage disconnect circuit which activates when the batteries discharge to 20...4 5. Battery Reserve Time The table gives approximate battery reserve times for an installation at full load conditions for new battery strings....2 33.... the maximum battery recharge is no greater than 6 times the battery discharge time...9 6...0 7....9 8..3 Primary with High Power CTU 2100 W 2...3 3.....2 9..25 volts DC...1 4.6 27.....

.......................................................... with power bays usually built without the protective enclosure required for outdoor operation.................. Optioned Items The Power Cabinets and Power Bays are optional items.................. Indoor Version There is a version of the power cabinet made for indoor Minicells.................78 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................. ........................................... 2 ........ Their physical appearance may change from installation to installation......... 401-703-025........................ The indoor primary doesn’t need heat exchangers.....Minicell Primary Power Cabinet (Optional) PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description For More Information More information on Minicell power requirements can be found in PCS CDMA Minicell Site Preparation Guidelines...........................................

..........................................79 .. Up to four rectifiers are needed for the primary cabinet....................... 31 in.................................................................................................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 2 ........./79 cm FAN UNIT CPS(2) (SECONDARY SHELF) CPS (1) (PRIMARY SHELF) DC DISTRIBUTION AC INPUT POWER PANEL ALARM PANEL BATTERIES STRING 1 1 STRING 2 2 1 2 ........................................ In a Power Cabinet............................................................................................. Power Cabinet Layout Diagram The diagram below shows the layout of the Minicell power cabinet.................................. A battery string is formed by placing 2 batteries in series to provide +24 volts DC........................ppt Components of a Power Cabinet The main components of a Power Cabinet are batteries and rectifiers.......... batteries are placed into 2 battery strings................................................. .............. Each battery string is placed in parallel to provide 6 kW of DC power holdover for about 30 minutes in the event of a commercial power failure...PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Minicell Power Cabinet Layout Minicell Power Cabinet Layout ..........................................

............................................................................ The diagram below shows the layout of the backup battery cabinet.............................. 2 ....................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Physical Description Backup Battery Cabinet (Optional) Backup Battery Cabinet (Optional) ................... Minicell configuration) – Eight hours @ 3 kW 12 Hours @ 2 kW (typical for three-sector Minicell with ten effective voice channels per sector) ............. 1 2 1 S t r in g 9 1 2 1 S t r in g 7 1 2 2 S t r in g 6 2 1 2 S t r in g 4 2 1 S t r in g 1 Backup Battery Cabinet Components 2 1 S t r in g 3 1 Output Bus and Protection S t r in g 8 S t r in g 5 1 2 S t r in g 1 0 2 S t r in g 2 The key components/features of the PCS battery backup cabinet include: • • • Ten Battery strings – Four hours @ 600 W each – Engineered based on holdover required Maximum holdover – Four hours @ 6 kW (Max............................................................................................................................................. OverviewDescription Backup Battery Cabinet Diagram The battery backup cabinet is linked to the primary cabinet to provide extended holdover time......................................................................................................80 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...........................................................................

........... The purpose of this unit is to identify the cabling and connections that support the delivery of data............ Connections and Schematic Drawings (SDs) Contents Schematic drawings (SDs) are discussed in unit 4..... Data paths were outlined in Unit 2....... controls........- - - - 3-3 .. Minicell Connections • Filter and Antenna Connections .....• Signal Buses ...................• User Alarms ..........3-14 ...... and MSC Interface • Minicell Omni Configuration ......................................3-21 ............• 15 MHz Reference Frequency Distribution .... The data and control paths are also used for testing purposes...............3-11 .................. Connections.....3-20 .3-6 ..3-5 ..3-9 ..3-18 ...........• Growth II Cabinet Connections ..........3 Cabling. controls (alarms and timing signals)..3-7 . TDM Bus..1 .........3-10 .....• Minicell TDM Bus ..............................• Minicell Three-Sector Configuration .. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ..........• Network Facilities Interface ....3-19 ....• Primary to Growth I Cabinet Connections ...................................................• Signal Path Distribution ..............• Power Distribution ..........................• Channel Service Unit.3-12 ... and services (DC and AC power)................ and Software Overview Purpose Minicell components are internally connected through cables that carry voice/traffic data (receive and transmit paths)....3-8 ....... and services to the cell components.... as part of the discussion of the “tools” used to communicate with the cell....................

......................................Single Channel Selective ........ and Software Test Paths 3-22 • Example of Test Path: Transmit Path (Simplex Configuration) 3-23 • Example of Test Path: Receive Path (Simplex Configuration) 3-24 • Example of Test Path: Rx and Tx in a Duplex Configuration 3-25 • Functional Tests ......................................................................3-35 • Functional Tests -.....Overhead Channel-.................................3-27 • Functional Tests -.....................................3-33 • Functional Tests -... 3 .........3-37 ..Traffic Path .Cabling...................Overhead Channels -..........Access Channel .................3-26 • Functional Tests -......Antenna ............2 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .3-31 • Functional Tests -.Pilot Level .............3-29 • Functional Tests -.................................................... Connections.Pilot/Sync/Paging ...

.................... The picture below shows the cabling connections at the back of the primary cabinet......Cabling............................. and Software Minicell Connections Overview ..............................3 .................................................................. The Lucent Technologies PCS CDMA Minicell can support different operating modes.......... Cables running through the cell are dedicated to specific functions...................................... Connections............... One objective of this unit is to identify the different paths that support these operating modes...................................................... ........................................................................................................................... Control......... Testing for the Minicell is done via the connections that are part of the voice and data link paths.................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ........................ Purpose Cable View Identifying Data...... and Service Paths Identifying Cables and Connections The three major types of connections that support the functioning of a Minicell are: • Voice (traffic) • Data Links (control) • Power.............. Understanding their role is necessary to the performance of troubleshooting tasks.....................................................

............................4 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...............Cabling.......... Timing signals are critical to CDMA encoding.................................................................... This unit outlines the path followed by these control signals. and Software Cell Configuration and Data Path Control Signal Distribution Power Distribution and Grounding A PCS CDMA Minicell can be configured to support one to six interconnected antenna faces........................... Connections......... .............................. 3 .................................................. AC and DC power is distributed throughout the cell.............. and proper grounding ensures isolation of the signal path from stray current from the power distribution system........

...............................0 Version 2................................... Minicell Version 2 Filter Configurations Two filter configurations are available for Version 2 Minicells: Simplex Simplex configurations require three filters: • One filter for Receive Diversity 0 signals • One filter for Transmit signals • One filter for Receive Diversity 1 signals on the side panel Duplex: Duplex configuration require two filters: Antenna Connections Diagram Rx1 • One filter for Receive Diversity 0 and Transmit signals • One filter for Receive Diversity 1 signals on the side panel The diagram below shows the simplex and duplex antenna connections for the Minicell.....0 Rx1 Tx Simplex Filters Rx1 Rx0 and Tx Rx0 and Tx Rx0 Duplex Filters Minicell Version 4 Configuration All Receive and Transmit filters are placed side-by-side and are accessible from the front of the Version 4 Primary Cabinet..................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ............................................................................... Connections........ .............................................................................................Cabling............. Version 4.................................................................................................5 ................................................. and Software Filter and Antenna Connections Filter and Antenna Connections ............................ Growth Cabinet II Filters are placed side-by-side and are accessible from the front of the Growth II Cabinet......................................................

........... and are used to carry a variety of signals........................................Cabling.. Signal Bus Diagram The diagram below shows the various system buses................................................ Overview Buses are physical connections mounted on the radio cabinet backplane that link the different circuit packs on the RCC Shelf....................................................................... UPDATE BUS CPU 0 CPU 1 SYSTEM BUSES A F I N C I C C C C P I B I U M E M S C T A F I TDM BUS C C C B I U S C T CE ACU ACU BCR BCR N C I C C C C R T U i C P I B I U M E M D F I RX 0 TX TO CTU RX 1 Cluster Bus BBA TRIO ....... There is one Cluster bus for each Cluster Controller........... Cluster Bus This bus connects a CCC to all the CEs it controls...................6 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........................................................................................................................ System Bus There are two separate system buses to enable communication between circuit packs within each CSC....... Connections. 3 ...... TDM Bus The Time Division Multiplexed (TDM) bus is used to carry signals between RCC and CRC shelves............................................................................ and Software Signal Buses Signal Buses .................................................. Update Bus This bus carries signals that enable the stand-by CPU to shadow the primary CPU................................... so that it can take over cell operation whenever the primary CPU experiences a failure............

..... The bus is separated into two physically separate buses to improve system reliability............... and Software Minicell TDM Bus Minicell TDM Bus ...................... Connections................................................ Synchronization of TDM bus control channel messages between the CPU and a circuit pack connected to the TDM bus is performed by the NCI..........................................T im e D iv is io n M u ltip le x ...................................p p t Legend Description The following are devices connected to the TDM and System buses: Acronym Text BIU Bus Interface Unit CCC CDMA Cluster Controller CPI Communications Processor Interface CPU Core Process Unit DFI Digital Facilities Interface MEM Memory NCI Network Control Interface TDM Time Division Multiplex The TDM bus permits voice..............................................................................................M em o ry B IU ..............................................C o m m u n ic a tio n s P ro c e s s o r In te rfa c e N C I .......................B u s In te rfa c e U n it C C C ....C o re P ro c e s s U n it C P I ................................. ..D ig ita l F a c ilitie s In te rfa c e T D M ............... C P U C P U U p d a te B u s S y stem B u s 0 C P I N C I S y stem B u s 1 M E M M E M N C I C P I TD M B us A TD M B us B C C C B I U S C T C C C CRC0 B I U S C T C C C CRC1 B I U D F I CRC2 C P U ......................N e tw o rk C o n tro l In te rfa c e M E M .................................7 . or control connectivity to any circuit pack connected to the TDM bus...............................C D M A C lu s te r C o n tro lle r D F I .... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ........................... data... TDM Bus Diagram The diagram shows the TDM bus...Cabling...............

........ Kentrox Kentrox is a registered trademark of ADC Kentrox Industries. The DFI circuit pack can be optioned for either a T1 or E1/CEPT interface....... and MSC Interface Cabling.............................. Default options are 9600 bps...... and each DFI provides two DS1 lines.................................... The SIU provides a common interface for all CSUs within a shelf for a single Video Display Terminal (VDT) or a Network Management System (NMS).. so each fully loaded DFI requires two CSUs................... The VDT is required to option the T-SMART CSU.......... TDM Bus.............................. MSC Interface The primary cabinet is connected to the MSC via T1/E1 facilities... TDM Bus The TDM bus in the primary cabinet provides communication between components in the CRC and the RCC...... one stop bit...........................................Channel Service Unit.............................. Channel Service Unit (CSU) Shelf The optional CSU shelf is an ADC Kentrox 4-slot shelf housing one to three T-SMART CSUs and one Shelf Interface Unit (SIU)........... Refer to Kentrox® Operator’s Manual 77000-GD for detailed information on the T-SMART CSU... The CSUs connect to the DFI(s) in CRC shelf 2 (lowest shelf) on the Minicell (terminal) side of the interface........... 8 bits per word/character..... VDT interface options are switch selectable......................... The number of facility interfaces is determined by the number of voice circuits and data links that the cell supports....... ............ Connections.......... TDM Bus. Each DS1 line is a 4-wire connection................................................ Voice traffic is transmitted between the cell and the MSC over packet pipes.. Control and status information is transmitted via one or two data links................................. and no parity................... which is also used to protect external user alarms....................... 3 ......................... It can be expanded to accommodate growth cabinets................ and Software Channel Service Unit........8 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..... and MSC Interface ................. T-SMART T-SMART is a registered trademark of ADC Kentrox Industries.... Each CSU handles only one DS1 line... The T1 (network) side of the interface is connected to a T1 terminal lightning protection block.. Reference For more information on the CSU see 2-29................

................................................Cabling........................................................................................................ The diagram below is a schematic of the signal paths from the CDMA cluster to the antenna.................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ......................................................... Shelf CDMA Cluster CDMA RF Train ... Connections.... Omni Configuration Omni Diagram In Omni configuration.............................. the three CDMA Clusters are logically connected to provide one CDMA train.............................................9 .... and Software Minicell Omni Configuration Minicell Omni Configuration ....................................................................................................................................................

....................................... Shelf 0 CDMA Cluster CDMA RF Train Shelf 1 CDMA Cluster CDMA RF Train Shelf 2 CDMA Cluster CDMA RF Train ............................ Three-Sector Configuration In a Three-Sector configuration................................. 3-Sector Diagram The diagram below is a schematic of the signal paths from the CDMA clusters to the antenna for the 3-sector configuration..................................................................................................... enabling flexibility and features such as softer handoff........ 3 .......................................................................Cabling................... and Software Minicell Three-Sector Configuration Minicell Three-Sector Configuration .............. Connections................. each cluster can be interconnected to all sectors.............................................................................10 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........................................................................................................

....... Packet Pipe Allocation CE Pooling Signal Path Diagram Every CCC that has Traffic CEs is assigned a Packet Pipe to carry traffic to/from the MSC........... The diagram below shows the signal path cross connections between the ACU’s and the BCRs.................................................................................... CE pooling enables cross-connection between Clusters.............................................................11 ................................... to reach a given level of service........ there is no relationship between the packet pipe and the RF sector that is being broadcast by the BCR equipped on the corresponding shelf............................................. As a result.... a cluster may need to be equipped with more CEs than required from RF engineering computations................................................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ....... TDM Bus CSC BIU CCU ACU BIU CCU B C R ACU BIU CCU B C R B C R ACU ............................Cabling............. and Software Signal Path Distribution Signal Path Distribution .......................... Connections......................................................... Consequently...............

The splitter has two inputs.... Reference Frequency Distribution Diagram The diagram below shows the distribution of the reference signal to the Minicell............................................................................................................................................ Timing signals are routed out of the P1 connector (RS485 connector) to provide timing to each individual frame............... Overview Reference signals are generated by the active Reference Frequency and Timing Generator......................................................................... The GPS receiver is in the Crystal Oscillator..............12 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........................... These signals are synchronized by a GPS signal......................... Connections..Cabling.................... J7 J7 1 RFTG Rubidium 2 Crystal P25 1 : 6 3 4 5 6 GPS J4 P47 2:4 P44 1 : 3 P36 2 RU2 (S1D1) P28 P15 RU5 (S3D0) P27 P13 P26 P11 P48 P52 RU4 (S2D1) RU3 (S2D0) RU1 (S1D0) P49 P54 P50 P56 P46 1 : 6 CTU 1 (S2P) CTU 0 (S1P) P61 P75 P60 P59 P73 2 SCT 0 P70 3 4 BCR 1 P58 P68 SCT 1 P57 P64 BCR 2 CRC2 5 6 2-to-4 Splitter P38 1 SIP Timing Signals P29 RU6 (S3D1) CTU 2 (S3P) 3 J7 Signal Divider P39 1 P34 P45 P40 P30 J4 P35 P37 P31 BCR 0 CRC0 CRC1 50 ohm terminator Reference signals are fed through dividers to four different groups of circuits: • Receiver Units • CDMA Transmit Units • Baseband Combiner/Radio and the Sync Clock and Tone boards • Side Interface Panel for distribution to the Growth Cabinets................................................. in which case the XO ocillator ................................... 3 ........................... and Software 15 MHz Reference Frequency Distribution 15 MHz Reference Frequency Distribution ..................................................... but only one is present at a time (The Rb oscillator is the primary input unless it is down... The primary cabinet is equipped with one 2-to-4 splitter.............................

13 ................................ which split the receive signals from the RU to three separate signals for the CRC complex in the primary cabinet and growth cabinet.... 1-to-2 Splitter There are six 1-to-2 splitters..... Each splits the 15-MHz reference signal from the 2-to-4 splitters into six separate signals for the RU and the CRC complexes............ and Software becomes the primary. 1-to-6 Splitter The primary cabinet is equipped with two 1-to-6 splitters................. CTU...................................................).. Connections............ and growth frame.............. not part of the reference signal................................. CRC complexes..... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ....... .. Three are assembled together so there are 2 assemblies each containing three 1-to-2 splitters. The function of the 2-to-4 splitter is to split the incoming 15 MHz reference signal into four separate output signals for the RU...................................... The 1-to-3 splitter splits the 15 MHz reference signals from the 2-to-4 splitter into three separate signals for CTUs in the primary cabinet.15 MHz Reference Frequency Distribution Cabling............................ 1-to-3 Splitter The primary cabinet is equipped with one 1-to-3 splitter.....

. In addition to DC power................................... 220 V AC power is supplied to the primary frame by the power cabinet................ .................................14 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................... while the +24 RTN connects to a common bus bar on the circuit breaker panel assembly which is isolated from the frame ground................... • The +24 V DC power is distributed to the different components in the system from these breakers...........Cabling................ the PCS CDMA Minicell also requires AC power for the heating elements of the heat exchanger.................. • Power cables are first connected to the terminal block on the PDA and then to the DC power conditioners............................. and Software Power Distribution Power Distribution ......... Connections............................ • The +24 V DC power feeds are then distributed to their respective circuit breakers........................................................................................................................ Overview 24 Volt Power Source 220 Volt Power Source The PCS Minicell requires a +24 V DC and 220 V AC power source........................ The following applies to the +24 V DC power source: • The primary frame is supplied by five pairs of +24 V DC and +24 return (RTN) feeds from the power cabinet...................................................................... 3 ................................................... • Each set of power and return cables is then connected to the optional feed through capacitors for Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) protection.................

.5A) CB1 (7...........................................Cabling............5A) CB2 (5A) CB3 (5A) CB4 (5A) CB5 (15A) CB8 (2..... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 .............PCU2 (15v) CB11 Heat Exc..5A) CB10 (10A) CTU 0 CRC 1 CTU 1 CRC 2 CTU 2 RFTG Side 0 CB6 (5A) RCC Side 0 CRTU CTU Shelf .......... and Software Power Distribution Power Distribution Diagram The diagram below shows the +24-V power distribution in the Minicell........................................................................... Fans Heat Exchanger Lightning Protector Power Distribution Assembly Diagram Transient Capacitor Ground Bus 35 A The diagram below shows the power distribution assembly....................................... Connections... + 24v from DC Power Plant 5 4 3 2 24v RTN to DC Power Plant 1 DC Power Conditioner Terminal Lugs 35 A 35 A 35 A 35 A Feeder Circuit Breakers Lightning Protectors EMC Feed-through Capacitors Terminal Lugs 5 Transient Capacitors 2 2 2 Circuit Breakers 6 5 220AC CRC 0 CB20 (25A) CB19 (10A) CB18 (25A) CB17 (10A) CB16 (25A) CB15 (25A) CB14 (5A) CB13 (15A) CB12 (2.....5A) CB9 (7.........PCU1 (15v ) Fan 0 Fan 1 RFTG Side 1 CB7 (5A) RCC Side 1 CSU Shelf 1 G 2 CTU Shelf ............ AC Feeder Antenna Interface DC Feeder Tx S3p S3g S2p S2g S 1p S1g RF Tes t Rx/dx 6 Gnd L1 Gps S 3d0 /pS3 d1/g S2 d0/p S2 d1/g S 1d0/ p S 1d1 /g L2 240 Ac 5 4 3 2 Dc Feed 1 Pw r Cab Alar ms Power Cabinet Alarm Access Hole T1 Facilities Access Hole External User Alarm Access Hole T 1/e1 Ex t U ser Al arm s Antenna Receive Connection For GPS .......................15 .............

............................ CB15....... Powering Sequence If it becomes necessary to power down one of the radio cabinets...................... then turn off the circuit breakers in the order CB19........ CB18. and the remaining circuit breakers from CB1 to CB14....... Component Name Qty 25A Circuit Breaker (CRC) 3 15A Circuit Breaker (RCC) 2 20A Circuit Breaker (CTU) 4 10A Circuit Breaker (15 V PCU) 2 5A Circuit Breaker (RFTG and Fans) 4 5A Circuit Breaker (CRTU and CSU) 2 10A AC Circuit Breaker (Heat Exchanger) 1 Circuit breaker values in this table depend on the version of PDA the customer might have..25-inch copper grounding plate with grounding studs and terminal blocks......... and Software Power Distribution Note The diagram depicts the 3-sector Minicell....................16 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...... CB16......Cabling.. and then the BCR faceplate switches................................ the prescribed sequence is to turn off all the BCR faceplate switches............... .... CB20.... The components used in the circuit breaker panel are shown in the table below.... The circuit breaker panel distributes the DC and AC power in the cabinet through the circuit breakers..................... To power the radio cabinet back up.... the prescribed sequence is CB1 to CB20............. The omni Minicell is quite different..... 3 ............. Connections................... Panel Description Circuit Breaker Panel The panel consists of the following components: • Antenna lightning protector (also known as antenna interface) (14) • DC power conditioner (5) • AC power conditioner (1) • +24-volt return common bus bar (1) • Transient capacitors (5) • 0........... CB17...........

.............................. and Software Power Distribution Whenever it is necessary to turn the power off on a radio cabinet....................... it will be necessary to wait at least 15 minutes after power has been restored before the RFTGs can be put back into service................. ............................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ............................................................................................................. Connections...................17 ..........Cabling......

.......................................................... 06 .............................Cabling............... 25 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 XMT to TELCO RCV From Telco Transmit CSU Lightning Protector 6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10 From CSU To CSU 11 12 13 14 15 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 21 22 23 24 25 Description Punch downs 3 and 8 for Primary T1/E1 Punch downs 1 and 6 for Growth I T1/E1 Punch downs 5 and 10 for Growth II T1/E1 The Network Facilities Interface is connected to the Primary Cabinet by way of an interface board located at the bottom of the Primary Cabinet (left hand side front in Minicell Version 2........................... 01 ... Receive CSU Lightning Protector Power Cabinet Alarm Protectors External User Alarm Protectors .......... OSP (Network Side) OSP (Network Side) CPE (Terminal Side) Lightning Protector Positions for: •Growth I: 1 and 6 •Growth II: 5 and 10 •Primary: 3 and 8 T GND R Front of Cabinet ........ and Software Network Facilities Interface Network Facilities Interface .............................................. Lightning protectors plug into one half of the board while alarm punch-down connections occupy the other half... .... 10 11 15 16 20 21 .......... ..................................... T1 Facilities Interface Diagram The diagram below shows the T1 facilities interface................................... and right hand side back in Minicell Version 4).......18 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ......................................... The interface board provides the circuit path back to the carrier facilities and also provides lightning protection to this path. CPE (Terminal Side) ........................... ..................... 05 ..................................................................... 3 ............................... ................................... Connections.....

......... and Software User Alarms User Alarms ...................................... User Alarm Connections User Alarm Diagram Setting user alarm connections to open or close on alarm is done by using the slide switches on a circuit board located in the Primary cabinet just above the T1 facilities and alarm interface board...... EXT ALM 6 AIM0 SIDE AIM1 SIDE CLOSE ON ALARM O PE N ON A LARM USER ALARM STANDARD CROSS CONN EC T ASSY 847576303 Wiring Options The user alarms can be wired through slide switches to monitor equipment alarms in two states: • Open on alarm (normally closed) • Close on alarm (normally open) More information on alarms is provided in Unit 6...........................................................19 ....................................................................... .............. Connections........................................................................Cabling....................................................................................................................................... The diagram below shows the user alarm standard cross connect................................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ...........................................................

.................................................................... GPS Receive Ant SIP Receive (RF) Transmit (RF) 15 MHz Ref Growth Cabinet 1 240 V AC 50/60 Hz Primary Cabinet RS-485 Bus (RFTG to SCT) CSU to DFI Alarms Power Cabinet TDM Bus Alarms +24 V DC 240 V AC + 24 V DC 240 V AC .. Connections...... 24V DC and 240 V AC power is directly provided to the Growth I from the Power cabinet..................................... the 15MHz reference.................. Connections Signal cables running through the Side Interface Panel connect the Primary and Growth I cabinets.......... In addition.................................................. and from the primary RFTG to the Growth I CRC0... Up to six Receive Ant..............20 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................... there are connections from the CSU in the Primary to the Growth I DFI................................................... Growth I Cabinet Connections Diagram The diagram below shows the Growth I cabinet connections to the Minicell primary cabinet and the power cabinet....................................................................... These cables carry the Receive and Transmit RF signals............................... Up to six Transmit Ant External User Alarms T1/E1 Lines ... and the Alarm signals......Cabling....... and Software Primary to Growth I Cabinet Connections Primary to Growth I Cabinet Connections ............................................................................................... 3 ................. terminating at the SCT board...........

..................................................................... Growth II Cabinet Connections Diagram The diagram below shows the Growth II connections to the antennas... Up to six Receive Ant..21 ................................................................. External User Alarms GPS Receive Ant SIP T1/E1 Lines Receive (RF) Transmit (RF) 15 MHz Ref Receive RF Signals Growth Cabinet 2 Growth Cabinet 1 240 V AC 50/60 Hz Primary Cabinet RS-485 Bus (RFTG to SCT) CSU to DFI Alarms Power Cabinet TDM Bus Digital & Control Signals Alarms +24 V DC 240 V AC + 24 V DC 240 V AC + 24 V DC 240 V AC Connections The Growth II cabinet sends digital and control signals to the Primary through the Growth I cabinet............................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ......... Growth I cabinet............................. digital and control signals to the Growth II cabinet through the Growth I cabinet............. and Software Growth II Cabinet Connections Growth II Cabinet Connections .............................................. Up to six Transmit Ant Up to three Transmit Ant........................................... The 24 V DC and 240 V AC power is directly fed by the power cabinet to the Growth II cabinet............................................Cabling.................................. and the power cabinet.................................................. The Primary cabinet sends RF receive.......................... ................. Connections.......................................

............................... Purpose Test paths are used to verify that the cell Receive and Transmit control paths are operating properly.........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................22 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............ and Software Growth II Cabinet Connections Test Paths Overview ............Cabling......................................................................... 3 ........................................................................ .......... Connections............................................ These paths make use of the CRTU unit......................

....... CTU BCR TX Upconverter Power Amp TX Filter -50 dB (Frwd) Coupler -40 dB (Refl) RS-422 control bus CRTU CDMA PCS RSP } } other sectors/ antennas other sectors/ antennas ........................................................................ Connections................... For that purpose....................23 . both in incident and in reflected modes.....................Cabling........................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ......................................... The RSP allows the test to be performed on all faces of the antenna................................................................................... the CRTU receives a fraction of the signal generated by the BCR and amplified by the CTU through a coupler connected to the antenna................................................................................ Overview One of the tests involves measurement of the transmit signal.................................................................................................................... and Software Example of Test Path: Transmit Path (Simplex Configuration) Example of Test Path: Transmit Path (Simplex Configuration) ..... Test Transmit Path (Simplex) Diagram The diagram below shows the test path for a transmission in a simplex configuration......

............................................................................................. BCR RX RX Coupler Filter LNA / Downconverter (RX MODULE) + -50 dB (Frwd) -40 dB (Refl) other ............... Connections............... which receives a fraction of the signal received by the antenna.....24 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........... Test Receive Path (Simplex) Diagram The diagram below shows the test path for reception in a simplex configuration................. and Software Example of Test Path: Receive Path (Simplex Configuration) Example of Test Path: Receive Path (Simplex Configuration) ................. CDMA PCS RSP CRTU RS-422 control bus ............................................................................................................................................................ The RSP allows the test to be performed on all faces of the antenna......................Cabling. / } sectors diversity }other sectors / diversity . 3 ...................................................................... then sends it to the frequency downconverter through a coupler connected to the antenna.................... Overview Measurement of the incident and reflected receive signals is done through the CRTU...........................................................................

.....................................................................................25 ...................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ............................................................... The complexity of the diagram reflects the increased number of components affected by the test beyond those of the test paths for the simplex receive and simplex transmit............................................................................................................... Connections................................. and Software Example of Test Path: Rx and Tx in a Duplex Configuration Example of Test Path: Rx and Tx in a Duplex Configuration ......................................................................... The test path shows: • Transmit filters • Receive filters • Incident and reflected RF energy for: • Test Path Rx and Tx (Duplex) – Antenna 1 – Antenna 2 Reflected and incident RF energy for: – Diversity 0 – Diversity 1 The diagram below shows the test path for transmission and reception in a duplex configuration.............. Duplexer -50 CDMA PCS RSP RS-422 Control bus Rx -40 TX Module BCR C R T U -50 Ant2 { { { { { { { { } other sectors } other sectors } other sectors } other sectors other sectors} other sectors} other sectors } Coupler Tx -40 Duplexer -50 Coupler Rx -40 other sectors} ................ Overview The CRTU can also be used to measure incident and reflected signals in case the Minicell is equipped with duplex filters........................ Ant1 RX 1 LNA / Downconverter (RX Module) RX 0 LNA / Downconverter (RX Module) Upconverter TX Incident Ant1 TX Reflected Ant1 TX Reflected Ant2 TX Incident Ant2 TX Reflected Div 0 RX Incident Div 0 RX Incident Div 1 RX Reflected Div 1 RX { Power Ampl.....Cabling..

...............................26 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............... it will not be re-migrated by the "Automatic Overhead Channel Placement Algorithm Feature.......................Pilot/Sync/Paging • Overhead Channel-..................Cabling......... can cause the migration of the overhead channels......................... 3 ... Overview Test Types The CDMA Radio Test unit (CRTU) can perform functional tests on the minicell............. The reason for this is that it is suspected that the CRTUm is faulty and not the CEs............... If a faulty CRTUm is left in-service it could cause overhead channel migration to migrate through all available traffic CEs and eventually none would be left to handle calls.............. Once a channel has been manually placed..........Access Channel • Traffic Path • Pilot Level • Antenna • Single Channel Selective Functional Test Manual Overhead Channel Placement Manual overhead channel placement addresses the issue of overhead channels being moved to less than optimum locations as a result of routine diagnostics or fault recovery..... This allows a customer to manually select the location of overhead channels............................................" Fault recovery or routine diagnostics.............. If HEH determines that the overhead channel FT has detected three failures on a minicell within a 15-minute period then HEH will request MRA to remove the CRTUm from service........... and Software Functional Tests Functional Tests ..................................................................... the "Automatic Overhead Channel Placement Algorithm Feature" will become operable again. then the Functional Test (FT) will inform the Hardware Error Handler (HEH) of the failure..... Connections................. however........ These are as follows: • Overhead Channels -............................................ HEH will then instruct the Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA) to migrate the overhead channel assignment to a different CE............................ ...................... HEH Functions if Overhead Channels Fail If any of the overhead channels fail.................................................. At this time................... There are several aspects of the minicell which are tested with functional tests.............

.... it demonstrates the proper operation of the carrier on which the call was made.................... The test uses the CRTU........................... sync..... Overview Overhead Channel Test This test verifies that the cell can transmit overhead channels and that the mobile can access the overhead channel.. ....... Result: If the response indicates that the system is idle.......27 ........................ Connections. Test Overview Depending on the test command......................... the test has passed......................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ................................................. The overhead channel functional test is used to verify that the pilot........................................................Pilot/Sync/Paging ................................................. sync.............................................Pilot/ Sync/Paging Functional Tests -........ as follows: 1 The CRTU interface (CRTUi) instructs the CRTUm to connect to one antenna face through the RSP........ If the response indicates otherwise....... This functional test first checks the status of the mobile................ and paging channels for that face....................................................................................... either one or all faces can be tested.............................. ....Overhead Channels -...... The line between the CRTUi .......................................................................................... the test has failed........................................ page....... ....................................................................................... then instructs the CRTUm to originate a call............................................. When the call completes....................... 3 The “mobile” transitions to the system idle state...................Overhead Channels -................................. and Software Functional Tests -............................... 2 The “mobile” in the CRTUm acquires the pilot................................ and access special purpose channels are working properly by establishing a CDMA MOST call.............Cabling..................................................................... 4 The CRTUi queries the status of the CRTUm............................ ..................................................................................................... When the call is established.. FT requests the status of CDMA overhead channels from the CRTUm...................... Pilot/Sync/Paging Functional Test Diagram The diagram below shows the overhead channel functional test signal flows for the pilot/sync/paging channels........ The test proceeds automatically........................

.............. . the test signals do not need to be sent over the air............. RCC PILOT/SYNC PAGE CEs MOBILE CRTUm CRTUi C C C Nature of the Test Signals C C U A C U B C R C T U RSP C O U P L E R S TX ANT The signals sent to and received from the CRTUm simulate communication with a wireless terminal.........Overhead Channels -...Pilot/ Sync/Paging and the RSP and the line between the CRTUi and the CRTUm are control lines..............28 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................................ All other lines are voice.........Cabling.............................................................. Because the CRTUm is a hard-wired mobile.. and Software Functional Tests -.................... 3 ........................................ Connections...............

.........................................................................Cabling........................................ The line between the CRTUi and the RSP and the line between the CRTUi and the CRTUm are control lines............................ 1 The CRTUi performs the pilot/sync/paging tests as before............................. and Software Functional Tests -........................................................................... The test uses the CRTU.......................... ............ The test proceeds as follows: ....................................................................................29 ................................ RCC MOBILE CRTUm CRTUi CTU C C C C C U A C U B C R RU Test Overview RSP C O U P L E R S TX ANT RX ANT Depending on the test command.................................................................................................................................................................................................... .Access Channel Functional Tests -.................................................................................................................................. Overview This test verifies that the cell can receive Overhead Channels...... 3 The Pilot/Sync/Access Channel element receives an “over the air” origination message and passes it to the CDMA Cluster Controller..................................................................... All other lines are voice............................................................................ Connections..................................... the CRTUi instructs the CRTUm to dial the (MOST) directory number.... ........................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ................Overhead Channel-........ .................................................... 2 If this test has passed........................................ Access Channel Functional Test Diagram The diagram below shows the signal flows for the functional test of the overhead channel access channel.............Access Channel ..... 4 The CCC instructs the Page Channel to acknowledge the “mobile” origination.....Overhead Channel-.................................. either one or all faces can be tested.........................................................

................................................................................. 6 The CCC informs the RCC (CRTUi) that the “mobile” has originated a call..................................................30 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................................................................ ........................................................................................................................ ....... 5 The Page CE sends an “over the air” acknowledgment to the “mobile”.............Functional Tests -.................................... 3 ..............................Access Channel Cabling...................................... and the CRTUm releases the call and control of the RSP......................................................................................... and Software .Overhead Channel-......................................... .......................................................................................... Connections.................................. 7 The RCC instructs the “mobile” to release the MOST number................................................................

............................................... using the CRTU.................................................................................. A CDMA MOST call will be established to the DCS and forced handoff will be performed to verify the traffic channel functionality............................. either one or all faces can be tested................ Test Overview Depending on the test command............... This handoff continues until all active.....Traffic Path . The design goal is to make this test less resource intensive at the ECP and DCS and at the same time automate the process of CE selection for handoff...................................................................... .............. If any CEs fail during the Traffic Path test........................31 ......................................Cabling. non-busy traffic CEs are tested.................................................................. HEH does not take any recovery action on failed CEs.. ............................. then HEH is informed and HEH will report only to the technician.......................................... then FT will notify HEH of the failure........ ............ Error Handling When a Traffic Path test is executed.............................................................. an Overhead Channel test is performed......... then the Traffic Path part of the test is executed............... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ................................................... Resource Usage In order to perform the traffic path functional test................................ the CRTUm will originate a call to a speech handler on the DCS and then the call is handed-off to the next active non-busy CE in the Minicell.................................. 1 The CRTUi selects an antenna face through the RSP.......................... HEH will apply the same recovery and migration strategy as described in the page 26.. and Software Functional Tests -..Traffic Path Functional Tests -................................................................ If any failures are detected during the execution of the Overhead Channel portion of the Traffic Path test................... 2 The complete Overhead Channel Functional Test is performed................................... This test is very resource intensive at the cell as the call is cycled through all CEs.................................. If the Overhead Channel portion of the test passes............... Connections.......... The test proceeds as follows: .. Overview This test checks the entire traffic path in active and idle states............................................................................. The objective of the traffic path functional test is to ensure that a CDMA traffic path can be established through every traffic CE in the Minicell and the established path is operational when used in a call.............. 3 The RCC requests message and subscriber validation to the ECP........

........ All other lines are voice........................................................................................................................................................... RCC MOBILE CRTUm CRTUi ACCESS MGR/ SWITCH M O S T E C P D F I D F I CTU C C C C C U A C U B C R RU RSP C O U P L E R S TX ANT RX ANT ................................................................................ Connections.................. Identifies the call as a CRTU-designated MOST call 2...................................Traffic Path ......... and Software Functional Tests -..................................................................................................... The CRTUm returns the traffic channel state... 6 Traffic Channels Functional Test Diagram The RCC queries the status of the CRTUm......................... Sends a traffic-channel assignment message to the RCC 3.....32 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 . Sets up PHV at the switch ........................... The line between the CRTUi and the RSP and the line between the CRTUi and the CRTUm are control lines...........................................Cabling................ Handoff procedures follow.......... 4 The ECP: 1...................................... indicating that the CRTUm is in a talk state......................................................................................... 3 ......................... 5 The RCC instructs a CCC to select a specific CE assigned to the antenna face being tested to handle the CRTU origination............................ The diagram below shows the signal flows for the functional tests on the traffic channels................ ................................................

.................................. The test proceeds as follows: ...... different cell configurations.......... Connections.................................................................................................. an Overhead Channel test is performed.............................. 2 If the Overhead Channel portion of the test passes then the pilot signal strength measurement is taken............ 1 Result: If any failures are detected during the execution of the Overhead Channel portion of the Pilot Level test........................................................ This is an important factor in determining the physical size of the Minicell coverage area................ Calibration Settings Test Overview During the calibration procedure for the Minicell.... a value is determined that compensates for attenuation variances in the CRTU’s RF signal path due to differing cable lengths........................................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ....................... then FT will notify HEH of the failure............................................................ and Software Functional Tests -......... unit variations......................................... Through the automatic initiated request........................................................................................................... 3 If the signal is out-of-tolerance then HEH is informed and HEH will report only to the technician............................ HEH will apply the same recovery and migration strategy as described on page 3-26.....33 ................. either one or all faces can be tested....................... 1 When a Pilot Level test is executed................................................................................................................. Overview This functional test provides the technician with the power level (in dBm) of the CDMA pilot channel.Cabling............ ........................................................................................................Pilot Level Functional Tests -......... .........................................Pilot Level . Depending on the test command.............................................................. this test provides continuous monitoring of the pilot signal strength and will report when the value becomes out-of -tolerance...................... etc.......... This test provides the technician with more information to help detect and isolate hardware faults within the Minicell.................... . This calibration value is assigned to a translatable parameter and is used by FT to adjust the CRTU’s reported pilot signal strength..................................................................................... ..........................

... The ROP indicates the actual measured pilot level value and the expected pilot level value (calculated by the software................ Pilot Level Functional Test Description The test is a modified version of the Overhead Channel FT.......... ..... and Software Functional Tests -........ PLFT Errors and Output PLFT generates ROP output and alarms on the Status Display Pages (Cartoon Pages) for out-of-tolerance Pilot Levels........................... based on amplifier type....... RSP...................Pilot Level Recovery: No recovery action is done by HEH if the pilot signal is out-of-tolerance............ 3 ... Connections.... Like other FTs.... cabling...... a manually initiated PL test will generate ROP output.................... Pilot Level Calibration Occurrence The Pilot Levels need to be calibrated when any of these procedures are performed on the Minicell: PLFT Diagnostics • Initial load of cell generic or installation of new cell • Changing of components in the RF test path (CRTUm.. an alarm indication is set on the CDMA Minicell Equipment status display page......... PL can be executed manually or automatically.................... or the cell must be stable cleared to clear the alarm........ and BCR attenuation values in translations). filters) • Changing of amplifier type......................... Scheduled PLFTs run silently unless an error occurs............. The 2131 page will show CDMA equipment in trouble (red).. The PLFT must be executed with ATP results...... As with OCFT and TPFT.......Cabling..... pilot dgu. if the pilot signal is out-of-tolerance... The 2138 page will show the affected CCC and PAF as degraded (yellow). Also....34 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...................... pilot dgu..... Frequency of automatic (scheduled) PLFT is set in translations. or BCR attenuation fields in translations A failed PLFT will cause the cell status to show a major alarm (red) on the 2121 page...

..................... Without this test the operator might be unaware that there is no transmission from a sector of a cell which appears to be operating correctly...........................Cabling............................. The most common is damage to the antenna from adverse weather..................................Antenna Functional Tests -............................................................................ Connections.................................................. A CDMA antenna can become inoperable for several reasons. The incident power being much larger than the reflected power shows that the transmit antenna does not have a fault........................................ results are reported only when the results indicate an antenna fault.......... Overview Reason for the Test This test informs the operator when a CDMA transmit antenna is not operating correctly............... An expected value is 7 dB............................... commonly referred to as the Antenna Functional Test (ANT FT) provides a means for maintenance technicians to verify the proper operation of the CDMA cell sites................. ............................................................. Description The CRTU Transmit Antenna Test is done by comparing the incident power to the antenna with reflected power from the antenna. Antenna Test Process The test is performed on a specified sector by measuring the RF energy incident to and reflected from the transmit antenna......................... ........................... ................. ANT FT provides an alarmed output report on the ROP and an alarm indication on the status and display page (SDP) when the tests indicate that the antenna is not operating properly............... The Pilot Channel shall be measured for this comparison....... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 ........................................................................... When the CRTU is used for antenna testing in the automatic mode...... 1 The CRTU is switched by the RSP between directional couplers that extract RF energy in the two directions from the transmit antenna.......................... This feature can be executed in the manual mode or automatic mode............ and Software Functional Tests -.............................. The value by which the incident power must be greater than the reflected power to show that the transmit antenna does not have a fault will be determined in testing.............35 ...........................................................Antenna ............... CRTU fault Isolation ............................................................... 2 The CRTU measures the strength of the incident and reflected pilot signal.......Antenna Test...... with an additional allowance for uncertainties in the measurement....................

................................................................. ........................ 3 ...................................................36 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ......................................................... Connections......... ......................... 4 The antenna is not taken out of service if the test fails....................................................................... who then decides on further maintenance action.................................................................................................. and Software Functional Tests -..... 5 Transmit Antenna Tests on that sector are inhibited and the operator is notified...... ........................................................................................................................................................ 3 If the energy reflected from the antenna is excessive........Antenna ................. the test indicates that insufficient RF energy may be being transmitted from the antenna under test and therefore there may be an antenna fault.Cabling.........................................................................................................................................................................................

. ............. the CCC. the test will have passed.........37 ..... carrier............ the operator selects the CE.......... the test ........................... A second way this test may be used is to verify a repair after it is completed.................................Cabling.... or on the path connecting two of the equipment items......................................... For this test............................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 3 .............. the ACU.Single Channel Selective . If a fault is detected....................................... For more information see the section "Single Channel Selective Functional Test" on page 7-22..................................... When the cell receives the message associated with the test.................................. 1 If the CE is idle......................................... In addition........Single Channel Selective Functional Tests -..................... the cell will instruct the CRTU to originate a call to a pre-defined DN. it is not executed as a part of routine functional testing but on demand by a TI command......... and sector on which the test is to be performed and enters this information through a TI input command.... Markov signals will be transmitted between the CRTU and the CE so that even minor distortions in the transmission path can be detected....................................................... If the call reaches the talk state........................... will attempt to execute the test with a camp-on or other mechanism.............................. A typical way to identify a fault on a traffic channel is with the traffic path functional test.................................. The carrier is specified because a CE may be able to operate on different carriers... Overview Reason for the Test Description More Information Single Channel Selective Functional Test Process Although this is a functional test................................... it will perform one of the following: ..... This capability extends the traffic path functional test so that the operator can isolate a fault along the traffic channel from a specified CE to a specified sector...................................................... 2 If the CE is busy with a call the cell.............................................................. normal traffic channel allocation will be bypassed and the preselected CE is assigned to this call.............. The operator can apply the single channel selective functional test several times on channels that partly overlap the channel on which the fault was found..... The fault can be isolated on the basis of which tests succeed and which tests fail. BCR.......... however.... and Software Functional Tests -............................... which tests all the equipped CEs in a cell in sequence................. When the cell sees the call origination from the CRTU mobile. Connections....................... it is not known in which of the equipment items on the channel the fault is located...................... The fault could be in the CCU. If the attempt is successful......................

....................... Result: Possible results returned to the operator are as follows: 1............. 3 If the CE is maintenance busy or unequipped....... ............................. No recovery or fault isolation will be attempted if the test fails.............................................. otherwise the test will be canceled.......... .................................. 2.......................Single Channel Selective Cabling.............................. 3 ..........38 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ......... Connections..Functional Tests -....................... The test was performed but the test identified deficiencies that are given in the results............. the BBA........... and Software described in item 1 will be performed on the CE that is designated.. The test was satisfactory........................ the CE....... the cell................ the sector.......... The results of the test will identify the speech handler (SH) in the test path............................. and the carrier................... The CE implies a specific carrier and it is included as a convenience to the operator........ the test will be canceled........ 3.............................. It was not possible to perform the test (together with the reason why it was not possible to perform the test).. the CCC........

...• Operation and Management Platform • Accessing the OMP .........................• Video States of SDP Display ..• Status Display Pages Linkage ..................................................................• Output Messages .......................................................................................4-19 ...4-20 ........ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ..........- - - - - 4-12 .- - - - - - - - - - - - 4-5 .......• Access Options to the PCSC .................................4-17 Status Display Pages Basics • SDP ....4-27 - - ..4-15 ........4-21 ..........................4-10 Craftshell Interface and Read Only Printer Basics • Purpose of Craftshell Commands ......................1 .......... Purpose Contents Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell 4-3 • Objectives ..• Read-Only Printer .................................................4-23 .............................................• Sample of Craftshell Listing ......• Status Display Pages ............................................4-8 .........................................4-25 .............................4-6 .......• Accessing Status Display Pages from the OMP • SDP Layout ...4-4 Interfacing with the Minicell • The User Interface .........4-14 .................4-16 ...............................- - - - - 4-18 ...............................4-13 .......4 Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Overview .............................4-9 ................• Craftshell Commands Syntax ....

..• ceqccu Form ....................• Inserting...SDP 2131 ............• Required Fields -.................................• Example of Switch Views ...• Access Manager Forms ......• 5ESS®-2000 Switch Views ...• Accessing the RC/V Form ...................4-52 .............................. 4 .. or Updating an RC/V Form • Required Fields .................2139 ........SDP 2121 .• Getting Help For RC/V Screens .............Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell • • • • • APX Index .....SDP 2138 CDMA Equipment Status Page Sample Status Display Page ..........................• RC/V Access Manager Forms ....................................................................................................- - - - - - - 4-35 4-36 4-37 4-38 4-39 4-40 4-41 4-42 4-44 4-45 4-46 4-47 4-48 4-49 4-50 Getting Information 4-51 • Schematic Drawings ...............• ceqcom2 Form .............................2 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..........Results ... Reviewing.......................• ceqface Form .............................- - - - - - - - - - 4-30 4-31 4-32 4-33 4-34 RC/V Screens Basics • RC/V Screens Overview ..................................• cell2 Form .................................

........................................................................... ............................................... This unit covers the different ways to perform these actions........................................ SDP/ROP Screens SDP Reference The screen images in the graphic below show the 2121 SDP and a sample of the ROP output.................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ................................................................................................................... The SDPs are covered in detail in Chapter 10 of the 401-610-160 manual............................................. Purpose Operators need to interface with the Minicell to enter commands and receive status reports on the condition of the Minicell........3 ............................................................................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Overview ....................................................

........................................................................................... This lesson is also designed to enable students to identify the format of commands and responses for each of the described tools.......................................... 4 .................. .......................................................................... This lesson is designed to enable students to identify them and to differentiate the conditions of their use........................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Objectives Objectives ........................................................................................................................................................................................ Identifying the Tools Using the Tools Several tools are available to support communication between the Minicell and the PCSC............................................4 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...............

.......................... Purpose The operational status (“health”) of the PCS CDMA Minicell may be viewed via the following: • Equipment status read-only reports (ROPs) • Graphical Status Display Pages (SDPs) • A command line interface tool called a craftshell .................................................................................................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................5 ..............................................................................................................................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Objectives Interfacing with the Minicell Overview ........

.............. Forms are accessed through a command line................... Status Display Pages (SDP or “Cartoon Page”) This is a graphic interface available on the OMP.............................. using a communication package........................... using the Unix® command “TIpdunix” at the Unix prompt............................ Two types of screens are available from the PCSC: Craftshell Interface vs.......... and responding to that information...................... Recent Change/Verify (RC/V) Screens Forms provide a means to change and view the operating parameters of a Minicell.... The craftshell interface and the SDP are two different ways of obtaining information pertinent to PCS CDMA Minicell performance......... 4 . Electronic Access to the PCSC Interfaces Supported at the PCSC Electronic access to the ECP at the PCSC can be done through a user interface............................................ The PCS CDMA Minicell user interfaces are supported by the AUTOPLEX® 1000 system...... Craftshell can be invoked: • Through a dial-up modem............................................................... such as ProComm Plus® • Through a data line....... Although the ways are not the same............................... ........ Read (Receive) Only Printer (ROP) This is a one-way interface that provides a running report of activities seen from the MSC.... Display of only those activities that are relevant to a specific Minicell is possible through specific craftshell commands...................... Status Display Page (SDP) • Forms — used for interactions with the Access Manager • Views — used for interactions with the 5ESS-2000 Switch............ using a laptop computer.... Craftshell This is a command line interface that enables you to perform diagnostics.6 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................ Depending on configuration and login authorization................................................. access to the ECP may be provided directly or through the OMP............. the information that is returned is identical in scope................... The cell site is connected to the PCSC and controlled by the OMP with appropriate authorization.......................... provided that the Minicell site is equipped with a regular telephone line.....Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell The User Interface The User Interface ......

............................ When access to SDP is allowed.. Commands and output messages are displayed in real time on the craftshell and the ROP........... compared to SDPs............................... The SDPs are simpler to use than the craftshell.....7 ............................... However...... Alarms are displayed on SDPs and printed to the ROP as soon as they are activated... giving the operator the flexibility of selecting the best tool for the task at hand.......... but it covers the entire spectrum of commands that may be needed to perform complex troubleshooting.................................................................. .. and are well designed to provide a “bird’s eye” view of the status of a Minicell......................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell The User Interface The craftshell interface demands a higher level of knowledge on the part of the user...... specific keystrokes can be used to toggle back and forth between SDP and craftshell...... corresponding updates of SDP displays are done at preset intervals and may lag by a few minutes behind craftshell and ROP outputs........................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 .............

..................................................................................... .................... Overview Two access options are potentially available to the technician: • Direct access to the computer that controls the call processing of the PCSC and Cell sites • Access through the front-end Operation and Maintenance Platform (OMP) workstation............................ OMP Access This mode of access enables a more precise control of the functionalities available to the technician......... 4 ........................................................................................................... Mode of access is determined by the telephone connection available to the Minicell...............Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Access Options to the PCSC Access Options to the PCSC ................................................................................ ECP Access This mode of access can potentially provide access to all the functionalities of the switch.................................................................................. most of which are not relevant to Minicell maintenance................. including network management.......... Reference More information on the OMP and ECP can be found in the 401-610160 manual.8 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..........................................................

......... the OMP provides the combined flexibility of all user interfaces in a multi-tasking environment..Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Operation and Management Platform Operation and Management Platform ................................ ...................................................................................................................... • • Reference Adjunct Processor – Provides additional terminal support – Provides off-line processing – Provides enhanced data management – Provides added interfaces to the APX-1000 Main purpose of the OMP is to improve operation and maintenance effectiveness by providing a single point access to all user interfaces and multi-tasking from the same terminal................................................................ From a user perspective..................................................................................................................................................................................................9 .......... Overview Using the OMP The OMP is a workstation that acts as a front end to the ECP..................................... More information on the OMP can be found in the 401-610-160 manual........................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 .....

. and similar commands........................profile (or ... for reviewing entries you have made at the Unix prompt.................. you may have to set terminal type (by typing TERM = <termtype>..................................................................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Accessing the OMP Accessing the OMP . Overview Communication with the Minicell is done through the OMP....................................................................................10 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....... For instance............................ Accessing the Craftshell Interface Be aware of the following when accessing the craftshell interface: • • PC (laptop) software settings: – E-7-1.......... 9600 baud – Termtype emulation = vt-100........ 4 . or similar You may have to set certain Unix environment variables at the login prompt.............................................................. Depending on the type of connection installed at the Minicell....... Your system administrator will advise you if you must enter environment variables at the Unix command line....... to achieve correct terminal behavior....... export TERM) at the system prompt if this variable is not present in your user ........... that communication may be through a dial-up line........login) file.............. your system displays an AUTOPLEX main menu and windows that provide a path to the craftshell.......................... Once logged in........................................ Your system administrator will explain how to use the history command.. ........................................................................

. ...................... SunOS 5....................................................... may vary from installation to installation.........Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Accessing the OMP Craftshell Access Diagram The graphic below depicts menus the user passes through to access the craftshell....................5...................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ...........................................11 .............. as well as access methods..... 1 Autoplex(R) OMP Technican menu AUTOPLEX(R) System 1000 ECP Access 5ESS(R)-2000 Switch DCS Access DEFINITY(R) DCS Translations and Maintenance DEFINITY(R) DCS Hardcopy control > OMP Status Miscellaneous Applications Exit 2 Autoplex(R) System 1000 ECP Access menu ECP Recent Change/Verify > ECP Craft Shell ECP RTR Shell ECP Control and Display ECP EAI MCRTms Inc...............1 Generic May 1996 ECP ROP Log Viewererase character ECP Physical ROP (Including PRMs) Log Viewer Site Dependencies Number and nature of windows for accessing the craftshell.......................

................................ a Minicell........... 4 ......................................................................................................... and get output messages from.........................................................................................................12 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .............................................. The output messages occur in response to craftshell commands and ROP output.... Purpose The craftshell provides the most flexible means to input commands into.................. ...................................................................................................................................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Accessing the OMP Craftshell Interface and Read Only Printer Basics Overview .........................................

............................13 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Standard Craftshell Craftshell commands are used to: • Identify operational status • Remove and restore a unit from service • Diagnose a unit • Download Non-Volatile Memory • Stop a command • Initialize a site .................................................................................................................................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Purpose of Craftshell Commands Purpose of Craftshell Commands ........................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ..........................................

..... with a space between the word “cell” and the cell number............ Follow strict syntax........Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Craftshell Commands Syntax Craftshell Commands Syntax .............. “tlp”................................”.g....... Craftshell Syntax Syntax Diagram Entering commands at the craftshell requires attention to precise syntax................g............ e.........14 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................................. – Data (if applicable).... e...g.............................. punctuation...............g................................................CRTU .......................................... “cell #”............. DGN: CELL 21.... spacing (space before a numeral) and capitalization rules............ preceded by a “. e....... DGN............... followed by “:”.................. “ucl”.... e... and a comma between elements................... The graphic below shows a sample command line and explanations of the various elements..UCL :TLP For More Information Lucent Technologie’s Cell Site/DCS Input/Output Messages............................................ – Identification: Where to perform the task................................ – Options (if applicable)....... preceded by a “:”....... 410-610107 . – Action: What is to be performed.. 4 ........................................................

............ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 .... MANUAL.... M = Manual................................................... ** = Major................................................ Overview Output messages are formatted system responses to technician commands or events in the system................................................................................................... – Abbreviated time........................................... M 52 DGN:CELL 21 CRTU ATP 05/14/96 08:52:45 #034389 M 52 REPT:CELL 21 CRTU OOS..... Output Messages Diagram The graphic below shows an example of output from the DGN craftshell command and explanations of the fields........Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Output Messages Output Messages ..................................... RMVD 05/14/96 08:52:45 #034390 For More Information Output messages are explained in detail in Lucent documentation Cell Site/DCS Input/Output Messages.............. • Include the following fields: – Priority : Alarm (*C = Critical.15 .................... Field is blank for informational message..................................... Message body...... Sequence Number........ * = Minor)........... 401-610-107............................. Date......................... A = Automatically generated............. ...............................................

................. 4 ...........tty& 02/17/97 47 #001818 M 47 OP:CELL 1 STATUS & CONTROLS BOOT ALW.......................................................................16 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............ PH MON ALW.. See page Craftshell Commands Syntax: page 4-14 for the syntax ......................................................................................tty& 02/17/97 47 #001821 dgn:cell 1.....................tty& 02/17/97 47 #001816 M 47 OP:CELL 1 DL 0 CONNECTED DEVICE ..................... PH STATE ACTIVE......................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Sample of Craftshell Listing Sample of Craftshell Listing .tty& 02/17/97 47 #001817 M 47 OP:CELL 1 DL 1 CONNECTED DEVICE ........................... M 47 OP:CELL 1 COMPLETED DEVICE ...................... DL(S) UP FORWARD SETUP CHANNEL CONTROL NORMAL (INH) DEVICE .................................................................................................. crtu Craftshell Syntax Entering commands at the craftshell requires attention to precise syntax............. CP ALW................................... The graphic below shows the listing received when issuing the OP:CELL craftshell command........... Overview Sample Listing Graphic A craftshell display is a continuous listing of input commands and output messages...............................................

...... Spontaneous reports are generated without any input from the technician. The ROP printouts should be reviewed at least once a day for CDMA-related messages................... Report Access The HEH and CPFail messages are printed at the ROP and may reflect problems not displayed on the SDPs....... To make this easier............... An example of a spontaneous report is the reporting of a cell site hardware error and corresponding automatic recovery action.................. CRTU.. ACTIVE 10/22/96 14:05:20 #084039 Report Types There are two types of output reports: solicited and spontaneous.... tools will be provided which will allow these messages to be filtered from the normal stream of ROP messages and routed to a CDMA log file at the OMP.......17 ................................. ALL TESTS PASSED 10/22/96 14:05:20 #084038 * 05 OP:CELL 169....................... Reference Format and meaning of ROP output are explained in the Lucent Technologies AUTOPLEX® 1000 Output Messages Manual............................................................................................... COMPLETED..................................... Sample ROP Output The graphic shows a selected portion of the ROP output as samples of the messages displayed...................................................... Solicited reports are generated in response to the commands entered by the technician.................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Read-Only Printer Read-Only Printer ............. These tools will also analyze these messages and sort and summarize them by specific equipment unit............ M 05 RST:CELL 169 CRTU........ Appearance The ROP appears as a craftshell output.......... 401-610107............. ............................................ Description The Read-Only Printer (ROP) is a continuous report of system activities................................ that can be configured by a “Selective Cell Site Messages” command from a Minicell to the PCSC to display only data related to the operation of a Minicell or a group of Minicells.... they are initiated automatically by system events or conditions................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ...

.............................................................................................. ...................................18 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................................................................................................................... 4 ............................................................................................................... More information on the SDPs can be found in 401-610-160.............................................................................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Read-Only Printer Status Display Pages Basics Overview ......................................................... Purpose Reference SDPs present predesigned scenarios for accessing and/or viewing a Minicell operating condition.

................................................... ....................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ............................................................................................................... The graphic below is a sample of the 2131 SDP.......................... Overview SDP Sample SDPs provide a “user friendly” tool to monitor the status of a Minicell...............................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell SDP SDP .......................................................19 ............................................................. using a consistent display format.......................................................................................................................................

.................................. and IMS................ Status display pages (SDPs) graphically represent the hardware and software subsystems of the Minicell site............................... ...................................... SDPs make extensive use of colors and flashing indicators (status display pages are often referred to as cartoon pages).............................20 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .......................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Status Display Pages Status Display Pages ................................................. DCS............................................................................................................... Interaction with the Minicell Interaction with the Minicell can be done through: • “Poke” commands • Craftshell commands Depending on the volume of activities on the network.............. They also provide tools for interaction between the Switch and the Minicell............ Overview SDPs provide a “birds-eye” view of the Minicell site................ 4 ................................... there may be a noticeable delay between completion of a command and its acknowledgment by display on the SDP....................................... ECP...................................................

t TRKGRP 2134..........c 2151.................. CE Trouble DCS Trouble Cell Trouble Relationships between Status Display Pages 2138........... the technician invokes one or more SDPs to further isolate the Minicell site that communicated the fault condition.. While the fault is in progress..................21 .......................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Status Display Pages Linkage Status Display Pages Linkage .......................................... TRUNK Alarm 2132.. SDP Links Diagram The diagram below shows the summary of page access syntax for the more common pages and information associations between pages........t TRKGRP Packet Pipe Trouble CCC Trouble 2139........ SDPs show the technician/operator the inner workings of the PCS CDMA Minicell system............ The SDPs allow the technician to do the following: • View system status • Enter commands • Receive system responses The commands entered by the technician/operator offer the ability to communicate detailed and specific instructions to any of the Minicell sites serving the ECP.............c............c CDMA 2152....c DS-1 2136.........d.................d TRKGRP 2130 or 2121 Cell 2131.................................................................. If the ECP receives a fault from any Minicell site in the network.........n CCU............................................. CE SDPs are linked according to a hierarchy.................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ......................... Tasks Performed with SDPs SDPs provide an easy method of entering maintenance commands for accomplishing the following tasks: • Removing (deactivating) units • Restoring (activating) units ....................... using colors to indicate levels of severity............d............................ that fault is graphically indicated................c LAC CCU........................................c CellSoftware 2100 CELL Alarm Index 2150......................

....................................................... SDP access is not hierarchical........ .......... To access an SDP....................................................................22 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Status Display Pages Linkage Accessing Status Display Pages • Diagnosing (testing) units • Generating status output message reports on units • Inhibiting/Allowing: – Audits – Audit/HEH output – Call processing – Forward setup channel control – Functional tests – Interrupts – Routine diagnostics – Diversity error imbalance output Depending on which system function needs analysis.............................. you can access any SDP from any other SDP........................................................ you can call up the associated SDP from the Operations and Management Platform (OMP) or from the MCRT as described in the following procedures......... enter the SDP number at the command line of any SDP that is already in view.... 4 ...

....................................................................................................................................... Local practice may vary................ To back out of the menus................................. MSG allows message keyboard input............. 3 Select ECP Control & Display from the AUTOPLEX® System 1000 ECP Access menu....................................................................................................................................... simultaneously press the Control-f and 3 keys..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... This is one method of accessing the SDPs........... Procedure 4-2............. enter the unique status display page number (command) and press RETURN............... Accessing Status Display Pages from the OMP ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ............................................ 2 Select AUTOPLEX® System 1000 ECP Access from the OMP Technician menu..................................................... ............................ 1 Select OMP Software Applications from the Workspace menu...... Purpose Backing Out of the Menus Status display pages can be accessed from the OMP or the MCRT.......................................... Result The requested SDP is displayed............... ........................................................................................... 4 The cursor is positioned at the CMD< line and appears as CMD< „ The CMD function allows graphic display and menu command input...........................................................................................23 ......................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ....................................................... END OF STEPS ................................................ 5 To open the display.................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................ simultaneously press the Control-f and 6 keys.............Accessing Status Display Pages from the OMP Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Accessing Status Display Pages from the OMP ................... ......................................................... Accessing Status Display Pages from the MCRT .. To exit............... Local practice may vary................................................................... Procedure 4-1............................. This is one method of accessing the SDPs...............................................................................

.................................................................. The CMD function allows graphic display and menu command input..........................................................Accessing Status Display Pages from the OMP Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell ............ ND OF STEPS E ....................................................................................... Result The status display page is shown...............................24 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................... 3 To open the display...... enter the unique status display page number (command) and press RETURN....................APX Index page)................................................................. 2 Select command mode by pressing the F3 (CMD/MSG) function key............ .......................... MSG allows message keyboard input.................... Status display page numbers (commands) are identified (listed) under the CMD heading on the System 1000 index pages (100 .................... 1 At MCRT............................. ....................................................................... 4 ...................................................................................... The CMD< „ prompt is displayed (Cursor is in CMD input area)............................................................................. press F2 (NORM DISP) function key...........................................................................................................................Page Index page and/or 2100 ............................................................................................. ............

...c ................c ... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 .Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell SDP Layout SDP Layout ..........APX Index Page • 2121 ....DCS d d DS-1/AFAC Equipment Status Status 2150.... generic release.CCS7 Link Specifics 2184 ........... c ......DCS d TRKGRP Summary 2151........... date.Cell APX System StatusSummary 2131....c............. These SDPs are: • 2100 ..........Cell c LAC Status 2137.. time & time zone – 2nd & 3rd lines .............Cell c CCC n CCU Status D A ttyj-cdJ TTY 07 IMS CELL CDN CCS7 LINK MSC DCS TRUNK 2100 ... Dublin ECP 01 APX-1000 L7............m ....c....ECP location........a SII Cell c VR Status 2134........c .......Direct Networked-MSC Summary 2171.......d .MSC m [B]X..................0 SYS EMER CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR OVERLOAD SYS INH CU CU PERPH CMD< CMD C PAGE TITLE 2130 Site Status 2120 ...........................d.........CCS7 Point Code SS Status REPT APXSHL TERMINAL IN SERVICE SDPs You Use with the PCS CDMA Minicell While there are dozens of SDPs that are available at the MCRT for analyzing PCS equipment..Cell c CDMA Equipment Status 2139.......................t ..... General Layout The following identifies the different areas of an SDP: • A = Header area – 1st line ......................n ...............system status • B = Command entry (CMD<) to enter “poke” commands on this line • C = Page contents area • D = Scrolling area – SDP Sample A B User enters messages in Craft Shell mode The graphic below shows a sample of a Status Display Page to show the main screen area is an SDP.....c ........d ..........................................d TMS/MC Status 2140 ....DCS DCS d Status Summary 2143.........25 Link Status 2180 ...CCS7 Link Summary 2183 ...CCS7 Link Set Specifics 2182 ........... the following are most useful in analyzing PCS CDMA Minicell performance........Cell c Software Status 2133 ........System Equipage Summary 2132.....25 ...d DCS 2141..Cell c LC/SU/BC Status 2136 ..d...............t .........CCS7 Link Set Summary 2181 ...........sg................ terminal id...........CDN Status Summary 2170 ...... c SI Cell c VRG Status 2133............................DCS d Cell TRKGRP t Status 2160 ..........DCS d TRKGRP t Status 2152..Cell c DS-1 Unit Status 2135.........APX INDEX SYS NORM CMD PAGE TITLE 2142....c ............Cell c OTU/LMT Status 2138....c Cell c Equipment Status 2121 ............Minicell Site Status Summary ..............

.........26 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..........................Minicell LAC Status Page • 2138 .........................Status Page • 2132 ....TRKGRP Summary Page • 2152 ..............Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell SDP Layout • 2131 ...............................................................DCS Minicell TRKGRP Status Page ...................Minicell DS-1 Unit Status Page • 2136 .................................Minicell CDMA Equipment Status Page • 2139 ....... 4 .............................Minicell Equipment .........Minicell CCC CCU Status Page • 2150 .........Minicell Software Status Page • 2134 ...............

........................................................................................ Color Scheme SDP Video States Table In the PCS CDMA Minicell......S..................................................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Video States of SDP Display Video States of SDP Display ...................................: black on red steady • Minor: white on red minor • Unavail............................................................................................................... Other background colors are used to signify specific conditions that may or may not require attention...... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 .........27 ...................... The graphic below lists the more common video states seen on Status Display Pages..................................... • Critical: white on red critical • Major : white on red major • O....................: black on purple steady unav • Standby: white on blue steady stby oos • Normal: black on green steady <none> • Alarm: white on red flashing alarm • Active: black on green steady act • Trouble: white on red steady trbl Steady or Flashing Indicators The table below shows the alarm types for indicators......................................................................................O... the color green denotes normalcy..... Logical State Text Displayed Color Terminal critical alarm <none> or critical white on red major alarm <none> or major white on red minor alarm <none> or minor white on red alarm alarm white on red .................. the color red on an SDP generally signifies a non-normal condition....

...... Logical State Text Displayed Color Terminal unknown <none> white on black standby stby white on blue trouble trbl white on red equipped equip white on black growth grow or <none> white on magenta black on blue initializing init white on magenta idle idle white on black reverse busy rbsy white on red .....................................................................................28 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .............................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Video States of SDP Display Indicators—Black Text The table below shows the alarm types for indicators with black text......................................................................... 4 .......................................... Logical State Text Displayed Color Terminal system normal <none> black on green active act black on green out-of-service oos or <none> black on red unavailable unav black on cyan initialization pending Init black on magenta overload ovld black on white diagnose dgn black on red inhibit inh black on white indeterminate indt or <none> black on yellow busy busy black on green warning warn or <none> black on yellow soft fault soft black on yellow DS1 alarm ds1a black on red OOS limit exceeded oos_ex black on red WARNING isolated WARNING or black on yellow <none> Indicators—White Text The table below shows the alarm types for indicators with white text....

......29 .................................... Logical State Text Displayed Color Terminal off-line OFL blue-green on red (Ring) arr_warning <none> blue on yellow blocked <none> blue on yellow arr_active (automatic <none> radio reconfiguration) green on black unequipped or <none> magenta on black red on yellow (Ring) OTU alarm otu red on yellow camp_on camp_on or <none> red on green LAC alarm lac or <none> red on yellow no_page <none> yellow on red uneq ....................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ...Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Video States of SDP Display assigned asgn white on magenta transient tran white on red guard gard white on red periodic reset rset white on red audit aud white on magenta no_psa (no pilot/sync/access) <none> white on red normal norm white on green out-of-service isolated OOS ISOL white on red (Ring) out-of-service normal OOS NORM white on red (Ring) arr_oos <none> white on red Indicators—Colored Text The table below shows the alarm types for indicators with colored text...........................................................................................................................

.............c..d ...n ....Cell c DS-1 Unit Status 2135.............c .............Cell Site Status Summary 2131.........CDN Status Summary 2170 ....Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell APX Index APX Index .....d ...................m ............ Dublin ECP 01 APX-1000 L7............CCS7 Link Specifics 2139.....DCS d Cell TRKGRP t Status 2160 ..c ......c ..System Equipage Summary 2130 .Cell c Software Status 2133.c ...30 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........................CCS7 Link Summary 2138.................d ...Cell c Equipment Status 2132........c ..DCS d TRKGRP t Status 2152.CCS7 Point Code SS Status A REPT APXSHL TERMINAL IN SERVICE Legend The APX INDEX gives a summary of the syntax to access a given SDP and a description of the information provided on that SDP.......Cell c OTU/LMT Status CMD PAGE TITLE 2140 .................t ..............CCS7 Link Set Specifics 2182 .............c ........ 2100 Snapshot Description SDP Index Graphic The 2100 .................... SDP code Description SDP Access Example a Physical Antenna Face c Minicell Site Numbers d DCS Number n CDMA Cluster Controller Number sg Server Group t Trunk Group Number VR Voice Radio VRG Voice Radio Group m Mobile Switching Center To view CDMA equipment status for cell 81.......................................Cell c CCC n CCU Status 2184 ......................APX System Status 2121 ........Cell c CDMA Equipment Status 2183 ........DCS d DS-1/AFAC Status 2150............25 Link Status 2180 .............DCS d TMS/MC Status 2143..APX Index page lists all the display pages that are accessible for the application..t ....DCS d TRKGRP Summary 2151.........c ..Cell c LC/SU/BC Status 2136......81 .........DCS Status Summary 2141........MSC m [B]X...........d.....................c................d ................DCS d Equipment Status 2142...0 SYS EMER CRITICAL MAJOR MINOR OVERLOAD SYS INH CU CU PERPH CMD< ttyj-cdJ TTY 07 IMS CELL CDN CCS7 LINK MSC DCS TRUNK 2100 ...............c .....SI Cell c VRG Status 2133... The graphic below is SDP 2100: the APX INDEX.........Direct Networked-MSC Summary 2171.... enter the command: 2138...CCS7 Link Set Summary 2181 ................ 4 .......Cell c LAC Status 2137.....sg..................APX INDEX SYS NORM CMD PAGE TITLE 2120 .d..a SII Cell c VR Status 2134.

.... ................................. Each cell is shown by the cell site number using the color codes (4-27) to indicate the cell status.................................................................................................... 2121 Sample The graphic below is a sample of the 2121 SDP...........................................................................................31 ...................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ..................................................................................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell SDP 2121 SDP 2121 .................................................................................................. Snapshot Description The 2121 .......................System Equipage Status page displays the disposition of the Minicell sites.........................

.............................................Minicell Equipment Status page displays the configuration of the Minicell site hardware units and provides a status summary of each unit or group of units.....Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell SDP 2131 SDP 2131 ...................... this page also has maintenance commands which can be used to: 2131 Sample • Change the Minicell hardware configuration • Generate a Minicell status output message report • Dump the Minicell maintenance request administrator queue (MRAQ) The graphic below shows the 2131 SDP................32 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...................................................................................................................................................... 4 .................................................................... 2131 Snapshot Description The 2131 ................................................................................ ...................................... The status of various equipment groups is shown using the color codes (4-27)................................................................................... In addition...

.................................................................................................................... Overview Screen Fields of the 2138 SDP The 2138 and 2139 SDPs are the only CDMA specific pages................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell SDP 2138 CDMA Equipment Status Page SDP 2138 CDMA Equipment Status Page ........................ Fields of interest in the 2138 SDP: • Tells which CCC is equipped and its status • Gives the operating channel number (set in translations) for the BBA . 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ......................................................................................33 ......................................................................................................................................................................................... The diagram below shows the 2138 Status Display Page................................................................................

...34 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............. Sync.. In this example the psa (Paging..2139 Sample Status Display Page ........... CEs (0 . The 2139 screen was chosen specifically because it changed substantially from an earlier ECP release.................................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Sample Status Display Page ..... Access) and page for each of the Physical Antenna Faces (PAF) occur as the first six CEs of the first CCU........ 1 2 3 Fields Features of interest (the number of the field corresponds to the number in the diagram): 1..... SDP screen number.................................................................................................................................... ................................................... The graphic below is a sample of an SDP with the areas of interest noted with the callouts....... CCUs (TCU or ECU) are displayed across the top of the table 3.......................2139 .......................9 for the ECU) are displayed down the table With the cross connect of the CRC shelves.......................... cell number........................................................................ any channel element can be used for the various functions................................ Overview Screen The screen image is used as an example to show the general look of these screens............................. and ccc in the upper right corner 2.......................... 4 .

.............................................................. ranging from its operating frequencies to its equipage. ...................................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Sample Status Display Page ............35 ........................................................................... Purpose Minicell configuration data... is stored in a database.................................................................................................................................2139 RC/V Screens Basics Overview .......................... Any change in that Minicell configuration must be reflected in its database.................................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 .................................................................. This is done through interactive Recent Change / Verify (RC/V) screens.....................

• Inputs to the cell database corresponding to a given configuration are called translations...................................................................................................... • All RC/V screens share the same “look and feel”... 4 ............................................................................. ..........................................36 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................... • Some of the changes are service affecting..............................................................................................................................................................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell RC/V Screens Overview RC/V Screens Overview ............................ • Recent Change/Verify (RC/V) screens are used to change and check on the configuration of a cell.............. Purpose of the RC/V Screens RC/V Screen Functions and Features RC/V screens provide the user interface to a Minicell database...................................

....................................... Overview Screen Formats 5ESS-2000 Switch Views Access Manager Forms Reference Forms are used to access the Access Manager............................................. For the recommended recommended translation parameter values for CDMA look up the CTSO Fax Flashes and Bulletins on the CD-ROM.................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Access Manager Forms Access Manager Forms ......................37 ........................................................ Two different screen formats are used to access the 5ESS-2000 and the Access Manager: • Switch screen views relate to the 5ESS-2000 operating parameters • Access Manager forms relate to the Minicell operating parameters The RC/V screens are grouped into 28 classes for accessing the 5ESS2000 switch............................................................................... to view and set the Minicell operating parameters........... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ................................................................. The forms of particular interest to the Minicell functioning are as follows: ecp Executive cellular processor cell2 Basic Minicell equipage ceqcom2 Specific Minicell equipage ceqface Specific Minicell face equipage ceqccu Specific Minicell CDMA CCU equipage............................................................................................................................................. See Lucent Technologies 235-118-251 for RC/V procedures............... ......

.................................................................................... 4 ..................................................... Switch View RC/V Graphic Reference The graphic below is a sample of the Recent Change and Verify Classes for the 5ESS switch............................................... ............................................................ Overview Use of Switch Views Switch views define the configuration of the switch that controls a Minicell.......... Given the fact that they make it possible to change an entire system configuration................ such as change in packet pipe size to accommodate new CCU.......................................................................... Switch views are rarely used for cell site maintenance................................................38 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..... Access to the switch views will normally be done under the control of a switch technician...........Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell 5ESS®-2000 Switch Views 5ESS®-2000 Switch Views ................... access to views is highly controlled............................... For more information on the switch views see Lucent Technologies 401-610-036............... One instance of access is as part of a cell update that requires re-configuration at the switch.........................................

.... Format Switch views have a header that resembles SDP headers................................................................................................................................................. Switch Views Sample The graphic below is a sample of a 5ESS switch view.................................... .................................................................. The body of the view lists and displays the value of the switch database fields that are covered by that view.............................................................................................. The lower part of the view is a craftshell command line....................39 ..................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Example of Switch Views Example of Switch Views ................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ...............................................................................................

........................... User Prompt .............................40 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...........................................................................................................................................an AUTOPLEX system feature that points you to a field in which you may enter information 2. and display three essential elements: 1..................................................... Help Message or System Status .......... Screen numbers are displayed on the top-right corner...................................... RC/V Forms layout The graphic shows the common areas to the RC/V forms............... Form Name User Prompt Screen Number Form Fields Help Message or System Status Form Essentials The Common Look All RC/V forms share the same “look” and “feel”...................... RC/V Form Fields ................ Reference For more information on the access manager views see Lucent Technologies 401-610-036.............................................................................Context-sensitive text that prompts you to enter a value in a field or provides system-level information Forms are arranged in screens........ .Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell RC/V Access Manager Forms RC/V Access Manager Forms ..... 4 ...... Position of a given field name. on a given screen or field number may change from time to time to accommodate different software releases............place holders that store and display RC/V information 3............................................. each of which contains a number of fields. The field names are arranged in columns on the left of the form while the assigned numbers corresponding data is displayed on the right...... Fields are assigned field numbers.........

.....................................................................................................................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Accessing the RC/V Form Accessing the RC/V Form .......................................................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ Purpose RC/V Access Screen Access to any RC/V form requires input of the form name at the prompt of a data entry screen....................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1 Type the form name at the prompt ............................................41 ....... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ........... To access an RC/V form: .......................................................... Procedure 4-3.... 2 Press Enter END OF STEPS ........................................................................................... This screen accepts legitimate values for RC/V screen names................................................................................................................................................................. Procedure to Access RC/V Forms .......................................................................................................................................... Entering a question mark (?) will list all allowed values........................

...................... or Updating an RC/V Form Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Inserting........................................ ..... In addition... It may be possible to unconditionally restore the associated maintenance objects or stable clear the cell to speed up the update on the TR parameters..............42 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................... These parameters are classified as 'non-updatable' parameters.................. This list can be found on the CD-ROM in the section on CTSO Fax Flashes and Bulletins............................. However.................. 4 ... It may take a long time........................................ All the translation parameters can be changed and 'updated' through RC/V screens................. Reviewing...................... The 'non-updatable' TR (Trunk reservation) parameters eventually will take effect through TR and/or the MRA audit............... Audits will change the status of the unit from OOS to unequipped and clear all the necessary software status fields.................... depending on how soon the audits come up............ review without changing................ Reviewing......... Purpose Non-Updatable Parameter List When accessing the RC/V Forms..............Inserting.. The translations will then be downloaded to the cells.................... the user must declare if they are going to insert. or update information in the form........... due to the need to reset the hardware or due to 'camp-on' for the live calls................. or Updating an RC/V Form ...................................... the audits have up to five minutes (camp-on time) to reset the maintenance objects before killing the live calls for the service-affecting TR parameter to take effect........... the unit should be removed from service............ The actions described in the non-updatable parameter list apply to 'equipped' maintenance objects only........................................................... some of the translations will not take effect immediately. For 'unequipping'.....................

.. . or Update Screen Sample Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell The sample screen below shows the confirmation screen for the type of access required on the RC/V screen requested............................................. 2 Selection is done by entering the proper letter (I for insert...................... or update data in an RC/V form: ...................................................................................................... Reviewing............................................................................................................................................. END OF STEPS ................................................... review.............................................................................................................................................. .......................................................... The resulting screen gives the choice of action....................... Result The requested form is displayed with the mode selected................................................................................................................................. and U for update) at the prompt........................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ................................................................. R for Review........................................................ Accessing the RC/V Forms ......................... Review................. or Updating an RC/V Form Insert.......... To insert.......................... Procedure 4-4.........43 ... 1 First access that form by entering its name at the prompt of the form access screen.........Inserting.......

....................................................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Required Fields Required Fields .... ECP Sample Screen Reference The sample screen below is the ecp screen 1 of 15......................... Only the first field is required to identify the executive cellular processor accessed...... 4 ....................................................................................................................................................................... These required fields are indicated by an asterisk (*)............ Identifying the Required Fields Some fields need to be populated with legal data before the form can display the contents of the Minicell data base..........................................................................................................................44 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...................................... A field that can be changed by another form is indicated by a (+)........ ...... For more information on the switch views see 401-610-036.......................................................

..45 .. help is available from any RC/V form screen....................... .. The help screens are accessed by entering a question mark (?) at the prompt...... Reference For more information on the switch views see Lucent Technologies 401-610-036....................................... the remaining fields are automatically filled and displayed on the completed form......... ECP Sample Populated The screen below shows the ecp screen 1 of 15 populated with the setup information for Executive Cellular Processor Identification 1.......................................................................................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ......................................................................................... Getting Help At any time..............Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Required Fields -..............................................................................................Results ....................................................................... Completed Form Once the required fields have been populated...Results Required Fields -.......

........................................................................................................................... For more information on the switch views see Lucent Technologies 401-610-036....... Sample RC/V Help Screens Reference The figure below shows representative help screens.................................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell Getting Help For RC/V Screens Getting Help For RC/V Screens ..........................................................................................................46 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .......... 4 ......

....... ceqccu Screen Sample The screen sample below is ceqccu screen 1 of 2 populated with the shelf equipage settings for cell 168.............................. Purpose of the Form The ceqccu form indicates the status of CCU equipment......47 .................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 4 ............................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell ceqccu Form ceqccu Form ......................................................................................................................................... Reference For more information on the switch views see Lucent Technologies 401-610-036...................................

.............. The fields marked with a plus (fields 2.............................................................................. For more information on the switch views see Lucent Technologies 401-610-036............................................................ ..................................................Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell cell2 Form cell2 Form ................... screen 1 of 14 populated with the information for cell site number 8............................................ and 4) are optional................ cell 2 Sample Screen Reference The screen sample below shows cell2..................... Purpose of the Form The cell2 form is a multi screen form used to make both hardware and call processing assignments................ 4 .........48 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..... Screen formats change with the field displayed...... Failure to properly update the "cell2" RC/V form when transitioning a system to a PERMANENT CDMA ON state may cause a loss of CDMA traffic after a RTR initialization of the ECP.......................................................... 3......................................................................................................................

Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell

ceqcom2 Form

ceqcom2 Form

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose of the Form

The RC/V ceqcom2 form contains information concerning Minicell
site equipment configuration, status, and maintenance-related
parameters for an individual Minicell. The values on the ceqcom2 form
take precedence over the values on the ecp form.

ceqcom2 Screen Sample

The screen sample below shows ceqcom2, screen 1 of 13 populated
with settings for cell site number 8.

Reference

For more information on the switch views see Lucent Technologies
401-610-036.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

4 - 49

Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell

ceqface Form

ceqface Form

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose of the Form

The ceqface form contains call processing parameters for an individual
face.

ceqface Screen Sample

The sample screen below is ceqcom2, screen 1 of 10 shown populated
with settings for face 3 of cell site number 8.

Reference

For more information on the switch views see Lucent Technologies
401-610-036.

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 - 50

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell

ceqface Form

Getting Information
Overview
Purpose

Two sets of information tools will help you to perform your tasks.
These tools are as follows:

The AUTOPLEX® documentation on CD-ROM (The interface
for reading information products on the CD-ROM)

The Schematic Drawings (SDs)

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

4 - 51

Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell

Schematic Drawings

Schematic Drawings

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Schematic Drawings
Sample

Schematic diagrams (SDs) are multi-page (sheet) documents. They
support a particular application. Of direct interest to maintenance
personnel will be the SDs that relate to cabling and connections. These
SDs document the circuit paths used in troubleshooting.
The drawing below shows the drawing identification information
located in the lower right corner of all schematic drawings.

Drawing Size
Sheet Number

Proprietary Information

Issue Number

Product Identification
Schematic
Drawing Number

F
SEE PROPRIETARY NOTICE ON COVER PAGE

Coordinates
PCS-CDMA
PRIMARY RADIO FRAME
CIRCUIT

LUCENT

6

Layout

DECEMBER 6, 1995

DWG SIZE

ISSUE

C2

W2

SD-2R-380-01

7

8

G

H

SHEET

B42

9

All SDs provide an SD number, a sheet number, and an issue number.
Coordinates to items in the SD are provided in the margin.
Additional information includes proprietary information and product
name.

SD Sheets

SDs are arranged by A to H sheets. These sheets are arranged as
follows:

SD
Sheets

Sheet Name

Sheet Contains

A

Index

Issue date(s), sheet indices to all SD pages

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 - 52

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell

Schematic Drawings

SD
Sheets

Sheet Name

Sheet Contains

B

FSs (Functional
Schematics)

Graphic information about the circuit(s)

C

Apparatus Figures

Component specific information, such as AT&T
comcodes and manufacturer numbers

D

Circuit Notes

Explanation of notes referenced within FSs

E

Circuit Description

Text description of the circuits appearing in SD2R349 (Note that most SDs do not contain a CD)

F

Not used in this SD

Not used in this SD

G

CADs (Cabling
Diagrams)

Specific interconnection cabling information

H

BDs (Block Diagrams )

High-level interconnections between major units

SD issue number is located on the top right corner of sheet A1.
Sheet A1 contains a count of the total number of sheets in the SD in the
lower right corner of sheet A1.
Page designations, such as A1 or B17, are located on the lower right of
each sheet.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

4 - 53

Communicating with the PCS CDMA Minicell

Schematic Drawings

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

4 - 54

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

5

PCS CDMA Minicell
Maintenance

Overview

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

There are essentially two different levels of maintenance:

Preventive (or Routine) maintenance covers the activities
necessary to prevent cell malfunction

Corrective maintenance covers the activities that take place to
correct a cell malfunction.

Excluding housekeeping tasks (leaf and snow removal, cleaning of
filters, etc.), most of the preventive maintenance, such as routine
diagnostics, can be done from the PCSC.
Contents

Maintenance Overview
• Operation vs. Maintenance - - - • Reasons for Maintenance - - - - • The Maintenance Process - - - - • Maintenance Targets - - - - - - • Required Maintenance Equipment
• Domestic Storage - - - - - - - -

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

Preventive Maintenance
• Preventive Maintenance Schedule - - - - - - - - - • Radio/Control Equipment Routine Maintenance Tasks
• Lucent Technologies Power and Battery Equipment • Building and Environmental Equipment - - - - - - • Servicing the Heat Exchangers - - - - - - - - - - -

-

-

5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9

-

-

-

5-13
- 5-14
- 5-17
- 5-20
- 5-21
- 5-23

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

5 - 1

PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance

Corrective Maintenance
• Test Equipment Maintenance - - - - - - - - - - • Precautionary Steps - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Automatic Diagnostic Tests - - - - - - - - - - - • Manual Routine Diagnostics - - - - - - - - - - - • Maintenance Records - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Corrective Maintenance Triggers - - - - - - - - - • Maintenance Actions - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Maintenance Units - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Maintenance Commands - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Maintenance States - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Examples of Input Commands and Output Messages
• Conditional Remove - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Unconditional Remove - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Conditional Restore - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Unconditional Restore - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Diagnose Command - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Stop a Diagnostic - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Initialize a Site - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Switch to Redundant Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - • Operational Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • Out-Of-Service State Qualifier -- Purpose - - - - • Out-Of-Service State Qualifiers -- Examples - - - -

-

-

-

-

5-25
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-30
5-32
5-33
5-36
5-37
5-39
5-40
5-41
5-42
5-44
5-45
5-46
5-47
5-48
5-49
5-50
5-51
5-52
5-53

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 - 2

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance

Maintenance Overview
Overview

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This unit is designed to enable you to:

Name major maintenance commands

Define maintenance actions and maintenance states

List conditions that trigger a warning message during a restore
process

Identify the conditions under which the diagnose maintenance
action can be applied to a redundant unit in the active state

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

5 - 3

PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance

Operation vs. Maintenance

Operation vs. Maintenance

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Perspective

While maintenance and operation involve overlapping activities with a
common goal of maximizing Minicell availability, these functions
correspond to two different perspectives:

Operation relies on sets of procedures (e.g., Standard Operating
Procedures)

Maintenance requires following processes (e.g., diagnostics)

The distinction takes some importance in cases of conflicting
requirements, such as routine maintenance conflicting with operational
staff availability.
Management Issues

Operation involves essentially user issues, such as selection of
personnel or documentation.
Maintenance involves contractual issues, with risks of loss of coverage
if recommended practices are not followed.
A successful maintenance program will optimize the operational costs
of maintenance.

Logistical Issues

One way of keeping maintenance costs down will be to optimize
maintenance logistics. Examples where logistics can be optimized are:

Balancing maintenance workload between the PCSC and the
Minicell

Pooling of test equipment.

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 - 4

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance

Reasons for Maintenance

Reasons for Maintenance

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

Objectives

The purpose of maintenance is to minimize the possibility and effects
of a system failure. To support that purpose, the maintenance process
must be able, in the event of a system failure, to collect information as
to its cause, and to provide the tools necessary to correct the situation.
The objective of the maintenance process is to maximize system
availability at the lowest cost possible. Ways to reduce these costs
include the elimination of unnecessary initialization, diagnostics, and
cell site visits.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

5 - 5

PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance

The Maintenance Process

The Maintenance Process

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Maintenance Activities/
Maintenance Levels

Responsibilities

The maintenance process is carried out through different paths:

Preventive (or routine) maintenance is concerned with tasks that
will reduce the probability of failure. Examples of such tasks are
cleaning and monitoring of performance.

Corrective maintenance is concerned with the speedy elimination
of a cause or potential source of failure. An example of corrective
maintenance is the replacement of failing circuit boards.

On-demand maintenance concerns tasks that are performed on a
Minicell, even though the Minicell is still operating properly. An
example of on-demand maintenance is the addition of capacity.

Responsibilities for maintenance are shared between the cell site (that
reports and analyzes any Minicell malfunction to the ECP), the ECP
(that attempts to correct these malfunctions through software), and the
Minicell technician (who performs any required physical intervention).

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

5 - 6

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

.............. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 ................. For instance........................... etc................ Overview Facility PCS CDMA Minicell maintenance addresses specific targets: • Facility • Cabinets • Equipment Performance and scheduling of facility maintenance (building.......................................................................... Some of the inspections may involve actual measurements.................. it is recommended that periodic maintenance be performed on the test and other maintenance equipment................................................................................. In addition to cell specific maintenance tasks............... Such inspection would include checking the guy wires.......... fences.............. Of critical importance will be the maintenance and calibration of reference standards................. .......... such as calibrated attenuators used to calibrate performance measurement equipment.. tower lights............ but Minicell technicians would be expected to visually inspect the antenna whenever they happen to be at the cell site... verification of the cell ground connection may require a measure of its electrical resistance....... antenna............ For instance.) are determined according to local practices..........................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Maintenance Targets Maintenance Targets ............................................... maintenance and repairs to the Minicell antenna mast may be provided by an outside vendor. Cabinets Equipment Inspection and Testing Maintenance of the cabinets (primary and growth radio cabinets........... grounding connections.......... Such maintenance should be conducted according to manufacturer’s instructions.......... access roads.................. and may be contracted out.................. and power cabinets) involves both physical and functional inspection............ etc.......7 ............. either on schedule or as part of a diagnostic action to respond to an equipment failure........

..... ......................................................... Test sets can be used to measure and analyze RF power.... 5 ....... it will usually be necessary to have tools and equipment for general “handyman” work available at the site.................................................................................................................................................. In addition...................... equipment such as multimeters should be available to check the operation of AC and DC components............................................ and calibrated connectors and cables....................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Required Maintenance Equipment Required Maintenance Equipment ....................................................................................................8 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 . analyzers (Test Sets)........................................... To maintain the Minicell site.................................. Overview Radio and Control Equipment Power Measurement Equipment Building and Facility Maintenance Equipment Equipment required for maintenance: • Radio and Control Equipment • Power Measurement Equipment • Building and Facility Maintenance Equipment Radio and control equipment includes frequency generators..............................

.... (This method is required and mandatory for ALL indoor cabinets........................................ Before you beginStorage Guidelines The following guidelines must be followed for both methods: • Temperature of the cabinets must be between -40° to 65°C (-40°F to 149°F) ............... 2" wide.. 4119 White Bear Parkway.......................... clean white cloths (both may be obtained from a local automotive store).. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 ................. this process must be repeated.............. the use of VCI101 is unnecessary.. Phone (612) 429-1100/Fax (612) 4291122 and may be obtained from a Cortec Distributor..................................... Class 1 Barrier Material may be used in place of ‰ EcoWeave‚ VCI Woven Polyethylene.....) • Outdoor unsheltered environment or environmentally uncontrolled storage facilities.... (This method is NOT permitted for indoor cabinets... St................................................................................................................. Cor-Pak% EcoWeave (VCI Woven Polyethylene) (Manufactured by Cortec Corp............) (MIL-B-131............ When cabinets are to be stored over 1 year.................. MN............... there are two possible locations to store the cabinets: sheltered or outdoor..................) • Water Resistant Packaging Tape......... Type 4 (Woven Cloth Backing.......... PPP-T-60.....................9 .......... Paul..... VCI-111 • Film...PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Domestic Storage Domestic Storage ................. may be obtained from a local packaging supplier. Purpose Material Required If there is a need to store a Minicell................... Storage Methods There are two methods for storing the Primary and Growth Cabinets...... This page describes the procedures to prepare the primary and growth cabinets for storage................ When EcoWeave (VCI Woven Polyethylene) is used.. 55110 USA..... VCI-105.......... Color Class 1... (sheltered is the preferred method): • Sheltered equipment storage buildings or environmentally controlled storage facilities........................) Regular opening and closing of the cabinet will require the VCI Emitters to be replaced with new VCI Emitters.) • Isopropyl Alcohol........... The following items are required: • Emitters VCI-101........

.......................................... ESD plugs are provided both in the front and back of the cabinet........................... and federal recycling regulations........................ ............................................. Location must be approximately 20 inches from the floor and 2 inches from the ...... or scrape cabinet when using sharp instruments to pierce and remove protective packaging......... Make sure the ESD wrist strap is grounded to the Minicell cabinet... All packaging removed must be handled in a manner that is in compliance with all applicable local.......................... scuff.. it must be conducted on a dry day and all steps in this procedure must be achieved............................. side.............................................. 2 Install the VCI-105 and VCI-111 on the interior right-hand side as viewed looking into the cabinet from the cabinet front door............... it must be conducted in a well ventilated area............. • Ensure appropriate environmental protection measures are taken before opening the front.. oils and salts............................................................. state............................ Cabinet Damage The components in the cabinet could be damaged by adverse weather...... cushioning.....PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Domestic Storage • Exposure to 95% relative humidity at 40°C (104°F) for no longer than 96 hours... and rear door(s) of the cabinet........ but not limited to.................... If this procedure is performed outdoors it must be conducted on a dry day and all steps in this procedure achieved.............. ................. Cabinet Damage There is a possibility of ESD damage...................................................................................... and exterior corner bumpers............................................................ 5 ............... • Adequate protective measures must be taken to prevent Physical Damage to Cabinet.......... Procedure 5-1......................... • If this operation is performed outdoors................................................10 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........................................... • Atmosphere must be clear of airborne contaminants such as.................... Use Extreme Caution not to scratch.. 1 Remove protective wrapping.. Wear the ESD wrist strap stowed inside of the Minicell cabinet before continuing with the steps in this procedure......................... • If this operation is performed indoors.................................. ...................

...... ........... WARNING Hazardous Chemicals Danger of exposure to potentially hazardous chemicals................................................... 7 Place external protection.... 6 All waste generated must be handled in a manner that is in compliance with all applicable local.................................. The information about the required personal protective equipment required may be obtained from material safety data sheet (MSDS)............... 5 Dampen (Do Not Soak) one entire clean cloth with isopropyl alcohol (IPA)............................. (This step in unnecessary if cabinet is installed at cell site and ancillary hardware housing is in place and rear of cabinet is sealed..11 ............. Cor-Pak‰ EcoWeave (VCI Woven Polyethylene) or MIL-B-131................ and federal regulations............. and approximately 24 inches from the floor and 2 inches from the CRC for the VCI-111..............................................................................) Cut a piece of Film..................................................................... ............................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 . state........................... skip to the final step........... and be trained in its proper use............ Personnel involved with cleaning the cabinet must use necessary personal protective equipment (PPE)................................ After the area is clean of debris... and through the eyes.... ingestion.................................... ............ 3 If cabinet is installed at cell site and ancillary hardware housing is in place and rear of cabinet is sealed... inhalation. The most common ways personnel could potentially be exposed to the materials listed in these guidelines are through the skin........ Repeat this process until the final cleaning of the surface leaves no residue on the cloth................................................ Class 1 Barrier Material large enough to cover the PDA and AIP area................ wipe the cleaned area with a dry cloth and remove any excess IPA....................................................................... ....... Wipe the area around the PDA and AIP..... 4 Prepare the cabinet for external protection......................................................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Domestic Storage CRC for the VCI-105..........

..................................................................................... Woven Cloth Backing.............................................. ......................................... Type 4............... 2" wide......................................... Color Class 1)................... 2" wide....... corners......... Woven Cloth Backing................................................................................................................ 9 Fold bottom corners over.............. Color Class 1)................................................................................................................................................... PPP-T-60..... 2" wide............. 5 ............................................................12 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....................................................... ................................................................... ................................................................................................. ............................................................................................. ..................... END OF STEPS ........................ PPP-T-60.. between film and cabinet (for use only with MIL-B131...................................................... 12 Tape right and left sides using a continuous piece of tape overlapping the bottom tape (Packaging Tape. 11 Fold top corners over............................. and edges are taped...... 15 Verify that all seams................ ............................................. Color Class 1)................... Type 4........................................................................................................................................................................... 13 Insert VCI-101.............................................................. Woven Cloth Backing............................... Class 1 Barrier Material)................... ...................... PPP-T-60.................................... ............................. Result The cabinets are prepared for storage for up to one year................................................................ Type 4.......... 16 Unlatch and close cabinet front door and replace side and rear door(s) if removed...............................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Domestic Storage ............................................................................................................................................................. .. 14 Place a continuous piece of tape along entire top edge overlapping sides (Packaging Tape...................................................... 10 Place a continuous piece of tape along entire bottom edge (Packaging Tape....................................................................... 8 Position the drab side of the film facing cabinet...........................................................

................ and other hardware • Automatic software diagnostics to identify failing units................................................. It involves measuring and comparing wireless signals to original specifications.13 .................. Inside the Minicell Preventive maintenance inside the Minicell covers: • Inspection of cabinet hardware to verify proper functioning of fans............... or lights to verify its proper functioning and/or to replace worn out parts ......................... and thus allow its timely replacement............................ batteries... Purpose Outside the Minicell Preventive maintenance is done to prevent cell malfunction and may identify potential sources of Minicell failures before they interfere with service........... especially for standby equipment (such diagnostics are scheduled to minimize impact on service) • Inspection of ancillary equipment... grounding......PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Domestic Storage Preventive Maintenance OverviewOverview ........................................... preventive maintenance may locate a failing board in a redundant unit.................................................................... intrusions switches................... For instance.......... to identify and remedy potential sources of hazards • Maintenance of the site............. such as removing snow or trimming shrubberies Drive Testing is a maintenance task performed on a periodic basis to meet regulatory requirements and to identify progressive degradation of performance..................... such as air conditioning................. They include: • Visual inspection of antenna mast. Already mentioned earlier...................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 ........... some of the preventive maintenance tasks outside a Minicell are often contracted out.................................................................................... etc.........

..................... FCC Measurements – Perform Setup Radio FCC Measurements – Perform Voice Radio FCC Measurements • Power and Battery Plant Equipment Equipment Test List Radio/Control Equipment Task List 1 Mo.........................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Preventive Maintenance Schedule Preventive Maintenance Schedule .................................. PREVENTIVE CHECK INTERVAL • Radio/Control Equipment – Clean Fans 6 Mo................................. The table below lists the tasks necessary to monitor the operations of the Minicell............................. The Lucent Technologies Practice contains a reference to the procedural information required to perform the maintennce task................. Overview Sample Preventive Check Preventive maintenance is done according to a schedule that reflects local operating requirements. 12 Mo................................. 1 Mo..............................................................14 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..................... The cell site ETL is divided into equipment areas: radio/control equipment............................................ 5 . The table below shows some suggestions for preventive maintenance checks on PCS CDMA Minicells......................... 1 Mo........ TASK MAINTENANCE TASK FREQUENCY REFERENCE 1 Perform and Review Functional Tests Specified in cell site translations 401-660-101 2 Perform and Review Software Audits 401-703-203 Controlled by RCC 401-660-101 401-703-203 3 Perform and Review Service Measurements Daily 401-610-135 CIB 117-8A ................................................ power and battery equipment...............and Low-Voltage and Rectifier Failure Alarms 12 Mo.. and building and environmental equipment................... 12 Mo............................. Storage Battery – Check Float Voltage Alarm – Check Fuse Alarms 1 Mo...... Rectifier – Check High................................................

...................................................................1 Flush Heat Exchanger Core 6 Months 401-703-301 16 (Indoor Only) Change front and rear Minicell air filters Monthly 401-703-300 17 (Indoor Only) Check Emergency Lighting Monthly N/A 18 (Indoor Only) Check Exhaust Fan Monthly N/A 19 Check Fire & Safety Equipment Monthly N/A 20 (Indoor Only) Check Air Dryer 6 Months N/A 21 Dust Cell Site Equipment 6 Months N/A .................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Preventive Maintenance Schedule TASK MAINTENANCE TASK FREQUENCY 4 Perform and Review Plant Measurements Controlled by RCC 254-341-116 5 Perform and Review Voice Channel Selection Activity Measurements Monthly 401-660-108 6 Perform and Review Power-Level Measurements Monthly 401-660-108 Lucent Technologies Power & Battery Equipment Task List REFERENCE The table below lists the tasks to monitor and maintain the physical condition of the Minicell................................ TASK MAINTENANCE TASK FREQUENCY REFERENCE 7 Check Generator Fuel Level Weekly 401-703-300 8 Operate Generator Under Load Monthly 401-703-300 9 Check Battery Float Voltage 6 months 157-601-701 10 Replace Maintenance Control Unit Alkaline Battery Annually 401-703-300 Building & Environmental Equipment Task List The table below lists the tasks to maintain the the Minicell’s environment.......................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 .......................................................................................15 ........... TASK MAINTENANCE TASK FREQUENCY REFERENCE 11 Perform Visual Inspection Weekly N/A 12 Check Tower Light Weekly N/A 13 Check Heat Exchanger & Fans Weekly 401-703-301 14 Clear Brush away from Cabinets Weekly N/A 15 Vacuum and wash fan screens Monthly 401-703-301 15.

................................................................................16 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................ Fire....................................... AC........................................... 5 .....................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Preventive Maintenance Schedule 22 Clean Fire Alarm Sensor 6 Months N/A 23 Check Peripheral Alarms 6 Months 401-703-301 (Door............ Heat) 24 (Indoor Only) Check Smoke Alarm 6 Months N/A 25 (Indoor Only) Check Heaters 6 Months N/A 26 Perform Set Up Radio FCC Measurements Annually 401-660-100 27 Perform Voice Radio FCC Measurements 401-660-100 Annually .............................................

.. When audits detect errors... the exact time of day cannot be specified)........ The frequency of routine functional tests is specified in the cell site translations (unlike routine diagnostic testing....................................................Perform and Review Software Audits • Transmit path • Receive path • Access channel • Paging channel • Sync channel • Pilot channel • Traffic channels • Antenna Software audits can be performed on a manual or a scheduled basis.. Only the failed results are reported when the tests are run automatically.................................. the cell site performs the requested functional test and returns the results to the ECP........... Running software audits on a regularly scheduled basis (routine audits) is a way of detecting............... and correcting software data errors before the errors adversely affect system performance..... Task 1 ......................... Running functional tests on a regularly scheduled basis (routine functional tests) is a way of checking the integrity of the cell site transmit and receive paths.....................................17 ....... are reported to the ECP.. These tests verify the operation of the following cell site equipment: Task 2 .............................................................. For the latter case..................... pass/fail............................ Functional tests temporarily take control of an in-service hardware unit................................... .....Radio/Control Equipment Routine Maintenance Tasks PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Radio/Control Equipment Routine Maintenance Tasks . functional tests are initiated and controlled from the ECP. the cell site performs the requested audit and returns the results to the ECP............. The test results... For the latter case........ Functional tests are run on equipment that is in-service but not active for calls during testing..... invoke appropriate system initialization....................... when the tests are run manually.. they recover any lost resources and. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 ..... the audits are initiated and controlled from the ECP..........................Perform and Review Functional Tests Functional tests can be performed on a manual or a scheduled basis............... confining.................... Software audits detect faults on software that is in-service.. test it................. if necessary.................................... and then free it for normal call processing traffic....

..... and the usage of system resources................. the telephone number of the involved mobile station. audit failures........ The data is used to troubleshoot the system..... For the time period specified by the user.. the .............. one file for every hour of the day... to evaluate how well the system is operating...... and initialization... and other data.. That count does not include manual removals............... Service measurements can be collected on a scheduled basis (scheduled hourly by the ECP) or a manual basis.. which automatically reports the data to the ECP every day at the set time.... On a scheduled basis..... failure durations (out-ofservice time)....... the RCC continually gathers service measurements and reports the data hourly to the ECP.....18 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ... the collected data is saved in a series of 24 data files.... The number of failures is the number of times a hardware unit is taken out-of-service automatically...........Perform and Review Plant Measurements Plant measurements provide information on the performance of cell site equipment including failure occurrences.........................Perform and Review Voice Channel Selection Activity Measurements Voice channel selection activity (VCSA) measurements provide detailed information about traffic movement within a cellular system by recording the occurrences of a set of predefined call-processing events at specified cell sites.. The data can be used to evaluate cell site hardware deficiencies and their impact on subscriber service.. Task 4 . there is no scheduling translation associated with audits... At the ECP..... Task 3 ....... Task 5 ......Perform and Review Service Measurements Service measurements provide statistical information (cumulative counts) on call traffic...... Scheduling of plant measurements is controlled exclusively by the RCC....... the time it occurred......... diagnostic failures.... Each record indicates what type of event occurred.... various failure events....... Audit test errors are reported to the ECP.... Plant measurements can be collected on a scheduled basis or manual basis... VCSA can also be run in a special mode to collect data only for a single specified mobile........... 5 . The service measurements are stored temporarily at the ECP and then copied to the OMP...................... and to engineer its growth............Radio/Control Equipment Routine Maintenance Tasks PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance The frequency of routine audits is controlled exclusively by the Radio Control Complex (RCC)... VCSA measurements can be collected only if a VCSA study is requested (manual basis)......... The files are overwritten with new data beginning at the start of a new day.................

......................... Task 6 .................................19 ......Perform and Review Power-level Measurements Power-level measurements (PLMs) provide detailed information about the distribution of power levels detected at a specified cell site................................... This study can also collect the distribution of noise detected by traffic channels....... add or alter radio frequencies....Radio/Control Equipment Routine Maintenance Tasks PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance RCC gathers VCSA measurements and reports the data to the ECP during and after the measurements are made............ and plan growth....... fine-tune a system................................................... the RCC gathers the PLMs and reports the data to the ECP after the study is completed................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 . For the time period specified by the user................................. The data is used to investigate system troubles... .. Power-level measurements can be collected only if a PLM study is requested (manual basis)...........

.... The alarm relay Detailed instructions for these procedures can be found in Chapter 13 of 401-703-300............................. Task 10 .20 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...... Task 7 ..................................... If the engine fails to start and assume the load.................... To provide this feature..... Task 8 ............ the day of week and the date 2......................Check Generator Fuel Level If a Standby Generator Cabinet is used.. a programmable maintenance controller is provided to run the engine and apply load in a fail-safe manner................................................................................................................................... The current time........................................ A battery log is provided to record battery replacement dates.................... its fuel level must be checked on a weekly basis......... the system rectifiers continue to power the load.................... (Do not use any type of cleaning agent on the Maintenance Control Unit’s liquid crystal display.........Operate Generator Under Load The Standby Generator vendor requires that the engine be operated under load for 30 minutes once per month to satisfy the manufacturer’s warranty................... The four procedures required to program the maintenance controller involve programming the following: 1......... Task 9 .... 5 ................................................... The on and off time for the 30-minute maintenance intervals 4.......) . This can be done by removing the cap on the generator fuel tank and observing the fuel level indicated on the cap dip stick.... check the battery float voltage semi-annually per Lucent Technologies Practice 157-601-701.............................................Replace Maintenance Control Unit Alkaline Battery The Generator Cabinet Maintenance Control Unit contains an alkaline battery that should be replaced annually....Check Battery Float Voltage To insure the operation of the batteries. The month and date of the 12 monthly 30-minute maintenance intervals 3...............PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Lucent Technologies Power and Battery Equipment Lucent Technologies Power and Battery Equipment .

.....Check Tower Light Task 13 ............................................ Task 17 ....................... A visual check of the tower light should be made each week................. Task 11 .. and tree limbs should be removed from the immediate vicinity of the cabinets..............................(Indoor Only) Change Front & Rear Minicell Air Filters The Indoor Primary Minicell Cabinet has an air filter on its front door and rear panel.............. See "Servicing the Heat Exchangers" on page 5-23 for more information................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Building and Environmental Equipment Building and Environmental Equipment .......................... Verify that heat exchanger and cabinet fans are functioning............ Typical visual indicators to look for are listed below: • Alarm lamp indication • Smoke • Broken cables • Blown fuses • Clogged heat exchanger screens....Perform Visual Inspection Task 12 ................. Brush. it should be checked on a monthly basis per local instructions...................................... The screens should also be washed with a medium cleaning solution or brushed to remove debris........(Indoor Only) Check Exhaust Fan If the cabinet area is equipped with an emergency lighting system... .......21 .Clear Brush away from Cabinets Visual inspections at the cell site should be made on a weekly basis..... grass.......................................... Task 15........... These filters must be removed and replaced on a monthly basis........................................Vacuum and Wash Fan Screens Cabinet fan screens must be kept free of insects and other debris................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 ...................... If the cabinet area is equipped with an exhaust fan............... Task 15 .... replace the faulty unit....... Task 16 .Check Heat Exchanger and Fans Task 14 .......(Indoor Only) Check Emergency Lighting Task 18 ...... This can be done with a portable industrial vacuum...................... it should be checked on a monthly basis per local procedures............. core cleaner..............Flush Heat Exchanger Core The external sides of the heat exchanger cores should be flushed every 6 months with a non-acid.1 .............. self rinsing............................ If there is indication of a problem..

..... AC... Contact a qualified fire & safety equipment vendor for maintenance as specified by local instructions........(Indoor Only) Check Heaters All heaters should be tested and verified that they are functional....... The thermostatic control should be tested to ensure that the heaters are activated at the proper temperature level.......... This includes door.............................. Detailed instructions regarding these measurements can be found in 401-660-100.........Perform Set Up Radio FCC Measurements The FCC requires that Set Up Radio test measurements be made on an annual basis.............................Check Peripheral Alarms Verify that all peripheral alarms are functioning properly............. Task 23 .. ESD is a major consideration here. and heat alarms.(Indoor Only) Check Air Dryer If the cabinet area is equipped with an air dryer.............Check Fire and Safety Equipment Check the service due dates on all fire and safety equipment................. 5 ..(Indoor Only) Check Smoke Alarm The smoke alarm should be tested and verified for its proper functioning........Building and Environmental Equipment PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Task 19 ..........660-100..Dust Cell Site Equipment This section is under review.......... Detailed instructions can be found in this manual...... Detailed instructions regarding these measurements can be found in 401........ the battery should be replaced during this process.................. Task 21 ... Task 20 ......... Task 26 .. Task 24 .Perform Voice Radio FCC Measurements The FCC requires that Voice Radio test measurements be made on an annual basis.. Task 27 ....Clean Fire Alarm Sensor The fire alarm sensor should be checked and any accumulation of dust or other foreign debris should be removed..........22 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ......... Task 22 ........ fire.......... its operation should be checked on a semi-annual basis per local instructions. ... Task 25 . If it is battery powered..........

...................... wash off with an appropriate cleaning solution................................ provides the logic to perform the following: • Vary the speed of the Internal and Ambient Fans to maintain the internal cabinet temperature between 0° and 65° C • Control of the Heater in maintaining the internal cabinet temperature at or above 0° C during cold cabinet temperatures • Provide alarms for fan failures... ........... Internal Fan.............PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Servicing the Heat Exchangers Servicing the Heat Exchangers ..................................................................................................................... Procedure 5-2..... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 ... cabinet high and low temperature conditions both on the heat exchangers and the Alarm Facilities Interface The heat exchangers report alarms under the following conditions: • Loss of 24 V DC power to the heat exchanger • Cabinet internal air temperature below 0° C • Cabinet internal air temperature above 65° C The following tasks should be carried out on a weekly basis: • Inspect the screens on the exterior of the cabinet • Brush to remove anything blocking the air flow If the material blocking the air flow resists brushing..................................................................................................................................... The heat exchangers consist of an Ambient Fan.23 ..................................................................... Follow the cleaning solution manufacturers instruction’s for handling the solution........................................................................................................................................ WARNING The heat exchanger can be damaged if the incorrect clening solution is used. Microcontroller........................................................................ Flushing the Core ............ The Microcontroller............................................................................... and a sheet metal housing............... Purpose Components Alarm Conditions Cleaning the Screens The heat exchangers on the Primary and Growth Frames are of the air-to-air type that provides thermal environmental control for these electronic equipment cabinets..................... which operates from a 26 V DC source.................. heater failures.... a heater cartridge......

........................................ .............................................................................................. 2 Check to see all the internal components are protected (check that the door is closed securely) ................................................................................. 1 Turn off power to the heat exchanger ............................................................................................................. 4 Turn the heat exchanger power back on END OF STEPS ............................................................................ 3 Spray the cleaning solution back and forth across the upper screen of the heat exchanger to sufficiently wet the heat exchanger surface ........................................................................................................................... Replacing the Blowers If a blower needs to be replaced................................................................................................................................................. do so according to the manufacturer’s instructions included with the replacement blower............................................................................................................................................. core cleaner.PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Servicing the Heat Exchangers Every six months clean the external side of the heat exchanger cores by flushing with a non-acid......... self rinsing........................................... 5 ..............................................................................................................................24 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................ using the following procedure: ..............................................................................................................

.................................... before an outage occurs... Minicell Level This type of maintenance corresponds to the need to replace a Minicell component................................. corrective maintenance will usually be triggered by an alarm....................... whether it has been diagnosed as part of preventive or corrective maintenance.... are the same once the cause of failure has been identified................................................................................. These actions are software initiated........ Preventive (or Routine) maintenance covers the activities necessary to prevent cell malfunction.............. By contrast....... Purpose Corrective maintenance is event driven............................................. Advanced This level of maintenance corresponds to situations where corrective actions require expert assistance............. Corrective Maintenance Description Corrective maintenance addresses the detection of failing units while in service..PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Servicing the Heat Exchangers Corrective Maintenance Overview ............... PCSC Level These are maintenance actions that do not need intervention at the cell.. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 . Procedures to remedy a failing unit...................................................... Except for repairs required by physical damage to the cell............ ......... Examples of such situations would be the replacement of components destroyed by lightning................................................................................................ such as through a restore command to reset the cell after an outage.................................25 ...............................

.......................... Overview Equipment Maintenance Checks Test equipment needs to be maintained to ensure that its outputs are meaningful................... The components that need to be maintained are cables and probes.............................................................................................................. Maintenance that should be performed according to manufacturer’s specifications also includes ensuring that the software used is up-todate...............26 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................................................................................. ............................ 5 .....................................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Test Equipment Maintenance Test Equipment Maintenance ................................................................................... as well as calibration devices such as attenuators.............................................................................................................

.............................................................. Follow the electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures listed in 401-660-125..... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 ............................. .. especially those requiring the use of torque wrenches Never disconnect a live RF cable or apply power to an RF unit that is in a transmit mode...............................27 .......................... a grounded antistatic wrist strap must be worn to protect the equipment from electrostatic discharge (ESD).................... • Check the identification code before replacing a circuit pack to ensure the proper board is being used........... The following guidelines should be used when handling circuit packs.” When handling equipment or working in the backplane area.............. Other Precautions • Turn off power before inserting or removing a circuit pack (unless otherwise specified by the procedure) • Carry the circuit pack in its packing materials to the replacement site before removing it from packaging (do not remove the circuit pack from the box and walk with it)....................... ESD Procedures ESD Reference Following proper ESD practices is required whenever handling circuit packs or working inside a Minicell cabinet................ search for “esd..............................................................................................................................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Precautionary Steps Precautionary Steps ................... If using the Lucent Technologies Autoplex Documentation CD-ROM...... Whenever handling cables and connections: • Avoid sharp bends • Follow required procedures for the handling of connections........................ • Identify and count circuit packs before removing the pack from its antistatic packaging material.......................................... chapters 1 and 4..............

................ the unit to be tested will be automatically (or must be manually) placed out of service................................ 5 .....PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Automatic Diagnostic Tests Automatic Diagnostic Tests .................... enabling the identification of the failing unit..................................................................................... individual tests are broken into phases.... When a test fails.......................................................................................................................28 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........................................................................ which are then broken down into segments.................................................................... and they address specific areas of a wireless system................ Locating a Failing Unit Each diagnostic test is supported by a Trouble Locating Procedure (TLP) that identifies the suspect unit(s) at fault when the diagnostic ....................... Grouping Tests that are performed automatically by the PCSC are run in groups............. Diagnostic Tests Diagnostic tests are run: • Automatically on schedule as part of routine maintenance • Automatically by software control when a fault is detected • Under manual control Before a diagnostic test is run............ the user interface displays the number of the phase and segment that failed...... Test Name Description AL Alarm Diagnostic BBA BCR-BIU-ACU Diagnostic CAT Clock and Tone Diagnostic CCC CDMA Cluster Controller Diagnostic CCU CDMA Channel Unit Diagnostic CPI Communications Processor Interface Diagnostic CPU Core Processing Unit Diagnostic CRTU CDMA Radio Test Unit Diagnostic DCCH Digital Control Channel Diagnostics DL Data Link Diagnostic DS1 Digital Switch Interface Diagnostic MEM Memory Diagnostic NCI Network Control Interface Diagnostic SCT Synchronized Clock and Tone Diagnostic Within each group........................

...................................................... In order to allow these activities a separate OOS maintenance limit exists.... The location of suspect units at fault is given in hard-copy table format........................... 401-660107...........PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Automatic Diagnostic Tests encounters a failure.. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 . Messages are described in Lucent’s AUTOPLEX® Cellular Telecommunications Systems System 1000 Series II Cell Site Diagnostic Test Descriptions401-660-101 .............................. For More Information For a complete listing of manual call input messages................... see the latest issue of the Lucent’s Cell Site Input/Output (I/O) Manual......................................................................29 .... Out-of-Service Limits Interpreting Failing Messages Some activities will be rejected if the OOS limit is exceeded................................... .....

............................................. 2 Selective cell site message (scsm) to display the ROP entries that relate to the Minicell (Routine diagnostics verify all circuits..............................scsm – exc:cell#........................................ 1 Stable clear command.. and therefore may take over one hour to complete......................................... Prior to running the test.........................30 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................... circuit by circuit........................................................................................................ Perform the test without the stable clear or run in off hours................................................................. Procedure 5-3.........................scsm Allow Selective Cell Site Messaging Perform Diagnostics Inhibit SCSM CAUTION Service Outage A stable clear will cause service outage for approximately 8 minutes........................................................................................................... to ensure that the Minicell is using the proper operating parameters ................................................................. Purpose Diagnostic Sequence Manual routine diagnostics are performed under operator control to check on the health of the entire Minicell...............................) ........................................................ 5 ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... thus the value of the scsm for monitoring of Minicell activities. – init:cell#:sc Initiate Stable Clear – alw:cell#.......................................................................rtdiag – inh:cell#..........................................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Manual Routine Diagnostics Manual Routine Diagnostics ................................................................................................... Diagnostic Description . The list below shows the sequence of commands used to diagnose the Minicell. it is necessary to invoke the following: .............

.................. in detail.......................... For example... • IP = In Progress......................... The message was received....... 3 Selective cell site messages will need to be disabled once the routine diagnostics have been run.......... Once the diagnostics have been completed................ Systems Response Upon receiving an input command..... the system acknowledges the command with one of the following messages: • OK = Good............................. • PF = Printout Follows: The request was received and action will be taken....... Request cannot be executed now because of unavailable system resources....................................................31 ................... the appropriate process was initiated.............................. END OF STEPS .............. such as system overload................. • NG = No Good... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 ............... • RL = Repeat later........ A printout will follow sometime later to explain......................................................... the results of the work initiated by the input message.......... The message was received...................................... action was requested for a unit that is being diagnosed.............................. Request received and initiated.......... the appropriate process was initiated...... The printout will be a termination report that may include the result of the work initiated by the input message................................ ................ Further output will follow.. or the requested process is busy....... but the request conflicts with the current system or equipment status.. and work was completed......................................... the test results (All Tests Passed (ATP) or Some Test Failed (STF)) are displayed.. excessive queue lengths.......................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Manual Routine Diagnostics ............................................

..................................................................................... Maintenance records should be neatly organized in folders............................................................g... ... Types of Maintenance Records Typical records would include: Guidelines for Maintenance of Records • Dates of maintenance visits to the Minicell • Description of maintenance tasks performed • Repair and performance logs..............32 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................................................................................................................................... software release) Maintenance records should be kept at the Minicell site for maintenance personnel use and for audit purposes.. with drawings and logs kept in a “clean” format............................................................................ and facilitate the performance of any required corrective action.......... 5 .................................... Need for Maintenance Records Maintenance Records keep a history of maintenance activities..... such as performance measurements • Reference documents (such as Minicell installation and engineering diagrams) • Up-to-date Minicell configuration data (e................. to ensure their long-term availability.................................. They are necessary to document Minicell operation..........PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Maintenance Records Maintenance Records ..............

............................... HEH either takes immediate recovery action or waits until the error has occurred a predefined number of times before taking action...................... HEH receives errors from hardware units................................................... poor transmission conditions.. or a synthesizer out of lock (these errors are detected by on-board self tests) • Software errors due to........ for instance.. for instance........ Within each 15-minute period.................................... All errors are analyzed by the Hardware Error Handler (HEH)......... preventive maintenance may locate a failing board in a redundant unit........................ Depending upon the severity of the error...... Procedures to remedy a failing unit.... loss of program control (such as synchronization signal) • Voice channel errors (such as access/failure rates) • Mobile errors due to................... Sources of Errors Handling of Errors Sources of errors that will require corrective actions are as follows: • Hardware errors due to............................. for instance.........................................33 .. For other errors........... HEH prints only an error report................. A throttling mechanism at the cell limits the number of alarms reported on a per board basis to the ECP......... HEH reports no more than one alarm for any particular board.... Corrective maintenance addresses the detection of failing units while in service.... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 ...... a faulty microprocessor....... functional tests.................................................. are the same once the cause of failure has been identified........ For instance.... whether it has been diagnosed as part of preventive or corrective maintenance.............. and callprocessing software. It determines when a recovery action (restore or remove) is needed and then issues a request to the Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA) to carry out the action.................. HEH Error Analysis HEH performs the following types of error analysis: • Immediate Action • All Tests Pass (ATP) Analysis • Single Time-period Analysis ....................................... and thus allow its timely replacement.........PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Corrective Maintenance Triggers Corrective Maintenance Triggers .............................. Overview Preventive maintenance may identify potential sources of Minicell failures before they interfere with service.........

............) This type of error analysis prevents a recovery cycle that might otherwise continue indefinitely.. 5 ... or the problem is external to the unit............... The conditional restore maintenance action schedules an event or process to restore the suspect unit after the unit passes a diagnostic test..... HEH will request a conditional restore of the suspect unit... (Possibly.. For most on-board hardware errors. When the number of failures exceeds some predefined value relative to the number of successful attempts (such as 2400 failures in 4000 attempts). The failed unit remains in the out-of-service state.... A timer value of 40 minutes is used............. Fail/Pass Analysis HEH performs this type of error analysis on call-processing detected errors such as voice channel confirmation failures..... The decrementing is done at set time intervals.. HEH takes immediate action.......... HEH clears the counter............ the MRA will trigger a message for corrective action. such as loss of communication between the MSC and the cell......... or the error will only be reported on the ROP......... ..... DFI............. Immediate Action For severe errors that are service-affecting....... All Tests Pass (ATP) Analysis For an HEH-initiated conditional restore request. the diagnostic tests for the unit are not robust enough to detect the problem... If that count exceeds an assigned threshold within a predefined time period (typically three in 40 minutes or five in 24 hours). Single Time-period Analysis Refers to the use of error counters assigned to each hardware unit (DS1........... its error history should be forgotten completely................ If an error count for a unit remains below a predefined threshold for a specific period of time............ and so on).......PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Corrective Maintenance Triggers • Fail/Pass Analysis • Leaky Bucket Analysis Depending on the severity of the error... This type of error analysis is based on the theory that if a unit has remained reliable for an extended period of time.................34 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....... HEH takes recovery action...... the conditional restore aborts....................... Leaky Bucket Analysis Refers to the decrementing of non-zero error counters for the configurable hardware units............. CAT..... if the unit passes all diagnostic tests....... the unit is restored to service and HEH adds a count to an ATP counter for the unit......... If the unit fails the diagnostic test... HEH will request a conditional remove of the unit....... This technique is more flexible than a simple analysis based on the number of errors in a single fixed period of time....

..... If the error has not occurred in a given amount of time... If a specified number of errors have accumulated in a specific amount of time.......... If the count reaches zero...................................................................................... 401610-057 and 401-610-107 manuals..............................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Corrective Maintenance Triggers That is...............35 ..................... Reference For more information on HEH messages............. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 ..... the count will be decremented....... the circuit is usually taken out-of-service.................... see the 401-610-055........ the error block is released..................... the count is incremented each time the error being tracked occurs on the circuit involved........... ..........

................. a conditional maintenance request will not result in any action that causes calls to be dropped or service to be denied to a user during the course of command execution........ can be conditional or unconditional.......................... if executing a conditional request would violate either condition..... Maintenance Action Reporting and Control All maintenance actions (remove......................................................................................................... Definition Allowed Maintenance Actions Maintenance Actions Instructions that lead to a change in cell status..... and operational status) are reported to the ECP........... diagnose. MRA will reject any subsequent maintenance-action requests for that unit until the current action has completed (except for stopping a diagnostic. Maintenance actions can be applied to maintenance units through commands from the ECP or by cell site software processes................. In contrast..... such as remove and restore......................................... an unconditional maintenance request will result in the execution of the request immediately or within five minutes of MRA accepting the request....................... which it will honor immediately)....... 401-610-107 .................................................. ......................... switch to redundant unit............... stop a diagnostic.............PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Maintenance Actions Maintenance Actions ....... Allowed maintenance actions depend on the hardware element..........36 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...... with little concern that calls are dropped or service is denied to a user during the course of command execution.............................. In general.. MRA rejects the request.................. Conditional or Unconditional Requests Some maintenance requests........................ restore................... 5 ..... The maintenance actions are listed in the Lucent’s System 1000 Cell Site DCS I/O Manual........................... Once a maintenance action has started on a maintenance unit......

............u yes yes no c.. in the rows of the table that do not have NULL in the Subunit ............................................... Maintenance Units and Actions Unit RCC* RCC RCC RCC RCC RCC DS1 DFI DL SCT† CCC CCU CCU BBA The table below shows the maintenance unit...u c...................... † SCT is denoted as CAT (for clock and tone) in the status display pages.......................u c................... and the ability to perform a maintenance action........... Maintenance actions can be applied to maintenance units through commands from the ECP or by cell site software processes.......................u yes yes no c..............................37 ........................... In the rows of the table that have NULL in the Subunit column.u yes yes no c............. Subunit Maintenance Action NULL CPU MEM NCI CPI AFI NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL NULL CE NULL Remove Restore Diagnose Stop a Switch to Diagnostic Redundant Unit c.... the action is applied to the maintenance unit specified in the Unit column............ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 ............................u c.u c........................ subunit (if any)...............................u c..............u c.u yes yes yes c...u yes yes yes no no yes yes no no no yes yes no no no yes yes no no no yes yes no no no yes yes no c....................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Maintenance Units Maintenance Units ...................u yes yes no no no no no no no c............. The RFTG-m is denoted as RG (for reference generator) in the status display pages................................u yes yes Obtain Status yes no no no no no yes yes yes yes yes yes no yes * The RCC is denoted as CSC (for cell site controller) in the status display pages..... Definition Description Maintenance Units Hardware elements that report their status to the ECP.......u c........u yes yes no c.u c.................. Yes/No Entries The yes and no entries under the maintenance actions in the table indicate whether a maintenance action is permitted for a maintenance unit...........

.................................................... .... the action is applied to the maintenance unit specified in the Subunit column........... 5 ...............PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Maintenance Units column......................................................................38 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .......... c/u Entries The c and u entries under the maintenance actions in the table indicate whether a remove or restore maintenance action is conditional or unconditional............................................ See Maintenance Actions (5-36) for further explanation of c and u entries...................................................

........................ As stated previously......................... which it will honor immediately).................................................. once a maintenance action has started on a maintenance unit........................................39 ......... the technician must perform manual recovery procedures from the ECP.................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 .... diagnose.........................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Maintenance Commands Maintenance Commands ............................... Definition Recovering from Faults Automatic Recovery Maintenance commands Initiate maintenance actions on maintenance units................ ........................ The Minicell software recovers from faults one of two ways: • Automatic recovery • Manual intervention All maintenance actions (remove.......................................... restore.......... the cell size status display pages provide an easy method of entering maintenance commands................................................... switch to redundant unit..................................................... MRA will reject any subsequent maintenance-action request for that unit until the current action has completed (except for stopping a diagnostic............ Maintenance commands entered using status display pages consist of: • Removing (deactivating) units • Restoring (activating) units • Diagnosing (testing) units • Generating status output message reports on units • Inhibiting/Allowing – Audits – Audit/HEH output – Call processing – Forward setup channel control (normally inhibited) – Functional tests – Interrupts – Routine diagnostics – Diversity error imbalance output... stop a diagnostic............ When manual intervention is required.................. Manual Intervention In situations where no automatic recovery action is taken or automatic recovery action fails.. and obtain status) are reported to the ECP...

... and is switched only when RFTG0 fails).......PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Maintenance States Maintenance States ............ • Unequipped: Unit exists in the translations database strictly as a place holder.......................... • Growth state: Unit is not available to be placed in use......................... applies only to redundant CSCs and SCTs (for RFTG................... Definition Maintenance State Descriptions Maintenance states Corresponds to the condition of a piece of equipment..... The meanings of the maintenance states are as follows: • Active: Unit is available for its intended use.................................................................... • Out-of-service: Unit is not available for its intended use (exact opposite of active state)........... MRA records locally the maintenance status of the cell site equipment in the equipment status table......40 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 . growth........... but is available to be diagnosed or updated with NVM....................... The maintenance status of equipment is reported to the ECP when the status changes or the ECP requests an update.... MRA will reject any maintenance request targeted for an unequipped unit.. or equipped via translations (system configuration parameter settings).................... .................................................... RFTG1 is on stand-by.......................... 5 .... but is available to be diagnosed or updated with NVM. each unit is assigned an equipment state of unequipped.............................. The status of cell site equipment appears in the SDPs........... Each equipped unit is further assigned a state of active.................................................. • Standby: Unit is available to be placed into the active state.......................................... out-of-service............ or standby (redundant unit only) via maintenance requests sent to the Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA) subsystem......... During installation...... Throughout the maintenance process..........................................

... the op:cell and dgn:cell commands are the most common... The use of options enables specific responses.............................................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Examples of Input Commands and Output Messages Examples of Input Commands and Output Messages .................... For instance: • The use of the option EXTERN yields a list of outstanding external and environmental alarms.......................... already mentioned in Unit 4......................... is used to diagnose a cell site unit........... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 .............................. is used to obtain the status on a cell.................................................. .............. Introduction More Common Maintenance Commands Craftshell commands are used to instruct the PCSC to perform specific activities........................ Its use will be discussed in more detail later in this lesson.................................................. The op:cell command........ From a maintenance perspective..41 ............. The dgn:cell command.. in particular......................................... or one of its components (or cell site unit)........................................................................................................................

.......... and the remove is deferred for up to five minutes................... Redundant Units For redundant units................................ 5 ............................................ As soon as the unit becomes idle (free of all calls) during the five-minute interval.................. It schedules an event or process to place the specified maintenance unit to out-ofservice assuming that it is NOT busy (in active state and currently performing its intended purpose).............................................. MRA automatically executes a switch before removing the unit from service........................ Out-of-Service If the unit is already out-of-service when a remove action (conditional or unconditional) is applied............................................... the conditional remove aborts with no action taken. This tag indicates that the unit is out-of-service due to a remove request—as opposed to being out-ofservice due to a diagnose request.......42 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .......................... If the unit is in the active state and the redundant unit is in the standby state when the conditional remove action is applied..................... as set in translations (form cell2) • The action is applied on the last data link to a cell site (to remove the last data link from service.................................. it is removed from service.. for example.... SCT supplying a digital tone source (this restriction avoids false error that may be generated upon premature .............. Conditional remove action will abort with no action taken if: • The unit is in the growth state • Placing the unit out-of-service would result in exceeding the outof-service threshold limit for that type of unit........ If the unit is still busy after five minutes.. the unit is blocked (not allowed to accept new calls)............. the conditional remove aborts with no action taken........ Busy CCC If the unit is a busy CCC or CCU when the conditional remove action is applied....................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Conditional Remove Conditional Remove ........ if the unit is in the standby state when the conditional remove action is applied......................... If the unit is in the active state and the redundant unit is in the out-ofservice state when the conditional remove action is applied......... use unconditional remove action) • The action involves an SCT involved in diagnostics of another unit—that is...... such as a CE supporting an active call.................................. the unit is taken out-of-service again and tagged with the qualifier OOS-RMV............ the unit is removed from service immediately............ Definition Conditional remove Maintenance action that changes the state of a maintenance unit from active or standby to out-of-service.......................

.................... ........................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Conditional Remove termination of the diagnostic test involving the SCT)....................................... A conditional remove action on a DFI is not permitted if that unit controls the last data link to a cell site......................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 ...................................................................... References For more information on the remove maintenance action.............. refer to the RMV CELL commands in the Cell Site/DCS Input Output Messages manual (401-610-107).........................43 .........................

............. MRA drops the calls and removes the unit from service...PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Unconditional Remove Unconditional Remove ......................... The format for unconditional remove is: rmv:cell^a.............................................. If the unit is still busy after 5 minutes.. ........................................ which may result in the generation of false errors upon premature termination of the diagnostic test.........44 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............. Definition Unconditional Remove Format Service Effects Unconditional remove Maintenance action that changes the state of a maintenance unit from active or standby to out-of-service........... It promptly places the specified maintenance unit in the out-of-service state unless any of the following conditions are in effect: • The unconditional remove action is targeted for a busy CCC or CCU.... • The unconditional remove action is targeted for a redundant CSC or SCT having an out-of-service mate................................................................................ The unconditional remove aborts with no action taken.......... • The unconditional remove action is targeted for a unit in the growth state............ b= unit to be removed Unconditional remove requests may be service-affecting because of the out-of-service limits that may be exceeded.......................................................................................................................... an unconditional remove request of the unit terminates the ongoing diagnostics..............b...............................ucl a: cell number... 5 ................................ If an SCT is involved in diagnostics of another unit......................... The unconditional remove aborts with no action taken.................... The remove is deferred for up to 5 minutes......

.............. the conditional restore aborts........... active.......... The format of the p restore command is: rst:cell^a....................... The failed unit remains in the out-of-service state... Restoring Units in a Growth State A conditional restore request on a unit in the growth state will diagnose and initialize the unit but will not change the state of the unit: the unit remains in the growth state..........45 .......... all the restrictions associated with a conditional remove are also associated with a conditional restore.................................... If the unit fails the diagnostic test....................................................................................................................b a: cell number......... An unconditional restore of a unit in the growth state is not permitted................. or standby state...........PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Conditional Restore Conditional Restore .............. Definition Format of Restore Command Conditional Restore: A maintenance action that brings a unit back to service........................... Therefore................. Except for a unit that is already out-of-service or in the growth state........... It schedules an event or process to restore the specified maintenance unit after the unit passes a diagnostic test..................................... the first step in a conditional restore maintenance action is the automatic execution of a conditional remove.... .......................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 .......................... b= unit being restored Use of the Command The restore maintenance action can be applied to units that are in the out-of-service................ Restoring Out-of-Service Units The conditional restore maintenance action changes the state of a maintenance unit from out-of-service to active unless the command specifies a standby state.............. Conditional versus Unconditional Restore The primary difference between a conditional and unconditional restore is that the conditional restore runs a diagnostic first while the unconditional does not..............................................

........... For more information on the restore maintenance action..........................................................ucl a: cell number.......................................... It schedules an event or process to restore the specified maintenance unit without first running a diagnostic test on the unit...................................... b= unit being restored Conditions Keeping the Unit OOS The unconditional restore maintenance action changes the state of a maintenance unit from out-of-service to active unless the command specifies a standby state......... the lack of restrictions associated with an unconditional remove—unconditional remove requests may be service-affecting—applies to an unconditional restore as well... except for a unit that is already out-of-service or in the growth state.................................................. refer to the RST CELL commands in the Cell Site/DCS Input Output Messages manual (401-610-107)............................. no diagnostic test is run............ • For redundant units: A CSC conditional restore request compares the active and redundant unit memories of the controller sides (CSC0 and CSC1) after the CSC being restored has elevated to the standby state................................... 5 ......................................................... the first step in an unconditional restore maintenance action is the automatic execution of an unconditional remove.......PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Unconditional Restore Unconditional Restore ................................b.... Definition Unconditional Restore Format Unconditional Restore Similar to the conditional restore command. The format of the unconditional restore is: rst:cell^a.....................46 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ......... Therefore............................. • No action is performed if an unconditional restore request is made on the currently in-service link.. Conditions Applying to Restore Requests The following are other conditions pertaining to conditional and unconditional restore requests that you need to be aware of: References • For data links (DLs): A conditional restore request reverts to unconditional if there is no link currently in-service...................... ........ • An active CSC or SCT having an out-of-service redundant unit cannot be restored conditionally or unconditionally................................ A mismatch in memory drops the CSC back to the out-of-service state and aborts the restore request............

............ ................................ b= unit being diagnosed For redundant units.................. The dgn command format is: dgn:cell^a....................b[.... In the latter case.......... A unit initially in the growth state remains in the growth state............. the diagnose aborts with no action taken. MRA initiates a switch before executing the diagnose request................. The diagnostic test results (pass........ucl][:tlp] a: cell number.............. fail) are reported to the ECP.... Diagnosing a CSC For More Information A diagnostic test can be called for the whole CSC (in which all controller circuit boards are tested).................................. if the targeted unit is in the active state........................ In addition................................... refer to the DGN CELL commands in the Cell Site/DCS Input Output Messages manual (401-610-107)................ or to a redundant unit in the active state.................................... The first step in a diagnose maintenance action for an active CCC or CCU is the automatic execution of a conditional remove.... CPU)............PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Diagnose Command Diagnose Command ........ or a diagnostic test can be called for an individual controller circuit board (for example.... Definition Format of Diagnose Command Use of the Command Diagnosing a CCC or CCU Diagnose (dgn) Maintenance action that can be applied to a unit in the out-of-service or growth state.............. the unit is left in the out-of-service state except for a unit in the growth state.....47 ....................... but the mate is out-of-service................. to a redundant unit in the standby state..................... For more information on the diagnose maintenance action................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 ............................................................ the diagnose maintenance action can be applied to a CCC or CCU in the active state........................... Whether a unit passes or fails diagnostics...

........................... 5 .................... ...PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Stop a Diagnostic Stop a Diagnostic .................... refer to the STOP DGN commands in the Cell Site/DCS Input Messages Manual (401-610-107)......... growth.................... or active)............ For More Information For more information on the diagnostic maintenance action................. If the diagnostic test is running....................................cell^a........................ CCU............ MRA aborts the test... MRA returns the unit to the state it was in just prior to the diagnostic request (out-of-service........................................................ Upon terminating a diagnostic test for one of those units.................................... If the diagnostic test request is still in the job queue... or BBA...................................... Definition Format of the Stop Command Stop This maintenance action stops a diagnostic test on a maintenance unit..........................b a: cell number........................... MRA removes the request from the queue.................................................................................48 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .... The format of the stop command is: g stop:dgn.............................. b= unit being diagnosed Use of the Command MRA leaves the unit in the out-of-service or growth state unless the unit is a CCC..................

....................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Initialize a Site Initialize a Site ................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 .................... Purpose of the Command Command Format The purpose of this command (init) is to reset a cell site operating parameters to their specified values................................................................................................... The table shows the command formats to initialize a cell site....................SW ......................................................................................... system process purge at a specific INIT:CELL a:SPP b[ CLASS c] cell site specific cell site phase INIT:CELL a:{TC|SC}[ CLASS c] cell site memory boot INIT:CELL a:BOOT[IE][ CLASS c] cell site memory boot and controller switch INIT:CELL a:BOOT[IE]...............................................................................................................49 ......................... To request a … Enter...............................................................................................................

......................... The format of the switch command is: sw:cell^a............. .......................... refer to the SW CELL command in the Input Messages manual (401-610-107)............. b= unit being switched Redundant Units If either of the redundant units is in the out-of-service state.................................. the switch request will fail if the SCT is involved in diagnostics of another unit..........................b a: cell number...................................................... This maintenance action applies only to CSCs and SCTs............ the switch request aborts with no action taken.....50 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .............................................................. 5 ... The purpose of the maintenance action is to transfer the functions of the first unit to the second unit...... For the SCT..................................................................................................................................................... References For more information on the switch to redundant unit maintenance action............ Definition Format of the Switch Command Switch (sw) The switch to redundant unit maintenance action changes the state of a maintenance unit from active to another state while at the same time changing the state of a second unit (the associated redundant unit) from standby to active.........................................................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Switch to Redundant Unit Switch to Redundant Unit ...................

.......... OP CELL EXTERN. that is............ OP CELL SG......................................... For more information on the obtain status maintenance action............ and OP CELL VERSION commands in the Cell Site/ DCS Input Messages manual (401-610-107)................... MRA automatically reports the maintenance status of equipment to the Access Manager whenever the status changes.......51 ........ refer to the OP CELL................................................ Use of the Command Format of the Operational Status Command Op The Operational Status maintenance action determines the status (state) of a maintenance unit............extern op:cell............ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 ........................... OP CELL SCSM........ OP CELL OVLD......................unit^ y op:cell^ x..........PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Operational Status Operational Status ................................... The format of the operational status command is: op:cell^x op:cell^x................................................. A status display page is refreshed with new maintenance status every 15 seconds................................................. OP CELL GENERIC................................. Maintenance Request Administrator (MRA) reads the recorded status from the equipment status table and forwards the status to the Access Manager............................................ OP CELL DLOPTS.. generic Operational Status Command SDP Reporting For More Information In addition..................................................... OP CELL DL...... .....

..................................... Both the qualifier and the final state of the unit are reported to the Access Manager.......................................................................... the MRA assigns a qualifier................................... The out-of-service qualifier in an output message identifies the source of that state................... Both appear in the ROP message............. .....................52 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .....................Out-Of-Service State Qualifier -.......... Need for an Out-Of-Service Qualifier A unit can be out-of-service for a variety of reasons................ Assigning of the Qualifier When a maintenance unit is placed OOS.Purpose ................................................................... The qualifier helps define the OOS condition.............................................................................................. Definition State qualifier A message from the MRA to indicate the reason why a particular unit is in an out-of-service state.............. 5 ............Purpose PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Out-Of-Service State Qualifier -.................................................................................

......................................................... To identify the reason that a unit is in the out-of-service state............. The diagram below shows some of the out-of-service qualifiers: • Some examples of OOS qualifiers: – OOS-DGN = successful completion of diagnose request – OOS-FAULT = fault detected during diagnostics – OOS-INITF = unsuccessful initialization process – OOS-RMVD = unit went OOS due to successful completion of the remove request ......... Examples Out-of-Service Qualifiers A maintenance unit can be placed in the out-of-service state due to one of several reasons..........................................Examples Out-Of-Service State Qualifiers -..........................................................Examples .................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 5 ....................................................................................................................... MRA assigns the unit a qualifier in addition to its final state of OOS.......................................................................53 .......................................PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance Out-Of-Service State Qualifiers -...................................................................................

.................................................................................................... 5 ....................54 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .......................................................Examples PCS CDMA Minicell Maintenance ............................Out-Of-Service State Qualifiers -...................................................

.... Corrective maintenance procedures are based upon alarm indications and diagnostic test results.........6-17 - - - - - - - - - - 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 ................. This unit provides an introduction to the principles and tools available to diagnose a cell site...........• Diagnostic Tests .......6 Diagnostics Overview Purpose Diagnostics are indications of system failures that need to be corrected.........• Hardware Error Handler ..............- - - - - - - - - Alarms and Diagnostics • Alarm Overview ......• Alarm Scanning ............ which provide identification of troubles and indications of faulty or suspect units.. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 ..................• Alarm Types .................... identify faults to one or more suspected units within a functional area.....6-14 .......6-12 .......................- - - - - - - - 6-11 ................• Functional Tests ..• Software Asserts ...............................1 ....................• Alarm Functions ............... • Diagnostic test results are generated by software test routines run on a functional circuit block and........... in most instances........................... Contents Fault Detection and Recovery Mechanisms • Fault Detection ............................. in most instances....... • Alarm indications............ are generated by dedicated monitoring circuits......• Software Audits ...........6-15 ...

....Frame Alarm User Alarms ..............................................- - - - Fault Detection and Recovery Tools • Performance Measurement • Automatic Recovery Tools .............• Orthogonal-Channel Noise Simulator .......- - - - - - - - - 6-20 6-21 6-22 6-26 6-27 6-29 - 6-30 6-31 .....................................• Fault Detection Mechanisms For Manual Recovery • OMP Read-Only Printer (ROP) Monitor ..................6-34 .• RF Call Trace .....................6-33 ...........................Diagnostics • • • • • • Alarm Control Board (ACB) Interfaces ....Detailed Alarm Description -..6-32 ....... Physical Display .........................6-36 ..........Alarm Display Description ..............................6-35 . 6 .......LAC Alarms Detailed Alarm Description -...............2 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..................................Alarms..................

...... – Manual fault recovery is executed under operator control as part of physical intervention to correct equipment failure.................. ....................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 ....... PCS CDMA Minicells support two complementary types of fault detection and recovery mechanisms: • • Fault detection is either automated or manual: – Automated mode constantly monitors and reports the results of periodic self-tests – Manual mode enables maintenance technicians to identify the source of equipment failure..... It is initiated automatically by the Switch as soon as it has detected a fault in the system under its control..... Fault recovery mechanisms are also either automated or manual: – Automated fault recovery is software driven............Diagnostics Fault Detection and Recovery Mechanisms Overview Purpose Types of Fault Detection and Recovery Mechanisms This section describes the system fault indicators and the types of tools used to identify the faults.....................................3 ..................................................................................................................................

....... Diagnostic Tests Diagnostic tests are run either automatically or manually...... is based on an indication at the MCSC and recorded on the Read Only Printer (ROP)......... In most cases........................... power and entry alarms......... they remain until they are reported.................... alarm indications should be cleared before attempting to clear diagnostic troubles...... fault detection................................................ fuse.......... Overview Fault detection..... Type of Housekeeping Software The cell site detects faults by various means.... Other alarm indications (non-latched) may or may not remain long enough to be read and reported............. Alarm Indications The majority of alarm conditions reported to the MCSC can be visually identified at the cell site by observing equipment alarm indicators......... including: • Diagnostic tests (see page 6-5) • Functional tests (see page 6-6) • Software audits (see page 6-7) • Software asserts (see page 6-8) • Board self-tests • Hardware integrity checks • Hardware alarm scanning ..................... and recovery are automatic.. Some alarm indications are latched — that is....... whether automated or manual. faults such as transmitter failure................................................ It should be noted that alarm conditions (such as power....... 6 ....... Cell Site Housekeeping Software The cell site has excellent housekeeping software... it may be difficult to relate an existing alarm condition to a diagnostic fault condition.............................................) can cause diagnostic faults to appear............... and speech path conditions are constantly monitored and are automatically reported to the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP)..................................Diagnostics Fault Detection Fault Detection .....4 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....... which provides a running record of all Minicell activities............................................. Therefore............................ etc..................... Their results provide the starting point for clearing diagnostic faults (non-alarm)........ diagnosis............................... In some instances........................

............... Related Documents Series II Cell Site Diagnostic Test Descriptions (401-660-101). For equipment that is down.......... manual diagnostics can be done.............. the cell site performs the requested diagnostic test and returns the test results to the ECP...................... or manual basis............................... Overview Diagnostic tests can be performed on an automatic (error-driven)........ Routine diagnostic tests are run once a day............................................................................................................................................................................................... Diagnostic tests are initiated and controlled from the ECP..................................... Running Diagnostic Tests Running diagnostic tests on a regularly scheduled basis (routine diagnostic tests) is a way of determining if the cell site hardware units are operational.................................................................................................Diagnostics Diagnostic Tests Diagnostic Tests ...................................... The test results are reported to the ECP...... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 ..... the time of day at which these tests are run is specified in the cell site translations...... scheduled... .........5 .........................

......................................... test it.........6 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................ 6 ........ ............... Type of Functional Tests Functional tests can be performed on a scheduled or manual basis.............. Running Functional Tests Functional tests are run on equipment that is in-service but not active................................... the exact time of day cannot be specified...................................... fail) are reported to the ECP..................................................................... These tests verify the operation of the following cell site equipment: • Transmit path • Receive path • Access channel • Paging channel • Sync Channel • Pilot Channel • Traffic Channel • Pilot Level • Antenna.................................................................................... Running functional tests on a regularly scheduled basis (routine functional tests) is a way of checking the integrity of the cell site transmit and receive paths...............................) The test results (pass................................................................. The frequency of routine functional tests is specified in the cell site translations.............. and then free it for normal call processing traffic......................... (Unlike routine diagnostic testing....... Functional Test Types Functional tests temporarily take control of an in-service hardware unit................. the cell site performs the requested functional test and returns the results to the ECP................... Functional tests are initiated and controlled from the ECP........Diagnostics Functional Tests Functional Tests ....

................ and correcting software data errors before the errors adversely affect system performance........ Audit test errors are reported to the ECP.................................................................Diagnostics Software Audits Software Audits ... Software Audit Frequency The frequency of routine audits is controlled exclusively by the RCC............................................. Running Software Audits Software audits detect faults on software that is in-service....... ........... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 .............................................................. the cell site performs the requested audit and returns the results to the ECP................ if necessary.................................... the audits are initiated and controlled from the ECP........ they recover any lost resources and....................... invoke appropriate system initialization............ When audits detect errors.................................................... Related Documents Series II Cell Site Audits Manual (401-610-078)..... there is no scheduling translation associated with audits......................... confining...................7 .......................................... Running software audits on a regularly scheduled basis (routine audits) is a way of detecting..................................................... Software Audits Software audits can be performed on a scheduled or manual basis.............

........ Such errors are reported to assert-handling software on the RCC. The assert handler does not initiate any recovery.... an assert macro provides the assert-handling software with the information it needs to process the assert failure.................................... SIassert can initiate different levels of recovery depending upon the severity of the assert....... The assert-handling software may be one of two software subsystems on the RCC: • Assert Handler: Receives and handles asserts from units on the TDM bus.......................Diagnostics Software Asserts Software Asserts ........................................................... ................... Assert messages are often difficult to analyze and may require escalation to the next level of technical support.. a software program calls a routine and expects three choices but is presented with four..................................................................................................................... When an assert occurs....................................... What output message prints at the ECP depends upon the macro that called the assert-handling software......... For example.8 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........................... • SIassert: Receives and handles asserts from the application software running on the RCC............. Most asserts come from the radios or the Communications Processor Interface (CPI) board....................................................... 6 ......... which is responsible for formatting assert output messages and sending the messages to the ECP............................ Description Handling Asserts Asserts occur when software encounters an unusual or unexpected condition..............................................................

.......... Depending upon the severity of the error....... the threshold is tunable via translations. referred to as scanned alarms........................................... There is no automatic recovery for scanned alarms.......... the operational parameter that caused the alarm may return to its normal operating range........... restore) is needed and then issues a request to carry out the action.......Diagnostics Hardware Error Handler Hardware Error Handler ............................. Scanned alarms include power converter and fan alarm conditions..... In time..... it is hardcoded into the software.................... either the HEH takes immediate recovery action or waits until the error has occurred a predefined number of times before taking action............. a technician must visit the site and manually clear the alarm............................... memory read/write errors.............. Otherwise.............. thereby clearing the alarm............ the threshold is an engineering parameter... Some faults.. Autonomous Error Types Hardware Alarm Scanning The cell site will autonomously report four types of errors to HEH to allow appropriate diagnostics recovery to be scheduled.......... An error message will be returned to the RCC......... and callprocessing software................ In other cases................... • Radio-channel errors include frame errors and access-attempt success and failure errors............. • Program control errors include stack pointer errors... that is............... ...... • Hardware errors include malfunctioning microprocessor errors....... It determines when a recovery action (remove........... The error types are hardware errors.... or synthesizer lock errors.......... divide by zero errors............. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 .. trap errors.......... For other errors.. and mobile station errors......... program-control errors................................. These errors are “bursty” in nature and will be reported to the ECP after a predefined threshold has been passed. In some cases...9 ...................................... functional tests............... The HEH receives error reports from hardware units.. radio-channel errors.... These errors come from on-board self tests. the HEH sends only an error report to the ECP............. are gathered by dedicated monitoring circuits at the cell site and then reported to the ECP........ or overflow and underflow errors....... • Mobile station errors include improper or illogical message content in the received message from a mobile transceiver or the absence of a response message.................. Hardware Error Handler The automatic recovery actions at the cell site are done through the Hardware Error Handler (HEH) software subsystem..........

....................................................Diagnostics Hardware Error Handler Related Documents Output Messages manual (401-610-057)...................................10 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................................... 6 ........................................ see RPT CELL HEH ................................................................

.. • Alarm indications...................................................................................................................... ..... This unit provides an introduction to the principles and tools available to diagnose a cell site..................................Diagnostics Hardware Error Handler Alarms and Diagnostics Overview ........................... Corrective maintenance procedures are based upon alarm indications and diagnostic test results................ in most instances............................. Purpose Diagnostics are indications of system failures that need to be corrected...... identify faults to one or more suspected units within a functional area.....................................11 ................................................................................................................................. which provide identification of troubles and indications of faulty or suspect units............................................................................... in most instances......................... • Diagnostic test results are generated by software test routines run on a functional circuit block and.. are generated by dedicated monitoring circuits. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 ......

........ In addition................. some alarms activate an LED display on the appropriate circuit pack.................. 6 .................................................................................. Alarms are also classified by level of severity/priority of required action...... Overview Latched Alarms Severity Alarm Reporting Alarms are the first indication of cell site trouble............................................... User Minicell Suite Alarm # Equipment Alarm State 0 External Alarm 6 Minicell Primary Switchable 1 External Alarm 5 Minicell Primary Switchable 2 External Alarm 4 Minicell Primary Switchable 3 External Alarm 3 Minicell Primary Switchable 4 External Alarm 2 Minicell Primary Switchable 5 External Alarm 1 Minicell Primary Switchable 6 External Alarm 0 Minicell Primary Switchable 7 Generator Alarm Generator Cabinet Normally Open 8 Power Major Alarm Power Cabinet Normally Open 9 CSU Alarm Normally Open Minicell Primary .........................Diagnostics Alarm Overview Alarm Overview .....................................................................................................12 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................................................................................ as indicated in the following table.................................................. PCS CDMA Minicell alarms are reported to the Switch by the Alarm/ FITS Interface (AFI) circuit pack in the Radio Control Complex (RCC) shelf................................. indicating one of the following conditions: • Software failure • Hardware failure • User-defined condition Alarms are either “latched” (remain until removed by operator action) or “unlatched” (are retired without operator intervention as soon as the defect has been cleared)............................ User alarms are numbered..

..........................................Diagnostics Alarm Overview 10 Door / Intrusion Alarm All 11 Heat Exchanger Hi/ Minicell Primary Lo Temp Alarm & Growth Normally Open 12 Battery Discharge Alarm Battery Cabinet Normally Open 13 Growth 0 Alarm Minicell Growth Normally Open 14 Sage Alarm Minicell Primary Normally Open 15 External Alarm 7 Minicell Primary Normally Open 16 Power Minor Alarm Power Cabinet Normally Open 17 AC Fail Alarm Normally Open Power Cabinet Normally Open ................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 .........................................................13 ........................................................................................................................

..........14 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............ Overview Alarms Scanned into the AFI The Alarm Control Board The Switch continuously monitors the Minicell operation.......... .................. All the Minicell alarms eventually are reported by the alarm and FITS Interface (AFI) circuit pack in the RCC Shelf.............. ............ For more information look at the alarm section in Chapter 7 of Lucent Technologies PCS System Acceptance Guidelines and Procedures 401703-203.......................................................................................................................................... through a process called Alarm Scanning...................... LAC alarms are used for reporting any CDMA transmit unit (CTU) and/or receive unit (RU) failures............................................................................ a frame alarm reports power converter unit (PCU) failures in the CTU shelf...................................................................... The alarms are connected to the AFI at the RCC shelf backplane via an AYD5 connector.... 6 ......................... at which time it reports both amplifier alarms (LAC alarms) and frame alarm status information to the AFI.......... AFI Polling Rate For More Information on Alarms The AFI can send out up to 32 unique polling requests in approximately a two-second period of time.........Diagnostics Alarm Scanning Alarm Scanning .......................... The alarms scanned into the AFI can be classified as follows: • Amplifier alarms (displayed as “LAC” alarms) • Frame alarms (fan and power converter alarms) • User alarms (18 maximum) • Miscellaneous alarms (RFTGm side 0 or side 1) The alarm control board (ACB) monitors the alarms from the Minicell’s frame PCS components and reports the alarm status to the AFI board located within the radio control complex (RCC)...... The ACB continuously scans and analyzes the alarms in its equipment sector until it is interrupted by AFI polling.......................................................

...................... An alarm can be triggered by the customer by cutting off this current in one of two ways: 1................ via a primary cabinet CTU shelf backplane connector..... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 ................................................................................................. pulled low to indicate power converter failure.............. then the opto-isolator LED is lit and no alarm is registered................... 2.......................... Power converter alarms (xxSHALxL): TTL signal... others will require a physical intervention at the Minicell site.......................... pulled low to indicate fan failure.......... communicates to the AFI (in the RCC shelf) via an RS-422 interface....... Breaking the circuit with the opening of a relay contact (open on alarm) ..... These are commonly called LAC alarms................... The ACB. There are a maximum of 18 user alarms. Usually connected to ALM1 contact on back of power converter (pin 113) while ALM2 is connected to ground (pin 114)...................... These are opto-isolator type alarms..........Diagnostics Alarm Types Alarm Types ..... Frame Alarms User Alarms Frame alarms can be broken into 2 classes: 1.................. The primary cabinet CTUs send their alarms to the ACB via internal CTU backplane connections............ Six possible connections per cabinet...................... As long as the circuit is complete..................... These alarms are static signals sent from each CTU and RU (in primary cabinet only) to the Alarm Control Board (ACB) to indicate the failures...... Some of these alarms may be retired remotely........................ LACALTX± and LACALRX±...... Fan alarms (xxFALxL): TTL signal........ On alarm................ Current to drive the opto-isolator is placed on the USERALxx+pin and is expected to be returned to the AFI on the USERALxx-pin.................. Overview Amplifier Alarms Alarms of direct interest to Maintenance Personnel are those that are related to hardware malfunctions.15 ..................... a relay closure connects ALM1 to ALM2 (ground)......... Six possible connections per cabinet......... The RU alarms (all contained in the primary cabinet) are collected by the ACB via cable harness connections to the primary cabinet’s CTU shelf backplane.................. while the growth cabinet CTUs send their alarms to the ACB (in the primary cabinet) via a cable harness between the CTU backplanes in the growth and primary cabinets..................

...................... 2 spare alarms (SPAUSEL_1 and SPARE4_1)............................... 6 ............................... Spare alarms Shunting the current from the USERALxx+ leads to an AFI ground pin with the closure of a relay contact (close on alarm) There are 4 spare TTL alarms (ALSPx).....................................................................................................Diagnostics Alarm Types 2..............................................................16 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...... ...

................................................................................................................................................................................................. RFGENSEL ± Not used Primary Cabinet Fan/ Blower Alarms (TTL Low Indicates Failure) PRFAL5L Rear Heat Exchanger (Optional) PRFAL4L Rear Heat Exchanger (Optional) PRFAL3L Cabinet Blower PRFAL2L CTU Shelf Fan PRFAL1L Heat Exchanger Blower 1 PRFAL0L Heat Exchanger Blower 0 .................................................................................................................................... and may be used for different purposes in the Minicell.. RFGEN1 ± RFTG Side 1 Alarm................... Overview The alarm inputs to the AFI are accessed at AFI1 slot (P20) via an AYD5 connector paddle board............. The alarm signal names originate from the Series II Macrocell project.....17 .................................... Alarms from RFTG RFGEN0 ± RFTG Side 0 Alarm.................... CTU and RU Alarm Bus LACALTX ± LACALRX ± CTU and RU (LAC) alarm bus from primary cabinet ACB via CTU backplane connector......... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 ..........................................................................Diagnostics Alarm Functions Alarm Functions .........

........................................................... or to lightning protection block for power cabinet alarms .................... 6 ................................................18 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........... PRSHAL4L CTU Shelf PCU1 Alarm from ACB via CTU Backplane Connector........... PRSHAL1L CRC Shelf0 415AC Alarm................................. PROCPWRL Internal Backplane Wired-or Alarm for the two RCC Shelf 415ACs G0FAL5L Not used G0FAL4L Reserved for Possible Cabinet Blower 2 G0FAL3L Reserved for Cabinet Blower 1 (only active when door is open) G0FAL2L CTU Shelf Fan G0FAL1L Heat Exchanger Blower 1 G0FAL0L Heat Exchanger Blower 0 G0SHAL5L PCU2 G0SHAL4L PCU1 G0SHAL3L CRC2 G0SHAL2L CRC1 G0SHAL1L CRC0 G0SHAL0L Not used 18 User Alarms Available (2 wires each) USRAL(0-17) ± User alarm inputs to AFI are wired permanently to AIM0 for cross-connect capability............................ PRSHAL3L CRC Shelf2 415AC Alarm.. AIM1 connects directly to primary cabinet user alarms............Diagnostics Alarm Functions Primary Cabinet PCU Alarms (TTL Low Indicates Failure) PRSHAL5L Growth Cabinet Fan/Blower Alarms (TTL Low Indicates Failure) Growth Cabinet PCU Alarms (TTL Low Indicates Failure) CTU Shelf PCU2 Alarm from ACB via CTU Backplane Connector.................. PRSHAL2L CRC Shelf1 415AC Alarm..................

........19 ...... External User Alarm 7 may be used for other purposes if the installation does not include a generator cabinet......... • Growth 2 (carrier 3) CRC alarms are for the right side of RG2....... minor........... Alarm locations for rack-mount growth cabinets correspond to the carrier for the equivalent growth cabinet..Diagnostics Alarm Functions and external user alarms... batteries on discharge.......high temp and low temp • Intrusion alarms (1) ............... • Growth 2 (carrier 3) CTU alarms are for the lower CTU.......................... the current loop is broken indicating an alarm) • Power Cabinet Alarms (6) .............................. generator running...............all door intrusion switches in both primary and growth cabinets are connected in series (if one fails. Growth 1.......major. • Growth 3 (carrier 4) CTU alarms are for the upper CTU...... For example..................................... These must be lightning protected when received into the primary cabinet • Reserved for Growth Frame (1) • CRTU (1) • Extra External User Alarms (7) ........ • Growth 3 (carrier 4) CRC alarms are for the left side of RG2.......... Each of these must be wire-ORed (or connected in series) with like signals from backup battery cabinet if used. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 .. and generator failure.......... ... This alarm is not programmable and is “Close ON Alarm”.............these must also be lightning protected if coming from outside the primary or growth cabinets External User Alarm 7 is used for Generator Fail when equipped with a generator...................... The 18 alarms are as follows (with quantity in parenthesis): External User Alarm 7 Locating Rack-Mounted Growth Alarms • CSU alarm (1) • Heat Exchanger alarms (1) ........ and RG2 (rack growth 2): • Growth 1 (carrier 2) alarms are for the growth 1 cabinet. AC fail.... alarms for a minicell with a primary cabinet......

.................................... Overview Alarm Inputs to the ACB The ACB (located in the Primary Cabinet CTU Shelf) formats alarms collected from the CTU..................................................................................................... The RS-422 Interface carrying the ACB LAC alarm status signals to the AFI board uses 4 wires: 2 for the transmit function and 2 for the receive function...........20 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................. Over Temperature. LNA failure 6 RX_ALmn (n = 1 to 6) Primary Cabinet 3 CTU Alarms Synthesizer out-of-lock...... 6 .... The following two paragraphs describe the interface for LAC alarm and cabinet alarm message reporting....... Subassembly Alarms Alarm Type Qty Alarm Condition Leads ACB Signal Name RU Alarms 6 Synthesizer out-of-lock........................Diagnostics Alarm Control Board (ACB) Interfaces Alarm Control Board (ACB) Interfaces ......... and Malfunction Alarm 3 TX_ALMn (n = 1 to 3) Growth I Cabinet CTU Alarms Same as Primary Frame CTU Alarms 3 TX_ALMn (n = 4 to 6) 3 CTU Shelf PCU 2 Alarms AFI Interface Output Voltage Variation (±3%) 2 DCI_ALMn (n = 1......................................................... LAC Alarm Interface LAC alarms cover any CTU and/or RU failure(s)............................................................................................................................... The alarm signals reported to the AFI are shown in the following table....................................2) Two types of alarm status information are sent to the AFI Interface: • LAC alarms • Frame (cabinet) alarms.......................... Frame Alarm Interface Frame alarms cover the two PCUs located in the same CTU shelf in the primary cabinet.............. ......................... These alarms are reported to the AFI circuit pack located in the RCC via a cable assembly connected to the CTU shelf backplane... DC Over Current......... RUs and PCUs before sending them to the Alarm FITS Interface (AFI) board (located in the RCC shelf)......

Physical Display Alarms.................................Diagnostics Alarms....... and green.................................. ............ STBY..... “OFF” means LED is not illuminated...................... the ALM AMP LED is displayed and latched.... grouped as follows: • A group of three LEDs (ALM............21 ....................................................................... ACB Alarm LEDs Unit ACB ACB ACB RU 1 RU 2 RU 3 RU 4 RU 5 RU 6 CTU “ON” means the LED is illuminated...................................... ACT) that depict the status of the ACB • A group of six (ALM 1 to ALM 6) that depict the status of diversity receive RU1 through RU6 • A lone LED (ALM AMP) that reports on the status of the CTUs.. All RU and ALM AMP LEDs are red........ LED Color RED YELLOW GREEN RED RED RED RED RED RED RED Description LED State ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Faceplate Text ALM STBY ACT ALM1 ALM2 ALM3 ALM4 ALM5 ALM6 ALM/AMP Alarm Condition Description Power-up/self-test failure Busy mode/Stand-by mode Passed all tests and/or is active RU 1 Failure/Alarm RU 2 Failure/Alarm RU 3 Failure/Alarm RU 4 Failure/Alarm RU 5 Failure/Alarm RU 6 Failure/Alarm CTU Failure/Alarm ALM STBY ACT ALM 1 ALM 2 ALM 3 ALM 4 ALM 5 ALM 6 ALM RU AMP RST The LEDs are used to depict a unit’s functional condition (status) within the PCS CDMA Minicell............ Physical Display .............................. yellow........................................... ACB LEDs are displayed at power-up or when there is an RU receiver failure...................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 ... The ACB’s three LEDs are red................................................ The alarm control board (ACB) of the Minicell has 10 faceplate LEDs.. Faceplate text is used to distinguish the ACB and RU LEDs from one another......................................................... System Alarms System alarms are always sent to the Read-Only Printer (ROP) and some are displayed on the SDPs.......... a yellow LED a standby state...... A red LED indicates an alarm state............ and a green LED an active state....... If there is a CTU failure.............. An illuminated RU LED indicates that the RU is bad..............

...... (STBY) 2 Diagnostic 3 to F ICT mode 1 2 3 S3 S4 S5 Type Rotary Rotary Rotary Failure LED State/Setting NA Function Reference Designation The LEDs can also indicate an error when there is a mismatch between the cell operating parameters set in translation and the physical settings of the switches on the ACB...........................................22 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............... DS 4............................................. (ALM1) Select ACB test modes.................. (ACT) 4 to F Unassigned Select customer’s licensed frequency band for synthesizer programming 0 to 9 Unassigned A to F Band A to Band F Select AFI polling LAC address assignments 0 Minicell 4 to F Unassigned DS 5................................................. 6 ............ The right column of the table below shows LED failure display for invalid switch settings................................................................ Provision # Switch Settings and Failure LED Display Alarms are displayed by various means and at different locations............................. in-circuit test (ICT) and diagnostic tests 0 1 None (Normal Operation) DS 2............................................................................ Overview State/Setting Description S1 Push-button (momentary) Unit Reset Pressed In Pressing actuator resets unit Not Applicable 4 S2 Rotary Select PCS CDMA Access Mode 2 3 Sector 3 Omni DS 3.................................................Diagnostics Alarm Display Description Alarm Display Description ...... (ALM0) Unassigned .....................................................................................................

.... as discussed in Unit 3................................ Synthesizer not in out-oflock condition Pin number D20 of the P1 connector will be LOW (or close to 0 volt) System alarms System alarms are always sent to the read-only printer (ROP) and some are sent to the SDPs............................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 ... 2138................... 2138....................... 2138 Primary Frame Radio Shelf 1 Power Converter 2131........ 2136 CCU 2131. 2139 ACU 2138..... 2139 CCC 2131......23 .Diagnostics Alarm Display Description LED for TX_UP There are two alarm conditions for the TX_UP..... The following table summarizes this: ALARM SDP NUMBER User Defined Alarms NO Amplifier Shelf Power Converter 1 2136 Primary Frame Amplifier Shelf Fan Alarm 2136 Primary Frame Main Fan Alarm NO Reference Frequency Generator 1 Alarm 2131 Controller Shelf Power Converter Alarm 2131.. 2139 Amplifier Shelf Power Converter 2 2136 Primary Frame Heat Exchanger Blower 1 Alarm NO Primary Frame Heat Exchanger Blower 0 Alarm NO Reference Frequency Generator 0 Alarm 2131..... 2139 CTU Alarms 2131. 2139 ................................. 2136 BCR 2138................................................. The description of these conditions are listed in the table below..................... Condition LED Causes State Alarm Red Synthesizer in out-of-lock condition or Alarm from the Amplifier Pin number D20 of the P1 connector will be HIGH (or close to 5 volts) No-Alarm Green None..... 2138.....2138............ 2139 SCT 2131 AS “CAT” RECEIVE UNITS 2131.

................. The following table indicates these codes................. ranging from MIN (Minor) to CRITICAL reflecting the potential of the detected failure on the ability of the Minicell to provide service... 2139 ...................................................... NO..............24 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........... 6 . PUNCH DOWN (OSP) External User Alarm 6 (ROP text is user definable) Min 0 0 0 - 17 22 External User Alarm 5 (ROP text is user definable) Min 1 0 1 - 16 21 External User Alarm 4 (ROP text is user definable) Min 2 0 2 - 15 20 External User Alarm 3 (ROP text is user definable) Min 3 0 3 - 14 19 External User Alarm 2 (ROP text is user definable) Min 4 0 4 - 13 18 External User Alarm 1 (ROP text is user definable) Min 5 0 5 - 12 17 External User Alarm 0 (ROP text is user definable) Min 6 0 6 - 11 16 Power Cabinet Generator On Maj 7 0 7 - 10 15 Power Cabinet Major Alarm Maj 8 1 0 - 9 14 CSU Alarm Maj 9 1 1 CB8 8 - Intrusion Alarm (all frames) Maj 10 1 2 - 7 13 Grw-Frm Heat Exchanger HI/LO Temperature Min 11 1 3 CB10 6 - Battery Discharge Alarm Maj 12 1 4 - 5 9 Growth 0 Alarm (Growth 0 Heat Exchanger) Min 13 1 5 - 4 - CRTU Min 14 1 6 CB12 3 - External User Alarm 7 Min 15 1 7 - 2 7 Power Cabinet Minor Alarm Min 16 2 0 - 1 12 Power Cabinet AC Failure Alarm Maj 17 2 1 - 0 11 Amplifier Shelf Power Converter 1 Min - 3 4 CB1 - - LEVEL ROP TEXT MESSAGE S2 USER ALARM BIT Alarms are assigned a level of importance..................Diagnostics Alarm Display Description ALARM SDP NUMBER BIU 2138................................. OFFSET Alarm Importance Levels 2131.................................................... 2139 ACB Primary Frame Radio Shelf 0 Power Converter CB AIM 1 TERM.........2138................... The ROP enables the Cell Technician to identify which alarm has been triggered through the display of offset codes..............

............................................................ NO.... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 ............................................ PUNCH DOWN (OSP) Primary Frame Amplifier Shelf Fan Alarm Min - 7 2 CB2 - - Primary Frame Main Fan Alarm Min - 7 3 CB3 - - Reference Frequency Generator 1 Alarm Maj - 2 6 CB4 - - Controller Shelf Power Converter Alarm Min - 3 0 CB5 CB13 - - Amplifier Shelf Power Converter 2 Min - 3 5 CB9 - - Primary Frame Heat Exchanger Blower 1 Alarm Min - 7 1 CB10 - - Primary Frame Heat Exchanger Blower 0 Alarm Min - 7 0 CB10 - - Reference Frequency Generator 0 Alarm Maj - 2 5 CB14 - - Primary Frame Radio Shelf 1 Power Converter Min - 3 2 CB18 - - Primary Frame Radio Shelf 0 Power Converter Min - 3 1 CB20 - - LEVEL ROP TEXT MESSAGE S2 USER ALARM OFFSET Alarm Display Description ..................................Diagnostics BIT CB AIM 1 TERM...........25 .......................................................................................................

...................................... Receiver Unit Alarms Each RU has two alarm conditions: LNA failure and RU down converter Synthesizer Out-of-Lock..........Detailed Alarm Description -..................................................... all the alarm conditions for both components are ORed together before reporting.26 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .. with an LED display on the ACB................... ... a red LED on the TU faceplate is turned on and a “logical 1” is sent to ACB.......................... Function Amplifier alarms report on CTU power loss and Receive Unit failure...... a red LED on the faceplate is turned on and a “logical 1" is sent to the ACB........... If the CTU is not powered up......... TX Amplifier Alarms Each TX Amplifier will have three alarm conditions: synthesizer out-of-lock.......... Each component checks for different alarm conditions..... CDMA Transmitter Unit Alarms The Transmitter Unit has two functional components: a TX Amplifier and a TX Upconverter.................... 6 ................................... Synthesizer Out-of-Lock The TX Upconverter’s frequency synthesizer in each CTU indicates an Out-of-Lock Alarm by turning on a red LED on the CTU faceplate and sending a “logical 1” to the ACB via a backplane connection from each CTU alarm output to the appropriate ACB input.. an alarm will be reported......................... If any or all of these alarm conditions occur........LAC Alarms .... If either of these alarm conditions occur............ In order to minimize alarm reporting to the ACB.................................. amplifier over-temperature........................................LAC Alarms Diagnostics Detailed Alarm Description -................... Low Noise Amplifier Alarms Failure in a Low Noise Amplifier will result in an alarm............................................................................ and over-current.........................................................

.... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 ......... 2..................... Frame alarms are composed of Shelf Power Converter Alarms and Fan Alarms.... unit latches OFF....... High voltage alarm: If the output voltage is greater than 3% of nominal.......................................... ........................................... • Single isolated contact closure upon LV alarm or HV shutdown................................. relay contacts close)............ one of two green LEDs on the Power Converter goes out and a “logical 1” is sent to the ACB...... The input voltage must be disconnected before the latch will clear............................ The 415AC PCUs have the following alarm types........................... pin 114)........ Function 415AC Power Converter Unit Alarms Frame alarms report on CTU failures......... The alarms for each 415AC in a CRC shelf are separately returned to the AFI board (UN166) in the RCC for processing via interface cabling. The relay contacts of the 415AC are connected to the backplane (ALM1..................... ~RED LED turns ON... • Red alarm LED on faceplate............Detailed Alarm Description -.. CTU Backplane Power Converter Alarms The PCU used in the CTU shelf has the following alarms: 1...................Frame Alarm Diagnostics Detailed Alarm Description -....... pin 113 and ALM2............ • Green LED on faceplate (indicates presence of input voltage).................... one of two green LEDs on the Power Converter goes out and a “logical 1” is sent to the ACB........... A relay closure connects ALM1 to ALM2 which indicates an alarm (Logic 0)................................. The ALM2 pin is connected to ground........ • Low output voltage alarm if the output voltage falls below 97% of nominal (RED LED turns on..... Low output voltage alarm: If the output voltage falls below 3% of nominal.....................Frame Alarm ....................27 .......................... relay contacts close). • High voltage alarm if the output voltage is greater than 103% of nominal (output turns OFF................... The RCC Side 0 and 1 415AC PCU ALM1 pins are connected together on the RCC backplane and run to the AFI on the backplane (pin 442 ‘PROCPWRL’).................................. The ACB will then invert this signal to logic low for alarm condition and outputs to the AFI via a CTU shelf backplane connector... The CTU shelf PCU alarms are connected to the ACB via internal backplane traces.....

................................................. ................................................... 6 .......Frame Alarm Fan Alarms Diagnostics A fan or heat exchanger blower failure (loss of +24 volt power or reduction in fan/blower speed) triggers a failure alarm for each fan................................................................................. which is reported back to the AFI via separate interface cabling...............28 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................Detailed Alarm Description -.........

.................................................................... These alarms are user defined................................... and generator failure...... User Alarm Name Number of Function Alarms CSU 1 Heat Exchanger 3 Intrusion Power Cabinet CSU alarm indicates a loss of signal..... and report on failures such as Antenna lights failure.......................................... These LEDs indicate either operational or alarm conditions.. ten of them being predefined.... Overview The PCS CDMA Minicell supports a total of 18 user alarms..................... 1 5 External --User 8 defined Miscellaneous Alarms Other alarms are reported to the Switch.............. This alarm is triggered whenever a door or side panel is opened....................... If applicable................................................ The RFTG-m.... and heater failure.....Diagnostics User Alarms User Alarms .... when in trouble....... which indicate either operational or alarm conditions.. AIM1 connects directly to primary frame user alarms.................. • CDMA Radio Shelf Circuit Pack LED Indicators: The CDMA radio shelf circuit packs have various LED indicators on their faceplates....... common fan failure...... AC power failure... these alarms are also wired into the backup battery frame.29 ................. and the other eight being customer-assigned alarms............. These alarms should also be lightningprotected whenever they protect components that are outside the Minicell housing............................... or to lightningprotection blocks or power cabinet alarms and external user alarms.... and provide visible indication on an associated LED display: • RFTG-m Alarm: It has the various LED indicators on the unit front panel............... low temperature.... These alarms cover intrusion....... .......... rectifier/circuit failure.... Outdoor cabinets have lightning-protected alarms................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 ................. transmits a major alarm................... User alarm inputs to the AFI are wired for cross-connect capability............ These alarms are meant for high temperature.......

............................. Synchronized Clock and Tone (SCT) Diagnostics 3................................................... Diagnostics cover the processes involved in identifying the cause of a Minicell failure..... Purpose Introduction In some cases...................... you will need to perform complete diagnostics before running functional tests......................................... When the diagnostics are complete..................................... such as in the case of a temporary loss of power....30 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................. CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) Diagnostics 4......................................................................... .......... Demand diagnostics are run by the Switch or Cell Site Technician....... 6 ............ whether indicated by an alarm or not..... This section contains descriptions of the detection and automatic recovery tools that are provided by the Switch to restore the system when faults occur..................... Routine and Demand Diagnostics Routine diagnostics are run automatically by the MSC....................................... In some cases............... the Switch can automatically correct a system failure....................... Diagnostics should be run in the following order: 1............. Radio Control Complex (RCC) Diagnostics 2....... CDMA Channel Unit (CCU) Diagnostics....... according to a specified schedule....... such as equipment upgrade............. In that case........... functional tests must be run.................Diagnostics User Alarms Fault Detection and Recovery Tools Overview ........ Actual input commands and resulting output messages have been discussed in Lessons 3 and 4....... Diagnostics can be run automatically or on demand................. you should run your diagnostics in the order shown in the following list.........

.. Performance testing is also sometimes used as a diagnostic tool to identify failures that are not sufficiently severe to trigger an alarm..............................31 ............ Drive Testing Conducted to check on the Minicell health from the “user” perspective..................................................... Performance Testing as a Diagnostic Tool Definitions of Tests Performance Measurement can be used as a diagnostic tool to identify potential sources of problems......................... and drive testing........................ Overview Types of Performance Testing Performance measurement corresponds to the verification that the cell is performing as specified............................................... This is especially true when measured data differ from cell specifications...... such as a slow degradation of output level......................................... Configure For more Information on Drive Testing Configure (CFR) Command requesting cell site equipment configurations for FCC testing..................................................... Power Measurement Measures the quality and strength of the signal as generated by the Minicell.... A detailed description of drive testing can be found in Lucent Technologies PCS System Acceptance Guidelines and Procedures 401703-203........................................................... but when these differences are too small to trigger an alarm................................... Rho Measurement...................................... Examples of performance testing include Rho and power measurements...... functional tests......Diagnostics Performance Measurement Performance Measurement ....... Performance Measurement and the FCC Used as a tool to verify that the Minicell functions within the parameters of its FCC license......................... .......... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 ....................... Functional Tests Uses the CRTU to verify that signals are correctly processed by the Minicell................

. to perform diagnostic tests on cell site equipment............... Description The PCS CDMA Minicell has fault-recovery software that allows it to recover automatically from internally and externally detected faults.32 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............ Automatic Recovery The cell site automatic fault recovery software consists of two main software subsystems: the HEH and the maintenance request administrator (MRA).. to restore (activate) cell site equipment. and placed back into service when needed........................ MRA handles requests to return information about the cell site................. in part. In general........... to remove (deactivate) cell site equipment....... This is achieved... and the maintenance status of equipment is reported to the ECP when the status changes or the ECP requests an update........... the maintenance status of equipment (hardware) is recorded...... it can be diagnosed............Diagnostics Automatic Recovery Tools Automatic Recovery Tools ................................................ by building redundancy into the system for critical system components......... The MRA subsystem not only responds to external requests from the MSC......... ......... Once the faulty component is out-of-service.................................................... repaired............. The strategy is to switch the standby or spare component into service when there is a fault in the active component......................... requests for removing a faulty unit from service come from the automatic fault-recovery software or from the ECP................................. but also responds to internal requests submitted by other software subsystems such as HEH...................... No single failure causes the complete loss of frame functionality.................... and so on............................................ Throughout the maintenance process...................................... 6 ...... The status of cell site equipment is displayed at the ECP.............................................................................

................ The cell site detects faults by various means including diagnostic tests.. and speech path conditions are constantly monitored and are automatically reported to the Executive Cellular Processor (ECP)............ diagnosis.......... and hardware alarm scanning........... and recovery are automatic................ software asserts......................... Trouble Indicators Cell Site Housekeeping Software There are various sources from which the technician can learn about the health of the PCS cellular system................................... fault detection..............................33 .................................... power and entry alarms......................................................... functional tests..................................................................Diagnostics Fault Detection Mechanisms For Manual Recovery Fault Detection Mechanisms For Manual Recovery ......................... Those sources include: • Alarms • Cell site housekeeping software • System performance measurements • Subscriber complaints • Drive testing The cell site has excellent housekeeping software............................................................ ..... faults such as transmitter failure.......... board self-tests................ In most cases............... hardware integrity checks................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 .................... software audits......

....... and audit reports.......... Spontaneous reports are generated without any input from the technician.... thereby forming a history of system operations....................................................... Description The OMP ROP monitor contains a copy of all system communications......... The ECP technician can use the information to track and analyze cell site actions............. An example of a spontaneous report is the reporting of a cell site hardware error and corresponding automatic recovery action....................................OMP Read-Only Printer (ROP) Monitor Diagnostics OMP Read-Only Printer (ROP) Monitor ............................................. hardware errors............. Each entry has an associated time stamp.................... All entered input commands and generated system responses (including faults reported automatically by a network element such as the cell site) are stored at the OMP for up to 30 days...................................... This same information is printed at the ROP........................ Report Types There are two types of output reports: solicited and spontaneous....................................................................................... 6 .. ...... they are initiated automatically by system events or conditions....................34 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................................................................................................ Solicited reports are generated in response to the commands entered by the technician.....

........................... A log of the measurements can be displayed showing both measurements from the serving cell site and the strongest measurements for the strongest non-service cell site............................................................... Related Documents These documents provide additional information on RF call trace: • RF Call Trace Optional Feature (401-612-052) • CDMA RF Call Trace (401-601-055) ..................................................................... RF call trace is available for AMPS.................................Diagnostics RF Call Trace RF Call Trace ............................................... Signal strength measurements can be collected from as many as eight cell sites....... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 6 ........35 ............................................................... and CDMA mobile stations............................................... TDMA............. Description Call Trace Uses RF call trace (RF CALL) allows a technician to study the strength of the signal received from a selected mobile station as it travels through the cellular system........................................................................................... RF call trace is useful for: • Handoff studies • Optimizing neighbor lists • Identifying poor coverage areas • Studying uplink-downlink balance • Verifying subscriber complaints Technicians can use this tool to analyze the mobile RF environment and fine tune translations (system parameters) relating to handoffs and interference.............................................

... 6 ................. or ...........................for testing purposes .. OCNS-configured CEs are used to generate radio signals that simulate the effect of multiple users......... It eliminates the need for mobile stations and reduces the number of cell site resources needed for the tests... Description Orthogonal-channel noise simulator (OCNS) is a CDMA-specific feature in which a special software personality is loaded into one or more CDMA channel elements (CEs) at the cell site...........................Orthogonal-Channel Noise Simulator Diagnostics Orthogonal-Channel Noise Simulator ..... It can be configured as an overhead channel.............. OCNS Uses Requirements The OCNS feature is a convenient way to perform load testing on the forward link of the CDMA system.................... No existing or in-progress calls are dropped by starting an OCNS session.................................. The MDM is used to collect data for off-line analysis............................................ The OCNS feature requires the use of a mobile diagnostic monitor (MDM) at the cell site...... A CE contains the necessary circuitry to support one CDMA channel..... For More Information See Lucent’s System 1000 Cell Site DCS I/O Manual401-610-107 ...............36 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................................................. An OCNS session is on a per sector and carrier basis and is independent of any other OCNS session........ a traffic channel..................... .......... so that CDMA system capacity can be estimated in the presence of actual electrical noise from the environment........................................................................................................................................................... The OCNS design can support multiple sessions at the same cell site.............................an OCNS channel.................. Any CE configured as an overhead or traffic channel is not directly affected by OCNS activity.

..............• Testing Overhead Paths .7-22 Performance Measurements 7-24 • Service Measurements .........• Testing Traffic Paths ............7-16 .. where possible... For this situation.......................... the most effective corrective action is to replace each card and rerun the diagnostic test until the trouble is cleared............................................• Testing using MOST ..........• Pilot Level Functional Test (PLFT) ....... To support this type of trouble-locating situation..........7-26 ..• Testing Overhead Channels ................. There are other cases in which corrective action is not so straightforward... Contents CRTU Measurement Fundamentals • CRTU Function ... diagnostic results indicate that more than one unit may be at fault.• CRTU Transmit Antenna Test ...............................• Single Channel Selective Functional Test - - - - - - - - - 7-3 ..7-9 ............. Some corrective action situations involve replacing one or more circuit cards within a group of two or three suspect cards...........7-18 .7-6 ........................7-11 .7-21 .................... This is often true in circuits involving both digital and RF functions........7 Troubleshooting Overview Purpose In many instances......... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ..... because diagnostic definition is lacking and/or suspect units are not easy to replace.......7-4 . trouble isolation procedures must be used...............7-13 ............1 ...............• Functional Tests using the CRTU ......................7-25 • Plant Measurements ..

.....................• PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Map .......• Power Cabinet Alarms .....7-86 .7-49 ........................7-67 ........................................- - - - - - - - - - 7-27 7-28 7-29 7-30 7-31 7-33 - 7-36 ........7-68 ......... 7 ........Troubleshooting Procedures • Communicating with the PCS CDMA Cell • Optioning the CSU .7-79 ...............7-73 .....• Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG)1 • Restoring Out-Of-Service Equipment ......- - - Minicell Alarm Testing Procedures • PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Test Procedures .7-61 ..............• Analyzing the CDMA RF Spectrum ...........• CRC Shelf Power Converters Alarm ........7-38 ..• Power Measurement Transmit Levels ............7-40 ..............................7-88 ..............7-82 .............7-76 ..7-37 ........7-71 - 7-72 .Call Setup Tests ..2 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .............• CTU Shelf Converters Alarm ..................Alarm Test Procedure ............CRTUm Traffic Path Functional Test ...............Troubleshooting • • • • • • Voice Channel Selection Activity Measurements Frame Error Rate and Power-Level Measurements Subscriber Complaints ...• Setting up the PCS CDMA HP Test Set • CDMA Clock Verification Test .• Fan and Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm Test ...............• Enabling Selective Cell Site Messaging Feature ......• Rho Measurement .............7-93 .......• Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG) 0 • CSC Shelf Power Converters Alarms ..........7-65 ...........7-45 .....7-56 ...7-41 ........• Power-Level Measurements ...........7-44 ..• Minicell Alarm Definition File ................................• External Alarms ....7-59 .

• Audible alarms are retired without instruction........Troubleshooting CRTU Measurement Fundamentals Overview Purpose Preparation for Working at the Cell Site It is assumed that the technician is familiar with the following or that such conditions are otherwise met: • Wrist grounding straps must always be attached before working on any component or handling the circuit packs (CPs)......... • Tagging faulty CPs with office location................ • Handling CPs by the edges and the faceplates to avoid damaging contacts and deforming components............... powering up the unit.............. . • All test equipment is known to be calibrated and functioning properly........................ diagnostic phase and test that failed............ • Understanding operations of the terminal to include mode changing. This is to prevent or reduce electrostatic discharge that may damage or destroy circuit packs containing integrated circuits.. and repeating diagnostics when an initial STF message is received to verify the corrective action........ re-seating CPs............. • Powering down the failing unit (when required)................ and message conventions......... page manipulation.. • Burned out lamps or LEDs are replaced without instruction. then replacing the next questionable CP.......3 ........ and repeating the diagnostics........ • A replacement unit or CP is known to be good...... • Replacing one CP at a time when several are suspected..... • The technician knows how to operate the test equipment to perform the recommended tests................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ............ and date removed................. mounting location..............................

....... including the RF train.. idle CEs in sequence.......... The CRTU tests parts of the Minicell.............................Troubleshooting CRTU Function CRTU Function ...........4 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .............................. using a battery of test sequences.......... Traffic channel elements: Verification that the Minicell traffic CEs are working...............g.............. ..... 2........ A MOST facility in the 5ESS2000 Switch DCS (the figure on 7-9) supports the CRTU as it tests active............... Pilot Level functional test: Checking the power level of the pilot channel and by inference the power of the Minicell... pass/fail) may be reported by: • the Read Only Printer (ROP) • Status Display Page (SDP) 2131 There are two ways to invoke a CRTU functional test: automatically (scheduled) or manually................... Overhead (Pilot/Sync/Access (P/S/A)................. the following events take place... While testing............... What the CRTU Does The CRTU makes it possible to test the functionality of the RF train subsystem of a working Minicell by emulating a mobile unit................................................................... when a CRTU test sequence is invoked................. Paging) channel elements: Verification that the P/S/A channel elements (CEs) and page CEs are working 2....... the RCC instructs the CRTU to dial the CRTUdesignated MOST number................. the ECP at the DCS identifies it as a MOST call and terminates the test call to a source (MOST NUMBER) as a MOST call from the CRTU.................... the CRTU permits you to test: 1....... 7 ................ The status of the tests (e......................... To accomplish this................. 3....... Test Sequence How the CRTU works As the CRTU tests the Minicell........ Whether under automatic or manual control............................. roughly in this order: 1.................... 3....... If the ECP receives the call for the particular test.......... the CRTU evaluates the operational aspects of inservice channel elements and antenna sectors (if not an omni-configured Minicell) or face (if an omni configuration)...............................................

.......................................) During the traffic path functional test................................................. or sector...................... until the call has been handled by each idle traffic CE available to the antenna face............ After a face is tested the other faces are tested.............................................5 ............. the RCC uses the MOST forced handoff function to transfer the call to idle (active and non-busy) traffic CEs within the same physical antenna face........ (The term “forced handoff” means to change to another Channel Element..................... ............ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ................Troubleshooting CRTU Function The RCC can trigger any one of several MOST test functions including forced handoff........................

.............................................................................................. the CRTU does the following: ........... To verify that the Overhead Channel is operating properly.................................... COMPLETED OC 1 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED OC 2 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED OC 3 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED DEVICE .................... 7 ................................................................... Purpose Enable the CRTU This procedure is designed to enable you to use the CRTU to perform functional tests................ttyc (A time/date/id #) .............Troubleshooting Functional Tests using the CRTU Functional Tests using the CRTU ............................. 2 Verify that the CDMA Traffic CEs are operational.................................... (a is the cell number......................................................................... 1 Verify that the pilot/sync/access (P/S/A) Channel Elements (CEs) and Page CEs are operational...............................................6 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................................................. This example will run across all sectors.........................ft oc<cr>......................... To enable the CRTU............................................................................................... perform the following command and wait for system response to proceed to the next step........................ STARTED DEVICE ..................................................... ............................. between 1 and 222) Response M 21 EXC............................................ttyc (A time/date/id #) M 22 EXC:CELL x FT OC...........................CELL x FT OC........ 3 Initiate Overhead Channel (OC) Functional Test (FT) 1 Test your cell with different operating parameters................................................................................................ ............................................. exc:cell a........

......................... COMPLETED TP 1 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSED CCC 2......ttyc (This is just an example..... CCU 4.............. M 22 EXC............. CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED CCC 2.... CCU 3.... CCU 3....... CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED ...........................CELL x FT TP.... CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED CCC 2......... CE 0 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED DEVICE ....... COMPLETED TP 2 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSED CCC 2.. CE 0 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED CCC 2..... CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED CCC 2... CE 0 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED CCC 2....Troubleshooting Functional Tests using the CRTU Procedure 7-1.................... Initiate Traffic Path(TP) Functional Test(FT) .................................. CCU 1................... CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED CCC 2......................... CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED CCC 2.. CCU 3.....7 ............................... The sequence of CEs will vary) (a time/date/id#) M 26 EXC:CELL x FT TP............. CCU 4........................... CCU 2............................................................... CCU 3.................ft tp<cr>............ x = Minicell # 1-222 Response Output may be different depending on the configuration of the Minicell................................. CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED CCC 2.......................................... To verify that the Traffic Path is operating properly................. CCU 2......... CCU 4........................... STARTED DEVICE ............. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ......................... This example will run across all sectors............. 1 exc:cell x............................ CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED CCC 2.....ttyc (a time/date/id#) M 22 EXC:CELL x FT TP................................. perform the following command and wait for system response to proceed to the next step..................................... .................. CCU 1......

............ CE 0 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED DEVICE .................... CCU 1....8 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 . CCU 3........ CE 0 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED CCC 2..................... CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED CCC 2.. 7 ........... CCU 4............... CCU 3.. CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED CCC 2.. CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED CCC 2.................. COMPLETED TP 3 COMPLETED ALL TESTS PASSED CCC 2.............................. CCU 2..ttyc (a time/date/id#) .. CCU 4.................. CE 1 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED CCC 2.......................................ttyc (a time/date/id#) M 27 EXC:CELL x FT TP.......... CCU 4...........Troubleshooting Functional Tests using the CRTU CCC 2............................ CE 0 COMPLETED ALL TEST PASSED DEVICE ..............

.................. respectively.................. TO/FROM PSTN CRTU Components MSC PCS CDMA Minicell T1 LINES 5ESS®-2000 SWITCH DCS RCC TDM BUS CRTUi TDM BUS T1/E1 DIGITAL FACILITIES INTERFACE MOST NUMBER TIME SLOT INTERCHANGE UNIT DIGITAL FACILITIES INTERFACE CRTUm RF TX ANT RX ANTs DIV0 DIV1 DFI SPAN CTU PCM PACKET PIPE PROTOCOL HANDLER FOR VOICE FRAME RELAY PROTOCOL HANDLER BCR RSP CDMA PATH DEFINITIONS: CRTUi CDMA RADIO TEST UNIT INTERFACE CRTUm CDMA RADIO TEST UNIT MODULE MOST MOBILE STATION TEST (FEATURE) RSP RADIO SWITCH PANEL MOST Test Process ..................................................................................................................... Relationship of 5ESS-2000 to PCS CDMA Minicell with CRTU The figure below illustrates the relationship between the 5ESS-2000 Switch and the PCS CDMA Minicell base station with a CRTU subsystem........... ...............Troubleshooting Testing using MOST Testing using MOST ...............................................9 ...................................................................................... Overview The CDMA functional tests require that the CRTU set up test calls using the mobile station test (MOST) feature............................................... The CRTU in the figure is represented as CRTUi and CRTUm....................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ............................................................................................................................... Both the Executive Call Processor (ECP) and the Radio Control Complex (RCC) in the PCS CDMA Minicell can distinguish a MOST call type because each has a unique Mobile Directory Number Type value designated via the RC/V subform.. The type of CDMA MOST call described in this unit is originated by the CRTU....................................................................................... 1 Software at the RCC determines how the CE forced handoff will function..................................................

............................................... 7 ...................Troubleshooting Testing using MOST ............................................................................................................................................... 4 After executing the handoff...................................................... .. .................................................................................................................................................................................................. the CE selection algorithm starts at the CE currently handling the call and searches forward through the ordered list of CEs until it finds an idle traffic CE to hand the call............................................................................................................................. 2 After FT triggers a MOST forced handoff.......................................................................... .. the RCC can either trigger another forced handoff to continue the test session or release the MOST call if all idle traffic CEs have been tested............................10 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................................................. 3 The RCC then hands off to the selected CE..................

.. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ............................ ... the CRTU calls the CRTUdesignated MOST directory number to verify access and paging operation..... ......... Results: Verifies that the overhead-channel reverse path (mobile-tobase path) is functioning.... by locking on a particular CDMA center frequency (carrier) and pilot pseudo-noise (PN) offset............................................... Results: Verifies that the overhead-channel forward path (base-tomobile path) is functioning..........Troubleshooting Testing Overhead Channels Testing Overhead Channels .......................................................................................... and paging channel acquisition test..................................................................................................................................... in this order: ................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Test Phases The overhead channel functional test consists of two phases...........................11 ................... if successful............................................................................................. 1 Pilot.............................. .................. Test Process The following process takes place during overhead channel functional testing: 1 The CRTU acquires the pilot............................ sync............. ............................................ 2 Access-paging channel test.................................................................................. The testing of one antenna face (non-sectored) takes approximately 30 seconds to complete......... sync.............................................................................................................. and paging channels................................................................... 2 During the final portion of the testing.. known as the CDMA forward control channels......................................... Overview The overhead channel functional test verifies the following for each antenna face (or sector) of the cell: • pilot • sync • paging • access..........

.... the overhead CEs for a sector or omni cell must be on the same CDMA cluster.................. then performs both parts of the overhead channel functional test on sector 2 (beta)........ Manually requested 2.................... RCC Initiated Actions If the RCC senses a failure in an overhead channel or a failure in the CCU carrying the overhead channel.................... Timer-scheduled 3...... The RCC does this by selecting and configuring another CE as the overhead channel............. 7 ........................... the RCC will automatically migrate the overhead channel to another CE....... the RCC performs both parts of the overhead channel functional test on sector 1 (alpha).....................12 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....... the overhead CEs must be controlled by the same CDMA cluster controller (CCC)....... In single-carrier operation......... and so on................................. Tests in Multiple-Sector Cell For a multiple-sector cell.... ...Troubleshooting Testing Overhead Channels Initiating a Test The overhead channel functional test may be initiated in one of three ways: 1............. that is.......... RCC-initiated........................ until the RCC has tested all sectors of the cell...............

............................................... and paging channels for the face............................................................................................. Overview Testing the PSA Channel The overhead channels are tested with the execution of the FT OC test........................................................... 1 The RCC instructs the CRTU to initiate a CRTU-designated MOST call ........... 5 Testing Access Paging Channel To pass.................. sync........................................................................... the following actions occur: ......... the following actions occur: .................................................................................... .................................. sync................................................................................ the following actions occur: ............................................................................................................................................. 2 Testing a Forward Path (Phase 1) To pass....13 ... To do a pilot.......................................................................... 2 The RCC instructs the CRTU to connect the RSP to that face ......................................................................................................................................................................... The various aspects of the overhead channels are tested as shown................................................. To do an overhead channel functional test (forward path)............. ..................................................... 1 The RCC instructs the CRTU to connect to a certain antenna face through the Radio Switch Panel (RSP)................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... .....................Troubleshooting Testing Overhead Paths Testing Overhead Paths ..................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ............................... 2 The mobile acquires the pilot................ the CRTUm must return the system idle state......................................................................... and paging channel acquisition test.. To do an access paging channel test.......... 3 The mobile transitions to the system idle state...... the network must be able to set up the call........................... ...................................................................................... 1 The RCC selects an antenna face to test............................................................................................................................................................................................. ....................... 4 The CRTUi queries the status of the CRTUm...............................................................................................

................................. 5 The RCC instructs the CRTU to release the MOST call............................................................ The following sequence of events occurs: ................ ................... the overhead channel functional test reports that it is a failure and then aborts......................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................... the RCC tests the overhead-channel reverse path (performs the access paging channel test).............................................. 3 The P/S/A CE for the selected antenna face receives an “over the air” origination message from the CRTU and passes the message to its controlling CCC...................................................................................................... ..................... The page CE sends an “over the air” acknowledgment message to the CRTU.................... sync....................................................................................... Testing a Reverse Path (Phase 2) Once it confirms that the overhead-channel forward path is functioning........................................................................................ 4 The CRTU returns the mobile idle state to the RCC......................................................... and paging channels............. .......................................................................................................................................................................... 3 The RCC queries the status of the CRTU.............................................................. If the CRTU never responds to the status query or returns a status other than system idle. ....... sync and paging) forward control channels........ 2 The CRTUm dials the MOST directory number.................................................................................................................... 4 The controlling CCC: • instructs its page CE to acknowledge the CRTU origination................................................................................. 1 The RCC instructs the CRTU to dial the CRTU-designated MOST directory number..Troubleshooting Testing Overhead Paths ........ indicating that the CRTU has acquired the pilot.......... • informs the RCC that the CRTUm has originated a call............................ The CRTU connects the RSP to the transmit path and the diversity 0 receive path........ ........................................... .............................14 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ... 7 ........................ The CRTU can only go to the system idle state if it acquires all three (pilot.................................

..................................................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ............................................15 .......... If the cell being tested has more than one antenna face..................................................................Troubleshooting Testing Overhead Paths ................................... .. fail) to the ECP automatically report the test results if the test fails ................... manually report the test results (pass..... and if the test was initiated manually for more than one antenna face.......................... 6 Invoking an Overhead Channel Test The CRTU releases the call and then releases control of the RSP................ The following table shows how test results are reported depending on how the test was intiiatd: If initiated........................ the RCC will immediately select and begin testing the next antenna face............. the RCC will wait a certain amount of time before testing the next antenna face........................ If the test was initiated by a timer (a scheduled functional test).........................the RCC will...............

........... 7 ............... ..................................... 2 Instructs the CRTU to dial the CRTU-designated MOST directory number to test the access-paging portion of the overhead channel test..16 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....... sets up the proper speech handler connections at the DCS ...................................................................................................................................................................................... Overview The traffic path functional test verifies that a CDMA traffic path can be established and maintained through every active and idle traffic CE on every antenna face................ depending upon how many idle traffic CEs are available to the antenna face................................ .......................................................................................................................................................... . The testing time of one antenna face varies from less than one minute to more than three or four minutes....................................................... Testing a Traffic Path To do traffic path functional testing...................... sends a traffic-channel assignment message to the RCC 4..................................................................... which completes the call path through the DCS (the MOST low tone is received by the CRTU)............. the RCC does the following: ....................................................... A CE configured as a traffic channel contains the necessary circuitry to process one CDMA traffic channel................................................ or sector................................... .................................................................................................................................................................................. The RCC repeats the MOST call origination and handoff for each antenna face of the cell.............. identifies the call as a CRTU-designated MOST call during digit analysis 2.......... 4 The ECP: 1.............................. terminates the test call to the MOST source at the DCS 3........................................................... 5 Instructs a CCC to select a specific traffic CE available to the antenna face being tested to handle the CRTU origination................................................ 1 Selects an antenna face and then performs an overhead channel functional test on that face.................. The RCC continues to Step 3 only if the overhead channel test passes............................................................................. of the cell.................................Troubleshooting Testing Traffic Paths Testing Traffic Paths ........................................................................................................... and also sends a channel confirmation message to the ECP. 3 Requests message and subscriber validation to the ECP..............

........................................................................................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ............................................................................................... .................................................................................. .......................... 10 Writes data pertaining to the selected CE (CE............................................. which sends a MOST forced handoff command to the RCC..................... and sector) into a global data area and then attempts to hand off the MOST call to the selected CE................................... the RCC reports the results to the ECP and does not send an “over the air” flash-with-information message to the CRTU.17 ............................... 9 Selects the next CE to which the call should be handed off....................... 8 Sends the message to the ECP............................................................................................ Proceeds to Step 10 if handoff succeeded................... CCU........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ The RCC updates the global data area for the selected CE with the failed test result...................................... CCC......... 12 If handoff failed...........................................................................................................................Troubleshooting Testing Traffic Paths ........................................................... ........................ or to Step 11 if handoff failed ........ 7 Instructs the CRTU to send a certain 3-digit feature code to trigger the MOST forced handoff function.................................................................................................. verifying that the CRTU is in the talk state...... ...... It updates the global data area for the selected CE with the successful test result.............. ................. The CRTU returns the traffic channel state to the RCC....... The CRTU sends the feature code................ the RCC reports the results to the ECP and sends an “over the air” flash-with-information message to the CRTU............ 6 Queries the status of the CRTU.. 11 If handoff succeeded......................................................................... which is received by the RCC as an “over the air” flash-withinformation message.................................................................................................................................. .......

................................................................................ The procedure to initialize the data needed for the PLFT feature is as follows: .......................................................... 2 Inhibit the PLFT — INH:CELL x.........................) ......................................................................... FT PL at the craft shell............... 1 [OPTIONAL] Adjust Pilot Power — Verify that the pilot channel signal strengths are within tolerance at the J4..... . the PLFT feature will occasionally print PLFT failures on the ROP and the pilots will turn yellow (pilot degraded) on the Status Display Pages (SDP’s)................................... .................................... it is the ROP output that is of interest.......................................................................... Purpose The purpose of the PLFT is to test the power level of the pilot signal to facilitate performance measurement...............................................................e. (It will most likely “fail” i....................... Lab support may choose to skip this step.................................... however......................................... the pilot will be out-of-tolerance.............................................................................. However.............18 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .......................... Procedure 7-2................. If the cell is not properly adjusted................... ...................... screen 14............................................................................. 7 ........................................................ the calibration value may be used to compensate for the condition......... transmit antenna test point.................................................. Preparations The customer is required to populate several database fields via Recent Change and Verify (RC/V).................................................. FT PL y at the craft shell.......... 4 Execute the PLFT for the Sector — EXC:CELL x.........................................Troubleshooting Pilot Level Functional Test (PLFT) Pilot Level Functional Test (PLFT) ......... but the values reported by the PLFT feature will not be correct.............................................................................................. PLFT .......... Without these necessary database updates....... 3 Initialize Calibration Value — Set the “CDMA Pilot Level Calibration” value for the sector/carrier pair(s) of interest (those that are equipped) to 0 dB using RC/V................. The translation can be found on the CEQFACE form............................................................. test point for each carrier/sector pair.................................................................................................................................................................................... The interval can be set via the RC/V forms.. customers (service providers) should not.......................................................

............................ . in dB......................................5 dB should be suitable for most installations....... The default value of 1..................... In fact................................................3 dB) It is recommended that an average...........................................................1..... using 5 to 10 runs..... ACTL=-80........................... If averaging was not done in step 5 it is recommended (but not necessary) that a value larger than 1............ screen 15 (or CEQCOM2..................................................................................................... the “Pilot Tolerance Value” can be increased by approximately 1.. EXP=30.... 8 [OPTIONAL] Set Tolerance Value — Set the “CDMA Pilot Level Tolerance Value” to the desired value using RC/V............................................................ .... END OF STEPS .....5 dB....................................... 5 Calculate the Calibration Value — Subtract the reported (actual) pilot level from the expected pilot level for the carrier (the values are taken from the ROP output resulting from step 4 and enter the difference into the “CDMA Pilot Level Calibration Value” field on the RC/V screen (CEQFACE form).............................19 ........ (e..................................) If the difference is not 0 +/.................................................................... FT PL at the craft shell........................................... 9 Allow the PLFT — ALW:CELL x..........5 dB be used.......... by omitting the “y” argument in the EXC:CELL command in step 4........................ repeat steps “Initialize Calibration Value” through “Verify Calibration Value”........................................................................................................................................... ... be calculated and the average entered.......................................................................................... The translation can be found on the ECP form......................g................. 6 Verify Calibration Value — Rerun the PLFT for the sector to verify that the difference calculated in step 5 is now 0 dB.. screen 2).................... (The difference may vary slightly between runs........................... all of the sectors can be calibrated in parallel as well................ Note that all of the carriers for a given sector can be calibrated in parallel since the ROP report will contain data for all of the carriers in the requested sector............ 7 Do for All — Repeat steps 3 through 6 for each equipped carrier/sector pair........... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 .0 dB...........................................8 dB....................Troubleshooting Pilot Level Functional Test (PLFT) ......................................................0 dB..... therefore the calibration value is 111................................... In lieu of averaging....................... .............................................. .................. The difference will usually be a positive value.......................

.. after: • changing the BCR attenuation factor by n or more (CEQCOM2) • changing the pilot channel’s digital gain by m or more (CEQFACE) • HW modifications to the RF test path • growing in new carriers or sectors on the cell.................................................20 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .......................................................... it should be noted that this procedure should be carried out again....... 7 ... ....................................Troubleshooting Pilot Level Functional Test (PLFT) Result The above procedure should be performed on every cell with a CRTU equipped in the system....................................... Also...............................................................

............................................... only test failures are reported..................... END OF STEPS ..................21 ................................................................................................. When to Execute ......................................................................... 1 Initiate the FT via the EXC command......................................................................................... TP (Traffic Path) and PL (Pilot Level) FT’s......................................................... 2 Allow or inhibit the automatic (scheduled) test via the ALW and INH commands.......................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ............................................ When executed manually.......................... Without this test.............................................. Result When executed as automatically..................................... respectively..................................... the technician can specify the interval at which the scheduled ANT FT executes in a manner identical to what is currently performed for the OC (Overhead Channel)............................................................ ............................... 3 In addition.......... The test is a functional test and can be performed manually or automatically................................Troubleshooting CRTU Transmit Antenna Test CRTU Transmit Antenna Test ............................................................................................................................................................................ ................................................. The most common reason is damage to the antenna from adverse weather.................................. ....................................... Procedure 7-3.................................................................. Purpose Reason for the Test This test informs the operator when a CDMA transmit antenna is not operating correctly............ a report will be made of the result of the test whether the test was successful or not.................................................................. ................................................... the operator might be unaware that there is no transmission from a sector of a cell which appears to be operating correctly............................................................................................. A CDMA antenna can become inoperable for several reasons...............................................................................................................

.......................................................................... Purpose This Single Channel selective Functional Test (SC FT) provides the technician with the ability to evaluate the quality of a call on a specific Traffic CE (TCE)................. This feature uses a markov service option which provides pseudo-random data for testing the traffic channel between the mobile and the basestation and RF Call Trace capability to collect Markov data....... and busy..........Troubleshooting Single Channel Selective Functional Test Single Channel Selective Functional Test ................................ When a call is up on the reserved CE........................ execute the functional test.................. ...... The SC FT will provide a ROP report with the Markov statistics collected for both forward and reverse links..................... CCU e........................................................... CE States on the SDP The Status Display Pages (SDP) subsystem currently supports and displays different CE statuses.......... The three states that SC FT is interested in are camp-on................ FT SC c.................................................. CE f [...... idle..................... the technician can look at the SDP 2139 to find out if the CE requested is busy and being camped on............. It is not supported for automatic mode (via a timer scheduled at the specified interval).................................................... When the CE is in reserve state for SC FT and waiting for a call to come up.......... the CE is idle.................... 1 At the command prompt.......... When the CE is being camped on for SC FT........ Its status will be displayed as “idle” (white/black).. 7 . it is not available for normal call processing to make calls on it................................................................................... However...................................22 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................................... CE state Status Display Color (foreground on background) camp-on camp red on green idle idle white on black traffic busy busy black on green When executing SC FT........................................ EXC: CELL a.. the CE is considered traffic busy and its status will be displayed as “busy” (black/green)............................................................................VORATE g]! ........................ the SDP will display the CE status as “camp” (red/green)............. CCC d... Procedure 7-4............................................................................... .... This test is executed on manual mode only (via a TI command).......................

.................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 .23 .............30) • e = The CDMA Channel Unit number (1 ...................................... 13) ........Troubleshooting Single Channel Selective Functional Test where • a = A single cell site number (1 ..........................................................................6) • d = The CDMA Cluster Controller number (1 ..................9) • g = Optional Vocoder rate (8....................................................................7) • f = The CDMA Channel Element (0 ................222) • c = The sector number (0 ....

..................... subscriber (mobile) data.......... and other obstructions There are four types of measurements collected by the RCC and reported to the ECP: • Service measurements • Plant measurements • Voice channel selection activity (VCSA) measurements • Power-level measurements.......................Troubleshooting Single Channel Selective Functional Test Performance Measurements System Performance Measurements Purpose Periodically.......... As explanation........................... such as callprocessing coverage problems and hardware units having partial performance degradation.................. The measurements contain information about system performance including traffic data............ Examples of Performance Degradation Measurement Types The following problems can cause reduction of radiated power (and therefore reduced coverage) without detection: • Damaged antenna • Partial lightning damage to antenna/cable • Damaged feeder • Damaged.. but less severe failures may escape detection by the RCC......................24 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .. and cell site equipment data...... faulty................. the ECP collects various measurements from the cell site and stores them in files at the ECP............... or waterlogged connectors • New (since the Minicell installation) buildings.. Need for Performance Measurements Measurements are unique in that they can be used to identify cell-siterelated faults that cannot be detected by the RCC............................... 7 ... catastrophic and severe failures will be detected by the RCC................................... . foliage growth...........

.......... On the scheduled basis.....Troubleshooting Service Measurements Service Measurements ....................... and to engineer its growth....... Overview Service measurements provide statistical information (cumulative counts) on call traffic.................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 .. and the usage of system resources........................................................... .......... various failure events............. to evaluate how well the system is operating................................................................................ Per-Carrier Service Measurements Starting ECP 13 Service Measurements are collected on a per-carrier basis............ At the ECP.. one file for every hour of the day............... Related Documents These documents provide more detailed information for service measurements..........................25 .... The files are overwritten with new data beginning at the start of a new day....................................... The service measurements are stored temporarily at the ECP and then copied to the OMP........................................... This assists isolating system faults........................... • Service Measurements (401-610-135) • Special Studies Measurements (CIB 117-8A)........ Collecting Service Measurements Service measurements can be collected on a scheduled basis (scheduled hourly by the ECP) or on a manual basis...... the collected data is saved in a series of 24 data files............................................ The data is used to troubleshoot the system.................................................... the RCC continually gathers service measurements and reports the data hourly to the ECP... The service measurements are stored temporarily at the ECP and then copied to the OMP.................

.......................................................... Scheduling of plant measurements is controlled exclusively by the RCC...26 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............. Collecting Plant Measurements Related Documents Plant measurements can be collected on a scheduled basis or manual basis.................... audit failures.............................................................. The number of failures is the number of times a hardware unit is taken out-of-service automatically. The data can be used to evaluate cell site hardware deficiencies and their impact on subscriber service.....................................................................................Troubleshooting Plant Measurements Plant Measurements .... That count does not include manual removals.................................... Overview Plant measurements provide information on the performance of cell site equipment including failure occurrences............................ failure durations (out-ofservice time)................................................................................................ 7 .......... diagnostic failures......................... .................... which automatically reports the data to the ECP every day at the set time............. and initialization.............................. ECP Plant Measurements System (254-341-116).............

..................................................... the RCC gathers VCSA measurements and reports the data to the ECP during and after the measurements are made.......................................................... ............Voice Channel Selection Activity Measurements Troubleshooting Voice Channel Selection Activity Measurements ...................... the telephone number of the involved mobile station.......... Overview Voice channel selection activity (VCSA) measurements provide detailed information about traffic movement within a cellular system by recording the occurrences of a set of predefined call-processing events at specified cell sites................................................. the time it occurred............................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ......... VCSA can also be run in a special mode to collect data only for a single specified mobile........... Off-line processing of this data by the AutoPACE system provides information about voice channel selection and handoffs during call processing............................................... For the time period specified by the user........................................................ Related Documents Performance Analysis and Cellular Engineering User’s Guide (401660-108)..................27 ........................................ Collecting VCSA Measurements VCSA measurements can be collected only if a VCSA study is requested (manual basis).................................................... Each record indicates what type of event occurred......... and other data........................

......................................... Related Documents Performance Analysis and Cellular Engineering User’s Guide (401660-108)...................................................................................................................................................... This study can also collect the distribution of noise detected by traffic channels................................ the RCC gathers the PLMs and reports the data to the ECP after the study is completed.... CDMA Frame Error Rate (FER) and Power Level Measurement (PLM) Optional Feature Document (401-612-203) ......... fine-tune a system..Troubleshooting Frame Error Rate and Power-Level Measurements Frame Error Rate and Power-Level Measurements .......... and plan growth.............. Overview Power-level measurements (PLMs) provide detailed information about the distribution of power levels detected at a specified cell site..................... Collecting Power-Level Measurements Power-level measurements can be collected only if a PLM study is requested (manual basis)............ The data is used by the AutoPACE system to investigate system troubles......................................................................... add or alter radio frequencies. For the time period specified by the user................ 7 .............................................................................................................28 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .....................

... • A cell site fault is evident.................29 . it is important to diagnose whether the fault is from the DCS............................................................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 .......... including: • The mobile station or installation is faulty............... is a performance analysis activity that may be used to find service-affecting problems.......... Drive testing an entire cellular system to find problems is very effective at directly assessing system performance............ the site controller. however........... • The customer attempted calls during the down time of the system/ cell..... It can also check RF propagation. it is very time consuming and expensive......................Troubleshooting Subscriber Complaints Subscriber Complaints ... the transmission link....... Therefore......... Description Drive Testing Subscriber (customer) complaints can be used to help identify problems of poor or reduced coverage................................................. Drive testing may be performed using a normal mobile or a test mobile.................. • The customer has incorrectly operated the mobile equipment.................. There can be a number of reasons why a customer reports less than satisfactory service................................ assuming that the problems are repeatable and not due to operator error. system-level drive testing is not normally performed except after a re-tune or major configuration change.... The test mobile is an important tool to differentiate between these categories... which equates to driving a motor vehicle (complete with mobile transceiver) in a specific area of coverage while attempting to complete or monitor mobile calls................. Trouble Isolation For a system fault involving the cell site................................... The test mobile is virtually identical to a normal mobile but has incorporated an automatic answer and the ability to loop back the line to the cell site....................................... because the test receiver measures the cell site RF off-air............................ or the RF. ............. • The customer is outside the normal coverage area............. Drive testing..........................................................

...............................Troubleshooting CRTUm Traffic Path Functional Test CRTUm Traffic Path Functional Test .................................................................................................................... ND OF STEPS E ................................. ......................................... The test should pass on each channel element (two channel elements per TCU or 10 channels per ECU....................... Other procedures will test diversity....................... The command (from the switch) is listed below................................................................................................................................................................................................ ................. on all CRC shelves... exc:cell x............................................................30 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................................................................................................... skip the procedures in this subsection............................ ft tp The Traffic Path Functional test is run only on diversity 0... Purpose If a CRTU is not equipped.........................................................) for all antenna faces.................................................................................................................................................. 7 ........................................................................................................................ 2 Run the CRTUm traffic path functional test.............. 1 Verify the CRTU is in service................................................................... ........................................................................................ Procedure 7-5........................ Running the CRTUm Traffic Path Functional Test .................................

.................................................................. .. 1 Remove power from diversity 1 RU by turning OFF CB9................................................................................................................ 1 Remove power from diversity 0 RUs by turning OFF CB1.... ................ Then repeat the above step for the GAMMA face....................................................................................................................................... 4 Restore power to diversity 0 RU’s by turning ON CB1................... 2 Make a call (to the switch) using each CCU on ALPHA face (remove from service the BBA for BETA and GAMMA) of the growth cabinet................................................................................... Procedure 7-6..............31 ...... .............................................. ............................................. Procedure 7-7.................................................................................................... END OF STEPS ............. 3 Repeat the above step for the BETA face........ Diversity 1/Transmit Face Tests ................................... Diversity 0 Tests ............................................................................................................................. ......................................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................ 3 Repeat the above step for the BETA face....................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................. Purpose This section describes the various Call Setup Tests............................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ................................................................................................ Diversity 0 was tested in that section........................................................................................................................................ These tests are not required if the CRTUm Traffic Path Functional Test test was completed.......Troubleshooting Call Setup Tests Call Setup Tests ................................................................................. 2 Place a call (to the switch) using any CCU (only one is necessary) on ALPHA face of the growth cabinet...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Then repeat the above step for the GAMMA face...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

............................................ 7 .............................................................................................................................................................. 4 Restore power to diversity 0 RU by turning ON CB2.......................32 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...............................................Troubleshooting Call Setup Tests ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... END OF STEPS .............................................................. ....................................

.. then User 11............ and verify the result (i........................ If External User Alarms have been wired and equipped in the Translations set. At the Power Cabinet.......................... may be reported...........g..................................e.......... an alarm going active) at the switch on the ROP............ The cell under test should indicate no alarms......................................... The procedure will be to perform an action (e................................... High/Low Temp....... Purpose Alarm testing will be done via the switch.......................... Growth Cabinet Alarm Tests The table below shows the alarms associated with the given circuit breaker............................. turn off a CB) on the growth cabinet... ensure that both the MAJOR and MINOR LEDs on the CPS ACU (cabinet power system alarm control unit) are extinguished.. Circuit Breaker Alarm Scan Reported 20 Growth Frame 1 Radio Shelf 0 Power Converter (CRC 0) 18 Growth Frame 1 Radio Shelf 1 Power Converter (CRC1) 16 Growth Frame 1 Radio Shelf 2 Power Converter (CRC2) .....33 .......................... gently pull the front door alarm switch until it comes to a full stop........ place the switch or sensor in a non-alarming or “Normal” state............ Do the same for the Power and Backup Cabinet door alarm switches.....scsm <cr> x = Minicell # Preliminary To override the Intrusion Alarms (door open............. if equipped.....Troubleshooting Alarm Test Procedure Alarm Test Procedure .............................. Verify if the gray protector caps have been installed in the Power Cabinet........... Enter the following command at a craftshell or UNIX [Tipdunix login] terminal to show the alarms to the terminal as they change state: alw:cell x............................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 .......... User Alarm 10)........................................ If the Radio Cabinet door is left open on a cold day (outside temperature below freezing)................... Alarm Scans Call the cell to see which alarms are active...........

...........................................................................................................Troubleshooting Alarm Test Procedure 1 Growth Frame 1 Radio Amplifier Power Converter 4 (PCU1 on CTU Shelf) 2 Growth Frame 1 Radio Amplifier Power Converter 5 (PCU2 on CTU Shelf) 3 Growth Frame 1 Amplifier Fan Alarm (CTU Fan) 4 Growth Frame 1 CRC Fan Alarm (Pedestal Fan) 19 CTU 3 CTU Critical Alarm (CTU 0) 17 CTU 4 CTU Critical Alarm (CTU 1) 15 CTU 5 CTU Critical Alarm (CTU 2) Testing of Growth Cabinet 1 is complete...................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................... 7 .. ..................... Result: This should clear the Power Minor Alarm (User Alarm 16).................................................................................................................... Result: The cell under test should indicate User Alarms 8 and 16............................................................................................. 2 Return the second rectifier to ON.................................................................. This subsection tests the top rectifier shelf in the Power Cabinet (where rectifiers were added for Growth Cabinet power).............................. ........ but User Alarm 16 should remain active.............................34 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .............................................................) Verify if each remaining rectifier generates a Minor ............................. 4 (There is no need to perform this step on the two rectifiers tested for Major Alarm. 3 Turn the remaining STBY rectifier to ON..... 1 Place the first two rectifiers in the top rectifier shelf to STBY Mode............................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................. Power Cabinet Alarms ...................................................................................................... Result: User Alarm 8 should clear........................................ Procedure 7-8...................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................... 4 Test all the alarms in the table on page 7-33 by turning OFF the listed breaker and verifying that the associated alarm comes up at the switch...................................... Turn the rectifier back ON before testing the next rectifier................................................................................. Growth Cabinet Alarms .................................................................... 3 Repeat steps using the side door switch and then the rear door switch on the Growth Cabinet......................................................... Result The growth cabinet door alarms have been tested.............................................................. ................................................................................................ Result: The User Alarm will clear... ..........................Troubleshooting Alarm Test Procedure Alarm by placing it in STBY until it scans as User Alarm 16.......... Result: These also appear in the scans as User Alarm 10................................. ND OF STEPS E ...................... After the alarm is indicated......................................... Result: The cell under test should indicate User Alarm 10............... .......... Result The power cabinet alarms have all been tested...... 1 To create a Door Intrusion Alarm (User Alarm 10)...................................................... END OF STEPS ............................................................................................................... .. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ...... ........................................................35 ............................................................................................................. turn the breaker back ON and verify that the alarm has cleared before proceeding to the next listed alarm....... Result: All equipped rectifiers should individually generate User Alarm 16.......................................................................... push on the door alarm switch in the front of the Growth Cabinet.............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. Procedure 7-9....................... 2 Return the door switch to the alarm bypass position..................................

...........Troubleshooting Alarm Test Procedure Minicell Alarm Testing Procedures General Description Purpose This section provides the procedures for performing equipment and user alarm tests on the CDMA Personal Communication Services (PCS) Minicell.............................36 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ... 7 ....... Operation & Maintenance401-703-301 • User Definable Alarms Feature 401-612-057 • Selectable Cell Site Messaging Feature401-601-003 .. • APX-1000 Input Message Manual401-610-055 • APX-1000 Output Message Manual401-610-057 • PCS Minicell Desc................................................... Records The results of these procedures should be recorded by obtaining the Read Only Printer (ROP) output...................................................................................................... This procedure should be performed on any new CDMA cell site equipment as part of an initial acceptance test or whenever problems are suspected at the cell............................................ Sequence of Tests The alarm testing procedures contained in this section can be performed any time after the Minicell has been successfully booted........ References The following documents may be useful as references during the performance of the procedures described in this section..

it should be repeated again during integration................................................................................................................................................37 ..................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ............................................................................ Overview Input Commands/Output Messages Even though alarm testing was performed during the factory test and installation phases of the Minicell growth... In this document......... The tests will verify alarm continuity of the alarm paths from the various electrical components to the Alarm and Fits Interface (AFI) board of the CSC............................ but they do not test the ability of the cell software to autonomously detect the fault and report it with the correct text message string on the ROP.......... Each input message required to perform a step during alarm testing should be entered from an Input Message (craftshell or UNIX [TIpdunix login]) terminal.......... Each table will provide the following information: 1..... the input and output messages are shown in table form............................................................. Expected output message as “Response” .................................................... Purpose of the action as the “Action Purpose” 2.................................................. Required action or input message as the “Stimulus” 3...............PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Test Procedures Troubleshooting PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Test Procedures ................................

.................................... reenter the alw:cell x........................................... scsm command.....................................38 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Message Routing These messages are not routed to the craftshell maintenance terminals but will be printed on the ROP........................................................................ Purpose Alarm scanning is the subsystem in the cell which detects and reports alarm messages to the ECP...........................Enabling Selective Cell Site Messaging Feature Troubleshooting Enabling Selective Cell Site Messaging Feature .......................... The SCSM feature should be used whenever it is active in a system.................................................... 7 ................................................ An alarm will report only when its state (OFF NORMAL or NORMAL) changes........................... Enabling Selective Cell Site Messaging Feature ........................................................................ makes it possible to route all messages for a single cell or group of cells to the terminal on which you are working.................. ........................................... 2 Clear registers and report alarms that are currently invoked...............................................................................................................scsm <CR> x = Minicell # 1-222 Result: OK (Feature is available and activated for the specified Minicell) or FEATURE NOT ACTIVE (SCSM not activated in feature activation file) .............. The SCSM feature will be active after this command is entered........ 3 Produce list of cells in which the SCSM feature is routing messages to a specific terminal............. Procedure 7-10............... alw:cell x....................................................................................................................... 1 See if SCSM is available............. Procedure for enabling the SCSM feature: .. init:cell x:spp as <CR> x = Minicell # 1-222 Result: OK (When no alarms are present) ................................................................. An optional feature.................... Selectable Cell Site Messaging (SCSM)................................ If ROP messages are not being routed to the terminal on which they were ‘allowed’..................................

.............................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ....................Troubleshooting Enabling Selective Cell Site Messaging Feature op:cell.................................................................................................. Result A list of cells is displayed and SCSM is enabled.......scsm <CR> ND OF STEPS E .......39 ........................................................... ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reference Frequency and Timing Generator
(RFTG) 0

Troubleshooting

Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG) 0

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

Note

This test covers the RFTG0 Alarm. Procedure for RFTG1 alarm
testing, done at the end of the testing sequence, is provided later on in
this Section.
Proceed with alarm testing BEFORE the RFTG 0 alarm has cleared.
The response will appear in about 15 minutes, when the alarm has
cleared.

Procedure 7-11. Testing the Reference Frequency and timing Generator

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The RFTG0 alarm testing procedure is outlined below.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

1

Test RFTG 0 Alarm Reporting
Turn OFF CB14

Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 2, BIT 5

ALARM:REFERENCE FREQUENCY GENERATOR 0 ALARM
STATE:OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................

2

Test RFTG 0 Alarm Reporting
Turn ON CB14
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 2, BIT 5

ALARM:REFERENCE FREQUENCY GENERATOR 0 ALARM
STATE:NORMAL
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 - 40

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Troubleshooting

CSC Shelf Power Converters Alarms

CSC Shelf Power Converters Alarms

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section is for CSC Shelf Power Converters Alarms.

Procedure 7-12. CSC Shelf Power Convertors Alarm Tests

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The following procedure tests CSC Shelf Power Convertor Alarms.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

1

Verify CSCsí states.**This could also be determined by looking at the
Cell c Status Screen on the MCRT: 2131,c.<CR>
op:cell x,csc 0

<CR>

op:cell x,csc 1

x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: OP:CELL x CSC 0,[ ][ ] = STBY or ACTIVEOP:CELL x

CSC 1,[ ][ ] = STBY or ACTIVE
...........................................................................................................................................................................

2

Make CSC 0 STBY and CSC 1 ACTIVE (if necessary)
sw:cell x,csc 0;ucl <CR>

x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: SW:CELL x CSC 0, COMPLETEDOP:CELL x CSC 0,

STBYOP:CELL x CSC 1, ACTIVE
............................................................................................................................................................................

CAUTION
Service Interruption
The cell could be rendered out-ot-service.
CSC 0 should be STBY and CSC 1 should be ACTIVE
before proceeding.
3

Remove CSC 0 from service
rmv:cell x,csc 0;ucl <CR>

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

7 - 41

Troubleshooting

CSC Shelf Power Converters Alarms

x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: RMV:CELL x CSC 0,COMPLETED
...........................................................................................................................................................................

4

Test CSC 0 Alarm Reporting
Turn OFF CB13
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT

0ALARM:CONTROLLER SHELF POWER CONVERTER
ALARMSTATE:OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................

5

Test CSC 0 Alarm Reporting
Turn ON CB13
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT

0ALARM:CONTROLLER SHELF POWER CONVERTER
ALARMSTATE:NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................

6

Restore CSC 0 to STBY
rst:cell x,csc 0;ucl:stby <CR>

x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: RST:CELL x CSC 0, COMPLETEDOP:CELL x CSC 0,

STBY
...........................................................................................................................................................................

7

Make CSC 0 ACTIVE and CSC 1 STBY
sw:cell x,csc 0;ucl <CR>

x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: SW:CELL x CSC 0, COMPLETEDOP:CELL x CSC 0,

ACTIVEOP:CELL x CSC 1, STBY
...........................................................................................................................................................................

8

Remove CSC 1 from service
rmv:cell x,csc 1;ucl <CR>

x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: RMV:CELL x CSC 1,COMPLETED
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 - 42

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Troubleshooting

CSC Shelf Power Converters Alarms

...........................................................................................................................................................................

9

Test CSC 1 Alarm Reporting
Turn OFF CB5
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT

0ALARM:CONTROLLER SHELF POWER CONVERTER
ALARMSTATE:OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................

10

Test CSC 1 Alarm Reporting
Turn ON CB5
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT

0ALARM:CONTROLLER SHELF POWER CONVERTER
ALARMSTATE:NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................

11

Restore CSC 1 to STBY
rst:cell x, csc 1;ucl:stby <CR>
Result: RST:CELL x CSC 1, COMPLETEDOP:CELL x CSC 1,

STBY
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

7 - 43

Troubleshooting

Power-Level Measurements

Power-Level Measurements

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview

Power-level measurements (PLMs) provide detailed information about
the distribution of power levels detected at a specified cell site. This
study can also collect the distribution of noise detected by traffic
channels. The data is used by the AutoPACE system to investigate
system troubles, add or alter radio frequencies, fine-tune a system, and
plan growth.

Collecting Power-Level
Measurements

Power-level measurements can be collected only if a PLM study is
requested (manual basis). For the time period specified by the user, the
RCC gathers the PLMs and reports the data to the ECP after the study
is completed.

Related Documents

Performance Analysis and Cellular Engineering User’s Guide(401660-108).

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 - 44

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Troubleshooting

CRC Shelf Power Converters Alarm

CRC Shelf Power Converters Alarm

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

This section is for the CRC Shelf Power Converters Alarm.

Procedure 7-13. Testing CRC Shelf Power Converter Alarm

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Service Interruption
Switching OFF CB16 will cause the Minicell data links to
drop OOS.
Do not attempt to test CB16 that supplies DC power to the
TN3500B DFI board on CRC 2.
.......................................................................................................................................

1

Verify SCTs’ states. This could also be determined by looking at the
Cell c Status Screen on the MCRT: 2131,c.
op:cell x,cat 0 <CR>
op:cell x,cat 1 <CR>
Result: OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0,[ ]

[ ] = STBY or ACTIVE
OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1,[ ]
[ ] = STBY or ACTIVE
...........................................................................................................................................................................

2

Make SCT 0 STBY and SCT 1 ACTIVE (if necessary)
rst:cell x,cat 1;ucl <CR>

x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: RST:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, COMPLETED

OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, ACTIVE
OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0, STBY

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

7 - 45

Troubleshooting

CRC Shelf Power Converters Alarm

............................................................................................................................................................................

CAUTION
Service Interruption
The Minicell needs at least one active SCT.
SCT 0 should be STBY and SCT 1 should be ACTIVE
before proceeding.
3

Remove SCT 0
rmv:cell x,cat 0;ucl <CR>

x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: RMV:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0,COMPLETED
...........................................................................................................................................................................

4

Test CRC 0 Alarm Reporting
Turn OFF CB20
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT 1

ALARM:PRIMARY FRAME RADIO SHELF 0 POWER
CONVERTER
STATE:OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................

5

Test CRC 0 Alarm Reporting
Turn ON CB20
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT 1

ALARM:PRIMARY FRAME RADIO SHELF 0 POWER
CONVERTER
STATE:NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................

6

Restore SCT 0 to STBY
rst:cell x, cat 0;ucl:stby <CR>

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 - 46

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Troubleshooting

CRC Shelf Power Converters Alarm

x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: RST:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0, COMPLETED

OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0, STBY
...........................................................................................................................................................................

7

Make SCT 0 ACTIVE and SCT 1 STBY
sw:cell x,cat 0;ucl <CR>

x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: SW:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0, COMPLETED

OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0, ACTIVE
OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, STBY
...........................................................................................................................................................................

8

Remove SCT 1
rmv:cell x,cat 1;ucl <CR>

x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: RMV:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1,COMPLETED
...........................................................................................................................................................................

9

Test CRC 1 Alarm Reporting
Turn OFF CB18
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT 2

ALARM:PRIMARY FRAME RADIO SHELF 1 POWER
CONVERTER
STATE:OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................

10

Test CRC 1 Alarm Reporting
Turn ON CB18
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT 2

ALARM:PRIMARY FRAME RADIO SHELF 1 POWER
CONVERTER
STATE:NORMAL
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

7 - 47

Troubleshooting

CRC Shelf Power Converters Alarm

...........................................................................................................................................................................

11

Restore SCT 1 to STBY
rst:cell x, cat 1;ucl:stby <CR>

x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: RST:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, COMPLETED

OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, STBY
...........................................................................................................................................................................

12

Make SCT 1 ACTIVE and SCT 0 STBY
sw:cell x,cat 1;ucl <CR>

x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: SW:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, COMPLETED

OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 1, ACTIVE
OP:CELL x CAT(SCT) 0, STBY
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................

Result

SCT 1 MUST be ACTIVE and SCT 0 MUST be STBY when this
section of alarm testing is completed.

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 - 48

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Troubleshooting

CTU Shelf Converters Alarm

CTU Shelf Converters Alarm

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

The CTU shelf is equipped with two +15 VDC Power Conversion
Units (PCUs). Each PCU has a single alarm which is used to report the
presence of any of the following alarm conditions:

Low Output Voltage Alarm

High Output Voltage Alarm

Over Current Alarm

Over Temperature Alarm.

Procedure 7-14. Testing the CTU Shelf Converters Alarm

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Procedures for testing the CRTU (for ecp release 10.0 and earlier)
converters are outlined in the following.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

1

Test PCU 1 Alarm Reporting

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

7 - 49

Troubleshooting

CTU Shelf Converters Alarm

Turn OFF CB1
Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3, BIT 4

ALARM: AMPLIFIER SHELF POWER CONVERTER 1
ALARM
STATE: OFF NORMAL

SCAN POINT:OFFSET 18, BIT 2
ALARM: CTU 0 CTU ALARM CLEARED
STATE: NORMAL

SCAN POINT:OFFSET 30 BIT 5
ALARM: CTU 0 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM
STATE: OFF NORMAL

SCAN POINT:OFFSET 18, BIT 4
ALARM: CTU 1 CTU ALARM CLEARED
STATE: NORMAL

SCAN POINT:OFFSET 30, BIT 6
ALARM: CTU 1 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM
STATE: OFF NORMAL

SCAN POINT:OFFSET 18, BIT 6
ALARM: CTU 2 CTU ALARM CLEARED
STATE: NORMAL

SCAN POINT:OFFSET 30, BIT 7
ALARM: CTU 2 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM
STATE: OFF NORMAL
...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 - 50

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Troubleshooting

CTU Shelf Converters Alarm

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2

Test PCU 1 Alarm Reporting

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

7 - 51

.........................................................................52 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............ BIT 7 ALARM: CTU 2 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM CLEARED STATE: NORMAL ...................... BIT 4 ALARM: CTU 1 CTU ALARM CLEARED STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 30.......... BIT 2 ALARM: CTU 0 CTU ALARM CLEARED STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 30 BIT 5 ALARM: CTU 0 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM CLEARED STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 18......... BIT 4 ALARM: AMPLIFIER SHELF POWER CONVERTER 1 ALARM STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 18............................... BIT 6 ALARM: CTU 1 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM CLEARED STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 18...........Troubleshooting CTU Shelf Converters Alarm Turn ON CB1 Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3........................ BIT 6 ALARM: CTU 2 CTU ALARM CLEARED STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 30........................ 7 ...........................................

...........................................................................................53 ........................................................................................................... 3 Test PCU 2 Alarm Reporting .............................................................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ...............................................................Troubleshooting CTU Shelf Converters Alarm ......................................................................

......................... BIT 6 ALARM: CTU 1 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM STATE: OFF NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 18..............................54 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .......................... BIT 2 ALARM: CTU 0 CTU ALARM CLEARED STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 30 BIT 5 ALARM: CTU 0 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM STATE: OFF NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 18.... BIT 6 ALARM: CTU 2 CTU ALARM CLEARED STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 30............Troubleshooting CTU Shelf Converters Alarm Turn OFF CB9 Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3..... BIT 5 ALARM: AMPLIFIER SHELF POWER CONVERTER 2 ALARM STATE: OFF NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 18.................... BIT 7 ALARM: CTU 2 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM STATE: OFF NORMAL ........................................... 7 ............. BIT 4 ALARM: CTU 1 CTU ALARM CLEARED STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 30.................................................................................

.....................Troubleshooting CTU Shelf Converters Alarm ...................................... BIT 4 ALARM: CTU 1 CTU ALARM CLEARED STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 30.............................................................................55 ........... BIT 7 ALARM: CTU 2 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM CLEARED STATE: NORMAL ND OF STEPS E .......................................................... BIT 6 ALARM: CTU 2 CTU ALARM CLEARED STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 30..................................................................... BIT 6 ALARM: CTU 1 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM CLEARED STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 18....................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ..................................................... ....................................................................................... BIT 5 ALARM: AMPLIFIER SHELF POWER CONVERTER 2 ALARM STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 18............................................ BIT 2 ALARM: CTU 0 CTU ALARM CLEARED STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 30 BIT 5 ALARM: CTU 0 SINGLE Rx AMPLIFIER ALARM CLEARED STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 18......................................... 4 Test PCU 2 Alarm Reporting Turn ON CB9 Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 3................................................

.................................................................................................................................................... 2 Test CTU Shelf Fan Alarm Reporting Turn ON CB2 Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 7........................................................................ 4 Test Frame Fan Alarm Reporting ................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................... 1 Test CTU Shelf Fan Alarm Reporting Turn OFF CB2 Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 7......................... BIT 2 ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME AMPLIFIER SHELF FAN ALARM STATE: NORMAL ................................... Procedure 7-15..................................................................................................................... 3 Test Frame Fan Alarm Reporting Turn OFF CB3 Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 7..........................56 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................................................................................................................................................Fan and Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm Test Troubleshooting Fan and Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm Test ............................................... Testing the Fan and Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm ...................................................................................................................................................................... Purpose This section is for the Fan and Heat Blower Alarm Test.. 7 ............................................................................................................................. BIT 3 ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME MAIN FAN ALARM STATE: OFF NORMAL ....................................................................................................... BIT 2 ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME AMPLIFIER SHELF FAN ALARM STATE: OFF NORMAL ..................................................................................... Procedures for testing proper functioning of a PCS CDMA Minicell Heat Exchanger Fan alarm are outlined in the following procedural list.......................................................................................................................................

.................................................. BIT 0 ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME FRONT HEAT EXCHANGER BLOWER 0 STATE: OFF NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 7........ BIT 3 ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME MAIN FAN ALARM STATE: NORMAL .........................................................Fan and Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm Test Troubleshooting Turn ON CB3 Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 7......... BIT 3 ALARM: HEAT EXCHANGER HI/LO TEMP STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 7.......................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 .................................................................. Turn OFF CB10 Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 1............................................................................................................................... BIT 1 ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME FRONT HEAT EXCHANGER BLOWER 1 STATE: OFF NORMAL ......................................................... 6 Test Heat Exchanger Alarm Reporting **The Heat Exchanger HI/LO Temp alarm will not report when testing alarms on an Indoor Primary Cabinet.... BIT 3 ALARM: HEAT EXCHANGER HI/LO TEMP STATE: OFF NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 7.................................................................................................................................... 5 Test Heat Exchanger Alarm Reporting **The Heat Exchanger HI/LO Temp alarm will not report when testing alarms on an Indoor Primary Cabinet............................ BIT 0 ..................................57 ... Turn ON CB10 Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 1...

......................................... 7 ............. .............................................................................................. BIT 1 ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME FRONT HEAT EXCHANGER BLOWER 1 STATE: NORMAL ND OF STEPS E ...58 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................................................................................................................................................................Fan and Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm Test Troubleshooting ALARM: PRIMARY FRAME FRONT HEAT EXCHANGER BLOWER 0 STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 7......................................................................................

............................................ Result: Same as above **OFFSET 0......................................Troubleshooting External Alarms External Alarms ..................... .......... Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 0.................................... If external user alarms have been wired into the OSP side of the Lightning Protection Block........................................................ Testing External Alarms ............................................................... 2 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for External Alarms 1 ................................................................. and of cell-site intrusion alarms.......................................................................................................................................................................... Procedure 7-16.................................... and are composed of user defined alarms.....................................................................................................................59 ............................................................................................................................ it will be necessary to remove the cable at the AIM1 connection on the Standard User Alarm Cross Connect Panel.............. BIT 6 ALARM: EXTERNAL USER ALARM 0 STATE: OFF NORMAL ....... BIT 6 ALARM: EXTERNAL USER ALARM 0 STATE: NORMAL ND OF STEPS E .......................................... verify that all of the External Alarm Switches on the Standard User Alarm Cross Connect Panel are in the closed (leftmost) position......................................... BIT (5-0) Reconnect the cable at the AIM1 connection on the Standard User Alarm Cross Connect Panel if it was removed earlier................... Testing procedures for these alarms are outlined below.............. 3 Move the External Alarm Switch 0 to the closed position (left-most)........................................................................... Advance Preparations To test User Alarms....................................................6............................................................... 1 Move the External Alarm Switch 0 to the open position (right-most).. . ................................ Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 0............................................................................................................................................ Purpose External alarms are pre-wired mechanical alarms....................................................................................................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ..........

............................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................ 5 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the Backup Power Cabinet ............) Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 1.................................................................................) Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 1........................................ BIT 2 ALARM: INTRUSION ALARM STATE: OFF NORMAL ................... 4 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the Growth Radio Cabinet.............................................. END OF STEPS ........................................................... 7 ..60 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................... ................................................................................................................................... Testing the Cell Site intrusion alarms is done by activating door sensors............................... (Simulates closing the door............................................... Testing the Cell Site Intrusion Alarms ............................................................................ 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the Primary Power Cabinet............................ .......................................................... BIT 2 ALARM: INTRUSION ALARM STATE: NORMAL ................................................................. if one has been installed..................................... 2 Push in the Primary Radio Cabinet front door sensor...............................................................................................Troubleshooting External Alarms Procedure 7-17....................................................... ..................................................................................................................................... Result All intrusion alarms at the Minicell have been tested................................................................................................................. if one has been installed........................... 1 Pull out the peg on the Primary Radio Cabinet front door sensor and push it back in............................................. (Simulates opening the door....................................................................

.............. Purpose This section is for the Power Cabineet Alarms................... Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 2.......................61 ... 2 Switch OFF a second power rectifier........................................................ 1 Switch OFF one of the power rectifiers located in the Primary Power Cabinet.......................................................................................................................................Troubleshooting Power Cabinet Alarms Power Cabinet Alarms ................................................................ Testing the Power Cabinets ................................................................................. BIT 0 ALARM: POWER CABINET MAJOR ALARM STATE: OFF NORMAL ....................................... BIT 0 ALARM: POWER CABINET MAJOR ALARM STATE: NORMAL .............................................................................. BIT 0 ALARM: POWER CABINET MINOR ALARM STATE: NORMAL ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3 Switch one of the rectifiers back ON (only one rectifier should now be switched OFF)..... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ........................................................................................ 4 Switch ON the single rectifier that was left OFF in the previous step... Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 1.......................... Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 1................................................ Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 2................................................................ BIT 0 ALARM: POWER CABINET MINOR ALARM STATE: OFF NORMAL .................................. .................................................................. Procedure 7-18............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. The tests outlined in below are for the Primary Power Cabinet...................................

......... ............................................................... There is NOT a CB1 in the Indoor Power Cabinet................................... If this happens....................................... BIT 0 ALARM: POWER CABINET MAJOR ALARM STATE: OFF NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 2............................ 5 Verify that there are batteries in the Primary Power Cabinet before proceeding..........................................Troubleshooting Power Cabinet Alarms ............... turn ON CB1 in the Power Cabinet IMMEDIATELY! 6 Switch OFF CB1 (double breaker) in the Primary Power Cabinet to Test AC Failure Alarm..........................................62 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...................................... BIT 0 ALARM: POWER CABINET MINOR ALARM STATE: OFF NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 2........................ Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 1............................ The Main AC breaker should be turned OFF to test this alarm............................................................................ CAUTION Battery Damage A Major Battery Discharge Alarm may appear OFF NORMAL if batteries are almost discharged............... 7 ......................................................... BIT 1 ALARM: POWER CABINET AC FAILURE STATE: OFF NORMAL ..............................................................................................

.............................................................................e....................... BIT 0 ALARM: POWER CABINET MAJOR ALARM STATE: OFF NORMAL ..................................... BIT 1 ALARM: POWER CABINET AC FAILURE STATE: NORMAL .. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ............................................................................................................ The Indoor Power Cabinet does NOT have a fan... Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 1........................................ CAUTION Service Interruption CB22 may be used as an auxiliary power supply for the facilities equipment (i................... Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 1.................................................................. fiber drivers)................ 8 Turn OFF CB22 to Test Power Cabinet Fan Alarm................................................. BIT 0 ALARM: POWER CABINET MINOR ALARM STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 2................................................................................. 7 Switch ON CB1 (double breaker) in the Primary Power Cabinet to test AC Failure Alarm......................Troubleshooting Power Cabinet Alarms .....................................63 ................. BIT 0 ALARM: POWER CABINET MAJOR ALARM STATE: NORMAL SCAN POINT:OFFSET 2..........

.......... 7 ...................................................................................... .. 9 Turn ON CB22 to test Power Cabinet Fan Alarm........................................................... Result The power cabinet alarms have been tested........................................................ Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 1................................................................................................................................................... BIT 0 ALARM: POWER CABINET MAJOR ALARM STATE: NORMAL ND OF STEPS E .......................................................64 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .............................................Troubleshooting Power Cabinet Alarms ..........................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................................... **Do NOT do this until the previous step’s response has been reported................................... A message is provided to indicate that the command went through.................................................. 1 Verify that the RFTG 0 alarm has cleared BEFORE testing the RFTG1 alarm reporting. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ........................................ A warning message must be displayed on the ECP console prior to the execution of this command......................... There is one icon for each RFTG unit.................................................................................................. BIT 6 ALARM:REFERENCE FREQUENCY GENERATOR 1 ALARM STATE:OFF NORMAL ........ execution of this command will disrupt CDMA service on this cell site................................... .......................... Press "RETURN" to continue or "ESC" to abort...................................................... The RFTG errors are reported to the ROP and are displayed on two icons on the 2138 SDP.............................................. Result: SCAN POINT:OFFSET 2. Procedure 7-19............... This test concludes the recommended alarm testing sequence............................................ 3 Ensure GPS timing........................................................... Turn OFF CB4.............................................................................................................................65 .............................................. A second message is provided to indicate that the RFTG unit returned to NORMAL status.......... 2 Test RFTG 1 Alarm Reporting...............................................................................Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG)1 Troubleshooting Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG)1 ............. The warning message says: You are about to reset a critical unit in the cell site....................................... If the RFTG unit does not return to NORMAL status....................... The command must specify the cell site and the RFTG unit (0/1)............................................................................................................................ .... The RFTG units must be able to be reset via a TI command......................................................... .................... Purpose RFTG Errors This section is for the RFTG1 alarm testing........................................................................... the second message will indicate: Unit did not responded or command failed................................ RFTG1 Alarm Testing ........

.................... CB20................. CB 4.............................. The alarm that should be checked is as follows:SCAN POINT:OFFSET 2.......... Result: A large number of alarms will report at this point............................... and CB18............ Result Test of RFTG1 is complete............................................................................................................................ 4 Ensure GPS timing and test RFTG 1 Alarm Reporting............ ................ Result: A large number of alarms will report at this point......... ................................ Turn ON CB14......... BIT 6 ALARM:REFERENCE FREQUENCY GENERATOR 1 ALARM STATE:NORMAL**This will take approximately 16 minutes to report............................. ND OF STEPS E . and CB18............................................................66 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....................................Reference Frequency and Timing Generator (RFTG)1 Troubleshooting Turn OFF CB14.......... It is not necessary to check for specific alarms.......................................................................................................................................... CB20............ 7 .

Troubleshooting

Restoring Out-Of-Service Equipment

Restoring Out-Of-Service Equipment

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

Alarm testing was done with the SCSM feature enabled, to facilitate
monitoring of the cell behavior. Because this feature generates a large
number of messages, it should be disabled in normal operation.

Procedure 7-20. Restoring Out-Of-Service Equipment

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

The procedure for restoring equipment to service is outlined below.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

1

Inhibit the SCSM feature on the terminal for the Minicell being tested.
**This must be done before restoring any equipment back into service.
inh:cell x,scsm <CR>
x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: OK
...........................................................................................................................................................................

2

Ensure that the SCSM feature was inhibited on the terminal for the
Minicell under test
op:cell,scsm <CR>
Result: OP:CELL,SCSM

CELL SITE
###
**The cell under test should NOT be listed.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

3

Clean up and restore all OOS units
init:cell x:sc <CR>

x = Minicell # 1-222
Result: OK
ND OF STEPS
E
...........................................................................................................................................................................

Result

The equipment is back in service.
............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

7 - 67

Troubleshooting

PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Map

PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Map

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
The Alarm Map

Thius section details the PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Map.
The following table gives the connections (AIM Terminal and Punch
Down) for user alarms, as well as the offset that is used to interpret
alarm messages.

ROP Text Message

Level S2 User Offset Bit CB
Alarm #

AIM 1 Punch
Term. Down
No.
(OSP)

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 6

Min

0

0

0

-

17

22

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 5

Min

1

0

1

-

16

21

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 4

Min

2

0

2

-

15

20

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 3

Min

3

0

3

-

14

19

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 2

Min

4

0

4

-

13

18

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 1

Min

5

0

5

-

12

17

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 0

Min

6

0

6

-

11

16

POWER CABINET GENERATOR Maj
ON

7

0

7

-

10

15

POWER
ALARM

MAJOR Maj

8

1

0

-

9

14

CSU ALARM

Maj

9

1

1

CB8 8

-

INTRUSION ALARM
(All Frames)

Maj

10

1

2

-

13
Grw-Frm

HI/LO Min

11

1

3

CB1 6
0

-

BATTERY DISCHARGE ALARM Maj

12

1

4

-

5

9

GROWTH 0 ALARM
(Growth 0 Heat Exchanger)

Min

13

1

5

-

4

-

CRTUm

Min

14

1

6

CB1 3
2

-

HEAT
TEMP

CABINET

EXCHANGER

7

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 - 68

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Troubleshooting

PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Map

ROP Text Message

Level S2 User Offset Bit CB
Alarm #

AIM 1 Punch
Term. Down
No.
(OSP)

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 7

Min

15

1

7

-

2

7

MINOR Min

16

2

0

-

1

12

POWER CABINET AC FAILURE Maj
ALARM

17

2

1

-

0

11

AMPLIFIER SHELF
CONVERTER 1

POWER Min

-

3

4

CB1 -

-

PRIMARY FRAME AMPLIFIER Min
SHELF FAN ALARM

-

7

2

CB2 -

-

PRIMARY FRAME MAIN FAN Min
ALARM

-

7

3

CB3 -

-

REFERENCE
FREQUENCY Maj
GENERATOR 1 ALARM

-

2

6

CB4 -

-

CONTROLLER SHELF POWER Min
CONVERTER ALARM

-

3

0

CB5 CB1
3

-

AMPLIFIER SHELF
CONVERTER 2

POWER Min

-

3

5

CB9 -

-

PRIMARY
FRAME
HEAT Min
EXCHANGER
BLOWER
1
ALARM

-

7

1

CB1 0

-

PRIMARY
FRAME
HEAT Min
EXCHANGER
BLOWER
0
ALARM

-

7

0

CB1 0

-

PRIMARY FRAME POWER Min
CONVERTER ALARM 0

-

3

0

CB1 3

-

REFERENCE
FREQUENCY Maj
GENERATOR 0 ALARM

-

2

5

CB1 4

-

POWER
ALARM

CABINET

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

7 - 69

Troubleshooting

PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Map

ROP Text Message

Level S2 User Offset Bit CB
Alarm #

AIM 1 Punch
Term. Down
No.
(OSP)

PRIMARY
FRAME
RADIO Min
SHELF 1 POWER CONVERTER

-

3

2

CB1 8

-

PRIMARY
FRAME
RADIO Min
SHELF 0 POWER CONVERTER

-

3

1

CB2 0

-

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 - 70

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Troubleshooting

Minicell Alarm Definition File

Minicell Alarm Definition File

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Overview
Use of the Definition File

This sections details the Minicell Alarm Definiation File.
One of the uses of the Alarm Definition File is in troubleshooting. In
particular, it allows to trace an alarm signal in Schematic Diagrams.
The table below gives the Alarm Reference Numbers in Schematic
Diagrams.

Alarm Ref
Number

Alarm Level

Usage

ALL 0 0

MIN

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 6

ALL 0 1

MIN

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 5

ALL 0 2

MIN

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 4

ALL 0 3

MIN

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 3

ALL 0 4

MIN

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 2

ALL 0 5

MIN

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 1

ALL 0 6

MIN

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 0

ALL 0 7

MAJ

POWER CABINET GENERATOR ON

ALL 1 0

MAJ

POWER CABINET MAJOR ALARM

ALL 1 1

MAJ

CSU ALARM

ALL 1 2

MAJ

INTRUSION ALARM

ALL 1 3

MIN

HEAT EXCHANGER HI/LO TEMP

ALL 1 4

MAJ

BATTERY DISCHARGE ALARM

ALL 1 5

MIN

GROWTH 0 ALARM

ALL 1 6

MIN

CRTUm

ALL 1 7

MIN

EXTERNAL USER ALARM 7

ALL 2 0

MIN

POWER CABINET MINOR ALARM

ALL 2 1

MAJ

POWER CABINET AC FAILURE

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

7 - 71

Troubleshooting

Minicell Alarm Definition File

Troubleshooting Procedures
Overview
Purpose

Documentation

This chapter contains procedures that you perform as PCS CDMA
Minicell-related maintenance tasks.
The following documents are used as reference material in this Section:

AUTOPLEX® System 1000 Input Message Manual(401-610-055)
for ECP R7.0

AUTOPLEX® System 1000 Output Message (401-610-057)
Manual for ECP R7.0

Series II Cell Site Hardware Description, Operation, and
Maintenance (401-660-100).

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 - 72

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Communicating with the PCS CDMA Cell

Troubleshooting

Communicating with the PCS CDMA Cell

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

Prerequisites

This procedure is designed to enable you to:

Access and exit the craftshell

Access Status Display Pages

Must have a log-in to the cell.

Procedure 7-21. Accessing the ECP Craftshell

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Perform the following:
...........................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select AUTOPLEX® OMP menu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select ECP and DCS OA&M from the AUTOPLEX® OMP menu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select AUTOPLEX® System 1000 ECP Access from the ECP and
DCS OA&M menu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

4

Select ECP Craft Shell from the AUTOPLEX® System 1000 ECP
Access menu.
END OF STEPS

............................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 7-22. Exiting the ECP Craftshell

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Perform the following:
...........................................................................................................................................................................

1

With the 3 AUTOPLEX® System 1000 ECP Access menu active, press
the Control - f - 6 keys, in the order shown.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

7 - 73

Communicating with the PCS CDMA Cell

Troubleshooting

...........................................................................................................................................................................

2

Close the 2 ECP and DCS OA&M menu using the keystrokes you used
in Step 1. Do this to reach the 1 AUTOPLEX® OMP menu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

3

At the 1 AUTOPLEX® OMP menu, highlight Exit using the cursor-up
or cursor-down key. With Exit highlighted, press the Return key.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

4

The system queries whether you want to exit the Craftshell. To provide
an affirmative response, press the Control-f-3 keys, in the order shown.
END OF STEPS

............................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 7-23. Access Status Display Pages from the OMP

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Perform the following:
...........................................................................................................................................................................

1

Select AT&T OMP Software Applications from the Workspace menu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

2

Select AUTOPLEX® System 1000 ECP Access from the OMP
Applications menu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

3

Select ECP Control & Display from the AUTOPLEX® System 1000
ECP Access Menu
The cursor is positioned at the CMD< line.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

4

The CMD function is used for poke commands (either as page number
or maintenance commands.). To open the display, enter the unique
status display page number (command) and press RETURN.
END OF STEPS

............................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 - 74

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Communicating with the PCS CDMA Cell

Troubleshooting

To back out of the menus, simultaneously press the Control-f and 6
keys.
To exit, simultaneously press the Control-f and 3 keys.

Status display page numbers (commands) are identified (listed) under
the CMD heading on the System 1000 index pages (100 - Page Index
page and/or 2100 - APX Index page).

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

7 - 75

Troubleshooting

Optioning the CSU

Optioning the CSU

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

Purpose

Reference

This procedure is designed to enable you to determine the correct
settings of a Kentrox CSU.
ADC Kentrox Operator Manual

Procedure 7-24. Accessing the Terminal Cell Interface Options

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................

1

Connect the terminal to the 25-pin port on the lower front of the PCS
CDMA Minicell cabinet.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

2

Option your terminal as follows:

Line rate = 9600 baud

8-bit / 1 stop bit / parity = none

Direct connect (if applicable)

Local echo = N (full duplex)

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3

Enter ^D xx:00 ^E, where xx is the CSU number. This exercise uses
CSU 02. This sets up the link to the CSU. The ^D means to press the
CTRL key and the D key at the same time. This input displays the Main
Menu from the CSU.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

4

Enter TC and press the Enter key. This displays the terminal (cell)
interface options.
END OF STEPS

............................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 7-25. Specify CSU Options

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................

1

Specify CSU options by typing the code corresponding to your
configuration parameters and pressing the Enter key. The options are
listed at the beginning of each line. For example, to change the terminal
interface to extended super frame, type TESF to specify the extended

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 - 76

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Troubleshooting

Optioning the CSU

super frame option. After setting an option, press the Enter key again
and the CSU redisplays the terminal configuration for verification.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

2

Type X after completing all desired terminal interface option changes.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

3

Type NC and press the Enter key at the Main Menu to change the
network interface options (toward the T1 provider). This brings up the
network interface configuration submenu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

4

Make option changes in the same manner as you did the terminal
interface changes.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

5

Return to the Main Menu by typing an X.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

6

Enter ^D. This severs the control link with the CSU. Repeat these steps
if you have more CSUs equipped. Remember to establish each CSU
control link with the input ^D xx:00 ^E.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

7

Type LD to enter the local diagnostics submenu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

8

Type DST to perform the self test.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

9

Observe the CSU under test. Observe the sequence of LED flashes
followed by the relighting of the green PWR/FAIL LED.
END OF STEPS

............................................................................................................................................................................

Procedure 7-26. Exiting the CSU

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................

1

Type X to leave the submenu.
...........................................................................................................................................................................

2

Enter ^D to break the connection to the CSU under test.

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

7 - 77

Troubleshooting

Optioning the CSU

...........................................................................................................................................................................

3

Remove the serial data cable from the jack on the lower front of the PCS
CDMA Minicell cabinet.
END OF STEPS

............................................................................................................................................................................

Result

Ensure that when you are done, all settings for the TC and NC are back
to their original values.

...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

7 - 78

Lucent Technologies – Proprietary
See notice on first page

401-703-301
Issue 8
April 1999

.. Procedure ...79 ............. and a HP-83236A PCS adapter........................................................................ a HP-83205A CDMA adapter.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... composed of an HP-8521A Spectrum analyzer........ the HP-83205A CDMA adapter......................................... 2 Power up both the 8521 and the 83236A for at least 15 minutes........................................................................................................... ........................................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................. 1 Connect the HP-8521A Spectrum analyzer.............................. ................................................................................................................................ HP Documentation Set up HP Test Set as shown in the diagram below: Procedure 7-27....... Purpose Reference Connections for the HP8521A and CDMA/PCS Adapters This procedure enables you to set up a PCS CDMA HP test set.................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 .....................Troubleshooting Setting up the PCS CDMA HP Test Set Setting up the PCS CDMA HP Test Set .................................... and the HP-83236A PCS adapter as shown in the figure........................................

....................................... Result When load and run are done............... screen shows Manual Control Main Menu............. 7 .................... then press the knob.... If you are in the "IBASIC TEST" screen....................... middile of upper row................................. A block appears with "Choices" at the top................... A block appears with "Choices" at the top......... press the "TESTS" button............. select "MANUAL" ................. 6............. 5................................... With the knob.................. • Pressing the knob will highlight a selection or provide you with other selections................................................................. ......... Insert the software card into right slot............................................................ 4 If either/or both the "Select Procedure Location” or “Select Procedure Filename” are blank.......................... depress "PRESET"....................................Troubleshooting Setting up the PCS CDMA HP Test Set ............................... Press the "PRESET" button.......... either depress k1 button or use the knob to position the cursor and select "RUN TEST".................................................................................. With the knob............. proceed with this step... Rotate knob to position the cursor at "SELECT PROCEDURE LOCATION"................. upper right of main test set........................ Rotate knob to "SELECT PROCEDURE FILE NAME"................................................. 4........ 6 At top right block on the screen................ middle of upper row...................... position the cursor to "Card" and press knob to select.............. otherwise................................... END OF STEPS ...............5 minutes....................................80 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................. ............ 5 If the "Select Procedure Location and the “Select Procedure Filename” have “Card” and “Manual” respectively................. press knob to highlight... 3 Press the "TESTS" button. Equipment Functions: • Turning the knob will move the cursor to the desired selection................. ................................................. 2.... The load sequence will take approximately 1.............................. 3... The test (main menu) screen will appear.................................. skip to the next step......................... 1................. 7.................................................................

........................ use the keypad and then press the knob....................................................................81 ........................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ........................................................... ...............................................................Troubleshooting Setting up the PCS CDMA HP Test Set • To enter numerical functions..

............................... Take care to ensure that you do not disable all SCT circuit packs at the same time.... Purpose Test equipment Background This procedure enables you to verify the clock source used for CDMA BCRs by performing the following: • Preparing the cell site for CDMA clock verification • Seting up the HP 8521A for CDMA clock verification • Performing the CDMA clock verification test The following test equipment is required to complete this exercise: • An HP8521A Test Set with PCS CDMA adapter • Miscellaneous cables..... connectors.......... The clock signal is then distributed to CDMA growth frames through cables connected to the RFTG-m..........................................82 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..............Troubleshooting CDMA Clock Verification Test CDMA Clock Verification Test ................................................... CDMA BCRs do not operate accurately without the timing source provided by the SCT circuit pack............... This section of the procedure ensures that the CDMA SCT circuit pack equipment is healthy and that it is in the proper state for test operations to begin.......................................................................................................... 7 ............... The derived clock signal is distributed by the active TN1703 synchronized clock and tone (SCT) circuit pack....................................... and adapters CDMA in the AUTOPLEX® System 1000 uses a clock signal to synchronize the CDMA BCRs................... ........................................................ A GPS antenna connected to the reference frequency and timing generator (RFTG-m) provides the timing source...................... The clock signal is derived from the global positioning system (GPS) signal timing component.................................................................... You will perform the clock verification test on each SCT circuit pack in the CDMA cell...................

............. STOP...................................................................................... If the LEDs do not indicate the presence of an adequate GPS signal........... Perform the following steps to prepare for CDMA clock verification testing: ........................................................................................................................................................................................ RFTG-m-RB J1 J2 REF OUT P1 +24V J3 J5 ALARM J6 J4 NO GPS FAULT STBY ON INTERFACE RS-485/1 PPS 15 MHz RFTG-m-XO J7 GPS ANT J2 REF IN P1 +24V J3 ALARM J5 J6 J4 NO GPS FAULT STBY ON INTERFACE RS-485/1 PPS 15 MHz Procedure 7-28...................... ............................................................................................................. or using the OP:CELL x input message.............................................................................................................. ............. CDMA Clock Verification Testing ................................................................................................. x Status Display Page for the cell site being tested...........................................83 ........Troubleshooting CDMA Clock Verification Test RFTG Display The diagram shows the rftg........................................................ 1 Ensure that there are no SCT circuit packs in the OOS (out of service) state by observing the 2131........... 3 Turn on the HP test set by pressing the POWER button and allow the set to warm up for 30 minutes if you have turned the test set off after exercise 3.... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ......... 2 Observe the LEDs on the RFTG-m. you cannot perform the CDMA clock verification test on this cell............... you cannot continue this procedure............................................................................................................................ If the LEDs do not indicate a proper GPS signal.................................................................................................................. .

6608 under Choices................................. ....................... 2 Connect a BNC(M)-SMA(M) cable from the CDMA TIMEBASE IN connector of the HP test set to the CLK (J2) connector on the SCT circuit pack to be tested..................................... Procedure 7-29............................................. 1 Connect a BNC(M)-SMA(M) cable from the EVEN SECOND SYNC IN connector of the HP test set to the 2PPS (J3) connector on the SCT circuit pack to be tested.............................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7 Select 19......................................................................................................................................... 4 In the To Screen menu area of the HP test set.......................................................................... 4 Use a standby SCT board................................................................................... ...................................................................................................... ....................... ............................................................................................... 3 Make sure that the SCT circuit pack is connected to the HP Test Set for the duration of all remaining procedures......... use the other SCT circuit pack............. select More.. You can determine which SCT is in the standby state by observing whether the ACT LED is lit....... .................................................... select the field labeled SYNTH REF . 8 At the SCT board being tested.......... Select Pause for Manual HP392NX Measurements (disregard the information on the next screen)...................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. The procedure outlined below covers seting up the HP test set.................... .................................................................................................................................... END OF STEPS ........................................ 5 Select CDMA ANL under Choices to go to the CDMA Analyzer screen................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................... switch the TST CLK switch to OFF............................................... 6 On the CDMA Analyzer screen................................................84 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................................................. Set up the HP Test Set .......... 7 ........................................................................................................................Troubleshooting CDMA Clock Verification Test ..................................... If lit............................................................................... .......................................................................

...........................Troubleshooting CDMA Clock Verification Test .................................. 10 At the SCT board being tested.................... verify that the CSTS REF UNLOCK LED is dark................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Result: Manual Main Menu should return to the screen............ ........................................................................... verify that the CSTS REF UNLOCK LED is lit............................................................. indicating that there is no 19........................................... ...... ND OF STEPS E .................................................................... 9 At the HP 85203A............................... Result You have completed this procedure................................................................................................................... 12 Press the PREV key (top middle key of the test set).................................................. indicating that there is an accurate 19.................6608-MHz signal coming from the SCT board........................6608-MHz signal coming from the SCT board....................... ....................................................................................... ............................................................ switch the TST CLK switch to ON........... 13 Select continue (K2 key).........................................................85 ................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................................... 11 At the HP test set..

........... 6 Select SPEC ANL from choices......................86 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........................................................................................................... ...................................................................... Channel Number can be found by accessing the Status Display Page 2138 for the appropriate cell.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7 ............ 4 Select Channel Number....................................... Purpose This procedure is designed to enable you to monitor and measure the center frequency and bandwidth of the CDMA RF signal..............................Troubleshooting Analyzing the CDMA RF Spectrum Analyzing the CDMA RF Spectrum .................................................... 2 Enter 34............................................................................................... select: • Change System Settings • Transmitter Test Cable Loss .............................................. ................................................................................................................................................ Analyzing the CDMA RF Spectrum ......................................... ........................................................................................................................ 7 Select Ref Lvl at bottom of screen ........................................ 3 Return to previous menu..................................................................................................................4db using keypad(for attenuator/cable loss).................................................................................... 5 Select Pause for Manual HP392NX Measurements (disregard the information on the next screen).... ............................................. .................................................................................................................................................................... 1 On the Manual Control Main Menu.................................................................. Procedure 7-30.................................... The cable connection for this test is from the RF IN/OUT on the HP83236A to SECTOR ONE(S1D0/P) connector in the Hatch-plate and to include a 30db attenuator.................................................................... ..........Enter 45 using keypad (adjust as necessary/desired)................................................................................................... ............................................................................... Enter channel number using the keypad............................................................................

. 11 Select continue (k2 key)................................................................................ You have completed the procedure............................................................ ........................................................................87 .......................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................Enter 5 using keypad(adjust as necessary/desired).............. 8 Select Span at bottom of screen .............................. 12 Manual Main Menu should return to screen............................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ....... .............. END OF STEPS ......................................................................................................................................................................Troubleshooting Analyzing the CDMA RF Spectrum .............. 10 Depress PREV key (top middle of test set)......................................................................................................................................................... 9 Record center frequency reading ___________ (right side of screen) .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...................

............................................. • Receiver Test Cable Loss ................................................................................................................................................. 7 ................................................................................................................................................................................0db ............................................................................................... Purpose This procedure is designed to enable you to monitor CDMA transmit power levels at the CTU output............. Enter channel number usng the keypad.............................................................................................................................................. Setup the Power Meter ................................................................................. .................................................................................... 3 Return to previous menu..... Procedure 7-31............ ...............................0...................................................................................... 4 Make the following entries: Channel Number (Channel Number can be found by accessing the Status Display Page 2138 for the appropriate cell......................Troubleshooting Power Measurement Transmit Levels Power Measurement Transmit Levels ................................................................................................88 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5 Select: Analyzer Attenuation .................................................................0 Db • Store system information to card • Load system information from card ......................................................................................................................... Some selections may already be in effect from previous procedures..) RF Generator Level:-130................................... 2 Select as necessary: • Equipment Type Base Station • Frequency Band 1850-1990 Mhz • Channel Type CDMA • RF Generator Out RF OUT ONLY • Transmitter Test Cable Loss ___ (use keypad) The test cable and attenuator must be checked for loss and the value placed here.................................................................................................... 1 Select: Change System Settings .................................................................

........................................................................ 10 Select ............................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7 Return to previous menu .....................change to 111 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Select: HP 83236A TX Power Measurement Select: Change Power Measurement Settings Select: Samples to Collect Enter 4800 with Keypad Select: update .............................................................................................89 ........................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2 On the ceqface form.................................................................................. Modify the ceqface Power Settings ............................................................................................................................................................................. 9 Return to previous menu ......................................................................................................... edit the following fields: • Enter cell number (Field 1) • Enter face (1 = alpha) (Field 2) • Pilot Channel Gain (dgu) ............. .................. The procedure below are the steps to modify the ceqface power settings................................ Procedure 7-32................................................... 6 Select Auto Set (Reminder: HP must be connected to the Hatch-plate) .................Troubleshooting Power Measurement Transmit Levels ........................................................... 1 At the terminal access the Recent Change/Verify via apxrcv and access the ceqface form..................................................................................................................Make Power Measurements END OF STEPS ...............................................................................................................................................................

...... ............................................... 7 Using a adjustment tool................................ ........................... ....................... 4 Disconnect from the ceqface form and apxrcv................................................................ 7 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. (Should be approximately 39db for 8 watts and 42 db for 16 watts) This is the nominal power for the transmitter......................................... 8 Adjust for the lowest power and record it ________.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ________.......................................................... 6 At the HP test set record the dbm reading on the screen................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... END OF STEPS .................. .................... ................................................ adjust the power in the BCR for maximum power and record it ___________.........................................................change to 00 .................................... 3 Update the form .............................................................. ............................................ 1 Access the Status Display Pages............................................................................................................................90 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................ The procedure below is to move the paging channel to another CCU ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................... 5 Restore the ccu that the paging channel was on........... ........................................ 4 Observe paging channel move to another CCU..............................................Troubleshooting Power Measurement Transmit Levels • Paging Channel Gain (dgu) ....b (a=cell b=ccc number)............. 2 Access 2139...................................change to 00 • BCR Attenuation Factor (db) ....... 3 Remove the paging channel CCU ............................................................................. Procedure 7-33.............................................................change to 00 • Synch Channel Gain (dgu) ............................................................a.......................................................................................... Move the Paging Channel to Another CCU .....................................

....... 9 Adjust back to the nominal power.........................................Power Measurement Transmit Levels Troubleshooting ................................................................... 5 Disconnect from ceqface form and apxrcv.................................................................................................................... .......... .......................................................................................................... 3 Edit the following fields Enter cell number (Field 1) Enter face (1=alpha) (Field 2) Pilot Channel Gain (dgu) ................................................................................................................................ Restore the Paging Channel to its Original CCU ......... The procedue below restores the Paging Channel to its original CCU ............................................................................................................. ............................................................................................. END OF STEPS ........................................................................................................................................................................................... The procedure below is to restore the ceqface Power Settings.............................................................................change to 8 ................................................91 ........................................................................................................................ 4 Update the form........................................................................... Procedure 7-35..................................................................................................................... ............................................................................... Procedure 7-34...................... 2 Select: update............................ END OF STEPS .....................................................................change to 64 Sync Channel Gain (dgu) ...................................................................................... ............................................................................ Restore the ceqface Power Settings ............................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ...........................................change to 34 BCR Attenuation Factor (db) .............................................change to 108 Paging Channel Gain (dgu) .................................................................................................................................................................. 1 Access Recent Change/verify via the apxrcv and access the ceqface form.................................................................................................................................................. 10 At the terminal.................................................................................................................................................................... disconnect from the Status Display Pages.......................................

.................................................................................... 3 Remove the ccu that the paging channel is on.......................................................................................................................................................................................................b (a=cell number b=ccc number)............................................. Procedure 7-36...................................................................................... 2 Access 2139.............................................................. END OF STEPS .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ................. 6 Disconnect from Status Display Pages........................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7 ....................................... ............................... ..............................................92 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................................................... 5 Restore the ccu that you have just removed.a.... ............................................... select: • Prev Menu (k1 key) • Prev menu You have completed the procedure........... .... 4 Observe the paging channel shift back to where it was previously.............................................................................................................................................................................................. 1 Access the Status Display Pages...... End the Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................... 1 At the HP-8521A..................................................... ................... ................................................................Troubleshooting Power Measurement Transmit Levels ...........................

........ System Requirements The test procedures can be performed on any CDMA PCS Minicell that is controlled via data links from a PCS Switching Center PCSC and that is loaded with the minimum software release of PXB07............................................... From the HP83236A Manual Control Main Menu........10................................................................. 2 Select: More (from the bottom of the screen) ............................... better known as Rho.... 3 Select: CDMA Anl ........ do the following: (The HP83236A Manual Control Main Menu should be on the screen) ....................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ............................................................................ 1 Select: Pause for Manual HP 892NX Measurements....................................... Procedure 7-37.................................................................................................................................. where a measurement of 1 indicates perfect correlation....................... 4 Select: Chan Pwr . Rho is a measurement of the transmitter modulation accuracy and gives the percentage of transmitted power that correlates to the ideal code......................................................................................................................................................................................................Troubleshooting Rho Measurement Rho Measurement ....... the clusters must be placed in a manual configuration (CFR) mode where the CDMA transmitter is activated with just the Pilot channel being modulated....................................................................................................... Result: A new screen will appear with a lot of information on it................................. It is not necessary to read it................... Uncorrelated power appears as white noise and is a source of interference for other users........... Purpose Description This procedure is designed to enable you to perform the CDMA transmitter waveform quality measurement................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. The CDMA Base Station Standard for passing is a Rho measurement of 0....................................................................................................... ...................93 .............. Anything lower suggests a problem with the BDR or ACU............................................................................. In order to perform Rho measurements on a Minicell................ Start Rho Measurement ............................95 or greater...............................................................................................................................

..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................) ND OF STEPS E ........................................ 6 Tune Freq Result: Will appear as an 850Mhz channel frequency range............................... 7 ............................ Set-Up Procedure ............50ms Gain Auto Anl Dir Fwd (this selection must appear underlined) .................................................................. 1 Input the following: Atten 20Db Port Ant( this selection must appear underlined) Anl Special 0 Synth Ref 19..............................................................................................................Troubleshooting Rho Measurement ................ 5 Select: Rho .............. This procedure is to enter the values ................................... DO NOT CHANGE !! (The up-bander uses a different mixing frequency than the CTU................... (can be found on the ceqface form field 61) Even Sec In Enable (this selection must appear underlined) Meas Intvl 0...................................................94 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................................... Procedure 7-38............................... Result The HP meter is setup to do CDMA analysis in the proper frequency range......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... The frequency was already inserted when you selected the channel number in previous procedures..........................................6608 CDMA TB Internal PN Offset Use Data keys to enter the PN Offset assigned to this sector in translations................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................start <cr> x = Minicell number 1 ........ 3 Select: CODE DOM .........................................222 Result: M 02 CFR:CELL x MULTI...... Configure the Session ............................................................... but this is not correct because all overhead channels are still active.................................................................................................................................. ND OF STEPS E .................................................................................................................... 4 Select: • Main • Trigger (under choices) • Trigger event • Delay Result: At this time the CDMA domain will appear on the screen with P/S/A and paging..........................95 .........................................................................................................Troubleshooting Rho Measurement Analyzer Cont (this selection must appear underlined) Qual Event 80ms Trig Event Delay 100us Result: A Rho measurement will appear in the top left screen........................................................ ...................................................................................................................... ..................................................multi.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2 Select: More (from the bottom of the screen) ..................................................................... At the Terminal access the Craft Shell and make the following entries...... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 .......................................................................................................................................................................... ALL WENT WELL ................. Result The meter is setup for Rho measurement.................... Procedure 7-39.............. 1 cfr:cell x.......................................................................

..................................................................................................................) cfr:cell x..... Turns on transmitter with just pilot channel............................ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ............................. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16 Status ...................multi bba b................... Config..........) cfr:cell x............................................................................................................ 7 ............................. b = bba number 2 ......... 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30 Status ............... 2 Add the BBA for the first sector to be tested to the configure session...... Config..................................................................... 3 Turn on the CDMA transmitter with next entry......................................................... This also turns the transmitter off........96 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..........................................................Troubleshooting Rho Measurement .. ALL WENT WELL BBA RANGE (1-30) BBA No.... (Observe that the CDMA DOM will disappear from screen when you receive the response........config 150<cr> x = Minicell # 1-222.................... (Observe that CDMA DOM is back on screen with just pilot after the response..xmitc 301<cr> .....multi bba b...s. 000000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BBA No.........................................6 (2 = alpha 4 = beta 6 = gamma) Result: M 02 CFR:CELL x MULTI........................

..... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BBA No...........) ...................................................................................................... Config........................................................... the CFR session can be terminated with the next entry................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 ........s.97 ............................................................................................. Config....................mstop<cr> ....................... This puts the transmitter back on the air with all channels.......................................... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .............multi. (Observe that the CDMA DOM screen has all channels up after the response................... 5 cfr:cell x................................... 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16 Status ....................... 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30 Status .................................................................Troubleshooting Rho Measurement x = Minicell # 1-222 Result: M 11 CFR:CELL x MULTI.......................................................................................... 4 Once the transmitter has been turned off..................... ALL WENT WELL BBA RANGE (1-30) BBA No.......

.............................................................................. 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30 Status ..... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BBA No.................... ............. Procedure 7-40. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16 Status ........ Config............. ..... Result The meter is ready to measure the Rho value.. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 11 CFR....... 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30 Status ........ Config.............................................................................................. ALL WENT WELL OICE RADION RANGE (0-191) BBA RANGE (1-30) BBA No..........................98 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .............................................................. Config.......................... ALL TESTS PASSED BBA No................................................ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ND OF STEPS E .................................................................................................................s.................................................CELL x MULTI................................................................................Troubleshooting Rho Measurement x = Minicell # 1-222 Result: M 11 CFR........................... 7 . COMPLETED..... Record Rho Value .............. 1 Push prev button to return to CDMA analyzer screen......................................................... Config................................................. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BBA No................. 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16 Status ..............................................................................................................................................................CELL 95 MULTI......

....... Observe the CDMA....................0 as defined in the CDMA Base Station Standards...............Troubleshooting Rho Measurement The measured Rho value should now be visible on the CDMA Base Station test set.................................................................... 2 Record two other standards from this screen: Freq Error ___________Hz (Standard: +/............ DOM is gone from the screen after the response........................................................................ ............................... 3 Push prev button to return to the CDMA DOM screen..................................................................................................multi bba b......99 ..... END OF STEPS ............................................................................................44Hz) Carrier Feedthru_____db (Standard: less than 25db) ............................................................................................................................................................................... 1 After the Rho measurement has been completed............................................................................................................xmitc 301<cr> ............... Record Rho__________ Standard: 0........................95 and 1.................... Enter the command: cfr:cell x........ Procedure 7-41........................................................................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 .................................................................................95 or greater ................................. turn off the CDMA transmitter with the next entry......................................................... Restore Cell to Service ........................... The acceptable measured Rho values must be between 0...........................................................................................................

....................................100 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................................... 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30 Status ........................... Config.....................................mstop<cr> .................................................................................. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .................................................multi......... Config.................. 2 Put the transmitter back on the air with all channels......s............... 7 ..................................................... 0000000000000000 BBA No................................. (Observe that the CDMA DOM screen has all channels up after the response) Enter the command: cfr:cell x......... 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13-14 15-16 Status .......Troubleshooting Rho Measurement x = Minicell # 1-222 Result: M 11 CFR:CELL x MULTI.............................................. ALL WENT WELL BBA RANGE (1-30) BBA No....................................

........ Config............. .............................................................CELL x MULTI........ ALL TEST PASSED ND OF STEPS E .............................................................................. ........ 1-2 3-4 5-6 7-8 9-10 11-12 13- ................. .......................................... ALL WENT WELL VOICE RADION RANGE (0-191) ........................... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 M 11 CFR...............101 ........ .................................. .......................................................... 17-18 19-20 21-22 23-24 25-26 27-28 29-30 Status ...... 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 BBA No..........................CELL 95 MULTI............. COMPLETED.......................... Config.... .......... .......... BBA RANGE (1-30) 14 15-16 Status BBA No...................................Troubleshooting Rho Measurement x = Minicell # 1-222 Result: M 11 CFR............................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 7 .............

.....................Troubleshooting Rho Measurement .........................102 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..................................................................................................................................................................................................... 7 ..........

.....................8-45 • Calibrate the CTU and HPCTU (8 Watt Setup) Transmit Power 8-48 .......8-33 • Connect the Power Meter to the Minicell .......8-27 • Translations .......8-42 • Set Up Shelf Calibration Signals ..................................8-28 Power Calibration Test Procedure 8-29 • HP 437B Power Meter Calibration .............1 .....................................................................8-19 ....................• Minicell Cleanup ............8-34 • Begin the Recent Change/Verify Session ..................................8 Repairs Overview Purpose Contents Changing Filters • Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 0) • Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 1)........8-25 CTU/HPCTU Calibration Issues 8-26 • Amplifier Type and Power Level ...... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 .............8-7 ..- - - 8-3 ....8-31 • Enter the Offset.............................• Call Processing Tests .....8-11 ................................................8-21 Power Calibration Description 8-22 • Preliminary Notes ......................8-37 • Set Up Attenuator Measurement Signal .........8-4 ....................................8-23 • Test Equipment ..........8-39 • Calibrate the Attenuator Offset .. If Known ........... • Replace Duplex Filters (Primary Transmit/Diversity 0) • Replace Simplex Filters (Diversity 1) ............................................8-15 ..

..8-76 ...........Remove Meter ....Restore the Original CDMA Power Control Translations RF Transmit Power Calibration Data Sheet ...............................................................8-62 • Yearly Heat Exchanger Maintenance .......Repairs • • • • • Calibrate HPCTU (16 Watt Setup) Transmit Power ...........8-63 • Replace the Control Card for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger 8-66 • Replace the Heater Cartridge for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger 8-69 • Replace the Ambient Fan for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger 8-71 Island Cell 8-73 • Island Mode CDMA Cell Script .......................................8-58 • Heat Exchanger ROP Alarm Corrective Actions .......................... 8 .............................8-59 • Heat Exchanger Hi/Low Temp Alarm ........................8-61 • Weekly and Monthly Heat Exchanger Maintenance ..........................................................................- - - 8-50 8-51 8-53 8-54 8-56 Heat Exchanger Repairs 8-57 • Heat Exchanger Maintenance .....8-74 NVM Procedures 8-75 • CDMA Cell Downloading Procedures ............................................................Calibrate Additional Shelves ....2 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........

.................................................................................. as well as running Call Processing Tests and performing Minicell cleanup................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ......................... ......................................3 .......................Repairs Changing Filters Introduction Purpose This section covers the converting and replacing of simplex and duplex filters in the Minicell........................................................

............................................................................................................. Purpose This subsection describes the procedure to convert the Primary Cabinet simplex transmit and simplex diversity 0 receive filters to one duplex filter...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... It is not on the cable................................... CABLE TYPE ALPHA BETA GAMMA DIVERSITY 0 DIVERSITY 0 DIVERSITY 0 SMA P10 P12 P14 SMA P11 P13 P15 SMA P1 P1 P1 N-TYPE P2 W101 a P2 W102 a P2 W103 a N-TYPE P2 W104 a P2 W105 a P2 W106 a P8 P9 DSUB (9-PIN) P7 a This label is referenced to the schematics (SD-2R374-01) only...............Repairs Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 0) Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 0) ....................................................... Remove the Simplex Filters (Diversity 0) ....... Only disconnect the cables to the filter panel being removed................................................... for diversity 0..................... RF Cables to be Disconnected on Simplex Filter (Inside Cabinet) The table below lists the RF Cables to be disconnected on simplex filter for each face..................................................... ..................... CABLE TYPE ALPHA BETA GAMMA DIVERSITY 0 DIVERSITY 0 DIVERSITY 0 SMA P28 P30 P33 SMA P27 P29 P34 SMA P25 P32 P35 SMA P26 P31 P36 Procedure 8-1...................... Change only one filter panel at a time............4 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................ CRTU Cables to be Disconnected on Simplex Filter (Inside Cabinet) The table below lists the CRTU Cables to be disconnected on simplex filter for each face..................... 8 ..................

. ......... CB2.................... CB19. 3 Remove the cables listed in the table for the filter panel being replaced............................ Install the new duplex filter........................... .... ............................................................................................................. END OF STEPS ............................................................................................................................................................... For a simplex filter configuration............... If the simplex filter does not have enough room to slide out.......................................................................................................... carefully push up the TX cable P1 from the CTU shelf.......................................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ........................................... 1 If the Minicell is in service................................................................. DO NOT BEND this cable............................ CB16........................................................... CB15..... 5 Remove the simplex filter............... then the CTU fan must be removed. Before removing the simplex filter............. If the duplex filter does not have enough room to slide in............................................ DO NOT BEND this cable.......................................... call the PCSC to remove the Minicell from service........................................................................................................................ CB18...... then the CTU fan must be removed.......................... 2 Turn OFF the following circuit breakers: CB1............................................... Install Duplex Filter (Diversity 0) ........................................................................................................................................ CB20.................... CB17................................................................................................................ CB9.. carefully push up the TX cable P1 from the CTU shelf.................................... Before installing the duplex filter.......... 4 Remove the two screws on the top of the simplex filter.......5 ..................... ........ the RX filter is below the TX filter.... CAUTION Damage can occur to the cables..................................... Procedure 8-2......Repairs Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 0) ............ ....................................................

.......................... remove the Alarm Control Board “ACB” and change rotary switch 1 to the correct frequency band (A-F)........................................................ CB18.................................................................................... CB17............................................................................. 1 Insert the two screws on the top of the duplex filter to secure it to the Minicell frame......... use the 13/16 torque wrench R-5851 (40 in-lbs)...................................................... ................................. The ACB is located to the right of the CTU fan assembly......................................................................................................................... CB16...................... If the Minicell is not in service................... When reconnecting the SMA cables‘ use the 5/16 torque wrench R4399 (14 in-lbs)................. ......6 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................................................................................................................. W102 and W103 cables are NOT connected to the newly installed duplex filter panels.....Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 0) Repairs ......................... 4 If the frequency band of the new duplex filter has changed........ CB15.................... 8 ........ This must be done before you start testing the new filter panels......... 2 Reconnect all cables to the newly installed duplex filter.............................................................................................................. 3 Turn ON the following circuit breakers: CB1.................. Perform the Call Processing Tests on diversity 0 as described in “Call Processing Tests”...................................................... If the Minicell is in service.. For the N-type cable connections............................................................................ CB2............ the following call processing tests must be performed......... ............ Diagnostics Call Processing Test Run diagnostics to test the working condition of the cell........................................................ 5 Press the reset “RST” button on the faceplate of the ACB............................. CB9..... CB19............ ... END OF STEPS ........................................ CB20........... The P2 W101.......................................................................... ......................................... this section can be skipped..............................

. Purpose This subsection describes the procedure to change the Growth Cabinet simplex diversity 1 receive filter (on side of cabinet) to a duplex filter........... Filter Removal Sequence When replacing Simplex diversity 1 filter panels with duplex panels............................... Cable Type Alpha Beta Gamma SMA P46 P41 P37 SMA P45 P42 P38 ................... beta is the middle panel.....................................................7 ................................ When facing the front of the Minicell....... .............. these diversity 1 receive filter panels are located on the outside of the left side of the Minicell..................... Alpha is the top filter panel..................... The Minicell does not have to be removed from service during the physical installation of these filters..................................... then the beta panel........Repairs Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 1).............................................. Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 1).. RF Cables to be Disconnected on Simplex Filter (On Side of Cabinet) CRTU Cables to be Disconnected on Simplex Filter (On Side of Cabinet) The table below lists the RF cables to be disconnected on simplex filter on side of cabinet..................................................................................................... Cable Type Alpha Beta Gamma SMA P41 P42 P43 SMB P38 P39 P40 DSUB (9 Pin) P5 P6 P4 N-TYPE W110 P2 W111 P2 W112 P2 The table below lists the CRTU cables to be disconnected on simplex filter on side of cabinet.............. and gamma is the bottom panel..... it is recommended to remove the gamma panel first....................................... for diversity 1................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 .... and then alpha.......

.............................................................................. Disconnect the Simplex Filters .................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Cable Type Alpha Beta Gamma SMA SMA SMA SMA P46 P45 P47 P48 P41 P42 P44 P43 P37 P38 P39 P40 Reconnect To Duplex Filter J6 (-50 RX) J5 (-40 RX) J4 (-40 TX) J3 (-50 TX) Procedure 8-3.......................... Refer to 8-7.............................................. disconnect the cables listed in 8-7 from the RU filter coupler assembly: If the CRTU is NOT installed in the Minicell............. 8 .............................................................Repairs Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 1).............. ........................................... there are no cables connected to the J3 and J4 coupler connectors........8 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................................................. beta or gamma) that is being removed............... 2 Disconnect the cables to the simplex filter panel (alpha........ .......................................................................... 1 Remove the left side panel and the back panel of the Minicell cabinet using the 216C can wrench...................................................................................... 3 If the CRTU is installed in the Minicell.......... RF Cables to be Reconnected on Duplex Filter (Side of Cabinet) CTRU Cables to be Reconnected on Duplex Filter (Side of Cabinet) The table below lists the RF cables to be reconnected on duplex filter side of cabinet.............................. ........... This procedure outlines the steps to replace simplex filters with duplex filters....................................................................................................... Cable Type Alpha Beta Gamma Reconnect To Duplex Filter SMA P41 P42 P43 J2 SMB P38 P39 P40 J4 9 Pin DSUB P5 P6 P4 J3 N-TYPE W110 P2 W111 P2 W112 P2 J1 The table below lists the CTRU cables to be reconnected on duplex filter on the side of cabinet.

....................................................................... use the table on page 8-8 as a reference for the cables to be reconnected........................................................................................................................................................ END OF STEPS ........................................................... The 50 ohm terminations have to be removed from coupler connectors J3.............................................................................................Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 1)........ use the 13/16 torque wrench R-5851 (40 in-lbs)................................................................................. this modification is not necessary.. 1 Reconnect all cables to the newly installed duplex filter.................................... One is located above the RU....................... 2 When reconnecting the SMA cables........................................... 4 Remove the three (3) screws holding the filter panel to the frame of the Minicell...................... the second is located below the RU. and the third is located on the upper-right corner of the side panel...........................................9 .............. J5 and J6 on the duplex filter before the cables from the RSP can be reconnected........................................................... 5 On the alpha face...................... right below the 15 MHz..... Install the new duplex side panel onto the Minicell frame................................................. Result Procedure 8-4..................................................... 3 If the CRTU is equipped in the Minicell.......................... check the screw holding the power splitter for receive diversity 0 to see if it is obstructing the installation of the new duplex panel............................. Use the table on page 8-8 as a reference...................................... J4.... 6 to 1.. .... the three (3) mounting screws are left justified... power splitter......................................................... A shorter screw.......................... Repairs ........................ ............. ...... For the gamma filter side panel.................................................................................. This power splitter is mounted on the top........................................... use the 5/16 torque wrench R-4399 (14 in-lbs)............................ ....................................................................... left-side of the front inside of the Minicell............................... For the N-type cable connections....... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 . (comcode 847743895).......................................................................................... If the power splitter is mounted on a L-bracket.............. The screw on the right side of the power splitter is the one that could possibly cause a problem............................................ Install Duplex Filter ............................. should be provided with the new duplex side panels........ The three (3) mounting screws should all be right justified for the alpha and beta filter side panels...................................... .............

............................................................ 4 If the frequency band of the new duplex filter has changed............ This must be done before you start testing the new filter panels................................................. the following call processing tests must be performed............................... to test the working condition of the cell...... remove the Alarm Control Board “ACB” and change rotary switch 1 to the correct frequency band (A-F)....................................................... ................................................................................ 8 .......... ................ J5 and J6 coupler connectors terminated........Convert Simplex Filters to Duplex Filters (Diversity 1).................. ...................................... If the Minicell is not in service................. leave the J3.................... Repairs If the CRTU is NOT installed in the Minicell.................................................................................. but the Growth frame is not being installed............... Diagnostics Call Processing Test Run diagnostics........ this section can be skipped..................... END OF STEPS ........................................... including the Rho test........................ 5 Press the reset “RST” button on the faceplate of the ACB................................... Perform the Call Processing Tests on diversity 1 as described on 8-19.................................................. Result The duplex filters are installed.......10 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....... If the CRTU is installed............. If the Minicell is in service..... The ACB is located to the right of the CTU fan assembly. J4................ leave the J5 and J6 coupler connectors terminated..........................................

......................................................... The table below shows the RF cables to be disconnected on duplex filter inside the cabinet........................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 .................................................................................................... Purpose RF Cables to be Disconnected on Duplex Filter (Inside Cabinet) This subsection describes the procedure to replace the Primary Cabinet Transmit /Diversity 0 duplex filter.................................................11 ..........Repairs Replace Duplex Filters (Primary Transmit/ Diversity 0) Replace Duplex Filters (Primary Transmit/Diversity 0) ............................................................................... This may be needed if changing frequency bands or replacing defective filters...................................................... Cable Type Alpha Diversity 0 Beta Diversity 0 Gamma Diversity 0 SMA P28 P30 P33 SMA P27 P29 P34 SMA P25 P32 P35 SMA P26 P31 P36 ................ Cable Type Alpha Diversity 0 Beta Diversity 0 Gamma Diversity 0 SMA P10 P12 P14 SMA P11 P13 P15 SMA P1 P1 P1 N-TYPE P2 W104 * P2 W105 * P2 W106 * DSUB (9-PIN) P7 P8 P9 * This label is referenced to the schematics (SD-2R374-01) only................... CRTU Cables to be Disconnected on Duplex Filter (Inside Cabinet) The table below shows the CRTU cables to be disconnected on duplex filter inside the cabinet............................ It is not on the cable.........................................

........................................Repairs Replace Duplex Filters (Primary Transmit/ Diversity 0) RF Cables to be Installed on Duplex Filter (Inside Cabinet) The table below shows the RF cables to be installed on duplex filter inside the cabinet.............. Change only one filter panel at a time............................. Cable Type Alpha Diversity 0 Beta Diversity 0 Gamma Diversity 0 Reconnect To Duplex Filter SMA P28 P30 P33 J6 (-50 TX) SMA P27 P29 P34 J5 (-40 TX) SMA P25 P32 P35 J4 (-50 RX) SMA P26 P31 P36 J3 (-40 RX) Procedure 8-5................................................................................................................... Only disconnect the cables to the filter panel being removed.................................................................. 1 If the Minicell is in service.......................................................................................................................... ......................................... CTRU Cables to be Installed on Duplex Filter (Inside Cabinet) The table below shows the CTRU cables to be installed on duplex filter inside thw cabinet......... Replacement Procedures ..................................................................................................... call the PCSC to remove the Minicell from service... It is not on the cable........... Use 8-11 as a reference for the cables to be disconnected..................12 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........................................................... 8 . .... Cable Type Alpha Diversity 0 Beta Diversity 0 Gamma Diversity 0 Reconnect To Duplex Filter SMA P10 P12 P14 J9 SMA P11 P13 P15 J10 SMA P1 P1 P1 J7 NTYPE P2 104 * P2 W105 * P2 W106 * J1 (ON BOTTOM OF FILTER) P8 P9 J8 DSUB P7 (9-PIN) * This label is referenced to the schematics (SD-2R374-01) only.....................................................

.......................................................................... 1 Insert the two screws on the top of the duplex filter to secure it to the Minicell frame................13 ................................................... Install Duplex Filter .............................. 2 Turn OFF the following circuit breakers: CB1................................................................................. 2 Reconnect all cables to the newly installed duplex filter.... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ......................................................... 4 If the CRTU is equipped in the Minicell..................... CB15............................................ ......Repairs Replace Duplex Filters (Primary Transmit/ Diversity 0) .............................. 5 Remove the two screws on the top of the duplex filter. Use 8-12 as a reference............... CB17........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ........ use 8-11 as a reference for the cables to be disconnected................................................................ 3 Remove the cables listed in 8-11 for the filter panel being replaced.................... then the CTU fan must be removed....................................................................................................................... DO NOT BEND this cable.......................... carefully push up the TX cable P1 from the CTU shelf.......... ........ Before removing the duplex filter................................. CB2.................................................................................. END OF STEPS ................................. CB16........... ............................... If the duplex filter does not have enough room to slide out................. .................................................................... CB20... CB18........ Before installing the duplex filter........................... 6 Remove the duplex filter................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................. carefully push up the TX cable P1 from the CTU shelf.............................................. DO NOT BEND this cable................................................................................. Procedure 8-6.................................................................... CB19.... ................................. CB9..................................... If the duplex filter does not have enough room to slide in....................................................... then the CTU fan must be removed.........................................................

......... CB2. Diagnostics Call Processing Test Run diagnostics to test the working condition of the cell...... ............... use the 5/16 torque wrench R4399 (14 in-lbs)... 6 Press the reset “RST” button on the faceplate of the ACB................ CB20......................................................................... For the N-type cable connections............................................ The P2 W101................... ..... W102....................................... .............................................................. this section can be skipped....................... use the 13/16 torque wrench R-5851 (40 in-lbs).......... use 8-12 as a reference for the cables to be reconnected........................ CB9.................................................. CB15.............................. .................................. If the Minicell is in service....................... Perform the Call Processing Tests on diversity 0 as described in “Call Processing Tests”............................. The ACB is located to the right of the CTU fan assembly...... 4 Turn ON the following circuit breakers: CB1........................................ CB18............................... If the Minicell is not in service........Replace Duplex Filters (Primary Transmit/ Diversity 0) Repairs When reconnecting the SMA cables....... 3 If the CRTU is equipped in the Minicell............... This must be done before you start testing the new filter panels................................................................ 5 If the frequency band of the new duplex filter has changed..................................................................................................................................................... CB17.......................................................................................................................... .................. CB16..... END OF STEPS ... remove the Alarm Control Board “ACB” and change rotary switch 1 to the correct frequency band (A-F)................... 8 ............ CB19...................... and W103 cables are NOT connected to the newly installed duplex filter panels.....................14 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................. the following call processing tests must be performed...............................................................

....................................................................................... it is recommended you remove the panels in the following order: Panel Location 1 gamma panel bottom 2 beta panel middle 3 alpha panel top When facing the front of the Minicell............................................................................................ CABLE TYPE ALPHA BETA GAMMA SMA P46 P41 P37 SMA P45 P42 P38 .Repairs Replace Simplex Filters (Diversity 1) Replace Simplex Filters (Diversity 1) . CABLE TYPE ALPHA BETA GAMMA SMA P41 P42 P43 SMB P38 P39 P40 DSUB (9 Pin) P5 P6 P4 N-TYPE W110 P2 W111 P2 W112 P2 The table below shows the CRTU cables to be disconnected on simplex filter on the side of the cabinet........15 .................................................................................................................................................... Purpose Sequence of Filter Removal This subsection describes the procedure to replace the Growth Cabinet Diversity 1 simplex filter (on side of cabinet).......................................... RF Cables to be Disconnected on Simplex Filter (On Side of Cabinet) CRTU Cables to be Disconnected on Simplex Filter (On Side of Cabinet) The table below shows the RF cables to be disconnected on simplex filter on the side of the cabinet........... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 .......... The Minicell does not have to be removed from service during the physical installation of these filters................................................................................. When removing the simplex filter panels. these diversity 1 receive filter panels are located on the outside of the left side of the Minicell...... This may be needed if changing frequency bands or replacing defective filters..........................

........................................... 3 If the CRTU is installed in the Minicell........................ CABLE ALPHA TYPE BETA GAMMA RECONNECT TO SIMPLEX FILTER SMA P41 P42 P43 J2 SMB P38 P39 P40 J4 DSUB (9 Pin) P5 P6 P4 J3 N-TYPE W110 P2 W111 P2 W112 P2 J1 CRTU Cables to be Reconnected on Simplex Filter (On Side of Cabinet) The table below shows the CRTU cables to be reconnected on simplex filter the on side of the cabinet............................................................................................................................................................................... 8 ................................................................................................ Replacement Procedure ......................16 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................................................................ there are no cables connected to the J3 and J4 coupler connectors...............Repairs Replace Simplex Filters (Diversity 1) RF Cables to be Reconnected on Simplex Filter (On Side of Cabinet) The table below shows the RF cables to be reconnected on simplex filter the on side of the cabinet.................................... ..................................... .............. Refer to page 8-15................................................. If the CRTU is NOT installed in the Minicell........................................................................ disconnect the cables listed on page 8-15 from the RU filter coupler assembly........ ...................................................................................................... 1 Remove the left side panel and the back panel of the Minicell cabinet using the 216C can wrench............................................................. beta or gamma) that is being removed..................... 2 Disconnect the cables to the simplex filter panel (alpha.............................................................. .......................................... CABLE ALPHA BETA GAMMA TYPE RECONNECT TO SIMPLEX FILTER SMA P46 P41 P37 J6 (-50 RX) SMA P45 P42 P38 J5 (-40 RX) Procedure 8-7..................................

............. The ACB is located to the right of the CTU fan assembly................................Repairs Replace Simplex Filters (Diversity 1) ................................. For the gamma filter side panel.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. The 50 ohm terminations have to be removed from coupler connectors J3 and J4 on the simplex filter before the cables from the RSP can be reconnected....................................................................................................................... 1 Reconnect all cables to the newly installed simplex filter........................................................................................................................... the second is located below the RU....................... END OF STEPS ...... use the 5/16 torque wrench R-4399 (14 in-lbs)................................................... Procedure 8-8.................. leave the J3 and J4 coupler connectors terminated........... and the third is located on the upper-right corner of the side panel......................................................17 ........................................................ Simplex Filter Panel Installation ................................................................................. use the table on page 8-16 as a reference for the cables to be reconnected..... use the 13/16 torque wrench R-5851 (40 in-lbs)........... remove the Alarm Control Board “ACB” and change rotary switch 1 to the correct frequency band (A-F).......................................... 4 Press the reset “RST” button on the faceplate of the ACB........ Use the table page 8-16 as a reference.............................................................. .... 4 Remove the three (3) screws holding the filter panel to the frame of the Minicell.................. When reconnecting the SMA cables.................................... 3 If the frequency band of the new duplex filter has changed......................................................... the three (3) mounting screws are left justified............................. This must be done before you start testing the new filter panels...................... 2 If the CRTU is equipped in the Minicell........................ The three (3) mounting screws should all be right justified for the alpha and beta filter side panels.... One is located above the RU..... ............................................................................................................................................. For the N-type cable connections............................................................................ .. Install the new simplex side panel onto the Minicell frame...................... ................................................................. ..... If the CRTU is NOT installed in the Minicell................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 .......

.............. Call Processing Test If the Minicell is in service.............. .................. ND OF STEPS E ................................. gamma).................................... Perform the Call Processing Tests on diversity 1 as described on page 8-19.......... the following call processing tests must be performed.......................................Replace Simplex Filters (Diversity 1) Repairs Run the FER (RX path test) for each antenna face filter that has been replaced (alpha................................................ If the Minicell is not in service.........................18 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ......................................................................... this section can be skipped.. 8 ...................................................... beta..................................................................

......ucl rst:cell #................................................................................ucl rmv:cell #................ The table below shows the circuit breakers to turn off to disable diversity............... 2 Restore all BBAs equipped....ucl rmv:cell #.................................. bba 6................................................................................ bba 2..... bba 4.................................. If the Minicell is not in service.............. Procedure ..................................... engineer..ucl rmv:cell #................................................Repairs Call Processing Tests Call Processing Tests ...... One CDMA Mobile-to-land call must be made for each antenna face (alpha............ gamma) equipped................. bba 4.................... ................ 1 Contact the cell tech.............. or maintenance personnel at the PCSC to perform the commands listed in the table above on the ECP before a call is made on each antenna face.............................................. bba 6............ucl rmv:cell #........... the following call processing tests must be performed.........ucl Procedure 8-9.......................................................................19 ........ Diversity Circuit Breaker Result diversity 0 turn OFF CB9 in the removes diversity 0 Primary Radio Cabinet from service diversity 1 turn OFF CB1 in the removes diversity 1 Primary Radio Cabinet from service Call Processing Test ECP Commands The table below shows the Call Processing Test ECP Commands Call Process On Alpha Face (BBA 2) Call Process On Beta Face (BBA 4) Call Process On Gamma Face (BBA 6) rst:cell #............................... beta.................... bba 6................... ............................................ucl rst:cell #........ this section can be skipped..................... bba 4.................................................................ucl rmv:cell #............... .......... Purpose Disabling Diversity If the Minicell is in service. bba 2......................... bba 2...............................ucl rmv:cell #...................................................................................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ......................................

............................ END OF STEPS ...........................................................................................................Repairs Call Processing Tests .................20 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ............... 8 ........................ 3 Turn ON CB1 and CB9........................................................................................................

.............. (Torque Wrenches (p/o ITE-6267) SMA type: R4399........ 3 Put the Antenna Cable Cover in place and secure................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ...................................... Check that all side and rear panel locking bolts are tight.............................................................................................21 ..................................................................................... ........................................................................................................... Procedure 8-10............. Verify all cell cabling is properly reconnected and the connectors are properly torqued.................................................. ...................................................................................................................................................................................... ......................................................................................................................................... if equipped END OF STEPS ........ N type: R-5851)......................................................................................................................................................... Purpose Remove all test equipment from the Minicell......................................................................... Verify that the special tools that ship with the cabinets remain with their respective cabinets................................. 1 Replace the side and rear panels...................................................................................................................................................... Secure Minicell ........................................................................................................... 2 Secure the doors to all cabinets in the Minicell...............Repairs Minicell Cleanup Minicell Cleanup .............. ........................................................................................................

.................................................................................. also.... There is NO need to perform these on every cell.... High Power CTU (HPCTU)................ 8 .................................Repairs Minicell Cleanup Power Calibration Description Introduction Purpose This section describes the procedures for performing PCS CDMA transmitter measurements and calibrations with the Minicell controlled from the ECP...... When to Run These Procedures These procedures are not routinely required during optimization................................ the procedures support both Primary and 1st Growth Cabinets... ..22 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....... They are included in the handbook for troubleshooting problems such as: • no detectable Pilot channel • unaccountably low level Pilot channel • LAC alarms When troubleshooting these problems........ RF transmit power measurements are an adjunct to antenna checks................................... Minicell Equipment The procedures include steps for the standard 8 Watt CDMA Transmitter Unit (CTU) and the 16 Watt..............................

A call up on the cell under test might affect the output power of the face under test............................. Double check that the ceqface fields modified during this procedure are . personnel at the switch center may use two terminals: one running a UNIX session......0 and Cell generic load h40Y08........ Additionally............. Rho and receive Frame Error Rate tests may be required... The High Power CTU can be adjusted to either mimic the 8 Watt CTU or set to its full 16 Watt output (42..) BCR Attenuation Factor For the standard (8 Watt) CTU.............................. HPCTU..... BCR......23 ............0 dBm) output............... or Filter).. craftshell or RC/V....................................................... These test procedures can be performed on any PCS CDMA Minicell that is controlled via data links from a PCS Switching Center (PCSC) and is loaded with the minimum Cell Generic software release APXB08.... CTU..00 (APXD08....... Units Taken Out-of-Service CTU and HPCTU ECP and Cell Generic Required To perform average RF power measurement or calibration on a PCS CDMA Minicell............. and the other on MCRT pages... never adjust the BCR Attenuation Factor in ceqface to less than 8 dB except while running this procedure..................... The RF transmit power calibration must be performed after the replacement of any component in the Transmit RF path (cabling...... Overview These notes should be read and understood before proceeding with the calibration.......... the RF transmit path will require calibration if the center frequency of the carrier (channel number) is changed.......................... BCR attenuation values less than 8 will result in overdriving the CTU... Station for Running the Procedures The procedure is best run from the OMP where simultaneous craftshell (TIpdunix) and APX/RCV sessions can be run....................... Additionally............................................. The standard CTU is always calibrated for an 8 Watt (39................................................ When Calibration is Required The installation crew performs a transmit path calibration as part of their normal testing.............. the CCCs and BBAs must be taken out-of-service.................................................... or later.... See the discussion under the heading CTU/HPCTU Calibration Issues.................... Coordination Calls End any coordination call while actually measuring/adjusting the RF power output of a face........... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ..Repairs Preliminary Notes Preliminary Notes .............00....1 dBm)...01).... The HPCTU and growth cabinets require ECP 9.... (Alternately............

......... References The documents listed in the table below are useful references for the procedures described in this section............................24 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....................... • Hewlett Packard 437B Power Meter Operation Manual0043790036 • AUTOPLEX® 1000 Cell Site Input Message Manual401-610-055 • AUTOPLEX®1000 Cell Site / DCS Input / Output Message Manual401-610-107 • CDMA Translation Note #1A Translation Application Note for CDMA Forward Link Transmit Path (Version 4........................................... the High Power CTU should never have its BCR Attenuation value set to less than 6 dB.........Repairs Preliminary Notes returned to their normal operation values after the RF transmit power has been measured or calibrated.......... Similarly....................... except when running the procedures in this section............ 8 .................................. Check the cell site configuration parameters for the range of allowed BCR Attenuation Factor values............ 3/5/98) .. Stable Clear A stable clear should be performed after translations modification to ensure that the changes take effect.................0........................................

............. HP 8481H...................................... This assembly does not permit enough room for the attenuator and power sensor head....................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ....................................... 50 Ohm attenuator 90 Degree N type adapter (male to female)............................... 3................................................................................................................. QTY 1 1 Description VT-100 Terminal Emulator and ECP dialup access (UNIX login) or a second person at the PCSC to enter terminal commands Hewlett Packard 437B Power Meter 1 1 1 Any calibrated Average Power meter and attenuator combination capable of reading approximately 43 dBm (about 20 watts) may be used........................................................................................25 ........... It is recommended that the HP-437B or HP-441A Power Meters used to set power in wireless system be allowed to warm up 30 minutes prior to calibration to allow it to stabilize for proper readings...................................................................... Required Test Equipment The following equipment is required to perform these test procedures.............5 Watt Power Sensor 30 dB................................................Repairs Test Equipment Test Equipment . . (Optional) Power Meter Warm up This is needed on installations with the Compact Size Antenna Cable Cover..........................

.....................................................Repairs Test Equipment CTU/HPCTU Calibration Issues Amplifier Type and Power Level Purpose The standard CTU can only be calibrated for 8 Watts (Linear Amplifier Circuit type................................... 8 ..............26 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 . or lactype..................................................................................... p and Maximum Power........................ or maxpwr. 8).......... ...................................

............... Growth Cabinet If a growth cabinet is equipped..................................................... the desired RF output level must be known.... If the CTU shelf fan is removed to check for HPCTU equipage.........27 .. 1 Remove the CTU fan to read the faceplate apparatus code (BMT1).....Repairs Amplifier Type and Power Level Amplifier Type and Power Level ....... Before you begin Prior to calibrating a High Power CTU............................... The High Power CTU can be adjusted for either: CTU lactype maxpwr 8 Watts p 8 16 watts z 16 Determine if CTU or HPCTU is Present CAUTION Permanent damage to the CTUs will result............................................................................................................................................. the HPCTU apparatus code (BMT1) on the faceplate can easily be read (the CTU fan is mounted in the rear)................... it must be reinstalled and operating within 15 minutes..............................................................................0 dBm)...................................................................... Never attempt to adjust a standard CTU for more than 8 Watts (39........................... .................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ......... To determine if the Minicell is equipped with the HPCTU: .............. tell-tale Heat Exchanger mounted on the rear panel in the Primary cabinet (although this extra Heat Exchanger is also used with the High Temperature Kit)....................................... Additional Heat Exchanger Minicell Primary cabinets equipped with HPCTUs have an additional....................................................................................................................................

.............. Power Translations ceqcom2 Amp Type Desired Max Pwr (field Configuration 162) lactype (field 75) CTU 8 Watts 8 p HPCTU 8 Watts 8 p HPCTU 16 Watts 16 z HPCTU can be calibrated for 8 Watts or 16 Watts on a face by face basis................ The table below sums up the CTU/HPCTU configurations...................................................................Repairs Translations Translations ............................ the translations must be changed and the RF path recalibrated to the new power level.......................... Overview CTU/HPCTU RF Power Levels The differences in translations must be understood prior to performing the procedures in this section............................................................................. 8 ............................................. Important! To change between 8 watt and 16 watts on the HPCTU.....................................................................28 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................ ............................................................................................................................................

...... Remove the CCC and BBA from service for all shelves to be measured or calibrated...... and Sync Channel Digital Gains..... 10............. Remove the BBA for the next face to be measured/calibrated...Repairs Translations Power Calibration Test Procedure Outline Purpose The following is an outline of the procedure in this section... Make Translations changes for the attenuator measurement....... 13... 4................... Restore the BBA for the shelf under test...... ..................... and Max Power..... 15............. 14......29 ...... 6................ Remove the Power Meter and re-connect the Foam Jumper.... Stable Clear the cell and verify that the CCCs and BBAs are restored to service. Remove the BBA again and add attenuator back into the measurement circuit. See subsequent paragraphs for detailed steps.... Start an apxrc/v session and note the Forward Link power translations values: Pilot..... 9...... and BCR Attenuator translations parameters for Each Face of the cell which will be calibrated or measured.. Measure the CDMA transmitter power and/or perform the calibration procedure....... 12...... Enter actual attenuator loss as an offset in the power meter... Paging.... Paging Sync............. Repeat steps 10 through 12 for all equipped shelves to be measured.... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 .............. Calibrate the Power Meter..... 5................... Temporarily Change the Pilot......... Remove the foam jumper and connect the power meter and attenuator to the cabinet’s antenna interface panel for the first shelf to be tested....... BCR attenuation.... 3.......... 8.. 11.. Remove from Service the BBA for the face just measured or calibrated. then restore the CCC and BBA for the first shelf and make the attenuator measurement. Linear Amplifier Type (lactype).... 1...... then remove the face’s foam jumper and connect the power meter... 7....... 2...

.................................. and re-connect the foam jumper........ Place one test call on all transmit paths measured or calibrated..... Stable Clear the cell and verify that the CCCs and BBAs are restored to service......................... .... 8 .................... Remove the tested BBA tested from service... 19............... disconnect the meter.... 17............................................................... 18... Change the translations back to the normal operating parameters for each face where translations were modified......Repairs Translations 16......................................................................30 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...

........................................................... press the [ZERO] button.........................1 99.......................... Purpose This section details the Power Meter Calibration............. Verify that there are no error messages on the display.... The unit will display “PRESETTING”.... Power Meter Diagram ITE6891 FUNCTION DATA ENTRY (HP437B) POWER REF Reference Calibration Factor SENSOR REF CF 99% GHz CF% Rho ................................................................................... ...........002 2............................................................................. ....................... ....006 " " " Calibration Factor " " " ITE6889 (HP8481H) Procedure 8-11................................................................0 ..31 .................... Power Meter Calibration .............................................................................. .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4 After presetting disappears........................................................................... ..............Repairs HP 437B Power Meter Calibration HP 437B Power Meter Calibration ..................................................0 ................................ 3 Press the [PRESET] button. The power meter will display “ZEROING***”................................................................ 2 Turn ON the Power Meter.......................................................... 1 Connect the sensor cable between the HP 8481H Power Sensor (ITE 6889) and the sensor jack on the HP 437B Power Meter (ITE 6891)................................................................................................................0 97...................................................................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ........................................................................................................ Then press [ENTER] to execute the preset....................................................................................

............................... ................ The meter displays the current value of the Calibration Factor..................... ....................................................................Repairs HP 437B Power Meter Calibration ...... use the left and right arrows ([¨] or [Æ]) to choose the digit............................................... If necessary.............................................................................................................. 5 When the “ZEROING***” is finished.......................................... .............................. This will guarantee accurate measurements.. 10 Select CAL FAC (press [SHIFT].......................................... 6 Connect the Power head to the POWER REF jack on the meter........ select CAL (press [SHIFT] then [ZERO])........................................ The display will show the current calibration factor stored in the meter........ See Figure 1... but varies between units.................................................................................................................... The calibration steps in the above paragraphs should be repeated every time the meter is turned on.................................................................................................................................................0 GHz from the table on the sensor head (see Figure 1).......... Alter the value using the arrow keys as done previously.......................................................................................................................................... The meter will display “CAL***”................................................. modify the blinking digit to match the Reference Cal.......................... It is labeled REF CF (or REF CAL FAC) and the value is typically 99%............................. 8 Press [ENTER] on the meter....... Press [ENTER]........................................................................................................................................................ 8 ............................................ 7 Locate the Reference Calibration Factor on the power head.......................................................... Using the up and down arrows ([¦] or [Ø])..........................................................................32 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 . disconnect the head from the POWER REF jack on the meter.................... ... ................... 11 Obtain the Calibration Factor for 2.............................................. This is located above the table on the head...................................................................................... 9 When the “CAL***” display disappears..................... ...................................................... then [FREQ]). .............................................. Factor........... END OF STEPS ...................

.................................................... If Known Enter the Offset................. ..................................................33 .................. 3 Press [ENTER]. If Known ............................................... END OF STEPS ............ Do Not enter an offset at this time unless the true loss of the attenuator was determined previously........................................ Procedure 8-12.................................... The actual insertion loss of the attenuator will be determined in a later step.................... Place the 30 dB attenuator in series with the head while reading full transmit power...................................... The power meter is now ready for use.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Repairs Enter the Offset........................................... 1 If the true offset is known............ Equipment Damage Sensor head may be permanently damaged........................................................................ ............................ press [OFFSET] on the Power meter................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Entering the Offset .................................................... Purpose Power readings will be taken with a 30 dB attenuator (ITE 7037) between the sensor head and the measurement point.................................................................................... .......................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 .................................................. 2 Use the arrow keys once again to obtain the true loss of the attenuator........................................................................................................ ...................................................

........................................................................................................S3G Growth...........................................................S2P 1st Carrier Beta Transmit Filter TX ...................................................... Function Data Entry Power Ref Sensor HP 8481 H The table below lists the 2 or 3-Sector Primary Radio Cabinet...........................S1G Growth.... Purpose This section describes connecting the power meter to the Minicell.S1P 1st Carrier Alpha Transmit Filter TX ...... 2nd Carrier Alpha Transmit Filter TX ................................................. 2nd Carrier Beta Transmit Filter TX .................. Filter Type Connection Description Simplex TX ................................... 2nd Carrier Gamma Transmit Filter ............ 8 .... RF interface plate connections.................S3P 1st Carrier Gamma Transmit Filter TX ................... Hewlett Packard Power Meter Connections Line RF Interface Plate Primary Radio Cabinet RF Connections 30 dB atten..............................Repairs Connect the Power Meter to the Minicell Connect the Power Meter to the Minicell ................................S2G Growth..34 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .............................................

...........CTU 1 / RU 2 C3P Third Carrier Transmit Filter .. Filter Type Connection Description Duplex D0 (C1P) First Carrier Transmit / Diversity 0 Receive ....................................................................................................CTU 0 / RU 1 RX/DX S2D0/S2P Primary Beta Transmit / Diversity 0 Receive .........CTU 1/RU 4 RX/DX S3D1/S3G Growth Gamma Transmit / Diversity 1 Receive .Growth CTU 1 C6G Sixth Carrier Transmit Filter .....Repairs Connect the Power Meter to the Minicell Duplex RX/DX S1D0/S1P Primary Alpha Transmit / Diversity 0 Receive ........ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 .........................CTU 2 C4G Fourth Carrier Transmit Filter ............................................................................................ Enter: TIpdunix <cr> Result: A REPT APXSHL TERMINAL IN SERVICE . RF Interface Plate Connections The table below lists the OMNI Primary Radio Cabinet....35 ..................................................................................................CTU 0/RU 2 RX/DX S2D1/S2G Growth Beta Transmit / Diversity 1 Receive ...............................CTU 2 / RU 5 RX/DX S1D1/S1G Growth Alpha Transmit / Diversity 1 Receive ..................................... Connect the Power Meter ...........................................................CTU 1 / RU 3 RX/DX S3D0/S3P Primary Gamma Transmit / Diversity 0 Receive ........... RF Interface plate connections.....CTU 0 / RU 1 D1 (C2P) Second Carrier Transmit / Diversity 1 Receive ........Growth CTU 0 C5G Fifth Carrier Transmit Filter ............................................................. .......... CAUTION Personal Injury or damage to cell equipment Donot disconnect any RF cable while any BCR is in the TRANSMIT state (ACT LED ON)........Growth CTU 2 Simplex Procedure 8-13............ enter the following command at the UNIX prompt to begin a Craftshell session.................... or using a VT100 terminal emulator with dialup access to the ECP........... 1 At the ECP......CTU 2/RU 6 OMNI Primary Radio Cabinet..........................

............................ The figure illustrates the connections for the HP 437B power meter equipped with the HP8481H Sensor and its associated 30 dB attenuator................................................................................................................................................................. 4 Remove the Foam jumper from the RF Interface Panel for the shelf (CRC) to be measured/calibrated..... ........................................................................................... return the BCR AUTO/OFF switch to AUTO.............................................................................................................................................................................. Remove only one foam jumper at a time to avoid mistakes upon reconnection......... BBA b............................................... .......................................................... 4 = Beta............................ bba b..................................... The 2 or 3-Sector and Omni tables list the transmit RF connection markings of the RF Interface Plate on the Primary Radio Cabinet............................................ rmv:cell a.............................................36 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................................................................................................ COMPLETED a = Minicell number 1 . ........................................................................................................Connect the Power Meter to the Minicell Repairs ........................... ............................ 3 Turn OFF the BCR AUTO/OFF Switch......... 8 ......... 5 Connect the attenuator and the sensor head/meter to the proper port of the RF Interface Panel.. 6 After connecting the attenuator and power meter to the transmit port at the RF Interface Panel............222 b = BBA number 2 or 4 (b = 2 for all cells except Beta/Gamma two-sector cells) 2 = Alpha or Omni -Carrier 1................... 2 Enter the following command to remove the first BBA from service...................ucl <cr> Result: RMV:CELL a............................................................................................................................................................................................. END OF STEPS ... 6 = Gamma ...................................

.. Procedure 8-14............................... 1 At the UNIX terminal.............................................. Personnel performing recent changes must be familiar with the recent change process and data entry commands................................................................................................. < <CR> to exit ....Repairs Begin the Recent Change/Verify Session Begin the Recent Change/Verify Session ......................................................................... The BCR faceplate adjustment will be used to trim the BCR output.................................................................................................. Begin the Recent Change/Verify Session ........................................... type: u for update....... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ......................................................................... changes cannot be made unless you exit Review Mode............................................................................................................................................................ Enter the left arrow key............................................................................................................................................................................................................ 4 After form name is entered....................................................................................................... 3 Enter: ceqcom2 <CR> ............37 ....................................................................... Purpose Recent Change/Verify will be used to control the CDMA Channel Elements to provide a calculated maximum power to the CTU/HPCTU input................................................. 2 The RC/V process will respond with a request for a form name: Enter Form Name (or ?): Enter ? to display all the available form names........................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................ ...... enter the following command to begin a recent change session: apxrcv ....... if a change to the HPCTU configuration will be made or r to review if no changes will be made If r was used to enter the form in review mode...........................................................................................................

........................ for each transmit path............. Navigation Commands The following commands are useful during recent change sessions: ! Abort form operation..... changes ignored < Go back to previous 'Tab stop' > Go forward to next 'Tab stop' ^ Backup to previous data field ~ Go to end of form * Go to end of form and execute ......... 3............... data must be entered in the field............ 1.......... 2...................38 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....................................Number) of the ceqcom2 form.......... ND OF STEPS E .......... No changes will be required on this form during this procedure unless the cell has high Powered CTUs being altered from the 8 watt to the 16 watt configuration or vice versa.... Type 6 for screen 6 and verify that the lactype (field 75) is as expected for the CTU/HPCTU on each face....................................................Repairs Begin the Recent Change/Verify Session form screens to enter the update modes............................. Default entry ' NULL entry ? List form names or control characters Form fields preceded by * are required fields..... type: ! <CR> ....... Enter the cell number in field 1 (CELL SITE .................................................................... The ceqface form contains antenna face information CDMA Forward Link Power Control parameters............. The ceqcom2 form contains the Amplifier parameters.............. Exit the form...................... 4............................................. 8 ...... Type 13 for screen 13 and verify that the maxpwr (field 162) is as expected..............

.................................................Number) of the ceqface form................................................................................................................................ 3 Enter the cell number in field 1 (CELL SITE ................ Procedure 8-15.... Set Up Attenuator Measurement Signal on the ceqface Screen ..... Sample ceqface Screen The diagram below shows the ceqface screen with the forward link parameters............................... 4 Enter the physical antenna sector or face number in field 2 (Physical Antenna Face) where the meter/attenuator is connected........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ...........................................................................................................................Repairs Set Up Attenuator Measurement Signal Set Up Attenuator Measurement Signal ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. enter: ceqface ............................................39 ...................................................................................... ......................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ......... .................................................................... skip to “Set Up Shelf Calibration Signals”................................................... 1 If attenuator loss is known and has been entered into the power meter as an offset..................... 2 At the apxrc/v form query prompt..................... 1 = Alpha or Omni 1st Carrier .....................................

.............................................. 7 Also record on a note the current values for the Paging Channel Gain (dgu).................. 8 .................................. The screen number will vary depending on the ECP release....................... 11 After these changes.......................... ............................................................................. ................................................................ .......................................... 6 Verify that the Pilot Channel Digital Gain value is 108.................................................................................................................. ......................................... and BCR Attenuation Factor (dB)......................................................................) ......................................................................... 8 Type C for Change............................ press Enter.... 10 Only for the HPCTU in 16 Watt configuration.............................................. ......... Enter 0 (zero) <cr> into the field.............................. ............................................................................ 9 Type C for Change............... then enter the field number of the Sync Channel Gain (dgu).......................... .Set Up Attenuator Measurement Signal Repairs 2 = Beta or Omni 2nd Carrier 3 = Gamma or Omni 3rd 4 = Alpha Growth or Omni 4th 5 = Beta Growth or Omni 5th 6 = Gamma Growth or Omni 6th .............................................................................................. “Form Updated” will appear if the form is properly updated........................... the Sync Channel Gain (dgu)........................................................ they must be restored later........................ check the cluster notebook to ascertain that an optimization change has been made to the pilot’s gain........... then enter the field number of the Pilot Channel Digital Gain...........................Forward Link............ 5 Find the CDMA Power Control Parameters ............. If it is not.............................................................. once again......................................... Enter 0 (zero) <cr> into the field...................................................................... The figure on page 8-39 shows typical ceqface CDMA power control values............................ type C... (For the CTU and HPCTU in the 8 Watt setup.................................................................. then enter the field number of the Paging Channel Gain (dgu)................................ “Forward Link” parameters will be on or around screen 8............................................................ Enter 90 into the field......... leave Pilot at dgu = 108....................................................................................40 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............ 12 Type U to update the ceqface form........................................................

........................................................................................... ................... ......................Set Up Attenuator Measurement Signal Repairs This setup will only be performed for this face to measure the test attenuator......................................................................................................... ND OF STEPS E ............ 13 Return to the craftshell session and perform a Stable Clear by entering the following command: init:cell a:sc <cr> A removal and restoral of the shelf is not adequate to ensure that the apxrcv changes will take effect on the paging channel..................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ..................................................................................................................... Do not repeat these changes to any other face............................................................................................41 ........................................................................................

............. 1 Restore the CCC and BBA.........Repairs Calibrate the Attenuator Offset Calibrate the Attenuator Offset ............ 8 ................ • A 30 dB attenuator is connected between the antenna port and the power sensor............................................................... DO NOT USE THIS procedure if the attenuator is anything other than 30 dB................................ Procedure 8-16................. There is no need to repeat the procedure unless the attenuator is dropped or appears damaged..................42 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .........................................5 dBm........................... turn the fine adjustment pot on the BCR under test down (counterclockwise) until the meter reads 2 dBm................................... Once the true loss of the attenuator has been measured.. Purpose Requirements Record the Attenuator Loss This procedure is for determining the true insertion loss of a 30 dB attenuator using the specified HP 437B and HP 8481H power sensor................... • The translations must have been setup for this procedure per “Set Up Attenuator Measurement Signal”....................................................................................... If the value is above 4.............. ......................... 2 Read the meter..................................................... the power level is too high............................................................. the RF path must be re-calibrated afterwards........... If you have to turn down the BCR faceplate potentiometer while performing this procedure............................. ...................................... Calibrate the Attenuator Offset .......................... At this point........................... the only signal should be: 8 Watt Pilot only at dgu = 108....... BCR att= 6 dB ........................................ The value should be approximately 1 to 4 dBm................................... BCR att = 8 dB 16 Watt Pilot only at dgu = 90............................................................................... tag the attenuator with the value for future use.................................................................................. • No offset has been entered into the meter.................................................................................................................... This procedure requires the following: • The power meter should have been calibrated...................................................

.................43 ..................... ........ turn OFF the BCR on the shelf under test...... for example..................... ........................ 11 Remove the sensor head from the antenna port and re-connect the 30 dB attenuator with the head to the antenna port.................................................... 6 Return the BCR switch to the AUTO position and then restore the BBA: rst:cell a.............. ............................................................................................................................................. at the Minicell....................................................................................................... Use the arrow keys once again to obtain the value calculated in the last step....................... 4 At the Minicell............... 9 Press [OFFSET] on the power meter...............................................................................................e.....Repairs Calibrate the Attenuator Offset ........ Record this value on a tag and attach it to the attenuator............................ ................................. turn OFF the AUTO/OFF switch on BCR on the shelf under test....................................................................................................................................................... then: 32........ 8 Subtract the reading just taken from the initial................................................................ The power meter is now ready for use............... i.....1 dBm and the reading without the attenuator was 32.............. ...........1 dB = 29................................................ ........................................................................................................................................................................................ucl ........................ 5 Remove the sensor head/attenuator from the antenna port........ it should be approximately 30 dB higher than the previous reading...............................................................6dB - 3......................................... 10 Once again........................5 dB The difference is the actual loss of the attenuator. The RF power measurements can now proceed........................................ 3 Record the meter reading.............................. Press [ENTER]..................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ............................................6 dBm............................ Unscrew the attenuator from the head and place the sensor head directly onto the same antenna port................................................................. ............ if the initial reading were 3...................... 7 Take the meter reading.................................................................... without the attenuator.................. bba y......................................................................................................... .................................................

..............................................................................................................Repairs Calibrate the Attenuator Offset The Sensor Head will be permanently damaged if the 30 dB attenuator is not in series with the head while measuring full transmit power........................................ 8 ..............................................................44 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .............................. .............................................................................. ND OF STEPS E .........................................................................................................

......... 1 At the apxrc/v form query prompt......................... If it is not....................................................... 4 Find the CDMA Power Control Parameters ........................ Purpose This procedure outlines the steps to set up shelf calibration signals................ . ......................................................................................................................................... Figure 3 shows typical ceqface CDMA power control values............................................................................................. • Alpha or Omni 1st Carrier • Beta or Omni 2nd Carrier • Gamma or Omni 3rd • Alpha Growth or Omni 4th • Beta Growth or Omni 5th • Gamma Growth or Omni 6th ............................................Repairs Set Up Shelf Calibration Signals Set Up Shelf Calibration Signals ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ Follow the steps below to set up the shelf calibration signals........................................................................................... check the optimization notebook to ascertain that an optimization change has been made to the pilot’s gain............................................................. .................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 .................................. Procedure 8-17............................................................................................................................................Number) of the ceqface form............................... .. 2 Enter the cell number in field 1 (CELL SITE ............. for screen 9).................................................................................................................................... Shelf Calibration Signals ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................45 ......Forward Link (type 9................................ 5 Verify that the Pilot Channel Digital Gain is 108................... 3 Enter the first physical antenna sector or face number in field 2 (Physical Antenna Face).................... enter: ceqface ..............................................................................................................................

...................................... BCR attenuation.................................... Enter 0 (zero) into the field............................................... then enter the field number of the Pilot Channel Digital Gain (dgu).................... press Enter............................. ................. Enter 59 into the field......... then enter the field number of the Paging Channel Gain (dgu)..... depending on the option that was set when configuring the HPCTU..... Pilot................Repairs Set Up Shelf Calibration Signals ................................................ ...... Enter 0 (zero) <cr> into the field............. and BCR Attenuation Factor (dB)........................................................................... ...... 10 Type U to update the ceqface form.. Type C for Change........................ steps 1 through 10)......................................................... ......................................................................................... Enter a value of 2-18 for HPCTU................................ 8 Type C for Change......... 7 Type C for Change........................ and Paging gains are changed.............................. then enter the field number of the BCR attenuation Factor... and paging gains are changed......... press Enter........................... Enter 0 (zero) <cr> into the field for CTU........................................... Type C for Change............. Enter 127 into the field....46 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........ “Form Updated” will appear on the screen........................... 11 Repeat the modifications to the ceqface form for all shelves in the cell which are to be measured and/or calibrated (“Set Up Shelf Calibration Signals”....................................... 1...... 6 Note the current values for the Paging Channel Gain (dgu)......................................................................... once again............... then enter the field number of the Paging Channel Gain (dgu).... then enter the field number of the Sync Channel Gain (dgu)...................... they must be restored later........................................................ 8 ....... 3................... 9 The table below shows the steps to change the Paging Channel Gain If Then CTU & 8 Watt HPCTU To change the channel gain for 8 watt: 16 Watt HPCTU To change the channel gain for 16 watt: 1............................................... After Sync....... 2........ 2................................................... After Sync............................ ........................................ BCR attenuation................ once again..................... Type C for Change...................................... ............. the Sync Channel Gain (dgu).......................................

............................... ......................................................................................................................................Repairs Set Up Shelf Calibration Signals ..... ND OF STEPS E ........ 12 Return to the craftshell session and perform a Stable Clear.....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................47 .............................................................................................. enter the following command: init:cell a:sc <cr> A removal and restoral of the shelf is not adequate to ensure that the apxrcv changes will take effect on the paging channel.................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ...............................................................

............... the default setting.................5 dBm................. Procedure 8-18.................. carefully turn the BCR adjustment pot..............................................................5 dBm is the expected value.................. 6 full turns Counter Clockwise.. The output power is so close to the full power with a Pilot Digital Gain of 108 that changing the setting for this procedure is not warranted..... 2 If calibration is required............................................ slowly turn the BCR pot Clockwise to obtain 38............. turn the potentiometer back (CCW) six full turns and then slowly increase (CW) to the set point........ otherwise proceed to “Remove Meter”..... continue on to step 3. Use the procedure on 8-50 for RF Transmit paths equipped with the HPCTU set up for 16 Watts.............................................. This power value (38................. 3 On the shelf under test............................................................................................. This step is necessary to prevent the BCR from overdriving the CTU..................................................... .................................Calibrate the CTU and HPCTU (8 Watt Setup) Transmit Power Repairs Calibrate the CTU and HPCTU (8 Watt Setup) Transmit Power .............................. Measure average power with the power meter.................................................................................. if you overshoot 38..................48 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..................................................................................................0 dBm)............................. A Pilot Digital Gain of 111 would boost the output two-tenths of a dB (0.................................................... 4 With a Trimpot adjustment tool............................................. 8 ...................................2 dB) to full power (39................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ....................................................85 dBm) on the power meter...............................................................75 to 38...8 dBm) reflects a Pilot Channel Digital Gain of 108.......................................................................................... A reading of 38............................ ...................................... find the BCR’s adjustment potentiometer on the BCR’s faceplate................................................. 1 At the Minicell.... These steps are necessary to prevent overdriving the CTU..........80 more than 0. Be careful not to turn too quickly.. the RF power should be present at the hatchplate (RF Interface Panel)............... ........................ ........................................8 ± 1........................ ...... 5 Using the adjustment tool................................ Calibrate the 8 Watt Transmit Power ..................................................................................80 dBm (range 38....................

........................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................... .............................................................................................................................................................................................................. ..Calibrate the CTU and HPCTU (8 Watt Setup) Transmit Power Repairs ............ 8 Proceed to the procedure on 8-51 to ceremove the meter....................... 6 Wait 15 minutes to ensure stability of the adjustment (only the last digit on the meter may vary)..................................................................................................................... 7 Record the power level measured on the RF Transmit Power Calibration Data Sheet (see Attachment).......................................................................................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ............................................................................................................ END OF STEPS .................49 .................................................

......... A reading of 42......................................................................05 to 42... carefully turn the BCR adjustment pot................................................5 dBm.............. 8 ............................................ Procedure 8-19................................................................................................................................ 5 Using the adjustment tool........................ Be careful not to turn too quickly..................................................................................... if you overshoot 42....................... find the BCR’s adjustment potentiometer (pot) on the BCR’s faceplate........................ ........................................................................... slowly turn the BCR pot Clockwise to obtain 42.......................................1 dBm (range 42..................... ..........Repairs Calibrate HPCTU (16 Watt Setup) Transmit Power Calibrate HPCTU (16 Watt Setup) Transmit Power .......................................... the RF power should be present at the hatchplate (RF Interface Panel)............................................................................................. ............................................ Measure average power with the power meter.............................. END OF STEPS ............................... turn the potentiometer back (CCW) six full turns and then slowly increase (CW) to the set point........................................................................ Calibrate 16 Watt Transmit Power for HPCTU .....................................................................5 dBm is the expected value.................................................................................. continue on to step 3... ........... .15 dBm) on the power meter........................... This step is necessary to prevent the BCR from overdriving the CTU.............................................................................1 more than 0...... ......................................... ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 7 Record the power level measured on the RF Transmit Power Calibration Data Sheet (see “RF Transmit Power Calibration Data Sheet”)......................................................................................................................................1 ± 1................................................ otherwise proceed to “Remove Meter”.................... 2 If calibration is required........ 6 Wait 15 minutes to ensure stability of the adjustment (only the last digit on the meter may vary)... 4 With a Trimpot adjustment tool................ 1 At the Minicell.............................................................. ................. 3 On the shelf under test......................... These steps are necessary to prevent overdriving the CTU.......................... 6 full turns Counter Clockwise.................................................................................50 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................9 Result: RMV:CELL a...................... ............................................................................................... 2 At the cell...................8 24-Gamma 2nd Growth or Omni ....7 22-Beta 2nd Growth or Omni .............. To prevent personal injury and/or damage to cell equipment.............................................................................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 .. ...................ucl <cr> Where: a Minicell number 1 ...................................................... 4 Re-connect the Antenna Foam Jumper Cable to the RF Interface Panel............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. bba b............Repairs Remove Meter Remove Meter ................................................................................ BBA b........... Procedure 8-20......................... never disconnect any RF cable while any BCR is in the TRANSMIT state (ACT LED ON)................. turn off the CDMA transmitter by taking the BBA Out-of-Service........................................................................ Enter: rmv:cell a. 1 After average power measurements have been completed..........................................................................51 ..... turn the BCR AUTO/OFF switch to OFF.................... COMPLETED ...2 6-Gamma or Omni ........................................................................................................................................................................5 12-Gamma 1st Growth or Omni ................. 3 Remove the power meter and attenuator............................ ...................... ..........222 b bba number 2-Alpha or Omni -Carrier 1 4-Beta or Omni ...... .....6 20-Alpha 2nd Growth or Omni ....4 10-Beta 1st Growth or Omni .................................................................................................................................. Purpose This procedure lists the steps to safely detach the power meter from the Minicell...................3 8-Alpha 1st Growth or Omni ...........................................................................

............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 5 Return BCR AUTO/OFF switch to AUTO.......Repairs Remove Meter ........ 8 ......................................................................................................................................... END OF STEPS .................................................................................................................................................52 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .............. ...............................

..........9 Result: RMV:CELL a...................................... Calibrate Additional Shelves ..............................5 12-Gamma 1st Growth or Omni .........222 b bba number 4-Beta or Omni ................................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ....... 1 If additional shelves are to be tested.............. or calibrated.............................. remove the BBA of the next shelf from service.............................................................................................................. END OF STEPS ..... COMPLETED ................. bba b......6 20-Alpha 2nd Growth or Omni .................. Procedure 8-21.........................................2 6-Gamma or Omni ....................................7 22-Beta 2nd Growth or Omni ......................... ...............3 8-Alpha 1st Growth or Omni ..................... 2 Repeat all the steps in 8-48 8 watt setup or 8-50 for 16 watt setup........................ ..............................Repairs Calibrate Additional Shelves Calibrate Additional Shelves ........................................................ BBA b.....................53 ............................................................................................................ whichever is applicable.............................4 10-Beta 1st Growth or Omni .......................................................8 24-Gamma 2nd Growth or Omni .................................. enter: rmv:cell a...........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ucl <cr> a Minicell number 1 .......................................... for the next shelf (face or carrier) to be calibrated or measured...........................................................................................

............................................................................. In particular................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ........ 5 Before the technician leaves the Minicell site........................................ Procedure 8-22............................................................ ...................................... Keep the apxrcv session active until all shelves have been restored to the original ceqface settings....................................Repairs Restore the Original CDMA Power Control Translations Restore the Original CDMA Power Control Translations .......... 3 Return to the craftshell session and perform a Stable Clear by entering the following command: init:cell a:sc <cr> A removal and restoral of the shelf is not adequate to ensure that the apxrcv changes will take effect on the paging channel................ 2 Update the ceqface form saving the parameters listed above............................................. 8 ................................................................................. verify that there are no alarms for the cell................... verify that CB 22 in the primary radio ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... this time updating the form with the original values for the: Sync Channel Gain (dgu) Paging Channel Gain (dgu) BCR Attenuation Factor Also Pilot Channel Gain (dgu)........ ......................................................54 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................... ......................................................... Restore the Original CDMA Power Control Translations .............................................. if changed for the HPCTU (16 Watt setup).......................................................... Purpose This section details restoring the original CDMA power control translations........................................................ ................................................................................................................................................... 4 Confirm the operation of the cell by placing one call on each transmit path of the Minicell....................................................................................... 1 Return to the APX/RCV session and update the ceqface form again......................................................

.... END OF STEPS .........................55 ............................................................................Restore the Original CDMA Power Control Translations Repairs cabinet is ON and check the CTU Shelf fan alarm (SCAN POINT: OFFSET 7. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 .......................................................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................... BIT 2)...................

..... Cell Identification The table below contains the information necessary to uniquely identify the cell site.......................................................................................................56 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .............................................................................. CABINET BB A PRIMARY 2 SECTOR/ CARRIER CTU/ HPCTU CHANNEL POWER # (dBm) 4 6 GROWTH I 8 10 12 GROWTH II 20 22 24 GROWTH III 26 28 30 ...................................................Repairs RF Transmit Power Calibration Data Sheet RF Transmit Power Calibration Data Sheet ............................... Cell Name: Date: Cell Number: Technician: Cell Serial Numbers................................................................................... 8 ....... Primary Cabinet: Growth Cabinet: Power Calibration Table The table below contains fields to store the power calibration data......................................................................................................................................................

. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ........................................................................................ .....................................................................................RF Transmit Power Calibration Data Sheet Repairs Heat Exchanger Repairs Overview Objectives Heat exchanger maintenance is covered in this section along with documentation from the original equipment manufacturer......................................57 ...........................................

. during cold ambient temperatures....... • Provide alarms for fan failures................... which operates from a 26 VDC source....... a heater element... The microcontroller..... Description The heat exchangers on the Primary and Growth Frames are of the airto-air type that provide thermal environmental control for these electronic equipment cabinets..... At ambient temperature of 50° F............................................ Alarm Conditions Microcontroller Functions Normal Heat Exchanger Operation These heat exchangers will report an alarm condition under the following conditions: • Loss of 24 VDC power to heat exchanger • Cabinet internal air temperature below 0° C......................... cabinet high and low temperatures conditions both on the heat exchangers and to the Alarm Facilities Interface.58 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........................... • Cabinet internal air temperature above 65° C............................................... provides the logic to perform the following: • Vary the speed of the internal and ambient fans to maintain the internal cabinet temperature between 0° to 65° C. It is normal for the ambient fan to cycle on and off above 50° F................................. These heat exchangers limit and monitor cabinet internal temperatures from 0° to 65° C.............................. ............................... 8 ............. The internal fan will run continuously a low speed and will ramp up in speed as cooling demand increases......... The heat exchangers consist of an ambient fan....................... or less the ambient fan may not need to run..................................... internal fan............ • Control of the heater element in maintaining the internal cabinet temperature above 0° C............ It is normal for the cabinet surfaces to feel very warm when touched in high ambient temperatures...... ambient.................................... heater failures............................ microcontroller.................Repairs Heat Exchanger Maintenance Heat Exchanger Maintenance ...................................... and a sheet metal housing...........

............................................................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 .................... Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm 0: (Internal Fan) ......................................... ............................... ................................................ 1 Perform heat exchanger test run.................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. 2 Perform heat exchanger test run........................................................................................... ................................................................. ................................................................................................... 2 Check fan fuse s1 on controller card inside heat exchanger.................................................................................................. Heat Exchanger Blower Alarm 1: (Ambient Fan) ............................................................................................................................Repairs Heat Exchanger ROP Alarm Corrective Actions Heat Exchanger ROP Alarm Corrective Actions ...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... .................................... 4 Check 26 V DC to fan at connector block on control card (see wiring diagram on heat exchanger)...................................................................... 6 Change control card if new fan does not correct problem................................................59 . Procedure 8-24..................................................... ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................ ..................................................................... Result The ambient fan is replaced.......................................... Purpose This procedure lists the steps to perform the heat exchanger rop alarm corrective actions Procedure 8-23........... END OF STEPS ....................................... ................................................ .......................... 3 Check fan fuse s2 on controller card inside heat exchanger (primary only)........................... 1 Check heat exchanger ambient intake and exhaust vents for obstructions.... 5 Replace with new ambient fan.....................................................................................................................................

................................................................................................ END OF STEPS ......................................................... 5 Change control card if new fan does not correct problem...............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................60 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........ 3 Check 26 V DC to fan at connector block on control card (see wiring diagram on heat exchanger) .................................. 8 ........................................................................................ ...Heat Exchanger ROP Alarm Corrective Actions Repairs ................................................................................... 4 Replace with new internal fan........................................................................ ....................................................................................................................................................

........................................................ power will be indicated by a LED alarm located on the heat exchanger panel................................................. 2 Perform heat exchanger test run... In addition............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3 Check for heater alarm on heat exchanger panel (for low temp alarm)................................... ................................................................................................................. Remove obstruction and clean vent screen........................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ...................................................... However........................................................................................................................... Heater Power Loss There are no alarms sent to the Alarm Facilities Interface for heater element failure or loss of 220 VAC................................................................................................................ ..........................................61 ............................ 1 Check heat exchanger ambient intake and exhaust vents for bug............................................................................................. 7 Change controller card if new heater element does not correct problem. ............................................................................. END OF STEPS ................... Heat Exchanger Hi/Low Temp Alarm ....... a heater element failure or loss of 220 VAC................................................................................................. ...................................................................................... Procedure 8-25............................ This will indicate a possible heater element failure or loss of 220 VAC............................................................................................. ................................ .......... 5 Check 220 AC power connector is plugged into heat exchanger (for low temp alarm)...................... ...................................... This procedure lists the steps to correct Minicell cabinet troubles when internal temperature is below 0× or above 65× c.................................................................................................. 4 Check 220 AC breaker for heater power (for low temp alarm)................................................................................ a Temperature alarm will be indicated if the cabinets internal air temperature falls below 0° C....................................................................................................................................................... power..................................................... dust or obstructions if high temp is suspected........................................... ................................................................................ 6 Replace heater element (for low temp alarm)............................................................................Repairs Heat Exchanger Hi/Low Temp Alarm Heat Exchanger Hi/Low Temp Alarm .................................................................................

..................................... Monthly Heat Exchanger Maintenance ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Repairs Weekly and Monthly Heat Exchanger Maintenance Weekly and Monthly Heat Exchanger Maintenance ................................................... Purpose This procedure lists the weekly and monthly maintenance procedures for the heat exchanger.............................................................................................................. 1 Perform heat exchanger test run END OF STEPS ........................................................... Procedure 8-26.......................................................................... ................................................................ ND OF STEPS E ............ ....................................................................... Weekly Heat Exchanger Maintenance ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................62 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ......................................................... .............................................................................. The intake screens may be cleaned with a brush and detergent cleaner....................... Procedure 8-27................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 1 Check heat exchanger ambient intake and exhaust vents for Obstructions.................... heavy insect or dust accumulations..........

................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ........... 888 INTERNAL FAN GREEN STATUS LIGHT HIGH TEMP AMBIENT FAN HEATER LOW TEMP UP ARROW DOWN ARROW Procedure 8-28.......................Repairs Yearly Heat Exchanger Maintenance Yearly Heat Exchanger Maintenance ... ..................................................................... ............................................................ Heat Exchanger Damage Cell components will short out if the liquid used in the cleaning come in contact with live electrical components................................................................................. 1 The cleaner should be sprayed with a low pressure sprayer into the top exhaust vent following the manufacturers instructions.......................................63 .............................. The heat exchanger should be powered down when performing this cleaning procedure................................................................................................. Control Panel Diagram The diagram below shows the control buttons and indicator lights of the heat exchanger control panel.................. Flush the Heat Exchanger Core ................. Heat Exchanger Damage The heat exchanger becomes blocked causing temperature control problems................. The heat exchanger core should be flushed clean with a non acid based air conditioning coil cleaner............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. This core cleaning process should be more frequent in dusty or areas with high air pollution levels........................................................................................................

.............................. ............................................. Test Run of Growth Frame Heat Exchanger .............................................................................. no fan alarm lights will remain illuminated during the test run.............. How to Perform Test Run of Primary Heat Exchanger: .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 1 Push both arrow buttons on display panel at the same time and hold until a 2................................. END OF STEPS .... ............................................................................. ...................................................................... appears on display then let go............................ Procedure 8-30........................................................................... In addition...................................................................................... Procedure 8-29........................................................................................................................................................................................................... Result: A 000 will display.......................................................... However.................................. 2 Thoroughly flush out with clean water............... the green OK status light will not illuminate during the test run..................... the alarm lights will all cycle on and off and the temp alarm indicator will remain illuminated during the test run.. ................................................................ 2 Wait 1 minute for fans to stop..............................Repairs Yearly Heat Exchanger Maintenance ................ END OF STEPS ..................... set to 5) of a full speed blower test run.................................................................... 2 It is also recommended to check for air flow on ambient side top vent to verify the bottom ambient fan is running during the test run........ it will illuminate after the 5 minute test run if the Heat Exchanger is functioning properly....................................................................................... This procedure outlines how to perform a test run of Growth Frame heat exchanger: ...................................... This will set the time duration (in minutes........................................................................................................................................ 1 Power-down growth heat exchanger by turning off circuit breaker number 12 and 13................................................. When the test run starts...................................................... 8 .... then push-up arrow button.................................................................................................................................................................................................... If the internal and ambient fans are functioning properly.............................................64 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .........................................................

.......................................... END OF STEPS .................................................................. 7 If no Alarm Panel status lights illuminate....................................................................... ................... ................................................................................. 4 Heat exchanger will perform a self test of fans and control card and run both internal and ambient fans for 60 seconds............................................................ 5 Check for air flow on ambient side top vent to verify the bottom ambient fan is running during this 60 second full speed test run......................................... ................................................................................ 6 Monitor the alarm panel status lights for 2 minutes................................................................................................................. 3 Power-up Growth heat exchanger by turning on circuit breaker number 12 and 13............................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ............................................................................................Repairs Yearly Heat Exchanger Maintenance ......................................... ..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................65 ........................................ ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... the heat exchanger is functioning properly...............

............................. ..................... ............................................................. Disconnect the J7 alarm connector............................... 4........ 2.66 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .... ......................................................................................... Procedure 8-31. Control Card Replacement .... Unfasten the four captive screws securing the control card to the heat exchanger...................................................................................................... 5............................................................................................................. Disconnect the J4 temperature sensor connector.......................................................... ..... 3.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................... 2 Unfasten the three captive screws and remove the fan shroud from the heat exchanger........................................................................................................ Purpose This procedure covers the replacement and testing of the heat exchanger control card................................................................................. Disconnect the 26 VDC power connector J2 from the control card........................................................ 4 Remove the card in this order: 1...................................................................... 3 Locate the control circuit card on the top right side of the heat exchanger......................... 8 ................... 1 Remove the top fan cover on the heat exchanger by removing all 14 pan head screws securing the cover............................................................... WARNING High voltage Danger of electrical shock and/or damage to the components....... Turn off the 220 VAC heater circuit breaker on PDA and turn off the 26 VDC breaker for the heat exchanger...........Repairs Replace the Control Card for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger Replace the Control Card for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger ..... Disconnect both the fan connectors J5 internal and J6 ambient fans from the control card.....................

............................ 6 Install the new control card in the heat exchanger with captive screws........................................................67 .................... 12 Connect the 26 VDC power connector on the heat exchanger.......................................................................................................................................................................................... 2.......................................................................................................................................................................................................... Connect the J4 temperature sensor connector................................... ... 13 Turn on the 220 VAC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel............................................................................................................ ................. Connect 26 VDC power connector J3 on the control card...................................................................................................................... Connect the J7 alarm connector....... END OF STEPS ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 10 Install the remaining 12 pan head screws.................................................... The heat exchanger should start-up with both fans at full speed............ 7 Connect the cables: 1.......................................................................... ............................................. . .................................................................................................................................................................................................................Repairs Replace the Control Card for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger ........ the following will occur: 1............................. 9 Put the top fan cover on the heat exchanger and install the two front cover screws connecting the cover to the fan shroud first........................................................................................................................................................................................ 5 Disconnect the 220 VAC power spade leads one at a time transferring them to the corresponding lug of the new control card heater relays..................................................................................................................... ................. 14 Turn on the 26 VDC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel.......................................................................................................... ................................. ............ .......................................... 8 Re-install the fan shroud assembly and secure the three captive screws.................................... ............................................... 11 Connect the 220 VAC power connector on the heat exchanger............................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ............................................................ Result If the installation is correct.............. 3................

............ The ambient fan will turn off and the internal fan will reduce and adjust to half speed.................................Replace the Control Card for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger Repairs 2..................................................................................................................................... 3......... Wait 5 minutes and there should be no alarm LEDs illuminated......... 8 .........................68 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...................... ..............

...............69 ...................................................................................... 6 Install the new heater cartridge in the air grill securing it with the four screws.............................................................. 7 Re-install the cable clamp securing the cable to the air grill.................................................................................................................................................................................................. Procedure 8-32......................... ......................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................. ................................................................. 4 Remove the four screws attaching the heater cartridge to the air grill........................................................................... 2 Unplug the heater cartridge from the cable harness.......................................... 5 Remove the heater cartridge from the air grill...................................................................................... .................................... WARNING High voltage Danger of electrical shock and/or damage to the components.................... 1 Remove the air grill on the heat exchanger by removing all 6 pan head screws securing the air grill..................................................................................................................... .................................................... Turn off the 220 VAC heater circuit breaker on PDA and turn off the 26 VDC breaker for the heat exchanger................................................ ................................................... Tighten the screws securely....................................................................... 3 Remove the cable clamp securing the cable to the air grill..............................................................................................Repairs Replace the Heater Cartridge for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger Replace the Heater Cartridge for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger ................... Heater Cartridge Replacement ............................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 .......................................................................................................................................... Purpose This procedure covers the replacement and testing of the heat exchanger control card........................ .............................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................................................................................

............... 10 Connect the 220 VAC power connector to the heat exchanger............................ 3.........70 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........................................................................................ 11 Connect the 26 VAC power connector to the heat exchanger............................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................... Result If the installation is correct....... .................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 12 Turn on the 220 VAC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel........................................................................ 9 Re-install the air grill and secure with the pan head screws....................... .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 Re-connect the heater cartridge cable to the mating harness connector...................................................... Wait 5 minutes and there should be no alarm LEDs illuminated............................... the following will occur: 1........................................................................................... 2..................................... The ambient fan will turn off and the internal fan will reduce and adjust to half speed........................ ............................................. ................................................................................................. 8 ..........................................................................Repairs Replace the Heater Cartridge for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger ........................... The heat exchanger should start-up with both fans at full speed........... 13 Turn on the 26 VDC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel END OF STEPS ..............................................................

........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2 Unfasten the four pan head screws connecting the fan bracket to the heat exchanger...................................... 6 Remove the fan from the fan bracket assembly................................................................................................ ................................. 4 Remove the cable clamp on the back of the fan/bracket assembly.................................................................................................................................................................................... Ambient Fan Replacement ................................................................................................................................................................................................ ................................. Remove the fan/bracket assembly from the heat exchanger........................................................................................................................................ Tighten the screws securely... 7 Attach the new fan to the fan bracket assembly securing it with the four pan head screws.................................................................................................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ...................................................................... Turn off the 220 VAC heater circuit breaker on PDA and turn off the 26 VDC breaker for the heat exchanger........................................................................ Purpose This procedure covers the replacement and testing of the heat exchanger control card....................................................................................71 .............................................................................. Procedure 8-33.................. ..................................................................................... 5 Remove the four screws attaching the fan to the fan bracket.......................................... 3 Unplug the weather tight fan connector from the heat exchanger.................. 1 Remove the bottom fan cover on the heat exchanger by removing all 19 pan head screws securing the cover plate........................................................................................ ..................... ............... .................................. WARNING High voltage Danger of electrical shock and/or damage to the components... ................................. ...........................................................................................................................Repairs Replace the Ambient Fan for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger Replace the Ambient Fan for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger ...........................

.................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 8 ................................................... Fully and evenly tighten all the pan head screws........................................... ............................................................................ ....................................................................................... Result If the installation.......................... 15 Turn on the 220 VAC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel............................. 2..................................................... 11 Spin the fan slowly by hand checking for interference and adjusting the fan bracket if necessary.... END OF STEPS .................................................................................................................................................................................................... ........................................... 14 Connect the 26 VAC power connector to the heat exchanger................. 16 Turn on the 26 VDC heater circuit breaker on the breaker panel.............................................................................................................................................72 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .......................................... .......................... Wait 5 minutes and there should be no alarm LEDs illuminated................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ................................................................................. The ambient fan will turn off and the internal fan will reduce and adjust to half speed......................................................... .............. 13 Connect the 220 VAC power connector to the heat exchanger................................................................Repairs Replace the Ambient Fan for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger ....... 9 Connect the fan cable connector back to the mating weather tight connector inside the fan box of the heat exchanger........................................................................ 10 Carefully re-install the new fan and bracket assembly...... is correct the following will occur: 1..................... ... 12 Install the bottom fan cover and secure it with all 19 pan head screws.......... The heat exchanger should start-up with both fans at full speed........................................................................................................................................................................................ ...................... 8 Re-install the cable clamp on the back of the fan bracket assembly.................. 3.....................................................................

...........................................73 .......................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ....................... evident when the cells cannot accept hand-offs from other cells.......... nor can the island cell hand-off to its neighbors........................................... Refer to the fax flashes and information bulletins to learn the latest information on this problem and procedures to correct it.............................. ................Replace the Ambient Fan for Growth Frame Heat Exchanger Repairs Island Cell Overview Objectives Correcting Island Mode Cells Some cell sites have experienced “island mode” situations....................................

........................................................................................................................................................0.............................. 8 ...... Once a potential island cell has been identified........................................ ................................. Overview Description A new Service Measurement Report Generator (SMRG) script has been developed to help identify island cells..................Repairs Island Mode CDMA Cell Script Island Mode CDMA Cell Script ........................74 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....................0 and 10..................................................................................................... and has been tested on both ECP 9.......... a test drive of the cell is still necessary to confirm the problem.................. Questions Please refer questions to the CTSO Methods and Procedures Organization. This script will work with both PCS-CDMA and CDMA-850 systems... The script compares secondary cell traffic channel usage to total traffic channel element usage to identify cells which may be in an island cell condition..........................................................

.......................... ..................... As each additional CCC is NVM'd............... By having the BBAs NVM'd and in service prior to NVMing the CCCs. 3...... With this change the CDMA downtime is reduced by (N-1) * (CCUOFC download time per CCC) where N is the number of CCCs............75 ... Call Processing is allowed during the download of CDMA hardware................................ additional CDMA radios become available for service.............................. 2....................... NVMing the BBAs before the CCCs....Repairs Island Mode CDMA Cell Script NVM Procedures Overview Purpose NVM Procedures These procedures are designed to minimize the amount of time that CDMA service is unavailable........................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 .............. For a 3 sector/1 carrier Series II cell with 6 CCCs this amounts to at least 25 minutes......... The total time it takes to NVM the entire cell is unchanged by these procedures. Previous procedures only allowed CP during download on AMPS/CDMA systems.... CDMA service is restored on a partial basis as soon as the first CCC is fully NVM'd (assuming the interconnection of shelves)................................. These procedures differ from previously recommended procedures in three primary ways: 1.. A Stable Clear of the cell at the end of the NVM procedure is not needed......

.........................................................UCL ................................................................................................................... Download CSCs ........................... The total time it takes to Non-Volitale Memory (NVM) the entire cell is unchanged by these procedures................................................ 8 ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 1 Remove CSC 0: RMV:CELL #........................................................ Purpose These procedures are designed to minimize the amount of time that CDMA service is unavailable..................................................CSC 0.....................................................................................RTDIAG ................................................................. ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 1 Use the Cell2 Form to change the generic................................................................ Procedure 8-35................................................... .......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3 Inhibit functional tests: INH:CELL #..... FT: ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................FT {ANT|OC|TP|PL} END OF STEPS ................................................AUD NVMVER ........................... RTDIAG...............................................................................76 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................ Change Generic: .. Inhibit Audits........................................................................ 1 Inhibit NVM version audit: INH:CELL #................................................................................................................................... 2 Inhibit routine diagnostics: INH:CELL #..........................................................................................................Repairs CDMA Cell Downloading Procedures CDMA Cell Downloading Procedures ............................................................................................................................GENERIC END OF STEPS ........... 2 Verify generic: OP:CELL.................................................................................................... .................................................... Procedure 8-34......................................................................................................... ....... Procedure 8-36...........................................................................................................................................

......SW ............................................................................................................................ 2 Download CSC 0 CPU: DNLD:CELL #..............................................CPI ....................................................CP ..................................................................................................................................................................... ................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ...............................CSC 1:STBY END OF STEPS .....................CSC 1.........CPI ...............................................................................................................................................................77 .................................................................................................... 1 Remove all the BBAs: RMV:CELL #................................................................................... Remove CDMA Hardware ............. 8 Download CSC 1 CPI: DNLD:CELL #.................................................................. 3 Download CSC 0 CPI: DNLD:CELL #........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................UCL(skip this step if BBAs do not need to be NVM'd) ..........................................................CPU ..........................CSC 1.............................................................................................................................................Repairs CDMA Cell Downloading Procedures .... 9 Restore CSC 1 to standby: RST:CELL #................................................................... 5 Boot the cell: INIT:CELL #:BOOT....................................................CPU .............................................................................................................................CSC 0................................................................................................................................................CSC 0........ 7 Download CSC 1 CPU: DNLD:CELL #.................. Procedure 8-37..............................................................................................................................CSC 0.................................................................................................................. 6 Verify CSC 0 version: OP:CELL #.........BBA #..........................UCL:VERSION .......... 4 Inhibit call processing INH:CELL #..................................................................

........................ .........................................................................................................................................UCL END OF STEPS ..................................................................................... 3 Remove the CRTU: RMV:CELL #..........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................78 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..............................................................................................................................................................................CAT # (Downloaded SCTs should restore to standby) ................................UCL ........................................................ 1 Allow Call Processing: ALW:CELL #........................................................................................CAT #.......UCL (A SCT board switch will occur) ................................................ Procedure 8-39....................... 1 Remove the standby SCTs: RMV:CELL #. 3 Remove the active SCTs: RMV:CELL #........................................... ..................... Skip this procedure entirely if SCTs do not need to be NVM'd.............................................................................................................CRTU.................................................................UCL ........................................................................................ ......... Procedure 8-38..CP ND OF STEPS E .................. 4 Download the SCTs removed: DNLD:CELL #...................... 8 .......................................................................................................................................................... Allow Call Processing ..........................................CAT # (Downloaded SCTs should restore to standby) END OF STEPS ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................Repairs CDMA Cell Downloading Procedures ................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ 2 Remove all the CCCs: RMV:CELL #...............................................................................................................................................................CAT #........................................... 2 Download the SCTs removed: DNLD:CELL #.........................................CCC #................................. Download SCTs ...................

........ 1 Download all BBAs: DNLD:CELL #.........................................................................................RTDIAG .................................................................................................................................................................. 4 Verify Cell status: OP:CELL # END OF STEPS ............................................... Procedure 8-41.............................................................................................................AUD NVMVER .........................................................................................................CCC ALLCDMA............................................................................................................ 4 Download CRTU: DNLD:CELL #................................................................................................................................ 1 The NVM version audits: ALW:CELL #................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 8 ................................................. .................................................................BBA ALLCDMA(skip this step if BBAs do not need to be NVM'd) .................... 2 Download all CCCs ...........................................................................................FT {ANT|OC|TP|PL} ................................................................................ 3 Download all CCCs ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................................................... Download CDMA Hardware ..................................................... 3 Functional tests: ALW:CELL #.......................................................................................................79 .........................................................................................................................Repairs CDMA Cell Downloading Procedures Procedure 8-40.................................................................................. ................................................................................Part 2: DNLD:CELL #......................................................................................................... RTDIAG...........CCUOFC ................................................................. Allow Audits.................................................................................................................................................................. FT .................CRTU END OF STEPS ... 2 Routine diagnostics: ALW:CELL #........................Part 1: DNLD:CELL #................................................CCC ALLCDMA..................CCCOFC .....................................................

.........................CDMA Cell Downloading Procedures Repairs ................................................................................80 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .............................. 8 ......................................................................................................................

.....9-13 .......................... and to apply these principles to the specific examples of ECU and HPCTU upgrades...........• ECU Upgrade -...................• Preliminary Preparation Procedures • Example of Configuration Change • Baselining a Minicell ........................- 9-10 ...• Installing the HPCTU ............9-16 Example of Upgrade: CTU To HPCTU • Preliminary Procedures ...Removing a CCC from Service ............... Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell • Outline of Upgrade Procedures ....9 Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Overview Purpose Contents This unit is designed to enable you to review the general principles of PCS CDMA Minicell upgrades.................9-11 .........................9-15 .........9-25 Range Extension Offer 9-26 • Range Extension Offer (REO) Overview ......................................9-22 ....9-14 .......................................9-9 Upgrade TCU to ECU • Example of Upgrade: TCU to ECU -..............- 9-19 ....- - - - - - - - - - - - - - 9-3 9-4 9-5 9-6 9-7 Programming the CRTU 9-8 • Items Needed to Program the CRTU .......9-27 .......• NVMing the CCC ............................• Testing the Minicell ..1 .....• ECU Upgrade -......................Updating the Minicell Translations ..........9-20 ............................Installation Procedure • Enabling Channel Pooling .. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ......

Transmit Power Calibration Procedure ...........Identifying Faults in the MAU ............Alarm Cable Connections Inside the Primary Cabinet Bias T Description ...................................MAU Description .......................Preparing an MAU for Mounting .......................Component Replacement and Repair Preparations Cable/MAU Connector Re-sealing .....Replacing a Failed MAU ........TTLNA Alarm and Call Processing Tests ............................2 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................... 9 .....TTLNA Physical Installation .................PDU Description .......................................................Required Material and Information .................Cable Routing ........- - - - - 9-28 9-30 9-31 9-32 9-33 9-34 9-35 9-37 9-41 9-42 9-43 9-45 9-46 9-47 9-49 9-50 9-51 9-52 9-54 9-56 9-60 ....Preliminary Procedures ....................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Description ......................Close Up the Minicell ....................Rho and FER Testing the TTLNA .............PDU Alarm Cable Routing Into Primary Cabinet ..........................................................Minicell Cleanup and Reboot .....................Replacing a Failed PDU ........................................

................. .........................g..................................................................................................... filter upgrades)....................................................................................... ECU or HPCTU)........................ Purpose How to Upgrade? PCS CDMA System Components are Involved in an Upgrade Upgrades are required to implement new software releases (e..................... or new services/features made possible by new hardware design (e.......... cell generic release 10).........g.......g................................ Upgrades are made according to specified procedures which are designed to keep impact on service to a minimum.............................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell OverviewIntroduction to PCS CDMA Minicell Upgrades ..............................3 ................................................ Upgrades may involve only the Minicell (e..................................... Procedures that cannot be carried out without taking a Minicell out-of-service will usually be done at night.... but most often will require changes at both the PCSC (translations) and at the Minicell site... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 .....................................

............. 2 Baselining the cell (i................................................................... For instance.............................................. it requires a thorough understanding of the internal workings of the Minicell and of the purpose of each procedure to keep the upgrading time to a minimum................... ..................................................... Even though its highly procedural........... 1 Preliminary preparation ..... 4 Testing that the upgrade is effective and that the cell is operating properly .......... the results of which would require translation changes at the PCSC...... to record the new operating parameters The Upgrading Team Some of the tasks performed during upgrades may have system-wide implications................................................................................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Outline of Upgrade Procedures Outline of Upgrade Procedures ............................... upgrades should be undertaken and performed as a team effort.4 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....... 3 Performing the upgrade ...................................... upgrading from TCU to ECU may require Packet Pipe re-engineering.......... Upgrade procedures should always involve the following sequence of tasks: ....................................... such as RF Engineering............................................................................................................................................. in addition to the physical hardware change at the Minicell site...............................................................e...................................................................................................... A typical team will be made up of PCSC and Minicell technicians.... Consequently.......................................................................................................................................... 9 ..... recording the state of the cell and its operating parameters) before the upgrade ............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... but it may need to include other specialties.......................... Overview Upgrade Procedure Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell can be an involved undertaking......................................................................................................................................................................................... 5 Baselining the Minicell after the upgrade..

............................................. In addition............... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 .........Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Preliminary Preparation Procedures Preliminary Preparation Procedures ..... whenever possible............. Hardware Preliminary procedures also involve ensuring that all hardware configurations have been worked out for the upgrade................................ an ECU will not work on ECP release 9..............0... ..................... Software Preliminary procedures will involve verifying that the proper software version for the upgrade has been installed at the PCSC and the Minicell............................................... Soaking period is usually set for one week.............................................................5 ....... For instance............................................................................................................ and that all upgrade components (circuit packs) and required tools and equipment are available................................. time has to be allowed to check that the cell is operating under the new release prior to the upgrade (a process known as “soaking the cell”)................................................................................................. Soaking a Minicell The term describes the process of running frequent diagnostics on a Minicell that has been downloaded with a new release to ensure that all its components have been properly updated to that release.......

.............................. 6.Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Example of Configuration Change Example of Configuration Change .............. such as when upgrading from a CTU to an HPCTU....... 5..... …………………......................……………............................... and gamma) must be associated with a series of DS0 channels on the pptm RC/V screen to define a packet pipe.. An example of a logical change is the reassignment of packet pipes................…………… 5) 56 DS1 Board Number... …………………..................…………….................. 6) 0 Screen 1 of 1 INFORMATION (pptm) System 7)DS0 Channels: FIELDS 1..……………........6 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....……………….............................. 2...... 12) 2 DS1 Board Number.........................................…………… 5) 56 DCS-E Switching Module...................... 12) 2 CL3805 L9V7 0 ..... AUTOPLEX Cellular Screen 1 of 1 System ALPHA BETA DL1 BETA GAMMA PACKET PIPE TRUNK GROUP MEMBER INFORMATION (pptm) Alpha Face Associated DSO Channels Beta Face Associated DSO Channels CDMA Switch Identification......................………….............................................…………..………………....... …………………................. 12) 2 CCC Board Number (Trunk Member Number)…*3) 4 Trunk Status..... *1) 1 Trunk Group Number.. 9 ..............…………… 5) 56 Cellular PACKET PIPE TRUNK GROUP MEMBER DS1 Board Number....... 6) 0 7)DS0 Channels: FIELDS 1.......... and the antenna faces............................ 6) 0 Gamma Face Associated DSO Channels 7)DS0 Channels: AUTOPLEX Cellular GROUP MEMBER INFORMATION FIELDS 1...... *2) 590 DCS-E Switching Module................................... 2.............. *1) 1 Trunk Group Number.............. 4) e Packet Pipe Data Rate (Kbps)............................... Example of physical change may be output power......... Logical Changes Logical changes involve changes such as the reassignment of communication channels...... 5......... RC/V Fields Diagram DSO DSO 11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 23 24 24 The diagram below depicts the relationship between the RC/V screens.............................. *2) 590 [3] 11[7] 16 CCC Board Number (Trunk Member Number)…*3) 6 [4] 12[8] 17 Trunk Status................... Physical Change Configuration changes that are reflected in translation may involve physical or logical changes to the Minicell configuration.......................... 4) e AUTOPLEX Packet Pipe Data Rate (Kbps)......................................... *1) 1 [2] 10[6] 15 Trunk Group Number...................................................................... 7 and 12 are site specific [1] 9 [5] 14 CDMA Switch Identification......... beta....PACKET 6.... Each antenna face (alpha...........………………. 6......................... the packet pipe......…………....... 7 and PIPE 12 areTRUNK site specific [1] 1 [5] 5 Screen 1 of 1 (pptm) [2] 2 [6] 6 System [3] 3 [7] 7 [4] 4 [8] 8 CDMA Switch Identification............ Upgrade procedures will specify the order in which these changes have to be performed... 7 and 12 are site specific [1] 18[5] [2] 19[6] [3] 20[7] [4] 21[8] DL0 * In ECP 13 the number of DS0 Channels is increased to 16 DCS-E Switching Module.............. *2) 590 CCC Board Number (Trunk Member Number)…*3) 2 Trunk Status... 4) e Packet Pipe Data Rate (Kbps)............... 5........ 2.

................................................. as shown in the table below.. by looking at the SDPs that reflect the configuration of the cell................. Packet Pipe Trunks................. ... Overview Components Involved The process of baselining is designed to certify that the Minicell is operating as intended......................................... replace the defective hardware and perform manually requested diagnostics on the unit........... SDP Page Number Title SDP 2121 System Equipage Summary SDP 2131 Minicell Equipment Status SDP 2132 Minicell Software Status SDP 2134 Minicell DS-1 Status SDP 2138 Minicell Site CDMA Equipage Status SDP 2139 Minicell Site CCC CCU Status Routine Diagnostics and Manual Diagnostics Routine diagnostics.......... BBAs................................................ may detect defective hardware. and CRTUm • Functional Tests on overhead channels and traffic paths Once these tests are completed...... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ..........................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Baselining a Minicell Baselining a Minicell ..... which are scheduled to be automatically performed after midnight............................ If diagnostic failures are reported........ CCCs........................................ CSCs........................................................................................ Baselining involves: • Routine diagnostics • Manual diagnostics on DLs..................................... SCTs....7 ............. it may be of value to verify the integrity of the cell.... especially when the update involves changes to the cell generic.................................................................

....................................................................................................................................... This information pertains to all cellular and PCS Autoplex customers with CDMA Growth Frames or Minicells with CRTU (CDMA Radio Test Unit) equipment.......... 9 ......................................................... ..............................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Baselining a Minicell Programming the CRTU Overview Purpose The ability to change CRTUm phone numbers is available with the Qualcomm (QC) phones......8 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................

..................... 33MHz............. RTO target is November 20............................. minimum configuration 386...... DOS5......................... customer provided) • Programming Adaptor (order via Lucent) The information on availability and ordering is in the following list: • Availability is by early November.. 8MB RAM...................... Description Required Equipment How to Order Qualcomm Ordering Information The Programming Adaptor allows service providers to perform NAMing (Number Assignement Module) of the Qualcomm (QC) mobile which resides within the CRTUm..........9 ..................................................................... 1997 • Series II CDMA GF: Comcode 407805423 • PCS or Cellular CDMA Minicells: ZCCMC-Adaptor (108167610) • List price is $200 Qualcomm ordering information is in the following list: • Call 1-800-349-4474 and identify your account • Specify appropriate version • PST-I supports service programming .................................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Items Needed to Program the CRTU Items Needed to Program the CRTU ........ PST software must be purchased by the customer directly from Qualcomm) • Commercial cable (DB9-RS-232 shielded type................................. An example of NAMing might be to make area code updates................... RS-232 serial port (customer provided) • PST software (v5........................... • PC or laptop..........................................................................................................................0 or later..................0......... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 . The Programming Adaptor provides the interface between the QC PST software and the CRTUm......................................... The following equipment is required to run the software........ without Lucent installation personnel......

..... Discussion of the “PCSC” side of the upgrade................. we will assume that all the necessary preliminary and PCSC related work has been performed........................................... Because the ECU can support ten CEs instead of the two CEs available with a TCU................................................................................... is an RF Engineering topic................................................................ and therefore outside the scope of this document.... Purpose The upgrade from TCU to ECU is a complex operation that may require significant service-affecting reconfigurations......... especially the discussion about packet pipe re-engineering..................... ......Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Items Needed to Program the CRTU Upgrade TCU to ECU Overview ............................................................. and limit the example to Minicell-related processes......................................10 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .. there may be a need to reconfigure the packet pipes that backhaul traffic back to the PCSC............................................................ In the following....................................................................... 9 ...............................

............................................................. .........Example of Upgrade: TCU to ECU -........ Procedure 9-1.... 1 Enable channel pooling.. ........................... software updates...................................................... See page 9-13 for more information...................................... baselining) must be performed in advance of the actual upgrade......................Installation Procedure Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Example of Upgrade: TCU to ECU -....Installation Procedure ........................................................................................... ............................... 8 Restore and diagnose each ECU.........................................................................................................................................................................11 ...... ............. 5 Update....................................... See page 9-15 for more information.... 5ESS views and Access Manager forms updated.... ............................................ 3 Remove from service the CCC controlling the TCUs to be replaced............................... Minicell NVM............................................................................................................................................................................................................................. ........................................ to avoid unnecessary automatic trigger of alarms at the PCSC.... 2 Inhibit Minicell diagnostics and tests.......................................................................................................................................................... The sequence of tasks is as follows: .............................................................................................. See page 916 for more information................ See page 9-14 for more information........................................ .................................. one sector at a time.............................................. and verify that the download is valid................... Upgrade TCU to ECU ...................................................................... Purpose The preliminary procedures (packet pipe re-engineering............................................... or ask someone at the switch to update.................................................................. See page 9-14 for more information................. 7 Insert the replacement ECUs................................................................................................................. 6 Re-NVM the CCCs..... The upgrade from TCU to ECU can be performed without loss of service if the channel pooling feature is enabled............................................................................ .............................................................................................................................................................. 4 Physically remove the TCUs from the shelf and take them out of the Minicell..................... the appropriate RC/V forms for the TCUs to be replaced............................................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ..............................................................................................................................................................................

.................................................................................... Result Upon completion of these broad steps........................................................................................................................ 10 Allow diagnostics and tests..................................Example of Upgrade: TCU to ECU -............. the cell will be operational with ECUs..... 9 ........Installation Procedure Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell ............................. 11 Re-baseline the Minicell......................................... ......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... The cross references note the steps with more information............................... .........................................................12 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........................................................ 9 Perform Functional Tests (overhead channels and traffic path)............................................................................................. END OF STEPS ..................................................................................... ........................................................

............12 2............................................................................................0 ___ CDMA Base Chanl Class 158) 159) 450 JTC 450 JTC 450 JTC Screen 13 of 17 LAC Phy ID Ant 160) 161) 29 1 30 2 31 3 Sub Mem 170) 1 1 1 Screen 14 Growth Cabinet BBA: 8......... Cabinet BBA Numbers Value to be entered Primary Cabinet 2......2.............................................................. field SubMem..............................12 SubMem: 2.............1............................. 2 Pooling NOT enabled if Sub Mem fields are set to “0” ..............6 SubMem: 1.......6 1.......1 BBA BBA BBA CDMA Stat Stat Type Carr 153) BBA 154) BBA 155) 156) 157) [1] 1 u 2 e FULLSET 1 [2] 3 u 4 e FULLSET 1 [3] 5 u 6 e FULLSET 1 Max LMT/CATV Pwr Max Pwr 163) 164) [1] 008...................................4..................10.4.......Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Enabling Channel Pooling Enabling Channel Pooling ........1.............2 ceqcom2 Screen The diagram below shows the ceqcom2 screen with emphasis shown on the SubMem field where channel pooling is enables.......1 Primary Growth I 8....0 ___ [2] 008. These values are given in the following table.................... AUTOPLEX Cellular SERIES 2 CELL EQUIPAGE COMMON (ceqcom2) System Cell 90 Screen 13 Primary Cabinet BBA: 2............0 ___ Channel [3] 008...........................10. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ........... Overview Channel Pooling Numbers Enabling of channel pooling is done by entering non-zero values in RC/ V Form ceqcom2............................ 2...............................................13 ........

..................................Removing a CCC from Service ECU Upgrade -.........................ft ant<cr> .....................ucl<cr> ....................... it may try to communicate with the CE..... Upgrading is done one sector at a time..............................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell ECU Upgrade -... oc<cr> inh:cell #................................................................................. ft...........................................ft pl<cr> inh:cell #..................................................................... Purpose Upgrading Sequence Before you begin The PCSC periodically initiates routine diagnostics and alarm scanning........................................................ It is therefore necessary to remove the TCU before changing the translation............... Result The cell is ready for upgrading of the forms............... 3 Physically remove the required TCUs...... Even though the CCC is out-of-service................................... after having removed the corresponding CCC from service.................................................................................... For the same reason.................................................................................. Remove the CCC from Service ........................................................................14 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................................................................................................ using its stored NVM............................................................. 9 . rtdiag<cr> inh:cell #..... 2 Remove the corresponding CCC from service: rmv:cell #.................................................................................. Procedure 9-2..................................................... the ECU should not be inserted in the CRC shelf before the translations have been updated................................................ ........................................................................................................... Inhibiting these tests will prevent the triggering of alarms when removing equipment from service.................................................................................... END OF STEPS ............ ........................................................................ft... tp<cr> inh:cell #................................................................ 1 Inhibit diagnostics and tests: inh:cell #...........................Removing a CCC from Service ...............ccc x.

............. [14] 27 u 2 28 u 2 [15] 29 u 2 30 u 2 AUTOPLEX Cellular SERIES 2 CELL CDMA CCU EQUIPAGE (ceqccu) Screen 1 of 2 System Cell Site Number *1) 90 2) CDMA Channel Unit Equipment Status List: CCC CCU 1 CCU 2 CCU 3 CCU 4 CCU 5 CCU 6 CCU 7 ID# 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) [1] 1 u u u u u u u u u u 2 e e e u [2] [3] 3 u u u u u u u u u u 4 e e u u [4] [5] 5 u u u u u u u u u u 6 e u u u [6] [7] 7 u u u u u u u [8] 8 u u u u u u u [9] 9 u u u u u u u [10] 10 u u u u u u u [11] 11 u u u u u u u [12] 12 u u u u u u u Equipage for CCC ID# 2.......................................................... [7] 13 u 2 14 u 2 [8] 15 u 2 16 u 2 [9] 17 u 2 18 u 2 [10] 19 u 2 20 u 2 [11] 21 u 2 22 u 2 [12] 23 u 2 24 u 2 Fields 149 and 150 are site specific.......................................... .. updating one upgraded CCC at a time............ 2 Upgrade Process Diagram Once the ceqcom2 form has been updated....... ............................. placing an e in each entry corresponding to an equipped CCU and entering a “u” where the TCU’s were taken out of the cell............. The Minicell upgrade requires changes to the Minicell translations as shown in the diagram: From the apxrcv........................L9V7...................... REFER TO THE [5] 9 u 2 10 u 2 DATA BASE UPDATE (401-610-036) [6] 11 u 2 12 u 2 FOR MORE DETAILS.............................................. to reflect the correct number of ECUs/ TCUs.... 10 and 12 are site specific..Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell ECU Upgrade -...... update the ceqcom2 form by changing the Type field from 2 to 10.......... Overview This page describes the process of updating the Minicell translations for a TCU to ECU upgrade............................................................................. 10 and 12 for a growth frame........ Verify and update (if required) the ceqccu form................ Populate [13] 25 u 2 26 u 2 CCCs 8........ 4........... [13] 13 u u u u u u u 8... [14] 14 u u u u u u u [15] 15 u u u u u u u CL3805 .. by entering and saving the change for each CCC involved in the upgrade.................................Updating the Minicell Translations ...0) from 2 to 10....... CCC Type field (field 150 in ECP 10............................................. 1 Translations are updated from the apxrcv.......15 ..... AUTOPLEX Cellular SERIES 2 CELL EQUIPAGE COMMON (ceqcom2) Screen 12 of 17 System Cell 90 146) CDMA Cluster Controller (CCC) List: Status Type Status Type CCC 147) 148) CCC 149) 150) [1] 1 u 2 2 e 10 WARNING: CHANGING CCC TYPE [2] 3 u 2 4 e 10 WITHOUT FOLLOWING THE PROPER [3] 5 u 2 PROCEDURES WILL CORRUPT THE 6 e 10 [4] 7 u 2 8 u 2 CELL OPERATION................... updating the ceqccu form.... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ........ if necessary.......Updating the Minicell Translations ECU Upgrade -..................................................................................................0 L tT h l i P i t ................................................ This change has to be done one sector at a time... Updating the Translations Note: someone with access to the switch needs to perform the RC/V updates........................ This is done by verifying and.................................................... 6............. it is necessary to verify that the proper CEs will be recognized........................ by changing the ceqcom2 database form......................... one face at a time......

......................ccc x......................................................................... Result The date reported back (052397) may change on later releases of the cell generic.............................................ccc x <cr> where x is the CCC number updated (2........................... the extension will be “-02”.......................................................... 6. 8..................................................................... ................................................................. 2 From the craftshell.... 10................... Purpose This page describes the procedure to download the correct software version to the NVM (Non-Volatile Memory).............................ccc x... For a TCU............................................................. but the “-10” extension must be there for an ECU................ invoke a download command................................ 9 ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................ucl<cr> rst:cell #................................................................................................................................. 3 Verify the following output message response is seen on the terminal for a CCC NVMed for ECUs: CCC NVM 052397-10 ND OF STEPS E ......................... Procedure 9-3....................................................................................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell NVMing the CCC NVMing the CCC ................................................................ To NVM CCCs.................. op:cell #...................................................................................................................................... Restoring the Cell to Service .................................. verify correct NVM.........................................................................ucl:version<cr> ...................................... 4................................ccc x<cr> .............................. ...............16 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........................................ dnld:cell #.............. To NVM the CCC .................................................................................................. with all CEs removed................................................................................................... 1 NVM the CCC for the ECUs............ Procedure 9-4................................................ or 12)..................................... 1 Remove and restore the CCC NVMed to diagnose it with the following commands: rmv:cell #..... This may require a prior initialization for new CCCs.......... .....................................................................................

................................................................................... or 12) and y is the ECU (1 .......... ......ccu y<cr> where x is the CCC number updated (2. .......17 ............................................ 8........................................................................rtdiag<cr> ............................................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ............ The overhead channels and any traffic channel elements that are busy will not be tested during this functional test..........................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell NVMing the CCC .... Restore cell to normal operation.....4)................................................... Perform functional tests..................................................................... Result The cell equipped with ECUs is operational.............................................ft pl<cr> alw:cell #................ft oc<cr> alw:cell #.............................................................................................................. 4 Allow routine diagnostics with the following command: alw:cell #............................ft tp<cr> alw:cell #....... .... 4............... 10.ft tp<cr> Result: For several equipped traffic CEs......... 2 Insert the new ECUs then restore and test the cell with: rst:cell #.............................................................................. 6............ Install ECUs to the appropriate slots................................................................................................................ traffic path functional tests could take several minutes to complete and give a response back as an output message on the terminal screen..................................................... Verifying the NVM Install ECUs Verifying download is done by invoking an op:cell command.... Monitor the MCRT 2139 page during the traffic path test...............ft ant<cr> ND OF STEPS E .................................................................................. 3 Execute the CRTU traffic path functional test and ensure each CE test passes for each physical antenna face (traffic path) in the subcell with the following command: exc:cell #...................ccc x.......................................................................... 5 Allow CRTU functional tests with the following commands: alw:cell #...............

....................................... It compressed both loads and now takes less than half the time. 9 ................ making the wait time only ten minutes per card....Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell NVMing the CCC As of APXD 12...................................................... a new script was written for individual CCCs................ ................................18 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .00...............................................................................................

In fact................................. a CTU upgrade will require that the Minicell be put out-ofservice during the upgrade..19 ....................................... the HPCTU is thicker than the standard CTU..........Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell NVMing the CCC Example of Upgrade: CTU To HPCTU Overview ....................................................e...... the upgrade from a CDMA Transmit Unit (CTU) to a High Power CDMA Transmit Unit (HPCTU) is characteristic of upgrades that can be performed entirely from the Minicell site.. In contrast....... requiring significant physical intervention within the affected Minicell cabinet.... Another difference in the type of upgrade is that TCU and ECU are plug compatible....... making their replacement an easy mechanical task................. same carrier) must be upgraded at the same time........................ However....................................... all CTUs within the same cabinet (i....................... this is not the case for the CTUs........................................ . Therefore........................................................................................................................................... while ECU upgrades could benefit from channel pooling............... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ........................................................... Purpose In contrast with the TCU to ECU upgrades....

........................................................... channel numbers. Result The Minicell is off-line........... To avoid unnecessary alarms at the PCSC.................... call processing and alarm reporting should also be inhibited...................... END OF STEPS ................................ Because the CTUs need to be tuned to the Minicell operating channels........................................................................................ To avoid unnecessary alarms at the PCSC................ 2 Inhibit call processing and alarm reporting..... PN offsets) be known before hand.................................................... The procedure lists the actions at a high level..................................................................................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Preliminary Procedures Preliminary Procedures . Purpose Taking the Minicell Out-ofService Before you begin This procedure prepares the Minicell to upgrade from a CTU to an HPCTU................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. channel numbers.................................................................... Because the CTU is on the signal path.............................................. the Minicell must be taken out-of-service before proceeding...................................... the Minicell must be taken out-of-service before proceeding.......... it will be impossible to reconfigure the Minicell with the new HPCTU............g................................................................................ ....................... 3 Take the Minicell out-of-service by removing the datalinks. This is done by removing the data links.......... call processing and alarm reporting should also be inhibited... 1 Record the cell operating parameters (e..............................................................) ...................................................................................... 9 ........... This is done by removing the Data Links. PN offsets.................................. Procedure 9-5.... Because the CTU is on the signal path....................................................................................................... ............................... Removing a Cell from Service .................... etc...g.......................... it is necessary that the cell operating parameters (e.................................................................................................20 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...... Without that information.....................................................................

..................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 .....21 .................................... ....................................... Leaving a CTU power setting for an HPCTU will result in an increase in power drain on the Minicell....................................................................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Preliminary Procedures Changing Translations Translation changes will relate to the change in the transmit power that is required by the HPCTU.......................................

... That heat exchanger is not required in the Version 4 Minicell.................................... a separate heat exchanger needs to be mounted on the radio cabinet back panel............... DANGER There is a serious risk of burns and other damages.................................................... as the HPCTU will use the same power source as the one feeding the existing CTUs... Follow them for the Heat Exchanger and the HPCTUs............. ..... Powering-down The sequence of tasks to perform is: ......... However.... ................................................................... In Minicell version 2............... Each piece of hardware comes with its own installation instructions............................................... 1 Power down the BCRs before begining the physical installation of the HPCTUs....................................................... the installation of an HPCTU is essentially an electrical/mechanical operation...........................................................22 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ......................................... the installation cannot proceed....................................................................... The Primary cabinet is pre-wired for HPCTU upgrades........... This procedure is used to upgrade the Minicell from a CTU to an HPCTU............. it will be necessary to verify that there is power.. verify that there is power for the Rear Door Heat Exchanger (cable P2 in the back should yield between 25 VDC and 28 VDC)................................................................................................................. Cooling for HPCTUs is provided by fans in the back of the radio cabinet........................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Installing the HPCTU Installing the HPCTU ... If there is no power................................................................... The BCRs must be turned off before attempting to install the HPCTU............................................. 2 For installation in the Primary Cabinet...... 9 .. This verification will not be necessary for the Growth cabinets................................................ Overview Purpose Before you begin Once translations have been changed........................................

......................... 3 Turn off all the remaining circuit breakers except for CB4 and CB 14........................ END OF STEPS ...23 ............................................................................................................... However.................................................................................................. Physical Strain The heat exchangers are heavy units................................................................ ........................... Secure assistance before attempting physical installation.................... using prescribed tools and torque to avoid warping the HPCTU circuit pack.......................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... which are the breakers feeding the RFTGs....... END OF STEPS .. Follow them for detailed instructions to install HPCTUs in a radio cabinet........................................................................................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Installing the HPCTU ..................................... ...................................................... Result The HPCTU is installed in the cabinet.... Procedure 9-6..................................................... Installing the HPCTU ............................................................................................................ Each piece of hardware comes with its own installation instructions.................. the HPCTUs are wider than the CTUs......................................................................................... A CTU shelf can accommodate up to 3 HPCTUs.. 1 Remove the cooling fan (if applicable) and the CTU card cage......... 2 Use the HPCTU mounting bracket to install the unit directly in the cabinet............................................................................... It will be necessary to do the following: ................................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ................... Result The cabinet is powered down and ready for the upgrade........................................

........................................................................ ........................................................................ 9 ................... END OF STEPS ...................................................................... ................. Rear Door Fan The Rear Door Exchanger fan may not start immediately as it is controlled by a thermostat.................................... Powering the Minicell Back ..................................................................................................................................................................... The fans should be running.......................................... 3 Power the Minicell back up by turning all the circuit breakers to ON..Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Installing the HPCTU Procedure 9-7................................................................................................................................................................................24 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .......................... except for CB8 (CSU) to prevent communication with the PCSC.............................................................................................................................. Result The primary Minicell is ready for tests...............................

...................... 1 Set RF Power to 40.................................................................................................. .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................79 db corresponds to a 12 W output............... invoke the restore command....................... The Minicell should boot..............25 ................................... 3 Turn the CB8 ON to activate the CSU.............................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ............ END OF STEPS ............................................................................ 4 Reset the ACB and verify that there are no alarms.................... if so...................................05dB.................................................................... Conduct CDMA Functional Tests ................................................................................................................................. ........................ Purpose Functional tests are run to ensure that the HPCTUs are functioning. Procedure 9-8.................................................................................. and............................................................................. Rho tests and Resetting the Minicell ........................ .....................79+/-0.......................................... 5 Check with the Switch that the Minicell can be restored to service............. The 40.................. Result The Minicell is ready to transmit............................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Testing the Minicell Testing the Minicell .......................................................... ................................................................................................................................. See Chapter 7 for more information............................................................. ...... 2 Run Rho tests....................... Power setting The RF power is set for CTU with Pilot Channel..........................................................................................................

.................................................................................................................... ...........................................26 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................. 9 ...............Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Testing the Minicell Range Extension Offer Section Overview Purpose This section covers the description and maintenance of the Range Extension Option.................................................. This feature includes several new components to enable a low noise amplifier at the antenna head to improve the radio reception and the HPCTU to improve transmission..

.................. Overview The REO System is an optional feature that improves the Minicell noise figure... up to 3 sectors) • Masthead Amplifier Unit (2 per Sector...... up to 3 sectors) Refer to the parts list.. for individual parts................ The required Primary Cabinet configuration for the REO..................................... must include the following items................. Required Primary Cabinet Internal Parts The required internal REO installation parts are shipped with installation instructions included in the kits..............Lucent power) and distributes 12-15 VDC to the Masthead Amplifier Units (2 per sector) via the individual antenna coaxial cables................... They amplify the receive antenna signals to the Primary Cabinet...............................................................................Receive Units.............. which are shipped (if not factory installed) with installation instructions included in the kits: • High Power CTU(s) • Rear Mounted Heat Exchanger The required external REO installation parts are supplied in four separate kits: • Installation Kit (1 per site) • Power Distribution Unit Kit (1 per site) • Bias T Kit (2 per Sector.................. Refer to the current FOA Test Plan for this product... Power Distribution Unit (PDU) The Power Distribution Unit receives 24 VDC from the Power Cabinet (or non........ improves performance in noise-limited environments............................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Range Extension Offer (REO) Overview Range Extension Offer (REO) Overview .................................27 ................................................ These parts are: • MAU MAS-RUs (Masthead Amplifier System .. It also provides individual PDU and MAU alarm signals to the Primary Cabinet................ Masthead Amplifier Unit (MAU) Required Primary Cabinet Configuration Required Primary Cabinet External Parts The MAUs (2 per sector) are powered by 12-15 VDC from the PDU.................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ...................................... 2 per sector) The existing Filter Assemblies must be replaced with new ones (having the new Receive Units) but not until certain FOA tests have been performed..... included in each kit........................ ........................................... and increases the radius and coverage area of the cell...............

....................................................................28 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........e........................................................................................... each face has two REO Systems) which consists of seven principle components....................... 9 ........................Lucent Connects the alarm control shelf and the RCC .............Lucent element 2 MAU Mounting Bracket ................ The table below lists the seven components of the tower top low noise amplifier..................................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Description Description ..................................Lucent Attaches the MAU to the antenna tower structure 3 PDU ....... Item Description Remarks 1 Masthead Amplifier Unit (MAU) Mounted on the antenna tower near the RX Antenna ............................................................................ Overview Diagram Components of the Range Extension Offer System Each receive (RX) diversity path has its own REO System (i.Lucent Located at the rear of the Minicell radio cabinet 4 PDU Alarm Cable ................................................................ The diagram below shows the REO System components.......................................................

......................................................................................................Customer Coaxial RF jumper between the MAU connector and the Tower Cable that runs down to the Minicell 7 MAU Grounding Wire Customer A # 6 solid copper ground strap connects the MAU grounding stud to the antenna grounding point ................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ..............Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Description Item Description Remarks 5 Antenna Jumper Cable Customer Coaxial Radio Frequency (RF) jumper between the RX Antenna element and the MAU connector 6 Tower Jumper Cable ...................................................29 .......................................................................

......................... ................. These External User Alarms will require text message definitions in the /lapx10/alarms/cell/ alarms file on the ECP (refer to User Definable Alarms Feature 401612-057)................................................ Required Information Obtain cell site specific information..........................30 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ................ and two user alarm assignments required for the TTLNA installation............................................................ and Transmit Power Level Adjustment Procedures are required for the TTLNA installation test. An ITE 5632 / 6379 / 6928 multimeter is recommended for TTLNA installation testing.............. 9 .................. This information should include radio carrier channel assignments...................... Required Equipment Equipment required for High Power CTU Upgrade along with the RHO............... Overview Various documents and equipment are needed to perform the installation and testing of the TTLNA (which includes the MAU)...........................................................................................................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Required Material and Information Required Material and Information ..................................................................................... FER............ PN Offsets.................................................

................31 .................................................. disabling alarm reporting....................... Place the locking bar............................... located at the bottom of the front door... When opening a cabinet.................................................................... Preliminary Procedures To prevent the CDMA equipment in the Radio Cabinet(s) from transmitting upon power-up............................................... Injury from wind gusts..... Generally this means disabling call processing.. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ................................................ Ask the cell tech or engineer to make the cell site translation changes required for the HPCTU upgrade...... Overview Remove Cell From Service These activities prepare the Minicell for the TTLNA upgrade......................................... ....................................................... front of the cabinet.........Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Preliminary Procedures Preliminary Procedures .......................... ensure all BCR faceplate AUTO/OFF switches are set to OFF....... Call the switching center (PCSC) to have the cell removed from service...... set the locking bar in place.............. into its slot in the bottom............... and disabling the data links.................................................

.......................................................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell TTLNA Physical Installation TTLNA Physical Installation .................................................................................... Perform the High Power CTU Upgrade.................................................................... Purpose TTLNA Installation High Power CTU Upgrade This procedure is to install the TTLNA and reset the ACB.................................. all the ACB LEDs should illuminate then extinguish....................................................................................................................................................................................... 2 Using a pen................................................................................................. except for the Active (ACT) LED.............................. Complete all of the installation instructions............................................. END OF STEPS ......... 9 ....... This will reset the LAC alarms reported by the ACB to the RCC............................................. Reset the ACB ............... ........................ the pack’s code is either BLB1 or BLB2)................................................... Result After a couple of seconds................. locate the Alarm Control Board (ACB............ Procedure 9-9.............................................................................................................. .............................................................................................. Install the TTLNA option according to the installation instructions included with the installation kit......... press the reset (RST) switch on the ACB...... 1 On the CTU shelf of the cabinet that was upgraded..................................................................................... Note: skip this section if the High Power CTU option is already installed.......................................................................................32 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................... ....................................

............................................... contact the Columbus CTSO Methods and procedures group at 1-800356-8574 or................................................................................................................................................... Purpose The following procedure calibrates the TTLNA/HPCTU equipped Minicell for operation at 16 watts............................................................................................................... Take care not to place any additional stress on the DC Bias Ts.......................................... Service Interruption The HPCTU power level must be set to 16 watts to ensure link balance.. for international locations............................................... If the customer desires a power level other than 16 watts....Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Transmit Power Calibration Procedure Transmit Power Calibration Procedure ................. Damage the lightning protectors Use of excessive force can damage the lightening protectors............ when attaching / removing the 30dB Attenuator.... 1 The power calibration will be performed at the output of the DC Bias T.................................................................................................................................................... Set the HPCTU power level to 16 watts using the procedure for 16 watts.... .................... on page 8-50 for each sector/carrier upgraded to a HPCTU................................................................. 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ..... ......................................................................... .................. Result The power is calibrated.......33 ................................................................ (614) 860-3760................................................................................................................................................................. ND OF STEPS E ............................................................... Procedure 9-10..................

............. recheck the test cable connections and repeat the test................................................................0 dB for a Growth Cabinet for each CE under test..................... ......................................................................................... FER must be 0% and the path loss must be less than 56......................................................................... ............................................................................................... Purpose Each sector/carrier must be tested to insure cell operation....................................... 9 .................................................................................................... 3 If the path loss exceeds the allowed value...................................................................................................................................................................................34 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................ .. Rho and FER Testing ............ 4 Only test a single channel element for each antenna sector and each diversity.......................................................... END OF STEPS ............................. Procedure 9-11.............Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Rho and FER Testing the TTLNA Rho and FER Testing the TTLNA ........................................................................................... Verify the RHO measurement is 0........................................ .......... ....................... 1 Run the RHO Test for each sector / carrier that was upgraded to an HPCTU.....................................................................................95 or greater for each transmit path upgraded to HPCTU............................................................................................................................................... 2 Perform the FER test on each sector / carrier and diversity that was changed for the TTLNA............................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................0 dB for a Primary Cabinet or less than 62..................................

............................. Procedure 9-13.................................................................................................................................................................... confirm that the RF spectrum is cleared........................ 1 Verify all test equipment is removed from the Minicell................................................................................................................... 3 Verify all CBs are ON in the cabinet being modified.................................................................................................................... 2 Verify all circuit packs are properly seated........................ END OF STEPS ................................. Once the facilities connections are restored at the PCSC.........................................................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Minicell Cleanup and Reboot Minicell Cleanup and Reboot .............................. ............................................................................................ 4 When the cell tech or engineer reports the site has started to boot......... ...................................................................... Minicell Cleanup ...................................................................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ........................................................ ......................... Procedure 9-12............................................................................. the Minicell should boot automatically.................. and any equipment removed for testing is replaced......................................................................... ............................................. Do not proceed until ready..................................................................................................................... After about 20 ................................................................... 2 Prior to performing integration with antenna connected....................35 ..................................... 1 Call the switching center and see if the cell tech or engineer is ready to boot the cell site to the switch.................................................................. .......................................... Purpose Once the installation is complete the Minicell must be cleaned up and restored to service....................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................................... 3 Ask the cell tech to restore the datalinks and alarm reporting....................................................................................................... Reboot the Cell ........ .................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... watch the primary cabinet for indications that it is booting..................................................................

................................................................................................................................................................................ Contact the switch and verify the Minicell has completed the boot................. 9 .................... END OF STEPS ............................................................................................................................ .................................................................36 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ...............Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Minicell Cleanup and Reboot minutes the cell should be booted..........

.......................................5 OFF ON STATUS ON 0........................................................5 TTA OFF STATUS OFF OFF POWER ALARM ON 0................................... Alarm testing will be performed at the PDU Panel and via the switch.... The TTLNA PDU control panel is shown below: POWER ALARM STATUS ON MAIN DC/DC ON 0................................................5 TTA 0.....................5 TTA OFF OFF Before beginning the TTLNA alarm testing procedures.................................0 ON POWER ALARM ON 0............................................................................................................................................................................................. The procedure will be to perform an action (e..................................................................... Damage to the PDU There is a potential for damage and/or blowing fuses to the Power distribution unit (PDU) Turn off the power to the appropriate MAU prior to connecting or disconnecting any RF cables...................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ....... Procedure 9-14....... turn off a switch)....37 .......... Alarm Testing ..........................................................................5 TTA OFF Before you begin STATUS ON OFF STATUS ON 0..................... Purpose PDU Diagram Alarm testing assures that all alarms are connected and working properly...................5 TTA OFF OFF STATUS ON TTA OFF POWER ALARM ON POWER ALARM ON OFF ON POWER ALARM OFF 2.............Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell TTLNA Alarm and Call Processing Tests TTLNA Alarm and Call Processing Tests .....g............................................. verify that all appropriate circuit breakers are on and the BCRs’ (AUTO/OFF) switches are in the OFF position......... and .............................................

................... 1 Verify that all of the External Alarm Switches on the Standard User Alarm Cross Connect Panel are in the appropriate position: closed on alarm... 9 .......................................................................... indicating an over-current condition..................................... Result: The Red LED for MAU1 should be lit................................................................ The power switches on the PDU for all the MAUs (TTA1 ..... indicating an under-current condition.................... .................................. 2 Ensure the Main power switch for the PDU is ON.....6) are in the OFF position and all the alarm switches are in the OFF position....................................................................... ....................................................................................................... .......................................................TTLNA Alarm and Call Processing Tests Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell verify the result (i.................................. ............................................................ ............... 5 Turn the power switch for MAU1 to the OFF position and connect the antenna jumper to the antenna connector of the bias tee on the alpha face diversity 1.............. 3 Disconnect the antenna jumper from the ANT connector of the bias tee on the alpha face diversity 1 connector............................................ check alarm LED or user alarm going active at the switch)...................... Result: The Red LED for MAU1 should remain lit........................................................38 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 .................. Turn the power switch for MAU 1 to the ON position................................................................ Turn the power and alarm switch for MAU1 to the ON position................................................ 4 Turn the power switch for MAU1 to the OFF position and connect a 30 dB 25W attenuator to the antenna end of the bias tee......................... ............................................. Turn the power switch for MAU1 to the ON position............................... Result: The green LED for MAU1 should be lit........................ (the green MAIN LED should be on)....... 6 Repeat this sequence for each MAU verifying the PDU alarm LEDs........................................................................................................................ indicating normal operating condition....................................................e............................. .......................................................................................................

................ ..................... ensure all the foam jumpers are securely attached to the antenna port of the Bias Ts and all the power and alarm switches for the MAUs are in the ON position........... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ......................................................................................................................... Radio Cabinet door is left open on a cold day (outside temperature below freezing)..... ..... and the User Alarm 11. 7 After verifying all the MAU alarms.......................................................................................... Then............. ............ is reported........................................... User Alarm 10).......................................................... All the green LEDs for the MAUs should be illuminated... Request the switch to verify which alarms are active............................. High/Low Temp.............................................................. 11 Verify from the ECP that both the PDU and MAU alarms are Active....................................... Verify the Offset/Bit................ 10 Disable both power supplies by turning off the main power switch on the PDU.. Alarm scan reported may change with different generic loads...............scsm <cr> Where a = Minicell #... .............. Do the same for all open doors............................................ ................................................ gently pull the front door alarm switch until it comes to a full stop..............................................................39 .............................................................. Scan reported does not match the table... indicating normal operating condition..............Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell TTLNA Alarm and Call Processing Tests ............................................................ Identify and correct the source of the alarm....................................................... the alarm test passes......................................... This will show the alarms to the terminal as they change state: alw:cell a............................ If the .......... Ignore this alarm............ 9 To override the Intrusion alarms (door open...... 8 Call the switch and ask the technician to enter the following command at the craftshell or UNIX [Tipdunix login] terminal................................ If the Offset/Bit matches................. Cell under test shall indicates any Alarms....................................................................

.... Result Installation testing of the TTLNA option is complete................................................................................................. ........................................................................................................................40 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....................................................................................... 9 ......... 19 If the Minicell is in service......................................................................................................................................... The red LED should illuminate for that MAU indicating an alarm. ... perform the Call Processing Tests on each antenna face upgraded with the TTLNA option........................ 12 Enable both power supplies by turning ON the main power switch.................................................................................................. ....................................... 18 After the alarm tests are complete.............. ..... 15 Verify from the ECP that only the PDU alarm is Active................... 16 Return the MAU power switch to the ON position.............................................................scsm <cr> Where a = Minicell #.......................................................................... ...... ........... 17 Verify from the ECP that the PDU alarm is Normal...................................................................................................................................... .................. ..........................................................................TTLNA Alarm and Call Processing Tests Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell ..................................................... This will inhibit the command allowed earlier........................................................... 14 Turn any one of the MAU power switches to the OFF position................ END OF STEPS ....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... ask the technician at the switch to enter the following command at a craftshell or UNIX [Tipdunix login] terminal....................................... 13 Verify from the ECP that both the PDU and MAU alarms are Normal................................................................................. inh:cell a............................................................................................................................................................................................................. The green LED should illuminate indicating Normal operation..........................................................................................

................................................ 3 Verify all CBs are ON in the cabinet being modified....................................... Secure Minicell ......................................................... ... END OF STEPS ........................................................................... N type: R-5851)........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................... Procedure 9-15............................................................ if equipped............................ Result The Minicell is ready for operation..................................................................................................................................... Check that all side and rear panel locking bolts are tight............................................................................................................................................................ and that the connectors are properly torqued (Torque Wrenches (p/o ITE-6267) SMA type: R-4399............................... 1 Verify no manuals or paperwork are blocking the cooling duct above the circuit breakers in the radio cabinet........... 4 Verify all cell cabling is properly reconnected...........................................................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Close Up the Minicell Close Up the Minicell .. 2 Secure the doors to all cabinets in the Minicell..41 ........................................................................................................................ Purpose Complete this procedure to close the cabinet and secure it against the outside weather conditions......................... 5 Put the Antenna Cable Cover in place and secure it.......................... ........................................................................................ ....................................... ............................................................... ........................................... particularly the antenna cables............................................. Turn on the Main power switch in the PDU and all equipped MAU power and alarm switches......................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 .............................................................................................................................................................................

...........................................................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell MAU Description MAU Description ........................................................................................................................................................... Masthead Amplifier Unit (MAU) MAU Diagram Power The MAU is mounted on the antenna tower near the receive antenna and is a rectangular enclosure which houses all of the following: • Low noise amplifier (LNA) • Band specific bandpass filter • Lightning protectors The diagram below shows the coax connectors and the ground connections on the side of the unit......................................................................................................... 9 .............................................................................. The MAU operates on D................... ...............C.. power (+12 VDC) supplied by the PDU via the coaxial cable....................................................................42 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ........

......................... and location of the PDU....................................................................................................................................................... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ............................................................................................................. openings... COVER LOCKW ASHER DRILLED SPANNER SCREW PO WE RC AB IN E T GASKET INSULATING BUSHING 4 PLACE S CHASE NIPPLES (INSIDE OF POW ER CABINET) SEALING RING (OUTSID E OF POW ER CABINET) LOCKNUTS G1/G2 MI PULL BOX GASKET P N IC C S EL CDM LC A AB IN E T COVER LOCK WASHE R DRILLED SPANNER SCREW G-2 PLUG ANTENNA CABLE COVER Route DC Cable From Power Cabinet To PDU The diagram below shows the DC cable routing from primary cabinet to PDU ........................... Overview The PDU (Power Distribution Unit) provides power to the MAU........................................ Prepare Antenna Cable Cover The diagram below shows the housing...............................................................................................................................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell PDU Description PDU Description ........................43 ....

Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell PDU Description /LTXLG 7LJKW )HHG 7KURXJK  RI .

3RZHU &DELQHW 3XOO %R[ &RQGXLW WR 3ULPDU\ &DELQHW  RI .

..... 3ULPDU\ &DELQHW $QWHQQD &DEOH &RYHU %R[ 7HUPLQDO %ORFN +RXVLQJ ....................................................................44 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ....................................................................................................... 9 .............................................................................

..............................................................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Cable Routing Cable Routing ............................................................... Cable Routing Through PDU Wall The diagram below shows the routing cable through clamp and removal/installation of tape gasket...................................................10 11 ................. CABLE CLAMP TAPE GASKET CABLES (TOP VIEW) SECURE SCREWS AFTER TAPING NOTE: SEAL ANY GAPS WITH RTV.. Fan Unit 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 ........ # 1 Growth Cab................................... # 2 1-5 6 .................................. TAPE GASKET (PUSH INTO CLAMP AND SEAL) CABLE CLAMP (SIDE VIEW) CABINET FLOOR SHELF CABLE BUNDLE Circuit Breaker The diagram below shows the DC circuit breaker distribution panel PDU Primary Radio Cab...... 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ......................................................................15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Power Cab......................................................................... Growth Cab.....................................................................45 ........................

............................................................................................................................................................... Route Alarm Cable To The Primary Cabinet PunchDown Block The diagram below shows the primary cabinet alarm cable entry at antenna interface plate................................................................ 9 ............... Ante nna C onnec tions GN D 6 L1 L2 5 240 AC 4 3 DC FE E D 2 1 PW R CAB AL A R M S Se e Note T 1/ E1 P owe r C a bine t Alar m s Ac cess T1/E1 Twisted P air F ac ilitie s Ac ce ss E XT ERN AL USER A LA RM A CCES S Lightning Protection Block E XT USE R AL A R M S 6 Gro un d Co nn ect ion s The diagram below shows the location of the lightning protection block in the primary cabinet.... TO A IM GROWTH #2 W H EN R E Q ’D P R IM A RY GROWTH #1 W H EN R E Q ’D T1 C A BLE O R IN C O M IN G A L AR M C A BL E FR O M P O W ER C AB IN E T P O W E R C A B IN E T A L AR M S .......Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell PDU Alarm Cable Routing Into Primary Cabinet PDU Alarm Cable Routing Into Primary Cabinet ........................................................................................................................................................46 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ..........................................................................................................

...............47 .......... Alarm Functions * Close/Open on Alarm or Switchable 110 ANA Block Lightning Protection Pair (OPS Side) External User Alarm 0 External User Alarm 1 External User Alarm 2 External User Alarm 3 External User Alarm 4 External User Alarm 5 External User Alarm 6 External User Alarm 7 Switchable 16 Switchable 17 Switchable 18 Switchable 19 Switchable 20 Switchable 21 Switchable 22 Close on Alarm 7 “Generator Fail” Connect Alarms to PunchDown Block The diagram below shows the lightning protection punch-down block (external user alarm application........................ 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 9 ................................................................................... ................................................................................................................... User Alarm Connections The table below shows the cable connections for the alarms in the primary cabinet......................................................................................................................................................................................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Cable Connections Inside the Primary Cabinet Alarm Cable Connections Inside the Primary Cabinet ...............................................................................

................. ..... 9 ...........................................................................Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Alarm Cable Connections Inside the Primary Cabinet GND LIGHTNING PROTECTION BLOCK 01 06 11 ALARM PROTECTION 16 21 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 6 7 8 9 10 OSP CPE 11 12 13 14 15 11 1213 1415 “OSP” SIDE EXTERNAL USER ALARM CONNECTIONS 16 17 18 19 20 16 1718 19 20 OSP CPE 21 22 23 24 25 21 2223 2425 NOTE: ALL PUNCH DOWN CONTACTS WILL ACCEPT 22 OR 24 AWG SOLID INSULATED WIRES.................48 Lucent Technologies – Proprietary See notice on first page 401-703-301 Issue 8 April 1999 ............................................................................................................................................

...................................................... Disconnect Applicable Antenna Jumper Cables The diagram below shows the weatherproofing connectors their removal............................................................... ............................................ C O N N EC TO R W E AT H E R P R O O F IN G K IT 1 /2 “ R F A N T E N N A JU MP E R C A BLE S C O M PA C T A N T E N N A C ABLE C OV E R C O N N EC TO R W E AT H E R P R O O F IN G K IT G PS AN TEN N A C A B LE A NTE N N A C AB LES Important! Do not bend the Antenna Jumper Cables more than the specified bend radius..........Upgrading a PCS CDMA Minicell Bias T Des